Service Manual Frontier 500

SERVICE MANUAL
DIGITAL MINILAB
FRONTIER 500
FILM SCANNER
SP-500
DIGITAL IMAGING CONTROLLER II
DIC II
LASER PRINTER/PAPER PROCESSOR
LP-5000
Servicing and Electrical

Circuit Diagram
S2 Ver.3.0 or later Second Edition

PP3-C1067E2
INTRODUCTION
This Servicing Manual outlines the maintenance and servicing procedures for the Fujifilm Digital Minilab
FRONTIER 500 SP-500, DIC2 and LP-5000.
This manual is a professional publication provided for qualified service personnel or persons fully trained in
equipment service procedures. All other personnel and operators are restricted from servicing the SP-500, DIC2
and LP-5000. When maintenance service is needed, be sure to contact qualified service personnel.
Precautions Generally Applying to All Serving Operations
! WARNING
When servicing internal machine parts, make sure the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply on the power
distribution board are both set to the OFF position and the scanner’s power supply cord is disconnected from the wall outlet.
If the main power is left ON, electricity will flow as far as the power supply section, and this can cause electric shocks and/or
short-circuiting.
If the power is left on, there is also the possibility for the machine to maybe accidentally activated causing damage to the
machine and/or bodily injury.
! CAUTION
The dryer will be hot to the touch. Wait 15 minutes after turning off the power before commencing with servicing procedures.
• Wear gloves when handling the optical system parts to keep the parts free from fingerprints.
• When mounting machine parts, take care not to sandwich any of the wires.
• Each of the connectors is provided with a symbol indicating what it is to be connected to. Make sure the connectors are
connected to the connectors, harness ends or parts bearing the corresponding symbols.
• The plastic connectors have a locking catch on the plug (male) end. To disconnect one of these connectors, loosen the
catch first; to connect, make sure the catch engages (locks).
Service Manual Appropriations
1. All rights are reserved by the Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. (FUJIFILM).
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service

personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore

proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.
K Manual copying in whole or in part.

K Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
K Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.
MENU TABLE 1
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2
MESSAGES AND ACTIONS 3
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 4
MAINTENANCE MENU 5
FILM CARRIER SECTION 6
SCANNER (SP-500) 7
PAPER SUPPLY SECTION 8
PAPER FEED SECTION 9
EXPOSURE SECTION 10
SUB-SCANNING EXIT/PRINTER EXIT SECTION 11
PROCESSOR SECTION 12
PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM 13
PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM 14
DRYER SECTION 15
PRINT EXIT SECTION/SORTER 16
ELECTRICAL SECTION 17
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS 18
APPENDIX 19
CONTENTS
1. MENU TABLE........................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Setup and Maintenance Menu Table................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table.................................................................. 1-7
1.2.1 Menu Table ............................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 0 [MENU] Item........................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.3 1 [STARTUP CHK.] Item ........................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.4 2 [END CHK.] Item .................................................................................................. 1-11
1.2.5 3 [LANGUAGE] Item ............................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.6 4 [CHECK] Item....................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.7 5 [SELECT FUNC.] Item ......................................................................................... 1-14
1.2.8 6 [PRINT COND.] Item ............................................................................................ 1-15
1.2.9 7 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item ........................................................................................ 1-16
1.2.10 8 [SYSTEM] Item..................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.11 9 [INSTALLATION] Item.......................................................................................... 1-19
2. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table ........................................................................ 2-4
2.3 Maintenance and Inspection Procedures ............................................................................ 2-6
2.3.1 Lens Dustproof Glass Cleaning................................................................................. 2-6
2.3.2 Plug-in Connector Cleaning ...................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.3 Crossover Rack/Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack Auto Washing Nozzle
Inspection .............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.3.4 Processing Solution Level Sensor Cleaning ............................................................. 2-8
2.3.5 Replenisher Level Sensor Cleaning .......................................................................... 2-8
2.3.6 Cutter Inspection ....................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.7 Back Printing Head Inspection .................................................................................. 2-9
2.3.8 Processing Rack Helical Drive Gear Lubrication....................................................... 2-9
2.3.9 Circulation Pump Inspection.................................................................................... 2-10
2.3.10 Processing Solution Heater Inspection ................................................................... 2-10
2.3.11 Waste Solution Level Sensor Cleaning ................................................................... 2-11
2.3.12 Solution Hose and Clamp Inspection ...................................................................... 2-11
2.3.13 Processor Drive Chain Lubrication.......................................................................... 2-12
2.3.14 PSR Level Sensor Inspection.................................................................................. 2-12
2.3.15 Dryer Rack Mesh Belt Inspection ............................................................................ 2-13
2.3.16 Back Printing/Registration Unit Feed Rollers Cleaning ........................................... 2-13
2.3.17 Sub-scanning Unit Large Rubber Belt Inspection/Pulley Cleaning ......................... 2-14
2.3.18 Sub-scanning Unit Small Rubber Belt Inspection/Pulley Cleaning.......................... 2-15
2.3.19 Sub-scanning Unit Feed Roller Cleaning ................................................................ 2-15
2.3.20 Sub-scanning Exit Unit Feed Roller Cleaning ......................................................... 2-17
2.3.21 Printer Exit Unit Feed Roller Cleaning..................................................................... 2-17
2.3.22 Back Printing/Registration Unit Nip Release System Inspection............................. 2-18
2.3.23 Sub-scanning Exit Unit Nip Release System Inspection ......................................... 2-18
2.3.24 Cutter Entrance/Guide/Back Printer Head Section Cleaning .................................. 2-19
4
3. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Error Indication Outline........................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.1 Message Number ...................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Message Icon ............................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.3 X-#### Actions .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Messages and Actions ........................................................................................................ 3-3
3.3 Trouble Shooting ............................................................................................................. 3-100
3.3.1 Film Carrier............................................................................................................ 3-100
3.3.2 CTL25 Circuit Board.............................................................................................. 3-101
3.3.3 Replenisher Cartridge Box Malfunction................................................................. 3-102
3.3.4 Processing Solution Temperature Abnormality ..................................................... 3-104
3.3.5 Dryer Temperature Abnormality ............................................................................ 3-107
3.3.6 Processing Solution Tank Level Lowering ............................................................ 3-110
3.3.7 Replenisher Pump Diagnostics ............................................................................. 3-111
3.3.8 Rack Auto Cleaning System Diagnostics .............................................................. 3-112
3.3.9 P1R Stirring Valve/Replenisher Cartridge Washing Valve Diagnostics ................ 3-113
3.3.10 Replenisher Level Sensor Diagnostics.................................................................. 3-114
3.3.11 Return Action after Replenishment System Error ................................................. 3-114
3.3.12 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Malfunction ......................................................... 3-115
3.3.13 Checking Network Connection/Environment......................................................... 3-116
3.3.14 Checking the Status of the DIC2 ......................................................................... 3-116
3.3.15 Checking the Status of Installed Software............................................................. 3-116
3.3.16 Checking the Processing Status of the Job/Order ................................................ 3-116
4. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Update ................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.1 DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Update .......................................................................... 4-2
4.2 DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Reinstallation .......................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1 BIOS Setup ............................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Partition Confirmation................................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.3 User Account Setup .................................................................................................. 4-9
4.2.4 Driver Installation and Computer Name Registration .............................................. 4-11
4.2.5 Taskbar Setting ....................................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.6 Classic View and Screen Saver Setting .................................................................. 4-15
4.2.7 Time Zone Setting ................................................................................................... 4-17
4.2.8 Local Area Connection Setup.................................................................................. 4-18
4.2.9 Windows XP Auto Configuration ............................................................................. 4-19
4.2.10 MSDE2000SP3a (MSDE) Installation ..................................................................... 4-21
4.2.11 Internet Information Services (IIS) Installation ........................................................ 4-22
4.2.12 Microsoft .Net Framework V1.1 Installation............................................................. 4-25
4.2.13 DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Installation................................................................... 4-28
4.2.14 Optional Software Installation.................................................................................. 4-30
4.2.15 Antivirus Software Installation ................................................................................. 4-30
4.2.16 Scanner Data Loading (Scanner Backup & download (Menu 0326))...................... 4-31
4.2.17 Printer Data Loading (Printer Backup & download (Menu 1622)) ........................... 4-32
4.2.18 Data Set Tool Creating............................................................................................ 4-33
4.2.19 Launcher Menu Registration (Menu 1024).............................................................. 4-37
5
5. MAINTENANCE MENU ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Operational Procedure ........................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2 System Operation Setup and Check (01)............................................................................ 5-6
5.2.1 Image Export Settings (0101).................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Media Production Information (0120) ........................................................................ 5-6
5.2.3 Print Production Information (0123) .......................................................................... 5-8
5.2.4 Equipment Name Set (0124)................................................................................... 5-10
5.2.5 Timer Waiting Time Setup (0125) ........................................................................... 5-10
5.2.6 Installation Information Reference (0126) ............................................................... 5-11
5.2.7 Media Cumulative Production Information (0127) ................................................... 5-11
5.2.8 Print Cumulative Production Information (0128) ..................................................... 5-13
5.2.9 Media Input Environment Setup (0136)................................................................... 5-14
5.2.10 Writing Service Output Settings (0137) ................................................................... 5-16
5.2.11 Photo Copy Environment Setup (0138)................................................................... 5-17
5.2.12 Media Attachment Index Print Setting (0139).......................................................... 5-18
5.2.13 Installation Information Setup (0140) ...................................................................... 5-18
5.2.14 Clear Error Log (0141) ............................................................................................ 5-19
5.2.15 Periodical Message Setting (0146) ......................................................................... 5-20
5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (02) ............................................................................... 5-21
5.3.1 Print Size Setup (0220) ........................................................................................... 5-21
5.3.2 Monitor Adjustment (0222) ...................................................................................... 5-23
5.3.3 Special Film Channel Setting (0223)....................................................................... 5-24
5.3.4 Monotone Correction Setting (0224) ....................................................................... 5-26
5.3.5 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (0225)...................................................................... 5-27
5.3.6 Back Printing Format (0226) ................................................................................... 5-40
5.3.7 Index Conditions (0227) .......................................................................................... 5-43
5.3.8 Image Correction Setup (0240) ............................................................................... 5-44
5.3.9 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag. Setting (0241) ................................................... 5-45
5.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (03) ............................................................................. 5-46
5.4.1 Input Check (0320).................................................................................................. 5-46
5.4.2 AF Function Setup (0323) ....................................................................................... 5-46
5.4.3 Image Scanning Condition Method (0324).............................................................. 5-47
5.4.4 Film Scanner Installation Information Reference (0325) ......................................... 5-48
5.4.5 Scanner Backup & download (0326)....................................................................... 5-48
5.4.6 I/O Check (0341) ..................................................................................................... 5-49
5.4.7 Carrier Inclination Display (0342) ............................................................................ 5-50
5.4.8 CCD Data Display (0343)........................................................................................ 5-51
5.4.9 Film Scanner ID Registration (0344) ....................................................................... 5-52
5.4.10 Optical Axis Adjustment (0345) ............................................................................... 5-53
5.4.11 Spectral Calibration (0348)...................................................................................... 5-55
5.4.12 LED Light Amount Adjustment (0349)..................................................................... 5-58
5.4.13 Scanner Parameter Check/Update (0350) .............................................................. 5-59
5.4.14 CCD Adjustment (0351) .......................................................................................... 5-60
5.4.15 Working Information Display (0352) ........................................................................ 5-62
5.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (04)................................................................................ 5-63
5.5.1 NC100AR Fixed Feeding Setup (0400)................................................................... 5-63
5.5.2 Mask Position Adjustment (0420)............................................................................ 5-63
5.5.3 NC100AR Input Check (0421)................................................................................. 5-66
6
5.5.4 MFC10AR Input Check (0422) ................................................................................ 5-66
5.5.5 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (0425).......................................................................... 5-67
5.5.6 Focus Offset Adjustment (0441).............................................................................. 5-68
5.5.7 NC100AR Sensor Calibration Information (0443) ................................................... 5-70
5.5.8 NC100AR ID Registration (0446) ............................................................................ 5-71
5.5.9 MFC10AR ID Registration (0447) ........................................................................... 5-72
5.5.10 NC100AR I/O Check (0448).................................................................................... 5-73
5.5.11 NC100AR Machine Data Setup (0451) ................................................................... 5-74
5.5.12 NC100AR Feeding Operation Check (0455)........................................................... 5-75
5.6 Order Control and Maintenance (09)................................................................................. 5-76
5.6.1 Workflow Adviser Environment Setup (0920).......................................................... 5-76
5.6.2 System Operation Setting Setup (0921).................................................................. 5-76
5.6.3 Server/DIC2 Operation Setting Setup (0923) ....................................................... 5-78
5.7 Register/Delete (10) .......................................................................................................... 5-79
5.7.1 Shop Logo Regist/Delete (1020) ............................................................................. 5-79
5.7.2 Template Regist/Delete (1021) ............................................................................... 5-80
5.7.3 Holiday File Regist/Delete (1022)............................................................................ 5-80
5.7.4 Custom Button Regist/Save (1023)......................................................................... 5-80
5.7.5 Launcher Menu Regist/Delete (1024) ..................................................................... 5-83
5.8 System Operation Setup and Check (16).......................................................................... 5-84
5.8.1 Timer Setup (1621) ................................................................................................. 5-84
5.8.2 Printer Backup & download (1622).......................................................................... 5-85
5.8.3 Installation Information Reference (1626) ............................................................... 5-86
5.8.4 Installation Information Setup (1640) ...................................................................... 5-86
5.9 Print Condition Setup and Check (17) ............................................................................... 5-88
5.9.1 Paper Condition Setup (1700)................................................................................. 5-88
5.9.2 Paper Magazine Registration (1721)....................................................................... 5-90
5.9.3 Paper Condition Method Setup (1742).................................................................... 5-93
5.9.4 Paper Surfaces Display Setup (1743) ..................................................................... 5-93
5.10 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (05) ................................................................................ 5-94
5.10.1 Magazine Feed Length Adjustment (0520) ............................................................. 5-94
5.10.2 G Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (0522)................................................ 5-95
5.10.3 Paper Feed (0523) .................................................................................................. 5-96
5.10.4 Printer Temperature Display (0524) ........................................................................ 5-97
5.10.5 Printer Input Check (0525) ...................................................................................... 5-97
5.10.6 Image Position/Angle Fine Adjustment (0527) ........................................................ 5-98
5.10.7 Printer Function Select (0528)............................................................................... 5-100
5.10.8 Printer I/O Check (0540) ....................................................................................... 5-101
5.10.9 Test Pattern Printing (0541) .................................................................................. 5-102
5.10.10 Laser Exposure Check (0542)............................................................................... 5-104
5.10.11 R Laser (R-LD) Data (0543) .................................................................................. 5-104
5.10.12 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (0544) .............................................................................. 5-104
5.10.13 B Laser (B-LD) Data (0545) .................................................................................. 5-105
5.10.14 Scan/Scan Home Position Parameter (0546) ....................................................... 5-105
5.10.15 Main Scan/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjust (0547) ............................................. 5-106
5.10.16 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (0548) .................................................. 5-107
5.10.17 Laser History Display (0549) ................................................................................. 5-109
5.10.18 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (0550) ................................................. 5-110
7
5.10.19 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (0551) .......................................................... 5-110
5.10.20 Filter Exchange Log (0552) ................................................................................... 5-111
5.10.21 Drawing Position Sensor Adjustment (0553)......................................................... 5-111
5.10.22 Image Position Initialization (0554) ....................................................................... 5-112
5.10.23 Sub-scan Feeding Speed Adjustment (0555) ....................................................... 5-113
5.10.24 Sub-Scan Soft Nip Adjustment (0557) .................................................................. 5-114
5.10.25 Sensor Current Value Setting (0559) .................................................................... 5-115
5.10.26 Printer Operation Data Display (0560) .................................................................. 5-116
5.10.27 Data Saving (0561) ............................................................................................... 5-117
5.10.28 Data Download (0562) .......................................................................................... 5-117
5.11 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (06) ........................................................................ 5-118
5.11.1 Pump Output Measurement/Setting (0620)........................................................... 5-118
5.11.2 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (0621) ............................................. 5-120
5.11.3 Low Volume Processing Setup (0622) .................................................................. 5-122
5.11.4 Processor Temperature Calibration (0623) ........................................................... 5-122
5.11.5 Processor Input Check (0624)............................................................................... 5-125
5.11.6 Processor Operating Condition Setup (0625) ....................................................... 5-126
5.11.7 Processing Temperature Setting (0640) ............................................................... 5-127
5.11.8 Processor I/O Check (0642).................................................................................. 5-128
5.11.9 Processor Operation Data Display (0643)............................................................. 5-129
5.12 Self-Diagnostic (23) ......................................................................................................... 5-130
5.12.1 Paper Feed Check (2340) ..................................................................................... 5-130
5.13 Printer Registration (15) .................................................................................................. 5-134
5.13.1 Printer Registration (1540) .................................................................................... 5-134
5.14 Special Operations (99).................................................................................................. 5-135
5.14.1 Paint (9940)........................................................................................................... 5-135
5.14.2 Explorer (9941)...................................................................................................... 5-135
5.14.3 Command (9942) .................................................................................................. 5-136
5.15 DST (Data Set Tool) Update ........................................................................................... 5-137
6. FILM CARRIER SECTION.................................................................................................... 6-1

Parts Location...................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1 NC100AR Upper Feed Section ........................................................................................... 6-9
6.1.1 Upper Mask Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................................... 6-9
6.1.2 Upper Feed Section Damper Spring Replacement ................................................... 6-9
6.1.3 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 6-10
6.1.4 Opposite Roller Replacement ................................................................................. 6-10
6.1.5 Upper Dust Removal Brush Replacement .............................................................. 6-11
6.1.6 Upper Dust Removal Brush Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ................................... 6-12
6.1.7 Pressure Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ................................................................ 6-13
6.1.8 CYA25 Circuit Board Replacement ......................................................................... 6-16
6.1.9 Leading End Sensor LED (D401L)/LEE22 Circuit Board Replacement .................. 6-18
6.1.10 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D403L)/LEE22 Circuit Board
Replacement ....................................................................................................... 6-19
6.1.11 LBF25 Circuit Board Replacement.......................................................................... 6-20
6.2 NC100AR Lower Feed Section ......................................................................................... 6-22
6.2.1 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation..................................................................... 6-22
6.2.2 Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... 6-22
8
6.2.3
Belt Tension Adjustment ......................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.4
Carrier Lock Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................................ 6-24
6.2.5
Carrier Lock Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................................... 6-24
6.2.6
Feed Belt/Feed Roller Replacement ....................................................................... 6-26
6.2.7
Lower Dust Removal Brush Replacement .............................................................. 6-28
6.2.8
Upper Feed Section Lock Release Button Replacement ........................................ 6-30
6.2.9
Carrier Stopper Replacement.................................................................................. 6-31
6.2.10
Handle Replacement............................................................................................... 6-31
6.2.11
JNC25 Circuit Board Replacement ......................................................................... 6-32
6.2.12
PDC25 Circuit Board Replacement......................................................................... 6-34
6.2.13
Leading End Sensor (D401P)/DTE25 Circuit Board Replacement ......................... 6-34
6.2.14
Upstream Perforation Sensor (D402P)/Check Tape Sensor (D404P)/
DTF25 Circuit Board Replacement ..................................................................... 6-35
6.2.15 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D403P)/DTE25 Circuit Board
Replacement ....................................................................................................... 6-36
6.2.16 Feed Motor (M401) Replacement ........................................................................... 6-37
6.2.17 Plug-in Connector Replacement ............................................................................. 6-38
6.2.18 Upper Feed Section Open/Close Sensor (D421) Replacement.............................. 6-39
6.2.19 Diffusion Box Sensor (D422) Replacement............................................................. 6-39
6.2.20 Pressure Solenoid (S401) Replacement ................................................................. 6-40
6.2.21 DBF25 Circuit Board Replacement ......................................................................... 6-42
6.2.22 Herness Routing...................................................................................................... 6-43
6.3 Winding Section................................................................................................................. 6-44
6.3.1 Winding Roller Unit Removal/Reinstallation............................................................ 6-44
6.3.2 Winding Roller Replacement................................................................................... 6-45
6.3.3 Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 6-45
6.3.4 Winding Upper Guide Replacement........................................................................ 6-46
6.3.5 Winding Section Cover Replacement...................................................................... 6-47
6.3.6 Open/Close Detecting Lever Replacement ............................................................. 6-47
6.3.7 Lock Release Lever Replacement .......................................................................... 6-48
6.3.8 Winding Roller Idler Gear Replacement.................................................................. 6-48
6.3.9 Winding Lower Guide Replacement........................................................................ 6-49
6.4 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR (Optional) ........................................................................ 6-51
6.4.1 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 6-51
6.4.2 Shutter Replacement............................................................................................... 6-52
6.4.3 CYB25 Circuit Board Replacement ......................................................................... 6-52
6.4.5 Carrier Lock Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................................ 6-54
6.4.6 Diffusion Box Sensor (D422) Replacement............................................................. 6-55
6.4.7 Carrier Lock Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................................... 6-56
6.4.8 Mask Position Adjustment Knob Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ....................... 6-57
6.4.9 Mask Position Adjustment Knob Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly................... 6-58
6.4.10 Mask Position Adjustment Rack Replacement........................................................ 6-59
6.4.11 SSA25 Circuit Board Replacement ......................................................................... 6-60
6.4.12 Side Rail Replacement............................................................................................ 6-60
6.4.13 IX240 Holder Door Open/Close Device Disassembly/Reassembly ........................ 6-62
6.4.14 IX240 Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly ......................................................... 6-63
6.4.15 135F Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly........................................................... 6-64
9
6.4.16 135H Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly .......................................................... 6-66
6.4.17 Mount Holder Replacement..................................................................................... 6-67
7. SCANNER (SP-500) ............................................................................................................... 7-1

Parts Location...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1 Body Covers ........................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.1.1 Top/Right Side/Left Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 7-4
7.1.2 Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation.......................................................................... 7-5
7.1.3 PSW25/LEA25/LEB25 Circuit Board Replacement................................................... 7-6
7.2 Light Source Section ........................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.1 LED Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation................................................ 7-7
7.2.2 LED25 Circuit Board Assembly Replacement........................................................... 7-8
7.3 Carrier Base Section ........................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.1 Airflow Cover Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................................... 7-9
7.3.2 Carrier Lock Sensor (D102) Replacement ................................................................ 7-9
7.3.3 Carrier Lock Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................................... 7-10
7.3.5 Carrier Guide Replacement..................................................................................... 7-14
7.3.6 Lower Carrier Guide Replacement.......................................................................... 7-15
7.4 Camera Unit ...................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.4.1 Camera Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 7-16
7.4.2 AF (Auto Focus) Motor Assembly (M201) Replacement......................................... 7-18
7.4.3 Lens Home Position Sensor (D201) Replacement.................................................. 7-19
7.4.4 Shutter Assembly Replacement .............................................................................. 7-20
7.5 Electrical Equipment.......................................................................................................... 7-21
7.5.1 Circuit Board Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .............................................. 7-21
7.5.2 ADC25 Circuit Board Replacement......................................................................... 7-22
7.5.3 CTL25 Circuit Board Replacement.......................................................................... 7-23
7.5.4 PZR22 Circuit Board Replacement ......................................................................... 7-24
7.5.5 DLE25 Circuit Board Replacement ......................................................................... 7-26
7.5.6 Power Supply Unit Replacement............................................................................. 7-27
7.5.7 Scanner Cooling Fan (F101) Replacement............................................................. 7-29
7.5.8 Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment............................................................................ 7-31
7.5.9 Wire Harness Routing ............................................................................................. 7-32
8. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ................................................................................................. 8-1

Parts Location...................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1 Paper Magazine .................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.1.1 Paper Supply Assembly Replacement ...................................................................... 8-3
8.1.2 Magazine Roller Release Arm Replacement ............................................................ 8-4
8.1.3 Drive Pulley Replacement ......................................................................................... 8-4
8.2 Upper Paper Magazine Table.............................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.1 Upper Magazine Setting Lever Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................. 8-5
8.2.2 Upper Magazine Setting Lever Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 8-5
8.2.3 Upper Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................. 8-6
8.2.4 Magazine Moving Cam Roller Replacement ............................................................. 8-6
8.2.5 Upper Slide Table/Bracket Removal/Reinstallation................................................... 8-7
10
8.2.6 Upper Magazine Table Slide Lock Assembly Replacement...................................... 8-7
8.3 Lower Paper Magazine Table (Optional)............................................................................. 8-8
8.3.1 Lower Magazine Setting Lever Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................. 8-8
8.3.2 Lower Magazine Setting Lever Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 8-8
8.3.3 Lower Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................. 8-9
8.3.4 Magazine Table Lift Cam Roller Replacement........................................................ 8-11
8.3.5 Soft Down Damper Replacement............................................................................ 8-12
8.4 Magazine Drive Unit/Interlock Switch ................................................................................ 8-13
8.4.1 Left Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation.................................................................. 8-13
8.4.2 Left Side Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................... 8-13
8.4.3 Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................... 8-14
8.4.4 Upper Magazine Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................... 8-14
8.4.5 Lower Magazine Drive Unit (Optional) Removal/Reinstallation............................... 8-15
8.4.6 Upper/Lower Magazine Paper Supply Motor (M610/M620) Replacement.............. 8-16
8.4.7 Drive Belt Replacement........................................................................................... 8-17
8.4.8 Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor (D680A/D680B) Replacement ....................... 8-18
9. PAPER FEED SECTION ....................................................................................................... 9-1

Parts Location...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1 Cutter/Feed Unit .................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.1.1 Cutter Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 9-6
9.1.2 Upper Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 9-7
9.1.3 Lower Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 9-7
9.1.4 Upper/Lower Magazine Paper End Sensor (D616/D626) Replacement ................... 9-8
9.1.5 Upper Magazine ID Sensor 1 to 4 (D610 to D613)/Lower Magazine ID Sensor
1 to 4 (D620 to D623) Replacement...................................................................... 9-8
9.1.6 Feed Motor 1 (M630) Replacement .......................................................................... 9-9
9.1.7 Drive Gear Replacement......................................................................................... 9-10
9.1.8 Upper Cutter Unit Replacement .............................................................................. 9-10
9.1.9 Lower Cutter Unit (Optional) Replacement ............................................................. 9-11
9.1.10 Upper Magazine Splice Sensor (D619P)/LED (D619L) Replacement .................... 9-12
9.1.11 Lower Magazine Splice Sensor (D629P)/LED (D629L) Replacement .................... 9-13
9.1.12 Magazine Exit Paper Sensor (D632P)/LED (D632L) Replacement ........................ 9-13
9.1.13 Nip Roller Replacement .......................................................................................... 9-15
9.1.14 Emulsion Side Open/Close Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation............................ 9-15
9.1.15 Back Surface Side Exit Guide Plate Replacement.................................................. 9-16
9.1.16 Common Guide Plate Replacement........................................................................ 9-17
9.1.17 Feed Roller Replacement........................................................................................ 9-17
9.1.18 Upper Magazine Exit Open/Close Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ................. 9-18
9.1.19 Upper Magazine Exit Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................ 9-18
9.2 Back Printer/Registration Unit ........................................................................................... 9-20
9.2.1 Back Printer/Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 9-20
9.2.2 Nip Release Solenoid 1 (S631) Replacement......................................................... 9-21
9.2.5 Back Printer Section Nip Roller Replacement......................................................... 9-24
9.2.6 Nip Roller 1 Replacement ....................................................................................... 9-25
11
9.2.9 Registration Tilt Motor (M641) Replacement........................................................... 9-27
9.2.10 Feed Motor 2 (M631) Replacement ........................................................................ 9-28
9.2.12 Tilt Home Position Sensor (D641) Replacement..................................................... 9-31
9.2.13 Tilt Unit Removal/Reinstallation .............................................................................. 9-31
9.2.14 Registration Section Feed Roller 1 Replacement ................................................... 9-33
9.2.17 Platen Replacement ................................................................................................ 9-37
9.2.18 Back Printer Drive Gear Replacement .................................................................... 9-38
9.2.19 Back Printer Head Replacement ............................................................................. 9-38
9.2.20 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................................ 9-40
9.2.21 Back Printer Unit Drive Gear Replacement............................................................. 9-41
9.2.22 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment............................................................... 9-42
9.2.23 Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement ...................................................... 9-43
10. EXPOSURE SECTION ........................................................................................................ 10-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1 LDD Circuit Board/AOM Driver Section ............................................................................. 10-4
10.1.1 Printer Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation .............................................................. 10-4
10.1.2 Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................................... 10-5
10.1.3 LDD Circuit Board Exhaust Fan (FAN) Replacement ............................................. 10-6
10.1.4 Control Section Exhaust Fan 4 (F604) Replacement.............................................. 10-6
10.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement ....................................................................................... 10-7
10.1.6 LDD27 Circuit Board Replacement ......................................................................... 10-8
10.1.7 Operation Panel/Keyboard Circuit Board (KEY27) Replacement ........................... 10-9
10.1.8 Calibrator Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................................... 10-10
10.1.9 Calibrator Width Guide Replacement.................................................................... 10-11
10.2 Laser Optical Unit ............................................................................................................ 10-13
10.2.1 Laser Optical Unit Air Filter Replacement ............................................................. 10-13
10.2.2 Anti-dust Fan (F670) Replacement ....................................................................... 10-13
10.2.3 Laser Optical Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................ 10-14
10.2.4 Shutter Solenoid (S673) Replacement.................................................................. 10-17
10.2.5 Shutter Open/Close Sensor (D674) Replacement ................................................ 10-17
10.2.6 Exposure Point Temperature Sensor (THA20) Replacement ............................... 10-18
10.3 Sub-scanning Unit ........................................................................................................... 10-19
10.3.1 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................... 10-19
10.3.2 Frame Removal/Reinstallation .............................................................................. 10-20
10.3.3 Large Rubber Belt Replacement ........................................................................... 10-20
10.3.4 Sub-scanning Feed Motor (M650) Replacement .................................................. 10-22
10.3.5 Timing Belt Replacement ...................................................................................... 10-23
10.3.6 Soft Nip Motor (M651) Replacement..................................................................... 10-24
10.3.7 Small Rubber Belt Replacement ........................................................................... 10-24
10.3.8 Soft Nip Home Position Sensor (D651) Replacement........................................... 10-26
10.3.9 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor (D650P)/Exposure Section
Paper Sensor (D653P) Replacement................................................................ 10-28
12
10.3.10 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor LED (D650L)/Exposure Section
Paper Sensor LED (D653L) Replacement ........................................................ 10-28
10.3.11 Soft Nip Pre-turning Belt Replacement ................................................................. 10-30
11. SUB-SCANNING EXIT/PRINTER EXIT SECTION ..................................................... 11-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1 Sub-scanning Exit Unit ...................................................................................................... 11-6
11.1.1 Sub-scanning Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 11-6
11.1.2 Sub-scanning Exit Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation .................................. 11-7
11.1.3 Nip Release Solenoid 4/5/6 (S660/S661/S662) Replacement ................................ 11-8
11.1.4 Nip Roller 1/2/3 Replacement ................................................................................. 11-8
11.1.6 Feed Motor 4 (M660) Replacement ...................................................................... 11-10
11.1.7 Feed Roller Drive Gear Replacement ................................................................... 11-10
11.1.8 Feed Roller Replacement...................................................................................... 11-11
11.1.9 Sub-scanning Exit Guide Open/Close Sensor (D669) Replacement .................... 11-12
11.1.10 Sub-scanning Exit Section Paper Sensor (D667) Replacement ........................... 11-13
11.1.11 Guide Rocking Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ..................................................... 11-13
11.2 Printer Exit Unit................................................................................................................ 11-15
11.2.1 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................................ 11-15
11.2.2 Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................................................ 11-15
11.2.3 Feed Roller/Drive Gear Replacement ................................................................... 11-16
12. PROCESSOR SECTION ..................................................................................................... 12-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.1 Crossover Racks/Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack ........................................................... 12-6
12.1.1 No. 1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly ................................................... 12-6
12.1.2 No. 2/No. 3 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly ......................................... 12-6
12.1.3 Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack Disassembly/Reassembly ................................... 12-7
12.2 P1/P2 Processing Racks ................................................................................................... 12-9
12.2.1 Upper Guide Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... 12-9
12.2.2 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly................................................................ 12-10
12.2.3 Roller Replacement............................................................................................... 12-12
12.2.4 Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... 12-14
12.3 PS1 Processing Rack...................................................................................................... 12-16
12.3.1 Upper Guide Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................... 12-16
13
12.6 PS Tank Partition Board .................................................................................................. 12-32
12.6.1 PS Tank Partition Board Removal/Reinstallation (Blade Replacement) ............... 12-32
12.7 Processor Drive System .................................................................................................. 12-39
12.7.1 Right Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................. 12-39
12.7.2 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................... 12-39
12.7.3 Auto Chain Tensioner Removal/Reinstallation...................................................... 12-40
12.7.4 Processor Drive Motor (M700) Replacement ........................................................ 12-42
12.7.5 Processor Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement ...................................................... 12-43
12.7.6 Processor Drive Chain Replacement .................................................................... 12-45
12.7.7 Printer Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement ............................................................ 12-46
12.7.8 Processor Cover (Large) Open/Close Sensor (D762A) Replacement .................. 12-47
12.7.9 Processor Cover (Small) Open/Close Sensor (D762B) Replacement .................. 12-48
13. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM............................................... 13-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.1 Sub-tank Section ............................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.1 Processor Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 13-3
13.1.2 Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation..................................................... 13-3
13.1.3 P1 to PS3 Solution Temperature Sensor (TS700 to TS703) Replacement ............ 13-4
13.1.4 P1 to PS3 Solution Level Sensor (FS700 to FS704) Replacement ........................ 13-5
13.2 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section...................................................... 13-6
13.2.1 Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation..................................................... 13-6
13.2.2 P2 Heater Cooling Fan (F701) Replacement .......................................................... 13-6
13.2.3 Heater Safety Thermostat (D700 to D703) Replacement ....................................... 13-7
13.2.4 Processing Solution Heater (H700 to H703) Replacement ..................................... 13-8
13.2.5 P1/P2/PS3 Circulation Pump (PU700/PU701/PU704) Replacement...................... 13-9
13.2.6 PS1/PS2 Circulation Pump (PU702/PU703) Replacement................................... 13-10
13.2.7 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F704) Replacement............................................. 13-11
13.2.8 Hose Connection................................................................................................... 13-12
13.3 Waste Solution System ................................................................................................... 13-13
13.3.1 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS728) Replacement ............................................ 13-13
13.3.2 Waste Solution Tank Replacement ....................................................................... 13-13
14. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM ....................................... 14-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section........................................................................................... 14-3
14.1.1 Replenisher Cartridge Door Open/Close Sensor (D724) Replacement .................. 14-3
14.1.2 Replenisher Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D722/D723) Replacement ........ 14-4
14.1.3 Replenisher Cartridge Open Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...................................... 14-5
14.1.4 Replenisher Cartridge Open Cam/Gear Replacement............................................ 14-6
14.1.5 Cartridge Opening Motor (M720) Replacement ...................................................... 14-6
14.1.6 Replenisher Door Lock Manual Releasing .............................................................. 14-8
14.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System..................................................................... 14-9
14.2.1 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Filter Replacement ................................................. 14-9
14
14.2.2 P1R/P2RA/P2RB/PSR Replenisher Pump (PU721/ PU722/ PU723/ PU724)
Replacement ....................................................................................................... 14-9
14.2.3 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement................................................................. 14-11
14.2.4 Replenisher Pump Bellows Replacement ............................................................. 14-12
14.2.5 PSR Filter Replacement........................................................................................ 14-13
14.2.6 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS723/FS727) Replacement............................ 14-13
14.2.7 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement................................. 14-15
14.2.8 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Tank Replacement ............................................... 14-17
14.2.9 PSR Tank Replacement........................................................................................ 14-20
14.3 Auto Washing and P1R Stirring System.......................................................................... 14-21
14.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU720) Replacement ......................................................... 14-21
14.3.2 Rack Auto Washing Valve/P1W Water Replenishment Valve (S720 to S723)
Replacement ..................................................................................................... 14-22
14.3.3 Cartridge Washing Valve/P1R Stirring Valve (S728 to S731) Replacement......... 14-23
15. DRYER SECTION ................................................................................................................. 15-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 15-2
15.1 Dryer Rack......................................................................................................................... 15-3
15.1.1 Dryer Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation................................................. 15-3
15.1.2 Dryer Section Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 15-3
15.1.3 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation......................................................................... 15-4
15.1.4 Dryer Mesh Belt/Roller Replacement ...................................................................... 15-6
15.1.5 Dryer Rack/Dryer Exit Unit Drive Belt and Gear Replacement ............................... 15-7
15.1.6 Dryer Section Cover Open/Close Sensor (D763) Replacement ............................. 15-8
15.2 Dryer Fan/Heater Section................................................................................................ 15-10
15.2.1 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS760) Replacement ............................................... 15-10
15.2.2 Dryer Fan (F760) Replacement............................................................................. 15-10
15.2.3 Dryer Heater Assembly Replacement ................................................................... 15-12
16. PRINT EXIT SECTION/SORTER...................................................................................... 16-1

Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 16-2
16.1 Dryer Exit Unit ................................................................................................................... 16-5
16.1.1 Dryer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................... 16-5
16.1.2 Nip Roller Replacement .......................................................................................... 16-6
16.1.3 Upper Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation...................................................... 16-7
16.1.4 Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor (D771P) Replacement ........................................ 16-8
16.1.5 Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor LED (D771L) Replacement ................................ 16-8
16.1.6 Feed Roller Drive Gear Replacement ..................................................................... 16-9
16.1.8 Dryer Exit Section Cover Open/Close Sensor (D766) Replacement .................... 16-11
16.2 SU700AR Sorter (Optional) ............................................................................................. 16-13
16.2.1 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation............................................................................... 16-13
16.2.2 Sorter Full Sensor (D811) Replacement ............................................................... 16-13
16.2.3 SWA23 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 16-14
16.2.4 Sorter Drive Motor (M810) Replacement .............................................................. 16-15
16.2.5 Sorter Tray Stop Position Sensor (D810) Replacement........................................ 16-16
15
17. ELECTRICAL SECTION ..................................................................................................... 17-1
Parts Location.................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.1 Power Input Section .......................................................................................................... 17-4
17.1.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation............................................................. 17-4
17.1.2 Built-in Circuit Breaker Replacement ...................................................................... 17-5
17.1.3 Noise Filter (NF1)/Capacitor (C1) Replacement ..................................................... 17-6
17.2 Power Supply/Electrical Equipment Section...................................................................... 17-7
17.2.1 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2 (F630/F631) Replacement..................................... 17-7
17.2.2 Power Supply/Electrical Equipment Section Inner Cover Removal/
Reinstallation....................................................................................................... 17-8
17.2.3 AC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 17-8
17.2.4 PAC27 Circuit Board Replacement ....................................................................... 17-10
17.2.5 SSR1 to SSR3 Replacement ................................................................................ 17-10
17.2.6 Relay (K1 to K3) Replacement.............................................................................. 17-11
17.2.7 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP5) Replacement ........................................................ 17-11
17.2.8 Feed Section Cooling Fan 2 (F607) Replacement ................................................ 17-12
17.3 DC Power Supply Section ............................................................................................... 17-14
17.3.1 Motor Driver (K3201 Circuit Board) Replacement ................................................. 17-14
17.3.2 DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................................... 17-14
17.3.3 DC Power Supply Unit Replacement .................................................................... 17-15
17.3.4 PWR27 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 17-15
17.4 Control Section ................................................................................................................ 17-16
17.4.1 CTL27 Circuit Board Replacement........................................................................ 17-16
17.4.2 OPA27 Circuit Board Replacement....................................................................... 17-17
17.4.3 GMC27 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 17-17
17.4.4 Control Section Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F600/F601) Replacement................................ 17-18
17.4.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan 3 (F602) Replacement............................................ 17-19
17.4.6 START Switch (D684) Replacement..................................................................... 17-19
17.4.7 Left Side Cover Open/Close Sensor A/B (D681A/D681B) Replacement.............. 17-20
17.4.8 Program Downloading to GMC27 Circuit Board.................................................... 17-21
18. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .............................................................................. 18-1

18.1 I/O Parts Diagrams ............................................................................................................ 18-2
18.1.1 Scanner Section (SP-500)....................................................................................... 18-2
18.1.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AR .................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.3 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR ............................................................................... 18-6
18.1.4 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Printer Section ........................................................... 18-7
18.1.5 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Processor Section ................................................... 18-10
18.2 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams........................................................ 18-13
18.2.1 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Printer Section ......................................................... 18-13
18.3 Block Diagrams ............................................................................................................... 18-15
18.3.1 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Signal Block Diagram .............................................. 18-15
18.3.2 Printor/Processor (LP-5000) Power Supply System Block Diagram ..................... 18-16
18.4 Scanner (SP-500) DC Power Supply Unit and Circuit Boards ........................................ 18-17
18.4.1 Circuit Boards Voltage List .................................................................................... 18-17
18.4.2 DC Power Supply Unit Fuses and LEDs ............................................................... 18-18
18.4.3 Circuit Board Layout Diagrams ............................................................................. 18-19
16
18.5 Scanner (SP-500) Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................ 18-23
18.5.1 Scanner Section (SP-500) Wiring Diagram........................................................... 18-23
18.5.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AR Wiring Diagram ........................................................ 18-24
18.5.3 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR Wiring Diagram ................................................... 18-25
18.6 Printer/Processor DC Power Supply Unit and Circuit Boards ......................................... 18-26
18.6.1 Circuit Boards Voltage Check List......................................................................... 18-26
18.6.2 DC Power Supply System LED Indication List ...................................................... 18-27
18.6.3 Circuit Board Layout Diagrams ............................................................................. 18-28
18.7 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Wiring Diagram .................................................................. 18-35
18.7.1 AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram ........................................................................ 18-35
18.7.2 LP-5000 Power Supply System Wiring Diagram .................................................. 18-36
18.7.3 PAC27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ................................................................... 18-38
18.7.4 PWR27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................................................................. 18-39
18.7.5 CTL27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ................................................................... 18-40
18.7.6 OPA27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ................................................................... 18-47
18.7.7 GMC27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................................................................. 18-48
18.7.8 LDD27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram.................................................................... 18-49
18.7.9 Laser Optical Section Wiring Diagram .................................................................. 18-50
19. APPENDIX ............................................................................................................................... 19-1

19.1 Adjustment Jigs ................................................................................................................ 19-2
19.1.1 SP-500 .................................................................................................................... 19-2
19.1.2 LP-5000................................................................................................................... 19-3
19.2 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement .............................................................. 19-4
19.2.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AR .................................................................................... 19-4
19.2.2 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR ............................................................................... 19-4
19.2.3 SP-500 .................................................................................................................... 19-4
19.2.4 Paper Supply and Feed Sections............................................................................ 19-5
19.2.5 Exposure Section .................................................................................................... 19-5
19.2.6 Processing Solution Replenishment System........................................................... 19-6
19.2.7 Electrical Equipment/Control Section ...................................................................... 19-6
19.3 Index.................................................................................................................................. 19-7
17
1. MENU TABLE
1
1.1 Setup and Maintenance Menu Table..................................................... 1-2
1.2 Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table .................................. 1-7

1.2.1 Menu Table............................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 0 [MENU] Item .......................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.3 1 [STARTUP CHK.] Item .......................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.4 2 [END CHK.] Item ................................................................................................. 1-11
1.2.5 3 [LANGUAGE] Item .............................................................................................. 1-12
1.2.6 4 [CHECK] Item ...................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.7 5 [SELECT FUNC.] Item......................................................................................... 1-14
1.2.8 6 [PRINT COND.] Item ........................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.9 7 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item ....................................................................................... 1-16
1.2.10 8 [SYSTEM] Item .................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.11 9 [INSTALLATION] Item ........................................................................................ 1-19
1-1
1.1 Setup and Maintenance Menu Table
Password
Laboratory
No. Submenu No. Menu Operator SE
Manager
— 0000 7777
01 System Operation Setup 0101 Image Export Settings K K K

and Check
0120 Media Production Information K K
0123 Print Production Information K K
0124 Equipment Name Setup K K
0125 Timer Waiting Time Setup K K
0126 Installation Information Reference K K
0127 Media Cumulative Production Information K K
0128 Print Cumulative Production Information K K
0136 Media Input Environment Setup K K
0137 Writing Service Output Settings K K
0138 Photo Copy Environment Setup K K
0139 Media Attachment Index Print Setting K K
0140 Installation Information Setup K
0141 Clear Error Log K
0146 Periodical Message Setting K
02 Print Condition Setup and 0220 Print Size Setup K K

Check
0222 Monitor Adjustment K K
0223 Special Film Channel Setting K K
0224 Monotone Correction Setting K K
0225 Custom Setting Regist/Delete K K
0226 Back Printing Format K K
0227 Index Conditions K K
0240 Image Correction Setup K
0241 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag. Setting K
03 Scanner Adjustment/ 0320 Input Check K K

Maintenance
0323 AF Function Setup K K
0324 Image Scanning Condition Method K K
Film Scanner Installation Information

0325 K K
Reference
0326 Scanner Backup & download K K
0341 I/O Check K
0342 Carrier Inclination Display K
1-2
Password 1
Laboratory
Manager
— 0000 7777
03 Scanner Adjustment/ 0343 CCD Data Display K

Maintenance
0344 Film Scanner ID Registration K
0345 Oprical Axis Adjustment K
0348 Spectral Calibration K
0349 LED Light Amount Adjustment K
0350 Scanner Parameter Check/Update K
0351 CCD Adjustment K
0352 Working Information Display K
04 Carrier Adjustment/ 0400 NC100AR Fixed Feeding Setup K K K

Maintenance
0420 Mask Position Adjustment K K
0421 NC100AR Input Check K K
0422 MFC10AR Input Check K K
0425 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup K K
0441 Focus Offset Adjustment K
0443 NC100AR Sensor Calibration Information K
0446 NC100AR ID Registration K
0447 MFC10AR ID Registration K
0448 NC100AR I/O Check K
0451 NC100AR Machine Data Setup K
0455 NC100AR Feeding Operation Check K
09 Order Control and 0920 Workflow Adviser Environment Setup K K

Maintenance
0921 System Operation Setting Setup K K
0923 Server/DIC2 Operation Setting Setup K K
10 Register/Delete 1020 Shop Logo Regist/Delete K K
1021 Template Regist/Delete K K
1022 Holiday File Regist/Delete K K
1023 Custom Button Regist/Save K K
1024 Launcher Menu Regist/Delete K K
15 Printer Maintenance Printer Setup and Maintenance

1520 K K K
(→see Next Page)
1540 Printer Registration K
21 Manual 2140 Service Manual K
1-3
Password
Laboratory
Manager
— 0000 7777
22 Self-Diagnostics
2245 NC100AR Sensor Test K
(Scanner)
24 Tool 2420 CD-R Recovery K K
99 Special Operations 9940 Paint K
9941 Explorer K
9942 Command K
1520
Password
Laboratory
No. Menu No. Submenu No. Menu Operator SE
Manager
— 0000 7777
1520 Printer 16 System Operation 1621 Timer Setup K K

Setup and Setup and Check
Maintenance Printer Backup &
1622 K K
download
Installation Information
1626 K K
Reference
Installation Information
1640 K
Setup
17 Print Condition 1700 Paper Condition Setup K K K

Setup and Check
Paper Magazine
1721 K K
Registration
Paper Condition Method

1742 K
Setup
Paper Surface Display

1743 K
Setup
05 Printer Adjustment/ Magazine Feed Length

0520 K K
Maintenance Adjustment
G Laser(SHG) Optimal
0522 K K
Temperature Setup
0523 Paper Feed K K
Printer Temperature
0524 K K
Display
0525 Printer Input Check K K
1-4
Password 1
Laboratory
Manager
— 0000 7777
1520 Printer 05 Printer Adjustment/ Image Position/Angle

0527 K K
Setup and Maintenance Fine Adjustment
Maintenance
0528 Printer Function Select K K
0540 Printer I/O Check K
0541 Test Pattern Printing K
0542 Laser Exposure Check K
0543 R Laser (R-LD) Data K
0544 G Laser (G-SHG) Data K
0545 B Laser (B-LD) Data K
Scan/Scan Home
0546 K
Position Parameter
Main Scan/Laser Beam

0547 K
Sync. Rough Adjust
Laser Beam Sync. Fine

0548 K
Adjustment Print
0549 Laser History Display K
Paper Condition Setup

0550 K
Table(Lut) Copy
Printer Mechanical Fine

0551 K
Adjustment
0552 Filter Exchange Log K
Drawing Position Sensor

0553 K
Adjustment
Image Position
0554 K
Initialization
Sub-scan Feeding
0555 K
Speed Adjustment
Sub-scan Soft Nip

0557 K
Adjustment
Sensor Current Value

0559 K
Setting
Printer Operation Data

0560 K
Display
0561 Data Saving K
0562 Data Download K
1-5
Password
Laboratory
Manager
— 0000 7777
1520 Printer 06 Processor Pump Output

0620 K K
Setup and Adjustment/ Measurement/Setting
Maintenance Maintenance
Auto Cleaning Output
0621 K
Measurement/Setting
Low Volume Processing

0622 K K
Setup
Processor Temperature
0623 K K
Calibration
0624 Processor Input Check K K
Processor Operating
0625 K K
Condition Setup
Processing Temperature
0640 K
Setting
0642 Processor I/O Check K
Processor Operation
0643 K
Data Display
23 Self-diagnosis 2340 Paper Feed Check K
1-6
1.2 Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table
1.2.1 Menu Table 1

Classification User
Laboratory
No. Main Menu No. Submenu Description SE
Manager
1 STARTUP CHK 11 PROC TEMP. K K
12 CALIBRATION K K
13 MEASURE DENS K K
14 CTRL STRIPS K K
2 END CHK. 21 CHK START K K
3 LANGUAGE 31 SET LANG. Language change K K
32 ORG. LANG NO. Required data version K K
33 ADD LAND NO. Loaded data version K K
4 CHECK 41 PROC TEMP Processor temperature K K

indication
5 SELECT FUNC. 51 POWER OFF Power supply OFF K K
6 PRINT COND. 61 CALIBRATION Condition upkeep printing K K
62 MEASURE DENS Density measurement K K
7 SPEC. PRINT 71 TEST PATTERN Pattern printing K K
8 SYSTEM 82 PROC METHOD Processing method K

selection
84 NIGHT ALARM Night alarm ON - OFF K
85 SET AREA K
9 INSTALLATION 91 PSR AIR EXT. PSR line air bleeding K
92 MIX REPL. Replenisher preparation K
93 PUMP AIR EXT. Replenishment line air K

bleeding
94 PARAMETER K
95 IP ADDR. SET K
96 NET MASK SET K
Key Operation for Menu
User Key Operation
Laboratory Manager MENU MENU MENU and ENTER

, ,
SE MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU and ENTER

, , , ,
1-7
1.2.2 0 [MENU] Item
MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU
ENTER
STANDBY $✻ 0 [MENU] 1 [STARTUP CHK.]
Ver 1.0-0X-010 1 STARTUP CHK. 1 PROC. TEMP. ?
(SeeSubsection
(See Subsection1.2.3)
1.2.3)
0 [MENU] 2 [END CHK]
2 END CHK. 1 CHK START ?
(See
(SeeSubsection
Subsection1.2.4)
1.2.4)
0 [MENU] 3 [LANGUAGE]
3 LANGUAGE 1 SET LANG. ?
(See
(SeeSubsection
Subsection1.2.5)
1.2.5)
0 [MENU] 4 [CHECK]
4 CHECK 1 PROC TEMP. ?
MENU (SeeSubsection
1.2.6)
0 [MENU] 5 [SELECT FUNC.]
5 SELECT FUNC. 1 POWER OFF ?
(See
(SeeSubsection
Subsection1.2.7)
1.2.7)
0 [MENU] 6 [PRINT COND.]
6 PRINT COND. 1 CALIBRATION ?
(SeeSubsection
1.2.8)
0 [MENU] 7 [SPEC. PRINT]
7 SPEC. PRINT 1 TEST PATTERN ?
(See
(SeeSubsection
Subsection1.2.9)
1.2.9)
0 [MENU] 8 [SYSTEM]
8 SYSTEM 1 PROC TYPE ?
(See
(SeeSubsection
Subsection1.2.10)
1.2.10)
0 [MENU] 9 [INSTALLATION]
9 INSTALLATION 1 PSR AIR EXT. ?
(See
(SeeSubsection
Subsection1.2.11)
1.2.11)
1-8
1.2.3 1 [STARTUP CHK.] Item 1
0 [MENU]
1 STARTUP CHK.
ENTER
1 [STARTUP CHK.] 11 <PROC. TEMP.>
1 PROC. TEMP. ? P1 42.0 $
11 <PROC. TEMP.>
P2 40.0 $
11 <PROC. TEMP.>
PS1 40.0 $
11 <PROC. TEMP.>
PS3 40.0 $
11 <PROC. TEMP.>
DRY 65.0 $
1-9
ENTER
1 [STARTUP CHK.] 12 <CALIBRATION> 12 <CALIBRATION>
2 CALIBRATION ? 1 89 G F START ?
ENTER
12 <CALIBRATION>
PRINTING
*
ENTER
1 [STARTUP CHK.] 13 <MEASURE DENS> 13 <MEASURE DENS>
3 MEASURE DENS ? START ? ENTER

MEASURING $
#M0002
ENTER MEASURED ENTER
13 <MEASURE DENS>
DATA NORMAL #Cancel [YES] ?
LUT UPDATE OK ?
ENTER
13 <MEASURE DENS>
ENTER
LUT UPDATE NG ? MEASURED #M0002
DATA
ABNORMAL
#Cancel [NO] ?
ENTER
13 <MEASURE DENS>
MEASUREMENT NG ? MEASURED DATA

RECEPTION
ENTER
13 <MEASURE DENS>
COMMUNICATION NG ?
ENTER
1 [STARTUP CHK.] 14 <CTRL STRIPS> #M0005
4 CTRL STRIPS ? START ? [CONDITION NG] #xxxxx

ENTER
[CONDITION OK]
#Set Holder
#DRIVE [YES] ?
ENTER
14 <CTRL STRIPS>
PROCESSING
*
ENTER
#Set Holder
#DRIVE [NO] ?
1-10
1.2.4 2 [END CHK.] Item 1
0 [MENU]
2 END CHK.
ENTER ENTER
2 [END CHK.] 21 <CHK START> 21 <STARTUP TIME>
1 CHK START ? CHECKING ✻ 07/01/03 09:00 ?
Only the date

rises/descends.
21 <STARTUP TIME>
07/01/04 09:00 ?
ENTER
21 <END CHK> 21 <RACK WASH>
SYSTEM END CLEANING $
POWER OFF
ENTER
#M0002
#Cancel [YES] ?
ENTER
#M0002
#Cancel [NO] ?
1-11
1.2.5 3 [LANGUAGE] Item
ENTER ENTER
0 [MENU] 3 [LANGUAGE] 31 <SET LANG.>
3 LANGUAGE 1 SET LANG. ? [English] ?
ENTER
31 <SET LANG.>
[Japanese] ?
ENTER
3 [LANGUAGE] 32 <ORG. LANG NO.>
2 ORG. LANG NO. ? 000004
ENTER
3 [LANGUAGE] 33 <ADD. LANG NO.>
3 ADD. LANG NO. ? 000004
1-12
1.2.6 4 [CHECK] Item 1
ENTER
0 [MENU] 4 [CHECK] 41 <PROC TEMP.>
4 CHECK 1 PROC TEMP. ? P1 42.0 $
41 <PROC TEMP.>
P2 40.0 $
41 <PROC TEMP.>
PS1 40.0 $
41 <PROC TEMP.>
PS3 40.0 $
41 <PROC TEMP.>
DRY 65.0 $
1-13
1.2.7 5 [SELECT FUNC.] Item
ENTER
0 [MENU] 5 [SELECT FUNC.] 51 <POWER OFF>
5 SELECT FUNC. 1 POWER OFF ? START ?
ENTER
#M0003
#Power OFF [YES] ? ENTER
POWER OFF
ENTER
#M0003
#Power OFF [NO] ?
1-14
1.2.8 6 [PRINT COND.] Item 1
0 [MENU]
6 PRINT COND.
ENTER
6 [PRINT COND.] 61 <CALIBRATION>
1 CALIBRATION ? MAG. [UPPER]
61 <CALIBRATION>
START ?
61 <CALIBRATION>
ENTER
MAG. [LOWER]
61 <CALIBRATION>
PRINTING ✻
ENTER
61 <CALIBRATION>
COMPLETED ?
ENTER ENTER
6 [PRINT COND.] 62 <MEASURE DENS> 62 <MEASURE DENS>
2 MEASURE DENS ? START ? MEASURE $
ENTER
#M0002
#Cancel [YES] ?
ENTER
62 <MEASURE DENS>
LUT UP DATE OK ? MEASURED DATA

NORMAL
ENTER
ENTER
62 <MEASURE DENS> #M0002
LUT UP DATE NG ? MEASURED DATA #Cancel [NO] ?

ABNORMAL
ENTER
62 <MEASURE DENS> MEASURED DATA RECEPTION
MEASUREMENT NG ?
ENTER
62 <MEASURE DENS>
COMMUNICATION NG ?
1-15
1.2.9 7 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item
ENTER
0 [MENU] 7 [SPEC. PRINT] 71 <TEST PATTERN>
7 [SPEC. PRINT] 1 TEST PATTERN ? MAG. [UPPER]
ENTER
71 <TEST PATTERN>
MAG. [LOWER]
71 <TEST PATTERN> 71 <TEST PATTERN>
LENGTH [82.5] TYPE GRID
71 <TEST PATTERN>
71 <TEST PATTERN>
TYPE BL Plas
LENGTH [89.0]
71 <TEST PATTERN>
71 <TEST PATTERN>
START ?
71 <TEST PATTERN> TYPE BD Plas
ENTER
LENGTH [127.0]
71 <TEST PATTERN> 71 <TEST PATTERN>
TYPE Pap. Feed PRINTING ✻

71 <TEST PATTERN>
LENGTH [254.0]
71 <TEST PATTERN> ENTER
71 <TEST PATTERN>
TYPE ZIBKPrint
COMPLETED ?
71 <TEST PATTERN>
LENGTH [305.0] 71 <TEST PATTERN>
TYPE LIBKPrint
71 <TEST PATTERN>
TYPE CHBKPrint
71 <TEST PATTERN>
TYPE Grad.
71 <TEST PATTERN>
TYPE Frame
1-16
1.2.10 8 [SYSTEM] Item 1
0 [MENU] 8 [SYSTEM]
(See 82 [PROC. METHOD].)
8 SYSTEM 2 PROC METHOD ?
8 [SYSTEM]
(See 84 [NIGHT ALARM].)
4 NIGHT ALARM ?
8 [SYSTEM]
(See 85 [SET AREA].)
5 SET AREA ?
82 [PROC. METHOD]
ENTER
8 [SYSTEM] 82 <PROC. METHOD>
2 PROC.METHOD ? [FACTORY TEST] ?
82 <PROC. METHOD>
[CP-49E] ?
ENTER
1-17
84 [NIGHT ALARM]
ENTER ENTER
8 [SYSTEM] 84 <NIGHT ALARM>
4 NIGHT ALARM ? [OFF] ?
ENTER
84 <NIGHT ALARM>
[ON] ?
85 [SET AREA]
ENTER ENTER
8 [SYSTEM] 85 <SET AREA>
5 SET AREA ? [Standard] $
ENTER
85 <SET AREA>
[North America] $
ENTER
85 <SET AREA>
[Europe] $
1-18
1.2.11 9 [INSTALLATION] Item 1
0 [MENU]
9 INSTALLATION
ENTER ENTER
9 [INSTALLATION] 91 <PSR AIR EXT.> 91 <PSR AIR EXT.>
1 PSR AIR EXT. ? START ? EXTRACTING AIR ✻
ENTER
ENTER
9 [INSTALLATION] 92 <MIX REPL.> 92 <MIX REPL.>
2 MIX REPL. ? START ? PREPARING ✻
ENTER
ENTER
9 [INSTALLATION] 93 <PUMP AIR EXT.> 93 <PUMP AIR EXT.>
3 PUMP AIR EXT. ? START ? EXTRACTING AIR ✻
ENTER ENTER
9 [INSTALLATION] 94 <PARAMETER> 94 <PARAMETER>
4 PARAMETER ? Shipment ? START ?
ENTER
PROCESSING
Ver 2.0-0X-003 $ ✻
It moves to POWER OFF

a right beam.
ENTER
9 [INSTALLATION] 95 <IP ADDR. SET> 95 <IP ADDR. SET>
5 IP ADDR. SET ? 192168006238 ? 192168006239 ?
ENTER
Number change
It moves to
a right beam.
ENTER
9 [INSTALLATION] 96 <NET MASK SET> 96 <NET MASK SET>
6 NET MASK SET ? 255255255000 ? 255255255001 ?
Number change
1-19
2. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
2.1 Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table......................................... 2-4 2

2.3 Maintenance and Inspection Procedures............................................. 2-6
2.3.1 Lens Dustproof Glass Cleaning ............................................................................. 2-6
2.3.2 Plug-in Connector Cleaning ................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.3 Crossover Rack/Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack Auto Washing Nozzle
Inspection .............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.3.4 Processing Solution Level Sensor Cleaning ........................................................ 2-8
2.3.5 Replenisher Level Sensor Cleaning ...................................................................... 2-8
2.3.6 Cutter Inspection ..................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.7 Back Printing Head Inspection............................................................................... 2-9
2.3.8 Processing Rack Helical Drive Gear Lubrication ................................................. 2-9
2.3.9 Circulation Pump Inspection................................................................................ 2-10
2.3.10 Processing Solution Heater Inspection............................................................... 2-10
2.3.11 Waste Solution Level Sensor Cleaning ............................................................... 2-11
2.3.12 Solution Hose and Clamp Inspection .................................................................. 2-11
2.3.13 Processor Drive Chain Lubrication ..................................................................... 2-12
2.3.14 PSR Level Sensor Inspection............................................................................... 2-12
2.3.15 Dryer Rack Mesh Belt Inspection......................................................................... 2-13
2.3.16 Back Printing/Registration Unit Feed Rollers Cleaning..................................... 2-13
2.3.17 Sub-scanning Unit Large Rubber Belt Inspection/Pulley Cleaning.................. 2-14
2.3.18 Sub-scanning Unit Small Rubber Belt Inspection/Pulley Cleaning .................. 2-15
2.3.19 Sub-scanning Unit Feed Roller Cleaning ............................................................ 2-15
2.3.20 Sub-scanning Exit Unit Feed Roller Cleaning .................................................... 2-17
2.3.21 Printer Exit Unit Feed Roller Cleaning................................................................. 2-17
2.3.22 Back Printing/Registration Unit Nip Release System Inspection ..................... 2-18
2.3.23 Sub-scanning Exit Unit Nip Release System Inspection ................................... 2-18
2.3.24 Cutter Entrance/Guide/Back Printer Head Section Cleaning ............................ 2-19
2-1
2.1 Maintenance Schedule
More than 3,000 ↓ ↓ Every 2 Every Every Every 2 Every 6

sheets/day Weeks Week Month Months Months
2.500 to 3,000 ↓ ↓ Every Every 2 Every 2 Every 4 Every

sheets/day Month Weeks Months Months Year
Schedule
Every Day
Less than 2.500 Every Every Month Every 3 Every 6 Every 2
sheets/day Pre- Post- Week Months Months Years
operational operational
Check Check
Total Number of Sheets – – – – 30,000 90,000 180,000 720,000

Processed
Auto Film Carrier

Clean
SP-500 NC100AR
LED Board Cover Clean
Process/
Control Strip
Check
Process/
Upkeep Print
Check
Inspect/
Filter for FRSS10
Replace
Waste Solution Collect
Crossover Racks Wash
Middle Guide/Upper
Part of the P1/P2/
Wash
PS1 Processing
Racks
Dryer Entrance
Wash
Rack
Back Printing Unit
Replace
Ink Ribbon
Printer Section Air
Clean
Filter
Power Supply/
Electrical
Clean
Equipment Section
LP-5000 Air Filters
Control Section Air
Clean
Filter
Processing Solution
Cooling Fan Air Clean
Filter
Dryer Section Air
Clean
Filter
P1/P2/PS3
Replace
Circulation Filter
Processing Racks Wash
Auto-washing
Clean
Nozzles
Sorter Tray Clean
Paper Feed Section
Rollers/Guide Clean
Plates
Dryer Rack Mesh
Clean
Belt
Dryer Exit Section
Rollers/Guide Clean
Plates
2-2
2.1 Maintenance Schedule
More than 3,000 ↓ ↓ Every 2 Every Every Every 2 Every 6

sheets/day Weeks Week Month Months Months
2.500 to 3,000 Every Every 2 Every 2 Every 4 Every
Schedule
sheets/day ↓ ↓ Month Weeks Months Months Year 2
Every Day
Less than 2.500 Every Every Month Every 3 Every 6 Every 2
sheets/day Pre- Post- Week Months Months Years
operational operational
Check Check
Total Number of Sheets – – – – 30,000 90,000 180,000 720,000

Processed
Winding Section/
Clean
SP-500 Diffusion Box
Air Filter Clean Replace
Calibrator White
Clean
Board
G Laser Optimal
Calibrate
Temperature Setup
PS Processing
Replace
LP-5000 Solutions
PS1/PS2 Circulation
Replace
Filter
Paper Magazine
Rollers/Inside of the Clean (at the time of paper end)
Magazine
2-3
2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table
Every 2 Every 3 Every 6 Every 1 and a

3,000 sheets/day
Months Months Months Year Half Years
Every 4 Every 6 Every Every 2 2 and a

Schedule 2,500 to 3,000 sheets/day
Months Months Year Years Half Years As
Refer to
Needed
Every 6 Every Every 2 Every 3 Every 4
Less than 2,500 sheets/day
Months Year Years Years Years
Total Number of Sheets Processed 180,000 360,000 720,000 1,080,000 1,440,000

Lens Dustproof Glass Clean Subsection 2.3.1
Subsection 2.3.2
SP-500 Clean/ for clean
Plug-in Connector
Replace Subsection 6.4.4
for replace
P1R, P2RA, P2RB Pump
Inspect Subsection 5.11.1
Output/Leaks
Inspect
PSR Pump Output/Leaks Subsection 5.11.1
Calibrate
Crossover Rack Auto
Washing Nozzles
Dryer Entrance Squeegee
Rack Auto Washing Nozzle
Processing Solution Level
Clean Subsection 2.3.4
Sensors
Replenisher Level Sensors Clean Subsection 2.3.5
Magazine Rollers Inspect Subsection 5.10.1
Subsection 2.3.6
for inspection
Subsection 9.1.8
for upper cutter
Cutters Inspect Replace
replacement
Subsection 9.1.9
for lower cutter
replacement
Subsection 2.3.7
for inspection
Back Printing Head Inspect Replace
Subsection 9.2.19
LP-5000 for replacement
Laser Optical Unit Air Filter Replace Subsection 10.2.1
Processing Rack Helical
Grease Subsection 2.3.8
Drive Gear
Circulation Pumps Inspect Subsection 2.3.9
Processing Solution
Heaters
Waste Solution Level
Sensor
Processing Solution Inspect
Subsection 5.11.4
Temperature Sensors Calibrate
Solution Hoses/Clamps Inspect Subsection 2.3.12
Inspect
Processor Drive Chain Subsection 2.3.13
Grease
Subsection 14.2.3
for valve
PSR Pump Bellows/Valves Replace
Subsection 14.2.4
for bellows
PS Tank Separate Plate
Replace Subsection 12.6.1
Blades/Seals
PSR Level Sensor Inspect Subsection 2.3.14
Dryer Mesh Belt Inspect Subsection 2.3.15
2-4
2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table
Every 2 Every 3 Every 6 Every 1 and a

3,000 sheets/day
Months Months Months Year Half Years
Every 4 Every 6 Every Every 2 2 and a

Schedule 2,500 to 3,000 sheets/day
Months Months Year Years Half Years As
Refer to
2
Needed
Every 6 Every Every 2 Every 3 Every 4
Less than 2,500 sheets/day
Months Year Years Years Years
Total Number of Sheets Processed 180,000 360,000 720,000 1,080,000 1,440,000

Back Printing/Registration
Unit Feed Rollers
Sub-scanning Unit Large
Rubber Belt
Sub-scanning Unit Small
Rubber Belt
Sub-scanning Unit Feed
Rollers
Sub-scanning Unit Pulley Clean Subsection 2.3.17/18
LP-5000 Sub-scanning Exit Unit
Feed Rollers
Printer Exit Unit Feed
Rollers
Back Printing/Registration
Unit Nip Release System
Sub-scanning Exit Unit Nip
Release System
Cutter Entrance/Guide/
Back Printer Head Section
2-5
2.3 Maintenance and Inspection Procedures
2.3.1 Lens Dustproof Glass Cleaning
1. Remove the left side cover Access Cover Screw

(see Subsection 7.1.1).
2. Remove the screw and then the dustproof glass

access cover.
R3-067
3. Loosen the screw and remove the dustproof glass Dustproof Glass Holder
holder.
Screw (Loosen)
R3-068
4. Wipe the dustproof glass surface clean using a Dustproof Glass

lens cleaning cloth. Use a lens cleaning fluid if it is
available.
R3-069
5. Reinstall the removed parts.
2-6
2.3.2 Plug-in Connector Cleaning
1. Remove the carrier.

2
2. Remove dirt and dust off the plug-in connector
using a cotton swab with long shank.
3. Blow off any dirt or dust from the plug-in

connector using the blower brush.
NOTE: The plug-in connector can be cleaned after

removing it (see Subsection 7.3.4).
Plug-in Connector Cotton Swab

R3-063
2.3.3 Crossover Rack/Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack Auto Washing

Nozzle Inspection
1. Remove the processor cover (Large).
2. Remove the No.1 to No.3 crossover and dryer Auto Washing Nozzle
entrance squeegee racks.
3. Check the auto washing nozzles for clogging and

clean them using a toothbrush if necessary.
Toothbrush
R3-128
Toothbrush
Auto Washing
Nozzle
R3-129
2-7
2.3.4 Processing Solution Level Sensor Cleaning
2. Remove the screw and then the solution level

sensor.
Screw Solution Level Sensor

R3-194
3. Wipe each processing solution level sensor Solution Level Sensor

carefully with a cloth moistened with water, to
remove any dirt.
R3-195
2.3.5 Replenisher Level Sensor Cleaning
1. Remove the sensor (see Subsection 14.2.7).
2. Wipe each replenisher level sensor carefully with

a cloth moistened with water, to remove any dirt.
Replenisher Level Sensor

R3-249
2-8
2.3.6 Cutter Inspection
1. Check the edges of prints. If they are rough, 2

replace the cutter unit with a new one (See
Subsection 9.1.8 for the upper cutter or 9.1.9 for the
lower one).
2.3.7 Back Printing Head Inspection
1. Check the back printing of prints. If it is abnormal,

replace the ink ribbon cassette with a new one
and check the back printing again.
2. If the back printing is still abnormal, replace the

back printing head (see Subsection 9.2.19).
2.3.8 Processing Rack Helical Drive Gear Lubrication
1. Remove the crossover racks.
2. Wipe grease off the helical drive gears of each

rack using cotton swabs.
GREASE
3. Apply recommended grease to the helical drive

gears.
Recommended Grease: Minilab Grease

(P/N: 891G02003)
NOTE: • Amount of grease for each rack is

approximately five times of matchstick end.
• Apply grease evenly to each gear and turn the
drive sprocket back and forth several times.
Rack Drive Gears (12)

4. Reinstall the crossover racks.
L2-578
2-9
2.3.9 Circulation Pump Inspection
1. Remove the processor front cover (see Subsection

13.1.1).
2. Turn ON the main power supply and the built-in

circuit breaker, then press the START switch to
start up the system.
1) Go to the second page of Menu 0642

“Processor I/O Check”.
3. Click the [ON] - [OFF] buttons for the PU700 to

PU705 circulation pumps then check that the
pumps are operating normally.
2.3.10 Processing Solution Heater Inspection
1. Start up the system and open Menu 4 “Processing

Solution Temperature Check” screen in the pre-
operational checks.
2. Check that the temperatures increase normally.
3. If a temperature increases slowly or does not rise,

either the circulation filter is clogged or the safety
thermostat or heater is malfunctioning.
2-10
2.3.11 Waste Solution Level Sensor Cleaning
1. Remove the processor rear cover (see Subsection Waste Solution Level Sensor
2
12.7.2).
2. Remove the waste solution tank cap.
3. Wipe the waste solution level sensor carefully with

a cloth moistened with water, to remove any dirt.
Waste Solution Tank Cap

R3-200
2.3.12 Solution Hose and Clamp Inspection
1. Remove the processor front cover

2. Check the processor bottom pan for any sign of

solution leakage.
3. Check the solution circulation system and

replenisher system for:
1) Any sign of solution leakage at each joint.
2) Loose hose clamps.
3) Collapsed, bent or cracked hoses.
4. If necessary, repair or replace parts.
5. Reinstall the removed covers.
2-11
2.3.13 Processor Drive Chain Lubrication
1. Remove all crossover racks. Chain GREASE
2. Wipe grease off the drive chain and sprockets.
3. Apply a sufficient amount of recommended

grease to the drive chain.
Recommended Grease: Minilab Grease
(P/N: 891G02003)
R3-197
4. Reinstall the crossover racks.
2.3.14 PSR Level Sensor Inspection
1. Open the Menu 0624 “Processor Input Check”

screen.
2. Remove the processor rear cover (see Subsection

12.7.2).
3. The PSR level sensor is normal if its level

matches the screen display. PSR Upper
Level Sensor
PSR Lower Level Sensor

R3-199
4. Reinstall the processor rear cover.
2-12
2.3.15 Dryer Rack Mesh Belt Inspection
1. Open the dryer rack. Dryer Rack Mesh Belt

2
2. Check the mesh belt for damage or fouling by
turning it by hand.
• Replace the mesh belt if it is damaged.

• Clean the mesh belt if it is fouling.
3. Close the dryer rack.

R3-250
2.3.16 Back Printing/Registration Unit Feed Rollers Cleaning
1. Remove the back printing/registration unit (see Feed Rollers

Subsection 9.2.1).
2. Loosen the screw and open the back printing unit.
3. Wipe the feed and nip rollers clean with a cloth

moistened with water while turning the knob.
Knob Screw Back Printing Unit

VR3-562
Nip Rollers
4. Close the back printing unit and tighten the screw.

Knob
VR3-563
2-13
2.3.17 Sub-scanning Unit Large Rubber Belt Inspection/Pulley

Cleaning
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit large rubber belt

2. Check the rubber belt for damage or dirt. Replace

or clean the belt if necessary.
Large Rubber Belt

VR3-564
3. Wipe the pulley surfaces clean with a cloth

moistened with alcohol solution (mixture of an
equal amount of alcohol and water).
Pulleys
VR3-568
2-14
2.3.18 Sub-scanning Unit Small Rubber Belt Inspection/Pulley

Cleaning
2
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit small rubber belt Pulleys
2. Check the rubber belt for damage or dirt. Replace

or clean the belt if necessary.
3. Wipe the pulley surfaces clean with a cloth

moistened with alcohol solution (mixture of an
equal amount of alcohol and water).
Small Rubber Belt

VR3-565
2.3.19 Sub-scanning Unit Feed Roller Cleaning
Removal M651
Connector
Screw
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit JD650
(see Subsection 10.3.1). Cover 1 Connector
Cover 2
2. Remove the screw and then cover 1. Clamps (3)
3. Remove the screw and then cover 2.
4. Open the harness clamps.
5. Disconnect the connectors.
6. Remove the screws and then the lower bracket.

Lower Bracket Screws (4) M650 Connector
VR3-329
2-15
7. Wipe the lower nip rollers clean with a cloth Lower Nip Rollers
moistened with water while turning the knob.
8. Reinstall the lower bracket.
Knob
VR3-566
9. Set the nip rollers and wipe the feed rollers clean Feed Rollers
with a cloth moistened with water while turning the
knob.
Knob
VR3-567
10. Wipe the scanning rollers clean with a cotton Paper

swab moistened with water while feeding a sheet
of paper to turn them.
Cotton Swab
Scanning Rollers
R3-457
2-16
2.3.20 Sub-scanning Exit Unit Feed Roller Cleaning
1. Remove the Sub-scanning Exit Unit

2
Nip Rollers

moistened with water.
VR3-569
Feed Rollers
VR3-570
2.3.21 Printer Exit Unit Feed Roller Cleaning
1. Remove the printer exit unit

(see Subsection 11.2.1). Nip Rollers

moistened with water.
Feed Rollers
VR3-571
2-17
2.3.22 Back Printing/Registration Unit Nip Release System

Inspection
1. Remove the back printing/registration unit Nip Release Solenoids (3)

2. Check the three nip release solenoids for smooth

operation by moving them by hand.
VR3-572
2.3.23 Sub-scanning Exit Unit Nip Release System Inspection
1. Remove the sub-scanning exit unit Nip Release Solenoids (3)

2. Check the three nip release solenoids for smooth

operation by moving them by hand.
VR3-573
2-18
2.3.24 Cutter Entrance/Guide/Back Printer Head Section Cleaning
1. Open the magazine door and remove the upper

2
Back Printer Head Area
and lower magazines.
2. Remove the left side cover (see Subsection 8.4.1).
3. Remove dust and paper powder off from the back

printer head area and guides using the vacuum
cleaner.
Vacuum Cleaner
R3-493
4. Remove dust and paper powder off from the Upper Cutter Entrance Section
upper cutter entrance section using the vacuum
cleaner.
Vacuum Cleaner
R3-491
5. Remove dust and paper powder off from the lower Lower Cutter
cutter entrance section using the vacuum cleaner. Entrance Section
6. Reinstall the left side cover, upper and lower

magazines.
Vacuum Cleaner
R3-492
2-19
3. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS
3.1 Error Indication Outline.......................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Message Number..................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Message Icon ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 X-#### Actions......................................................................................................... 3-2
3
3.2 Messages and Actions ........................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Trouble Shooting ................................................................................ 3-100

3.3.1 Film Carrier .......................................................................................................... 3-100
3.3.2 CTL25 Circuit Board............................................................................................ 3-101
3.3.3 Replenisher Cartridge Box Malfunction ............................................................ 3-102
3.3.4 Processing Solution Temperature Abnormality ............................................... 3-104
3.3.5 Dryer Temperature Abnormality ........................................................................ 3-107
3.3.6 Processing Solution Tank Level Lowering ....................................................... 3-110
3.3.7 Replenisher Pump Diagnostics.......................................................................... 3-111
3.3.8 Rack Auto Cleaning System Diagnostics ......................................................... 3-112
3.3.9 P1R Stirring Valve/Replenisher Cartridge Washing Valve Diagnostics ......... 3-113
3.3.10 Replenisher Level Sensor Diagnostics ............................................................. 3-114
3.3.11 Return Action after Replenishment System Error............................................ 3-114
3.3.12 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Malfunction .................................................... 3-115
3.3.13 Checking Network Connection/Environment ................................................... 3-116
3.3.14 Checking the Status of the DIC2 2 ...................................................................... 3-116
3.3.15 Checking the Status of Installed Software........................................................ 3-116
3.3.16 Checking the Processing Status of the Job/Order........................................... 3-116
3-1
3.1 Error Indication Outline
3.1.1 Message Number

The messages are identified by the following four codes.
Symbol Error
E Trouble (Error requires action of the service representative.)
W Mismatching of condition (Error can be corrected by the operator.)
I Information
X Software trouble
Number Error
14XX to 19XX Operation system (common)
2XXX Printer processor/CD-R writing
31XX PNS (S2)
42XX Image processing section
43XX to 49XX Scanner system
5XXX IL (common)
6XXX Self diagnosis
7XXX Film carrier
-SP-XXXX Scanner SP-500
-LP-XXXX Printer processor LP-5000
-P0-XXXX Operation system (common)
-P1-XXXX Media input/P to P (S2)
-P6-XXXX CD-R writing (S2)
-Q0-XXXX WFA/OM (common)
3.1.2 Message Icon

Icon Error
Errors with code “E” (Take measures after turning OFF the power supply.)
Errors with code “E”, “W” or “X” (Error can be recovered.)
For code “I” (Information)
3.1.3 X-#### Actions

X-#### errors (software error)
Take the following actions.
1. Write down the error number.

2. Restart the system.
3. Reinstall the software if the problem persists.
4. Create a report in the specified format.
3-2
3.2 Messages and Actions
No. Message Factor Actions
W-Q0-1001 Server/DIC2 was not found. – Restart the system. If problem
persists, the operating environment is
Check that the server/DIC2 is abnormal. Check the status of the
switched on. DICII and installed software referring
to Subsections 3.3.14 and 3.3.15.
Once the server/DIC2 has
started, press [Retry]. To
3
continue without the server/
DIC2, press [S-Alone].
E-Q1-1001 Software error occurred. (Cause of the error message) Billing information setting is
Billing process failed. abnormal. Check whether or not the
Billing process was canceled. product information is set correctly on
PLMaker.
Check if product information is
properly set.
I-Q0-1002 This device is started up in the – To connect to the server/DICII, select
stand-alone mode. “Start connection to the Imaging
Controller” in the “Setup and
To connect to the server/DIC2, Maintenance” screen.
select “Start connection to the
Imaging Controller” in the “Setup
and Maintenance” screen.
E-Q1-1002 Software error occurred. (Cause of the error message) Restart the system. If the problem
Abnormal operating environment persists, the operating environment is
Billing information cannot be abnormal. Check the status of the
obtained. Starting of billing DIC2 and installed software referring
program was cancelled. to Subsections 3.3.14 and 3.3.15.
Consult your technical

representative.

representative.
Installation path acquisition error persists, the operating environment is
obtained. DIC2 and installed software referring
representative.

representative.
W-P1-1008 Not able to recognize the media. Reading of device selected in media
selection dialog failed.
Cancel the order, then register it (Causes of the error message)
again. 1. Media not inserted. 1. Insert media.
2. Media loading time lag 2. Click [Retry] button.
3. Incorrect media drive 3. Select correct device.
3-3

W-Q0-1010 Server/DIC2 was not found. – 1. Check that the power of server/
DICII is turned on.
Check that the server/DIC2 is 2. When the server/DICII has started,
switched on. press the [Retry] button.To
continue without the server/ DICII,
Once the server/DIC2 has press the [Stand-Alone] button.
started, press [Retry]. To
continue without the server/
DIC2, press [Stand-Alone].

representative.

representative.

representative.

representative.
Sales information acquisition error persists, the operating environment is
Sales information cannot be abnormal. Check the status of the
obtained. DIC2 and installed software referring
representative.
E-Q1-1018 Software error occurred. (Cause of the error message) Billing information setting is
Product identification failed. abnormal. Check whether or not the
Product was not found. product information is set correctly on
PLMaker.
Check if product information is
properly set.
3-4

W-Q0-1020 Paper (width and paper type) and – 1. Exchange the magazine after the
magazines are mismatched to display, enabling exchange,
the next order. appears.
(Width:%NUM%mm 2. Press the [Output] button to output
Surface:%SURFACE%) forcibly.
Exchange the magazine after the

3
display to be able to exchange
the magazine afterwards
appears.
Press [Output] output forcibly.

E-Q1-1020 Software error occurred. (Cause of the error message) Set the discount keys again.
Total discount key setting acquisition
Billing information cannot be failure
obtained.

representative.
E-Q0-1021 Starting-up of server/DIC2 – 1. Press the [Emergency Stop]
failed. button to shut down the system.
2. Check the network environment,
Press [Emergency Stop] button restart the system. If problem
to shut down the system. persists, the operating
environment is abnormal. Check
Check the network environment, the status of the DICII and
then restart the sytem.If this error installed software referring to
persists, consult your technical Subsections 3.3.14 and 3.3.15.
representative.
E-Q1-1026 Number of prints is not set. (Cause of the error message) Billing information setting is
Printer error abnormal. Check the receipt setting
Check the billing setting in the in the “Billing Environment Setup”
“Billing Environment Setup” screen.
screen.
E-Q1-1027 Output destination is not selected (Cause of the error message) Check the output destination in the
yet, so the billing was not Printer error “Billing Environment Setup” screen.
outputted.
Select the [Printer] on the “Billing

Environment Setup” screen.
To output it, the billing must be

performed again on the “Order
Manager” screen.
Setting information acquisition error persists, the operating environment is
Setting information cannot be abnormal. Check the status of the
program was canceled. to Subsections 3.3.14 and 3.3.15.

representative.
E-Q1-1029 Communication error to server/ (Cause of the error message) Check the network connection of the
DIC2 occurred. Communication error between the DIC2 referring to Subsection 3.3.13.
server and DIC2
W-P1-1739 Both index print and lens This message shows that lens –
correction can not perform when correction can not perform when the
the free cropping is selected. free cropping is selected.
W-P0-1751 XXXXXXXXX This message appears when the real- –
time display cannot be started.
Couldn’t start scan. Eject film.
XXXXXXXXXX
3-5

W-P0-1836 The carrier or mask removed, so This message appears when the
the custom setting information is carrier or mask is removed while the
not displayed correctly. custom setting function dialog is
displayed on LUKE.
Install the carrier or mask, and (Cause of the error message)
then try again. 1. Removed carrier. 1. Reinstallation the carrier.
2. Removed mask. 2. Reinstallation the mask.
W-P0-1837 Do not change the carrier in the The carrier was changed from the Reinstallation the carrier.
middle of ordering. original one during the re-order on
LUKE.
Put it back to the original position.
I-P0-1839 135 reversal film was selected. Reversal was selected while 135 AFC Remove the auto film carrier, set the
was installed on LUKE. dust removal brush lever to the [R]
Remove the auto film carrier, set position then clean the feed lane and
the dust removal brush lever to winding section.
the [R] position then clean the When reversal film processing is
feed lane and winding section. completed, return the dust removal
brush lever to the [N] position.
When reversal film processing is
completed, return the dust
removal brush lever to the [N]
position.
W-P1-1961 The film holder was not set to the Film holder is not installed in MFC. Set the film holder and then perform
manual film carrier. the pre-scan.
Set the film holder and then

perform the pre-scan.
W-P1-1962 Print size differ from paper width The print size and magazine paper Press [OK] to change magazine, or
of the installed magazine. width mismatched.(Kariba) change print size.
Press [Output] to output forcibly.
Press [OK] to change magazine,
or change print size.

W-P1-1963 Surface differ from surface of the Selected surface and that of Press [OK], then replace magazine.
installed magazine. magazine mismatched.(Kariba) Press [Output] to output forcibly.
Press [OK], then replace

magazine.

W-P1-1964 Print size and surface differ from Selected paper width or surface and Press [OK], then replace magazine.
paper width and surface of the that of magazine Press [Output] to output forcibly.
installed magazine. mismatched.(Kariba)

magazine.

W-P1-1965 Print size for template differ from This error message appears when Press [OK], then replace magazine.
paper width of the installed the template width does not match Press [Output] to output forcibly.
magazine. the paper width of the selected
magazine.(Kariba)
magazine.

W-P1-1966 Surface for template differ from Selected surface for template and Press [OK], then replace magazine.
surface of the installed magazine. that of magazine Press [Output] to output forcibly.
mismatched.(Kariba)
magazine.
3-6

W-P1-1967 Print size and surface for Selected paper width or surface for Press [OK], then replace magazine.
template differ from paper width template and that of magazine Press [Output] to output forcibly.
and surface of the installed mismatched.(Kariba)
magazine.

magazine.
3
W-P1-1968 Print size (XXXXmm) differ from Print size differ from paper width of Replace the magazine and press
paper width of the designated the designated magazine.(Can Retry) [Retry] to retry processing.Press
magazine. [Output] to continue processing
forcibly.
Replace the magazine and press Press [Cancel] to cancel the
[Retry] to retry processing.Press order.The order needs to be reissued
[Output] to continue processing when the order was cancelled.
forcibly.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the

order.The order needs to be
reissued when the order was
cancelled.
W-P1-1969 Surface (XXXX) differ from Surface differ from surface of the Replace the magazine and press
surface of the designated designated magazine.(Can Retry) [Retry] to retry processing.Press
magazine. [Output] to continue processing
forcibly.
forcibly.

cancelled.
W-P1-1970 Print size (XXXXmm) and surface Print size (XXXXmm) and surface Replace the magazine and press
(XXXX) differ from paper width (XXXX) differ from paper width and [Retry] to retry processing.Press
and surface of the designated surface of the designated [Output] to continue processing
magazine. magazine.(Can Retry) forcibly.
Replace the magazine and press order.The order needs to be reissued
[Retry] to retry processing.Press when the order was cancelled.
[Output] to continue processing
forcibly.

cancelled.
W-P1-1971 Print size (XXXXmm * XXXXmm) Print size (XXXXmm * XXXXmm) of Replace the magazine and press
of the index format differ from the index format differ from paper [Retry] to retry processing.Press
paper width of the designated width of the designated [Output] to continue processing
forcibly.

cancelled.
3-7

W-P1-1972 Surface (XXXX) of the index Surface (XXXX) of the index format Replace the magazine and press
format differ from surface of the differ from surface of the designated [Retry] to retry processing.Press
designated magazine. magazine.(Can Retry) [Output] to continue processing
forcibly.
forcibly.

cancelled.
W-P1-1973 Print size (XXXXmm * XXXXmm) Print size (XXXXmm * XXXXmm) and Replace the magazine and press
and surface (XXXX) of the index surface (XXXX) of the index format [Retry] to retry processing.Press
format differ from the designated differ from the designated [Output] to continue processing
forcibly.

cancelled.
of the large index format differ the large index format differ from [Retry] to retry processing.Press
from paper width of the paper width of the designated [Output] to continue processing
designated magazine. magazine.(Can Retry) forcibly.
forcibly.

cancelled.
W-P1-1975 Surface (XXXX) of the large index Surface (XXXX) of the large index Replace the magazine and press
format differ from surface of the format differ from surface of the [Retry] to retry processing.Press
designated magazine. designated magazine.(Can Retry) [Output] to continue processing
forcibly.
forcibly.

cancelled.
3-8

and surface (XXXX) of the large surface (XXXX) of the large index [Retry] to retry processing.Press
index format differ from the format differ from the designated [Output] to continue processing
Replace the magazine and press
[Retry] to retry processing.Press
order.The order needs to be reissued
when the order was cancelled.
3
forcibly.

cancelled.
of Multi-Image print differ from Multi-Image print differ from paper [Retry] to retry processing.Press
paper width of the designated width of the designated [Output] to continue processing
forcibly.

cancelled.
W-P1-1978 Surface (XXXX) of Multi-Image Surface (XXXX) of Multi-Image print Replace the magazine and press
print differ from surface of the differ from surface of the designated [Retry] to retry processing.Press
designated magazine. magazine.(Can Retry) [Output] to continue processing
forcibly.
forcibly.

cancelled.
and surface (XXXX) of Multi- surface (XXXX) of Multi-Image print [Retry] to retry processing.Press
Image print differ from the differ from the designated [Output] to continue processing
forcibly.

cancelled.
W-Q0-2001 The check and order for an order – To try to print it again, reissue the
was canceled. order in the “Order Manager” screen.
To try to print it again, reissue the

order in the “Order Manager”
screen.
I-P6-2101 Cancel the job running? – –
3-9

E-LP-2102 Communication error occurred No response within a specified time
between scanner and printer. after command is issued.
(Causes of the error message)
(Command time-out) 1. Poorly connected or broken LAN 1. Connect the cable correctly, or
(interface) cable repair or replace it.
Consult your technical 2. Abnormal system software 2. Restart the system software.
representative.
I-P6-2102 Current order was deleted. – –
I-P6-2103 Deleting the current order... – Wait until it ends.
Please wait a moment.

W-P6-2105 Failed to copy image. – To read it again, select the [Retry]
button.
To read it again, select [Retry].
I-P6-2106 Copying user’s CD-R is – –
completed.
W-P6-2111 Index image creation failed. – To create it again, select the [Retry]
button.
To create it again, select [Retry].
W-LP-2112 Printer initialization failed. Printer initializing is failed according Connect the LAN cable correctly
to turning OFF printer power supply between the PC and the printer then
Printer may not be started up or or disconnecting LAN cable. restart the PC and printer.
LAN cable disconnected. (Causes of the error message)
1. Disconnected LAN cable
2. Printer power supply turned OFF
3. Communication error
W-P6-2112 Either the user’s CD-R was not – To create it again, select the [Retry]
inserted or this is not a CD-R for button.
F-DI service.
To create it again, select [Retry].

E-LP-2113 Transferring of image from Image transfer timeout (10 sec.) Connect the LAN cable correctly
scanner to printer failed. (Cause of the error message) between the PC and the printer then
Sending of image to printer failed. restart the PC and printer.
representative.
E-LP-2114 Heap memory allocation error. Memory reservation failed. Restart the scanner and printer.
Restart the system. If the 1. Scanner initialization failed
problem persists, consult your 2. Communication with printer failed.
technical representative.
E-LP-2115 A communication error occurred Mount definition request retry over Connect the LAN cable correctly
between the scanner and printer. (Cause of the error message) between the PC and the printer then
Communication with printer failed. restart the PC and printer.
(Retry over)

representative.
W-P6-2115 CD-R is not inserted, or – To read it again, select the [Retry]
information cannot be read from button.
it.
To read again, select [Retry].

E-LP-2116 A communication error occurred Image reception preparation request Connect the LAN cable correctly
between the scanner and printer. retry over between the PC and the printer then
(Cause of the error message) restart the PC and printer.
(Retry over) Communication to printer failed.

representative.
3-10

W-P6-2116 CD-R is not inserted, or the file is – Check if the CD-R is correct one, if it
damaged in all sessions. is incorrect.
This kind of CD-R nor

FUJICOLOR CD cannot be
recovered.
3
Terminating the recovery
process.
E-LP-2117 An error occurred while installing Automatic update of printer failed.
program into printer. (Causes of the error message)
1. Communication error 1. Connect the LAN cable correctly
Restart the scanner and printer. If between the PC and the printer
the problem persists, consult your then restart the PC and printer.
technical representative. 2. Faulty printer 2. Adjust or repair the printer.
3. Data succession process failed. 3. Set up a correct environment.
I-P6-2117 Copying user’s damaged CD-R is – –
completed.
W-LP-2118 Older version of program is Former version printer program is Select “Yes” or “No” in the dialog.
installed in printer. tried to install.
Downgrade printer software?

W-P6-2118 All image files are gone. – Wait until it ends.
Finishing process.
E-LP-2119 Printer type does not match. Mismatch of printer type is detected. Check the printer type.
I-LP-2120 Program Installation into printer is CBF and LUT are installing by Wait until installation is completed.
in progress. (Max. 10 min.) automatic update.
(Cause of the error message)
Firmware/image data is being
installed.
I-P6-2120 If this image is deleted, there will – Click the [OK] button to delete the
be no images left in this order. sort.
Ok to delete this order number:

%FREE_PARAM%?
I-P6-2121 If this image is deleted, there will – Click the [OK] button to delete the
be no images left within the sort. sort.
Ok to delete this sort number:

%FREE_PARAM%?
W-LP-2122 Printer serial number not Serial number does not obtain during Enter the serial number in the
specified. automatic update. maintenance menu and restart the
(Cause of the error message) scanner and printer.
Perform serial number setting in Nonexistent serial number
setup and maintenance menu.
I-P6-2122 This image will be deleted. – Click the [OK] button to delete the
sort.
Ok to delete this image:
%FREE_PARAM%?
W-LP-2123 A communication error occurred Printer power supply is OFF or LAN Connect the LAN cable correctly
between the scanner and printer. cable is disconnected. between the PC and the printer then
(Causes of the error message) restart the PC and printer.
Printer may not be started up or 1. Disconnected LAN cable
LAN cable disconnected. 2. Printer power supply turned OFF
3. Communication error
W-LP-2124 Printing cannot be performed Printing operation is performed when Wait until printer initialization is
because printer initialization is initialization of the printer is not completed and then try again.
not completed. completed.
Wait until printer initialization is

completed and then try again.
3-11

I-P6-2124 If this sort is deleted, there will be – Click the [OK] button to delete the
no sorts left in this order. sort.

%FREE_PARAM%?
W-LP-2125 Post-operational check has Printing operation is performed Restart the scanner and printer.
already been performed in printer during post-operational check.
or the power is turned OFF. (Causes of the error message)
1. Post-operational check has
Restart the scanner and printer. already been performed.
2. Printer power supply turned OFF
after post-operational check
I-P6-2125 This order will be deleted. – Click the [OK] button to delete the
sort.
%FREE_PARAM%?
E-LP-2126 Version information of the Version obtaining of program to be Set up environment correctly.
program to be installed cannot be installed failed.
acquired. (Cause of the error message)
Firmware/image data version
obtaining failed.
W-LP-2127 Installation cannot be started Automatic update is requested during
because printer is in operation. printing or maintenance in operation.
Wait for a while and then try 1. Printing in progress 1. Retry after printing is completed.
again. 2. Printer maintenance in progress 2. Retry after printer maintenance is
completed.
3. Software installation in progress 3. Retry after installation is
completed.
W-LP-2128 Installation is performed from Automatic update is executed from Restart the scanner after installation
another scanner. another PC when connecting to the is completed.
printer.
Restart the scanner and printer.
W-LP-2129 Installation is being executed in Printer is starting or installation from Retry after installation is completed.
printer. another PC is executing.
Wait for a while and then try

again.
E-LP-2130 An error occurred while starting Printer error occurs during starting Restart the scanner and printer.
up printer. the printer.
Restart the scanner and printer. If

the problem persists, consult your
I-LP-2131 Updating paper type data. Installation of only LUT is in operation Wait until installation is completed.
by automatic update.
Paper type update in progress.
W-P6-2131 The number entered is not a valid – Enter correct the CD-ID.
CD-ID.
Enter correct CD-ID.

W-P6-2132 The CD-ID entered is for – Enter correct the CD-ID.
incorrect CD-R type.
Enter correct CD-ID.

W-P6-2133 This order did not have a CD-ID – Click the [OK] button.
entered during Frontier scan, and
is being forced to execute.
Ok to continue work?
3-12

W-P6-2134 The value entered does not – Enter the CD-ID for the CD-R to do
match the CD-ID for the CD-R to additional write.
do additional write.
Enter the CD-ID for the CD-R to

3
W-P6-2141 Path is not entered. – Enter the correct path.
Enter path.
W-P6-2142 The following character can not – Change the folder name.
use as a folder name.(/;*?<>)
Change the folder name.

W-P6-2143 Specified directory is not exist. – Click the [OK] button.
Create?
W-P6-2144 Creating the directory has failed. Check if the drive is writable and if the
space is sufficient.
Check if the drive is writable and
if the space is sufficient.
W-P6-2145 Entered path name exceeds – Enter a path within 200byte
200byte.
Enter the path within 200byte.

W-P6-2151 Failed to write to CD-R. CD-R – Set the correct CD-R.
may not be inserted.
Prepare CD-R.
%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2152 Inserted CD-R is not for – Use a FUJICOLOR CD-R.
FUJICOLOR CD.
Prepare a FUJICOLOR CD-R.

%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2153 Wrong type of order was written. – Check it, then start writing.
Check it, then start writing.
%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2154 Wrong type of media was – Check it, then start writing.
inserted.
Check it, then start writing.

%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2155 The value entered does not – Enter the correct value.
match the CD-ID for the CD-R to
%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2156 It may be wrong type of CD-R – Use a correct type of CD-R.
was inserted.
%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2157 This CD-R does not have enough – Replace it with a CD-R for writing.
free space.
Replace to another new CD-R for

writing. %RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2158 Remained space is insufficient. – Reserve enough space, then start
writing
Reserve enough space, then
start writing.
%RETRY_MESSAGE%
3-13

W-P6-2159 This media does not have – Replace it with a new media.
enough free space.
Replace to new media.

%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2160 There is not enough disk space – Make more than 1 GB disk space
for CD-R. available for CD-R writing temporarily
in the hard drive.
Make more than 1 GB disk space
for CD-R writing temporary hard
drive. %RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2161 Processing image may be – Check the image, and then try it
corrupted. again.
%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2162 Failed to write to CD-R. – Prepare a new CD-R.
Prepare a new CD-R.

%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2163 Failed to do additional write to – Check the image and CD-R, and then
CD-R. try it again.
%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2164 Failed to verify. – Prepare a new CD-R.
Prepare a new CD-R.

%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2165 Verify for additional write to CD-R – Use a correct CD-R.
has failed.
%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2166 CD-R write succeeded, but index – Restart the system, and then try it
image creation failed. again.
W-P6-2167 Media write succeeded, but index – Restart the system, and then try it
image creation failed. again.
W-P6-2168 Failed to delete directory. – Restart the system, and then try it
%RETRY_MESSAGE% again.
W-P6-2169 Failed to write. – Restart the system, and then try it
%RETRY_MESSAGE% again.
W-P6-2170 Failed to write to Media. Media – Prepare Media.
may not be inserted.
Prepare Media.
%RETRY_MESSAGE%
W-P6-2171 If controls returns to the WFA – Click the [No] button, and then try it
screen, all operations done in the again.
Revisions screen will be
cancelled.
Continue importing?
W-LP-2201 This function cannot be started. Not equipped maintenance item Check version number for scanner
starting is requested. and printer software.
Mismatched scanner and printer
software versions
E-P6-2201 Setting for CD writing software – Check the setting for CD writing
may be incorrect. software.
Check setting for CD writing

software.
I-LP-2202 Creating condition setup print. Printing condition setup print is in Wait until printing is completed.
progress.
3-14

W-P6-2202 0 is selected for number of sets. – Register the order information.
Reregister the order information.

I-LP-2203 Measuring density of condition Density measurement of condition Wait until density measurement is
setup print. setup print is in progress. completed.
W-P6-2203 Number of images to be written is – Check the images in the media, and
3
“0”. then try it again.
This order is completed while not

written to media.
W-P6-2204 0 is selected for index of sets. – Register the order again.
Register order again.

W-LP-2205 As printer setup and During the printer/processor After quitting the maintenance mode
maintenance is in progress, the operation panel maintenance, the on the printer operation panel,
printer maintenance not started. maintenance mode has been activate the maintenance mode.
activated.
W-P6-2205 Number of sets for writing is 0. – Change the order.
No further order can be added

after this.
W-LP-2206 Printer setup and maintenance is During the printer/processor
in progress. maintenance, paper condition setup
has been attempted.
Perform the paper condition (Cause of the error message)
setup after the operation. During the printer/processor After quitting the printer/processor
maintenance, the W-LP-2507 error maintenance, perform paper
has occurred and the [Yes] button has condition setup.
been clicked.
W-P6-2206 Index cannot be created with this – Check the print size, and then try it
CD-R. again.
Make a copy of CD-R only. OK?

I-LP-2207 Paper condition setup starting. After paper end, paper condition Wait until paper condition setup has
setup has been activated. started up.
W-P6-2207 Order No is invalid. – Register the order again.
Register order again.

W-LP-2208 As the order remain, the printer (Cause of the error message)
maintenance not started. The maintenance is started when the Start the maintenance after printing
order is remained. or canceling all orders.
W-P6-2208 Disk space insufficient. – Delete unnecessary files, then try it
again.
Delete unnecessary files, then try
it again.
I-LP-2209 Initializing printer. (Causes of the error message)
The maintenance is started during Wait until printer initialization is
Please Wait. initializing the printer. completed.
W-P6-2209 Environment of software is – Check the current settings.
incomplete.
Check settings.
I-LP-2210 Printer is processing. (Cause of the error message)
The maintenance is started during Wait until processing is completed.
Please Wait. the printer is processing.
W-P6-2210 View and order process is – After this process is completed, try it
currently performed. again.
After this process is completed,

try it again.
3-15

I-LP-2211 Performing evaporation (Causes of the error message)
correction. Please Wait. The maintenance is started during Wait until the evaporation correction
performing the evaporation is completed.
correction.
W-P6-2211 Settings of media attached index – Perform the settings by the Media
are not done. Attached Index Settings Tool, then try
it again.
Perform the settings by the Media
Attached Index Settings Tool,
then try it again.
W-LP-2213 Printing not performed Print pre-check NG
due to lack of conditions. (Cause of the error message)
Printing is directed when the printer is Wait until the printer can print or
under condition that printing cannot correct error condition.
be done.
W-LP-2214 As the magazine is not loaded, (Cause of the error message)
printing not performed. Printing is directed when the Install the magazine.
magazine is not installed.
W-LP-2215 As specified magazine ID differs (Cause of the error message)
from the stored ID, printing not Mismatch of magazine ID Install the correct magazine.
performed.
W-LP-2216 Printing not performed due to the (Causes of the error message)
error occurrence. Printing is directed in error condition. Correct error condition.
I-LP-2217 The printer maintenance not Bad maintenance starting condition Clear the indicated error and try
started due to lack of conditions. starting maintenance again.
I-LP-2218 Parameter downloaded. Parameter is downloaded during Restart the system.
downloading data.
Restart the system.
W-LP-2219 Processing control strip. Condition setup is started during Wait until control strip processing is
control strip processing. completed.
Perform the paper condition
setup after the operation.
W-LP-2220 As paper end detected in Paper end of the designated paper Install roll paper in the magazine and
magazine, printing not magazine perform printing.
performed.
I-LP-2221 Data was downloaded. Loading of additional language is
completed.
W-P6-2221 There are no drives that are – Check the setting for CD writing
ready to begin writing. software.
Check setting for CD writing

software.
I-LP-2222 Data was deleted. Deleting of additional language is
completed.
W-LP-2223 Downloading of files failed. Non additional language file Put the additional language message
files in the appropriate folders and
No message file was found. retry downloading.
Check if the message file exists

in the folder.
W-LP-2224 Downloading of files failed. Writing of additional language file
failed.
Writing of FROM failed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Software error 1. Retry downloading.
Download it again. 2. Faulty GMC27 circuit board 2. Replace the GMC27 circuit board.
3-16

W-LP-2225 Downloading of files failed. Language version mismatch Check the additional language
message file version and download
Version of printer and that of the appropriate version again.
message file mismatched.
Check the version of message

file.
3
W-LP-2226 Incorrect file contents. Incorrect language ID Check of the additional language
message file language ID and
Undefined language was download the correct ID file again.
selected.
Check the message file with the

check tool.
W-LP-2227 Incorrect file contents. Incorrect character code Use a check tool to correct unsuitable
characters and retry downloading.
Unregistered special character is
used.

check tool.
W-LP-2228 Incorrect file contents. Insufficient character string Use a check tool to add a sufficient
character string and retry
Necessary characters are downloading.
insufficient.

check tool.
W-LP-2229 Incorrect file contents. Too much character string Use a check tool to delete an
unnecessary character string and
Check the message file with the retry downloading.
check tool.
W-LP-2230 Incorrect file contents. File size is zero. Check the file size and retry
downloading.
File with 0KB size exists.
Check the file size, then

download it again.
W-LP-2231 Too large file size. File size over Correct the contents to reduce file
size to less than 400 KB and retry
File size exceeds 400KB. downloading.
Be sure to use the file with the

size less than 400KB.
I-LP-2232 Printing request not accepted by The other error factor cannot be The factor of the error is indicated
printer. found at pre-check of print. separately. Clear the cause and try
starting maintenance again.
Request rejected.
I-LP-2233 Initializing printer. Print pre-check is executed during Wait until printer initialization is
initialization operation. completed.
Please Wait.
I-LP-2234 Processing in printer. Post-operational check is tried to start Wait until the processing is
when prints are remained. completed.
Please Wait.
I-LP-2235 Laser temperature adjustment Laser warming up is not completed. Wait until the exposure section laser
not completed in exposure warming up is completed.
section.
Please Wait.
3-17

E-LP-2301 Request not accepted by printer. A printing command is sent but the
Request rejected. printer/processor cannot perform
printing.
Another error has not been solved. Take appropriate corrective
measures.
E-LP-2302 Maintenance is underway in The printer/processor is in the Quit the printer/processor
printer. maintenance mode. maintenance mode.
Request cannot be accepted.
Complete maintenance in printer.

E-LP-2305 The data in the printer backup – –
memory was updated.
This message does not mean

abnormality when the software
version is updated.
For other than the version up,

consult your technical
representative.
E-LP-2306 Printer’s timer abnormal. Scanner Error occurred in reading the time
time adopted. data from timer IC at the start-up.
If problems persist, consult your 1. Abnormal system software 1. Restart system, and if problem
technical representative. persists, reinstall system software.
2. Faulty backup circuit 2. Replace the GMC27 circuit board.
3. Timer IC failure 3. Replace the GMC27 circuit board.
4. Memory failure 4. Replace the GMC27 circuit board.
I-LP-2309 Initializing printer. While initializing the printer/ –
processor, the post-operational check
Please Wait. is activated.
I-LP-2310 Printer is processing. While driving the printer/processor, –
the post-operational check is
Please Wait. activated. This message also
appears when the user attempts to
shut down the PC during automatic
version upgrading.
W-LP-2315 Communication error occurred Communication between the scanner
between scanner and Printer. and printer/processor has interrupted
more than 30 seconds.
Refer to manual for guidance. (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected or broken LAN 1. Connect the cable correctly, or
(interface) cable repair or replace it.
2. Faulty GMC27 circuit board 2. Replace GMC27 circuit board on
the printer.
E-LP-2336 GMC27 circuit board power Abnormality of analog power supply
source abnormal. on GMC27 circuit board is detected.
Consult your technical 1. Disconnected connector 1. Connect the connector correctly.
representative. 2. Broken harness 2. Repair or replace the harness.
3. 5V power not generated 3. Replace the GMC27 circuit board.
4. Faulty power supply 4. Replace the DC power supply unit.
3-18

W-LP-2401 Paper jam occurred in upper Splice sensor does not change
supply section(1). though the paper is supplied
specified length or D632 detects no
Check it. #### sheets remain. paper when paper cutting.
1. Faulty D619
2. Faulty M610
1.
2.
Replace the D619.
Replace the M610.
3
3. Broken D619-to-M610 harness 3. Repair or replace the harness.
4. Faulty magazine drive belt 4. Replace the belt.
5. Damaged magazine pulley 5. Replace the magazine pulley.
6. Faulty D632 6. Replace the D632.
W-LP-2402 Paper jam occurred in lower Splice sensor does not change
supply section(2). though the paper is supplied
specified length or D632 detects no
Check it. #### sheets remain. paper when paper cutting.
2. Faulty M620 2. Replace the M620.
4. Faulty magazine drive belt 4. Replace the belt.
5. Damaged magazine pulley 5. Replace the magazine pulley.
W-LP-2404 Paper jam occurred in cutter feed D650 does not change after elapsing
section and back printing / specified time in cutting feeding
registration section(3). (Causes of the error message)
Check it. #### sheets remain. 2. Faulty M630, M631 or M632 2. Replace the M630, M631 or M632.
3. Broken D650-to-M630/M631/M632 3. Repair or replace the harness.
harness
W-LP-2406 Paper jam occurred between D667 sensor does not change
sub-scanning section and sub- although specified time elapsed after
scanning exit section(4). D650 detects sheet.
Check it. #### sheets remain. 1. Faulty D667 1. Replace the D667.
2. Faulty M660 2. Replace the M650 or M660.
4. Faulty upstream feed up to sub- 4. Check and repair feed system.
scanning exit section
5. Worn rollers 5. Clean or replace the rollers.
6. Disconnected harness connector 6. Connect the connector securely.
W-LP-2409 Auto-rewinding of (upper) Splice sensor does not function even
magazine failed. if a specified amount of paper is
rewound.
1. Abnormal magazine 1. Load another magazine, and if
paper rewind is normally done,
replace the old magazine.
2. Slip of magazine rollers 2. Clean the magazine rollers.
3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Connect the harness correctly, or
harness between the upper repair or replace it.
magazine splice sensor (D619)
and CTL34 on the CTL27 circuit
board
magazine paper supply motor
(M610) and CTL3 on the CTL27
circuit board
5. Faulty D619 5. Replace D619.
6. Faulty M610 malfunction 6. Replace M610.
7. Faulty CTL27 circuit board 7. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
3-19

W-LP-2410 Auto-rewinding of lower Splice sensor does not function even
magazine failed. if a specified amount of paper is
rewound.
1. Abnormal magazine 1. Load another magazine, and if
paper rewind is normally done,
replace the old magazine.
2. Slip of magazine rollers 2. Clean the magazine rollers.
harness between the lower repair or replace it.
magazine splice sensor (D629)
and OPA8 on the OPA27 circuit
board
magazine paper supply motor
(M620) and OPA3 on the OPA27
circuit board
6. Faulty M620 6. Replace M620.
7. Faulty OPA27 circuit board 7. Replace the OPA27 circuit board.
W-LP-2412 Cutter operation(M600/D601) Home position sensor does not
abnormal. function during operation.
When a paper jam occurs in the 1. Jammed paper remains. 1. Remove paper.
printer section, this problem is 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the harness correctly, or
solved by removing the paper. harness between the upper cutter repair or replace it.
open (home) position sensor
Shut down scanner with (D601) and CTL34 on the CTL27
emergency button and restart it. circuit board
If problems persist, consult your 3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Connect the harness correctly, or
technical representative harness between the upper cutter repair or replace it.
drive motor (M600) and CTL5 on
the CTL27 circuit board
4. Faulty D601 4. Replace the cutter unit.
5. Faulty M600 5. Replace the cutter unit.
W-LP-2413 Lower cutter operation(M601/ Home position sensor does not
D603) abnormal. function during operation.
When a paper jam occurs in the 1. Jammed paper remains. 1. Remove paper.
printer section, this problem is 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the harness correctly, or
solved by removing the paper. harness between the lower cutter repair or replace it.
open (home) position sensor
Shut down scanner with (D603) and OPA7 on the OPA27
emergency button and restart it. circuit board
If problems persist, consult your 3. Poorly connected or broken 3. Connect the harness correctly, or
technical representative harness between the lower cutter repair or replace it.
drive motor (M601) and OPA4 on
the OPA27 circuit board
4. Faulty D603 4. Replace the cutter unit.
5. Faulty M601 5. Replace the cutter unit.
3-20

W-LP-2414 Initializing of registration section
Home position sensor does not
tilt (M641/D641) failed. function during operation.
Open and close magazine door. If 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly, or
problems persist, consult your harness between the tilt home repair or replace it.
technical representative. position sensor (for M641) (D641)
3
board
harness between the registration repair or replace it.
tilt motor (M641) and CTL7 on the
CTL27 circuit board
5. Faulty tilt mechanism 5. Replace the registration unit.
W-LP-2416 Initializing of nip in exposure Exposure soft nip home position is
section (M651/D651) failed. not detected (Sensor did not function
even if the soft nip motor is driven
Open and close magazine door. If specified pulses).
problems persist, consult your (Causes of the error message)
technical representative. 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly, or
harness between the soft nip repair or replace it.
home position sensor (for M651)
(D651) and CTL32 on the CTL27
circuit board
motor (M651) and CTL4 on the
CTL27 circuit board
5. Faulty exposure nip mechanism 5. Replace the sub scanning unit.
W-LP-2421 Paper end processing (of upper Paper end sensor detects paper end.
magazine) completed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Paper end 1. Load paper. If paper remains,
Replace magazine. perform 2 to 4.
If not replaced, press [Print Stop] harness between the upper repair or replace it.
to cancel print instruction. magazine paper end sensor
(D616) and CTL35 on CTL27
circuit board
W-LP-2422 Paper end processing of lower Paper end sensor detects paper end.
magazine completed. (Causes of the error message)
Replace magazine. perform 2 to 4.
If not replaced, press [Print Stop] harness between the lower repair or replace it.
to cancel print instruction. magazine paper end sensor
(D626) and OPA8 on OPA27 circuit
board
3-21

W-LP-2423 Unknown magazine ID is set. Different magazine ID from the last
magazine’s is used when replacing
Set correct magazine ID. magazine at paper end.
1. Paper magazine has been 1. Change print size, or use the
replaced. previous magazine.
2. ID chip has been replaced. 2. Change magazine registration
data.
magazine ID sensor (D610 to
D613) and CTL35 on the CTL27
circuit board
D623) and OPA8 on the OPA27
circuit board
5. Faulty D610 to D613 5. Replace D610 to D613.
W-LP-2424 Magazine is not registered. Unregistered magazine ID is set.
1. Unregistered magazine 1. Register the magazine.
circuit board
circuit board
W-LP-2425 ID is duplicated for upper and ID is duplicated for upper and lower
lower magazines. magazines.
Set another magazine ID. 1. Same IDs for upper and lower 1. Replace an ID chip for one
magazine, and register it again.
circuit board
circuit board
3-22

W-LP-2426 Magazine not loaded. Paper drawing is attempted but the
paper magazine is not installed.
Set magazine. (Causes of the error message)
1. Magazine is not installed. 1. Install paper magazine.
2. ID chip is not installed. 2. Install ID chip and register it.
3. Poorly connected or broken
harness between the upper
3. Connect the harness correctly, or
repair or replace it.
3
circuit board
circuit board
W-LP-2429 Magazine section door open. Magazine door is opened during
paper processing.
Remove paper in printer and (Causes of the error message)
close door. 1. Magazine door is open. 1. Close the magazine door.
2. Bent or broken interlock dog 2. Repair or replace the interlock
dog.
3. Removed or loosened magnet 3. Install the magnet properly.
harness between the magazine repair or replace it.
door interlock switch (D680) and
PWR2 on the PWR27 circuit board
6. Faulty PWR27 circuit board 6. Replace the PWR27 circuit board.
W-LP-2430 Magazine section door open. Magazine door is opened during
printing.
Close magazine section door. (Causes of the error message)
1. Magazine door is opened. 1. Close the magazine door.
2. Bent or broken interlock dog 2. Repair or replace the interlock
dog.
3. Removed or loosened magnet 3. Install the magnet properly.
W-LP-2431 Printer section left-hand cover Printer section left cover is opened
opened. during paper processing.
Remove paper in printer, and 1. Printer section left cover is 1. Close the printer section left cover.
then close cover. opened. 2. Repair or replace the interlock
2. Bent or broken interlock dog dog.
3. Install the magnet properly.
3. Removed or loosened magnet 4. Connect the harness correctly, or
4. Poorly connected or broken repair or replace it.
harness between the left cover
interlock switch (D681) and PWR2
on the PWR27 circuit board 5. Replace D681.
5. Faulty D681 6. Replace the PWR27 circuit board.
6. Faulty PWR27 circuit board
3-23

W-LP-2433 Incorrect paper magazine is set. Magazine installed oppositely.
Replace magazine. 1. Magazines are installed 1. Replace the magazines.
oppositely.
2. ID chip is replaced. 2. Use the previous ID chip or
register it again.
circuit board
circuit board
I-LP-2435 Resume printing. Density measured magazine is set. –
W-LP-2436 Magazine with different paper Magazine different from one at paper
width installed. end has been set.
Install magazine with correct Refer to W-LP-2433. Refer to W-LP-2433.
paper.
I-LP-2437 Paper end process completed in When the upper magazine has been –
upper magazine. paper end and the next printing is set
auto selection, the paper type and
Paper is to be fed from lower width of the lower magazine are
magazine. same as the upper magazine.
I-LP-2438 Paper end process completed in When the lower magazine has been –
lower magazine. paper end and the next printing is set
auto selection, the paper type and
Paper is to be fed from upper width of the upper magazine are
magazine. same as the lower magazine.
W-LP-2439 Paper end detected in upper Paper end sensor detects paper end.
magazine. (Causes of the error message)
Install a new paper in magazine. perform 2 to 4.
magazine paper end sensor
(D616) and CTL35 on CTL27
circuit board
W-LP-2440 Paper end detected in lower Paper end sensor detects paper end.
magazine. (Causes of the error message)
Install a new paper in magazine. perform 2 to 4.
(D626) and OPA8 on OPA27 circuit
board
3-24

W-LP-2441 Specified magazine ID differs Even though printing is attempted by
from the stored ID. specifying a magazine ID, the
specified magazine is not installed.
Install magazine with ID=###. (Causes of the error message)
1. Even though printing is attempted 1. Install the specified magazine.
by specifying a magazine ID, the
specified magazine is not installed.
3
2. Faulty upper magazine ID sensor 2. Replace D610 to D613.
(D610 to D613)
3. Faulty lower magazine ID sensor 3. Replace D620 to D623.
(D620 to D623)
W-LP-2442 Specified paper width and When printing is attempted, the
registered print size mismatched. magazine of the specified paper
width is not installed.
Replace magazine. (Causes of the error message)
1. When printing is attempted, the 1. Install the specified magazine.
magazine of the specified paper
width is not installed.
2. Faulty magazine ID chip 2. Replace the magazine ID chip.
3. Faulty upper magazine ID sensor 3. Replace D610 to D613.
(D610 to D613)
4. Faulty lower magazine ID sensor 4. Replace D620 to D623.
(D620 to D623)
W-LP-2444 Printer section left-hand cover The left cover is opened during paper
opened. processing.
Close it. 1. The left cover is opened. 1. Close the left cover.
2. Faulty left cover interlock switch 2. Replace D681.
(D681)
3. Faulty left cover 3. Replace the left cover.
W-LP-2447 Paper jam occurred between Paper is not detected even when the
distribution section and printer specified time has elapsed.
exit section(5). (Causes of the error message)
1. Paper jamming 1. Remove paper.
Check it. ### sheets remain. 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the harness correctly, or
harness between the paper sensor repair or replace it.
circuit board
harness between the Feed Motor repair or replace it.
4 (M660) and CTL6 on the CTL27
circuit board
W-LP-2448 Initializing of upper cutter • The cutter open sensor detects
failed(M600,D601). their home position.
• Cutter error flag is detected.
Shut down scanner with • The cutter close position sensor
emergency stop button and does not function even after the
restart it. If problems persist, specified time has elapsed.
consult your technical (Causes of the error message)
representative. 1. Faulty upper cutter drive motor 1. Replace the upper cutter unit.
(M600)
2. Faulty upper cutter open (home) 2. Replace the upper cutter unit.
position sensor (D601)
3-25

W-LP-2449 Initializing of lower cutter • The cutter open sensor detects
failed(M601,D603). their home position.
• Cutter error flag is detected.
Shut down scanner with • The cutter close position sensor
emergency stop button and does not function even after the
restart it. If problems persist, specified time has elapsed.
consult your technical (Causes of the error message)
representative. 1. Faulty lower cutter drive motor 1. Replace the lower cutter unit.
(M601)
2. Faulty lower cutter open (home) 2. Replace the lower cutter unit.
position sensor (D603)
W-LP-2450 Tilt in registration section(M641/ Tilt home position cannot be
D641) malfunction. detected.
Shut down scanner with 1. Faulty tilt home position sensor (for 1. Replace D641.
emergency stop button and M641) (D641)
restart it. If problems persist, 2. Faulty registration tilt motor (M641) 2. Replace M641.
consult your technical 3. Faulty registration mechanism 3. Repair the registration unit.
representative.
W-LP-2452 Exposure section nip(M651/ Nip home position cannot be
D651) malfunction. detected.
Shut down scanner with 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly, or
emergency stop button and harness between the soft nip repair or replace it.
restart it. If problems persist, home position sensor (for M651)
consult your technical (D651) and CTL32 on the CTL27
representative. circuit board.
motor (M651) and CTL4 on the
CTL27 circuit board
6. Faulty cam mechanism 6. Replace the sub scanning unit.
W-LP-2458 Sub-scanning exit section guide Opening of the sub-scanning exit
in printer is open. section guide is detected during
initialization.
2. Broken harness between D669 to 2. Repair or replace the harness.
CTL33 on the CTL27 circuit board.
W-LP-2459 Printer section cover opened. During output check, device
Close it. operation is attempted with a cover
open.
harness between the left cover repair or replace it.
on the PWR27 circuit board
6. Damaged cover 6. Replace the cover.
3-26

W-LP-2460 Paper is not Installed in Upper magazine paper end is
magazine. detected during initialization.
Install a paper in magazine. 1. Paper is not installed in the 1. Install paper or replace the
magazine. magazine.
2. Poorly connected or broken
harness between the upper
2. Connect the harness correctly, or
3
circuit board
W-LP-2461 Paper is not Installed in lower Lower magazine paper end is
magazine. detected during initialization.
Install a paper in magazine. 1. Paper is not installed in the 1. Install paper or replace the
magazine. magazine.
(D626) and OPA8 on the OPA27
circuit board
W-LP-2462 Magazine ID changed. (Cause of the error message)
The magazine ID is changed during Reinstall the magazine correctly.
Check magazines. driving the feed system.
W-LP-2463 Specified paper and registered (Cause of the error message)
paper mismatched. The paper type or surface differs from Install the proper magazine.
the magazine installed.
Replace magazine.
W-LP-2468 Paper remains in supply D619 detects remaining paper when
section(1). starting, I/O check or closing cover.
1. Paper remaining 1. Remove paper.
W-LP-2469 Paper remains in lower supply D629 detects remaining paper when
section(2). starting, I/O check or closing cover.
W-LP-2470 Paper remains between cutter D632 detects remaining paper when
feed section and back printing / starting, I/O check or closing cover.
registration section(3). (Causes of the error message)
W-LP-2471 Paper remains between the sub- D650/D653/D667 detects remaining
scanning section and sub- paper when starting, I/O check or
scanning exit section(4). closing cover.
2. Faulty D650/D653/D667 2. Replace the D650, D653 or D667.
E-LP-2472 Communication error occurred in Communication to MCSS-IOSS
printer(GMC27-CTL27). timeout occurs.
Shut down scanner with 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Reconnect or repair the harness.
emergency stop button and harness between the GMC27 and
restart it. If problems persist, the CTL27 circuit board
consult your technical 2. No response from CTL27 when 2. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
representative. transmitting from GMC27
3-27

E-LP-2473 OPA27 is not found. Condition of OPA circuit board and
setup to be used are mismatch.
Consult your technical (Causes of the error message)
representative. 1. Incorrectly set up OPA27 circuit 1. Check the setting for the optional
board item in installation magazine.
information setting menu
2. Disconnected OPA27 circuit board 2. Connect the connector securely.
connector
E-LP-2501 Anti-dust shutter abnormal. Shutter open/close sensor (D674)
does not function even if operating
Shut down scanner with anti-dust shutter at initialization.
emergency stop button and (Causes of the error message)
restart it. If problems persist, 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly, or
consult your technical harness between ROS on the repair or replace it.
representative. laser unit and LDD12/LDD14 on
the LDD27 circuit board
3. Faulty S673 3. Replace S673
4. Faulty LDD27 circuit board 4. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
E-LP-2502 Anti-dust fan malfunction. Fan does not function (Rotating
sensor malfunction).
Shut down scanner with (Causes of the error message)
emergency stop button and 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly, or
restart it. If problems persist, harness between ROS on the repair or replace it.
consult your technical laser unit and LDD14 on the
representative. LDD27 circuit board
2. Faulty F610 2. Replace F610.
E-LP-2503 Polygon malfunction. Mechanical polygon is abnormal
(Rotating sensor malfunction).
consult your technical laser unit and LDD12 on the
representative. LDD27 circuit board
3. Faulty laser unit 3. Replace the laser unit.
E-LP-2505 LDD27 circuit board cooling fan LDD cooling fan malfunction
malfunction. (Rotating sensor malfunction).
emergency stop button and harness between the LDD cooling repair or replace it.
restart it. If problems persist, fan (FAN) and LDD13 on the
consult your technical LDD27 circuit board
representative. 2. Faulty FAN 2. Replace FAN.
3-28

W-LP-2507 Condition setup for present paper Density measurement for the
not performed. installed magazine is not performed.
When replacing the paper with 1. Paper condition setup is not 1. Perform paper condition setup.
the one with different emulsion performed.
number, make sure to perform
condition setup for paper.
2. ID chip is replaced. 2. Change the magazine registration
data.
3
circuit board
circuit board
E-LP-2508 Communication error occurred in Communication error occurred
printer(GMC27-LDD27). between the GMC27 and LDD27
circuit board.
restart it. If problems persist, harness between the LDD3 on the repair or replace it.
consult your technical LDD27 circuit board and GMC6 on
representative. the GMC27 circuit board
harness between the LDD1 on the repair or replace it.
LDD27 circuit board and PWR7 on
the PWR27 circuit board
3. Replace the LDD27 circuit board 3. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
4. Replace the GMC27 circuit board 4. Replace the GMC27 circuit board.
E-LP-2509 Abnormal R laser (R-LD) Abnormal data read from EEPROM in
information. the laser unit at start-up.
Shut down scanner with 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly.
emergency stop button and harness between the laser unit
restart it. If problems persist, and LDD8 on the LDD27 circuit
consult your technical board
representative. 2. Faulty LDD27 circuit board 2. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
3. Faulty laser unit 3. Replace the laser unit.
E-LP-2510 Abnormal G laser (G-SHG) Abnormal data read from EEPROM in
emergency stop button and harness between the laser optical
restart it. If problems persist, unit and LDD6 on the LDD27
consult your technical circuit board
3. Faulty laser optical unit 3. Replace the laser optical unit.
E-LP-2511 Abnormal B laser (B-LD) Abnormal data read from EEPROM in
3-29

E-LP-2512 R laser (R-LD) temperature Laser temperature did not converge
adjustment outside specified within a specified range during
range. initialization.
The laser temperature control 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly.
stopped. harness between the laser optical
unit and LDD8 on the LDD27
Shut down scanner with circuit board
emergency stop button and 2. Faulty LDD27 circuit board 2. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
restart it. If problems persist, 3. Faulty laser optical unit 3. Replace the laser optical unit.
representative.
E-LP-2513 G laser (G-SHG) temperature Laser temperature did not converge
unit and LDD6/LDD11 on the
Shut down scanner with LDD27 circuit board
representative.
E-LP-2514 B laser (B-LD) temperature Laser temperature did not converge
representative.
E-LP-2515 Abnormal R laser (R-LD) 1. Laser temperature exceeds the
temperature. range.
2. Thermistor error is detected.
The laser temperature control (Causes of the error message)
stopped. 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly.
harness between the laser optical
Shut down scanner with unit and LDD8 on the LDD27
emergency stop button and circuit board
restart it. If problems persist, 2. Faulty LDD27 circuit board 2. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
consult your technical 3. Faulty laser optical unit 3. Replace the laser optical unit.
representative.
E-LP-2516 Abnormal G laser (G-SHG) 1. Laser temperature exceeds the
temperature. range.
Shut down scanner with unit and LDD6/LDD11 on the
emergency stop button and LDD27 circuit board
representative.
3-30

E-LP-2517 Abnormal B laser (B-LD) 1. Laser temperature exceeds the
temperature. range.
Shut down scanner with

3
representative.
W-LP-2518 Abnormal temperature detected Ambient temperature exceeds the
in printer. range.
The laser temperature control 1. Dirty air filter on the machine body 1. Replace the filter.
stopped. 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the harness correctly, or
harness between the temperature repair or replace it.
sensor (THA27) and LDD12 on the
LDD27 circuit board
3. Tripped circuit protector on the 3. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
LDD circuit board
4. Faulty THA27 4. Replace THA27.
5. Faulty LDD circuit board 5. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
E-LP-2520 R laser (R-LD) current exceeded. LD current value limiter detection.
representative. 2. Faulty LDD27 circuit board 2. Replace LDD27 circuit board.
E-LP-2521 G laser (G-SHG) current LD current value limiter detection.
exceeded. (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly.
Shut down scanner with harness between the laser optical
emergency stop button and unit and LDD10 on the LDD27
restart it. If problems persist, circuit board
consult your technical 2. Faulty LDD27 circuit board 2. Replace LDD27 circuit board.
representative. 3. Faulty laser optical unit 3. Replace the laser optical unit.
E-LP-2522 B laser (B-LD) current exceeded. LD current value limiter detection.
representative. 2. Faulty LDD27 circuit board 2. Replace LDD27 circuit board.
E-LP-2523 R laser (R-LD) current PD current value does not converge
measurement value outside within a specified range.
specified range. (Causes of the error message)
consult your technical 2. Faulty LDD27 circuit board 2. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
E-LP-2524 G laser (G-SHG) current PD current value does not converge
specified of range. (Causes of the error message)
3-31

E-LP-2525 B laser (B-LD) current PD current value does not converge
specified range. (Causes of the error message)
W-LP-2526 R laser (R-LD) current exceeds Laser deterioration was detected at
the specified range. the last post-operational check.
Shut down scanner with LD deteriorated.
emergency stop button and 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly.
restart it. If problems persist, harness between the laser optical
consult your technical unit and LDD5 on the LDD27
representative. circuit board
W-LP-2527 G laser (G-SHG) current exceeds Laser deterioration was detected at
No problem for the moment, but LD deteriorated.
consult your technical 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly.
representative. harness between the laser optical
circuit board
W-LP-2528 B laser (B-LD) current exceeds Laser deterioration was detected at
Shut down scanner with LD deteriorated.
emergency stop button and 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly.
restart it. If problems persist, harness between the laser optical
consult your technical unit and LDD9 on the LDD27
representative. circuit board
E-LP-2529 SOS detection failed. SOS (Start of Scanning) is not
detected.
consult your technical laser optical unit and GMC9 on the
representative. GMC27 circuit board
2. Poorly connected connector on the 2. Connect the harness correctly, or
DTA27 circuit board on laser repair or replace it.
optical unit
3. Faulty DTA27 circuit board 3. Replace the laser optical unit.
4. Faulty GMC27 circuit board 4. Replace the GMC27 circuit board.
W-LP-2532 G laser (G-SHG) optimal It’s time to perform SHG stabilization. Perform Menu 0522 “G, B Laser
temperature setting periods. (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup”.
W-LP-2533 10 days passed since the last Paper magazine requiring paper Perform paper condition setup.
paper condition setup. condition setup is detected during
magazine installation.
We recommend paper condition
setup.
3-32

E-LP-2534 R laser (R-LD) connector Laser thermistor detected.
removed or temperature sensor (Causes of the error message)
abnormal. 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly.
harness between LDR1 on the
Shut down scanner with LDR27 circuit board and LDD8 on
emergency stop button and
restart it. If problems persist,
the LDD27 circuit board
3
representative.
E-LP-2535 G laser (G-SHG) connector Laser thermistor detected.
harness between JMH2 on the
Shut down scanner with JMH27 circuit board and LDD10
emergency stop button and on the LDD27 circuit board
representative.
E-LP-2536 B laser (B-LD) connector Laser thermistor detected.
harness between LDB1 on the
Shut down scanner with LDB27 circuit board and LDD9 on
emergency stop button and the LDD27 circuit board
representative.
W-LP-2537 The laser temperature control After the initialization, the ambient
cannot be performed, because temperature has been outside the
the ambient temperature is too specified range for more than the
low (high). specified period.
Adjust the ambient temp. 1. The current temperature is above 1. On Menu 0524 “Printer
between 15 to 30 °C. (Laser (or below) the specified range. Temperature Display”, measure
temp. adjustment will be started the internal temperature, and
when the ambient temp. exceeds adjust it (using an air conditioner)
5 °C.) to within 5 to 45 °C.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the connector, or repair or
harness between THA on the replace the harness.
THA27 circuit board and LDD12
on the LDD27 circuit board
3. Faulty thermohygrometer (THA27) 3. Replace THA27.
W-LP-2538 Anti-dust filter of laser unit is It’s time to change anti-dust filter. Replace the filter.
about to its lifetime.
Prepare a new anti-dust filter. No

problem for the moment, but
representative.
E-LP-2539 Anti-dust filter of laser unit is It’s time to change anti-dust filter.
about to its pariodic replacing (Cause of the error message)
time. Filter has not been replaced. Replace the filter.

representative.
3-33

W-LP-2540 Ambient temperature too low The ambient temperature has been
(high). outside the specified range (15 to
30°) for more than the specified
Adjust the ambient temperature period.
between 15 to 30 °C. (Causes of the error message)
1. The current temperature is above 1. On Menu 0524 “Printer
(or below) the specified range. Temperature Display”, measure
the internal temperature, and
adjust it (using an air conditioner)
to within 5 to 45 °C.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the connector, or repair or
harness between the temperature replace the harness.
sensor (THA27) and LDD12 on the
LDD27 circuit board
3. Faulty thermohygrometer (THA) 3. Replace THA27.
E-LP-2542 AOM drive temperature error Abnormal temperature of AOM driver
occurred. is detected.
emergency stop button and harness between LDD2 on the repair or replace it.
restart it. If problems persist, LDD27 circuit board and AOM
consult your technical driver
representative. 2. Faulty temperature control circuit 2. Replace the AOM driver.
on the AOM driver
E-LP-2544 An error detected by R laser (R- Laser thermistor detected.
LD) sensor. (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected or broken LDD8 1. Connect the connector correctly,
Shut down scanner with connector on the LDD27 circuit or repair or replace it.
emergency stop button and board
consult your technical 3. Faulty laser thermistor 3. Replace the laser optical unit.
representative.
E-LP-2545 An error detected by G laser (G- Laser thermistor detected.
SHG) sensor. (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the connector correctly,
Shut down scanner with LDD10 connector on the LDD27 or repair or replace it.
representative.
E-LP-2546 An error detected by B laser (B- Laser thermistor detected.
LD) sensor. (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected or broken LDD9 1. Connect the connector correctly,
Shut down scanner with connector on the LDD27 circuit or repair or replace it.
emergency stop button and board
representative.
W-LP-2552 The density measurement is not Density measurement time-out
complete within a specified time. (Causes of the error message)
1. Cable is disconnected during 1. Connect the cable properly and
density measurement. perform density measurement
again.
2. Calibrator goes wrong during 2. Inspect the calibrator and replace
density measurement. it if necessary.
W-LP-2553 The densitometer may Data size from the densitometer is
malfunction. abnormal.
Consult your technical 1. Calibrator error (Red LED lights.) 1. Press the [RESET] button and
representative. retry.
2. Faulty calibrator 2. Replace the calibrator.
3-34

W-LP-2554 Check the outputted upkeep print Density measurement operation error
and then perform the density for upkeep printing
measurement again. (Causes of the error message)
1. Calibrator error (Red LED lights.) 1. Press the [RESET] button and
retry.
3
W-LP-2555 Density measurement failed due The [Measure] button is clicked but
to the error occurrence. measurement cannot be started
because error has been occurred in
the densitometer.
1. Calibrator error (Red LED lights.) 1. Press the [RESET] button and
retry.
W-LP-2556 Initializing is in progress, so Density measurement cannot be
density measurement cannot be started because the calibrator
started. initialization is in progress.
After initialization, retry Initializing calibrator Wait until calibrator initialization is
measurement. completed.
W-LP-2557 Density measurement cannot be Density measurement cannot be
started. started because error has been
occurred in the calibrator.
Press the [Reset] button of the (Cause of the error message)
densitometer, and then retry it. Calibrator error (Red LED lights.) Press the [Reset] button to initialize
the calibrator.
W-LP-2558 Density measurement cannot be Signal for starting density
started. measurement is not received from
the calibrator within the specified
Consult your technical time.
representative. (Cause of the error message)
Disconnected cable before Connect the cable properly and
measurement perform density measurement again.
W-LP-2559 Canceling of density Density measurement interruption
measurement failed. failed.
Check if the paper remains. Jammed chart in the calibrator. Press the [Reset] button to eject the
chart. If not ejected, pull out the chart
by hand and press the [Reset] button.
W-LP-2560 Canceling of density Communication busy state occurs
measurement failed. when interrupting density
measurement.
Consult your technical (Cause of the error message)
representative. Collision occurred while Press the [Reset] button to initialize
communicating with the the calibrator.
densitometer.
W-LP-2561 Detecting of leading end of the The leading end of the print upkeep
print failed. chart cannot be detected during
density measurement.
Insert the upkeep print into the (Causes of the error message)
densitometer correctly, and 1. Chart is not inserted. 1. Set the chart and perform density
perform the measurement again. measurement again.
2. Insufficiently inserted chart. 2. Set the chart and perform density
measurement again.
W-LP-2562 Detecting of leading end of the The leading end of the print upkeep
print failed. chart cannot be detected during
density measurement.
Insert the condition setup print (Causes of the error message)
into the densitometer correctly, 1. Chart is not inserted. 1. Set the chart and perform density
and perform the measurement measurement again.
again. 2. Insufficiently inserted chart. 2. Set the chart and perform density
measurement again.
3-35

W-LP-2563 Paper is inserted incorrectly. Pattern reading failed during density
measurement of upkeep chart.
Insert the upkeep print into the (Causes of the error message)
densitometer correctly, and 1. Incorrect chart insertion direction 1. Insert the chart correctly.
perform the measurement again. 2. Tilted chart or out of lane 2. Adjust chart guides correctly.
3. Inserted print is not for upkeep 3. Insert the print upkeep chart.
printing.
W-LP-2564 Paper is inserted incorrectly. Pattern reading failed during density
measurement of upkeep chart.
Insert the condition setup print (Causes of the error message)
into the densitometer correctly, 1. Incorrect chart insertion direction 1. Insert the chart correctly.
and perform the measurement 2. Slanted or misaligned chart 2. Adjust the chart guides correctly.
again. 3. Inserted print is not for upkeep 3. Insert the print upkeep chart.
printing.
W-LP-2565 Detecting of trailing end of the Chart is not ejected from the
print failed. densitometer.
Insert the upkeep print into the Jammed chart in calibrator Press the [Reset] button to eject the
densitometer correctly, and chart. If not ejected, pull out the chart
perform the measurement again. by hand and press the [Reset] button.
W-LP-2566 Detecting of trailing end of the Chart is not ejected from the
print failed. calibrator.
Insert the condition setup print Jammed chart in calibrator Press the [Reset] button to eject the
into the densitometer correctly, chart. If not ejected, pull out the chart
and perform the measurement by hand and press the [Reset] button.
again.
W-LP-2567 Ejecting of the print failed. Chart is not ejected from the
calibrator.
Insert the upkeep print into the (Cause of the error message)
densitometer correctly, and Jammed chart in calibrator Press the [Reset] button to eject the
perform the measurement again. chart. If not ejected, pull out the chart
by hand and press the [Reset] button.
W-LP-2568 Ejecting of the print failed. Chart is not ejected from the
calibrator.
Insert the condition setup print (Cause of the error message)
into the densitometer correctly, Jammed chart in calibrator Press the [Reset] button to eject the
and perform the measurement chart. If not ejected, pull out the chart
again. by hand and press the [Reset] button.
W-LP-2569 Check the outputted setup print Density measurement operation error
and then perform the density for condition setup printing
measurement again. (Causes of the error message)
1. Calibrator error (Red LED lights.) 1. Reset the calibrator.
I-LP-2573 Laser temperature adjustment When the laser warming up is not –
not completed in exposure completed, printer maintenance is
section. tried to execute.
Please Wait.
E-LP-2580 R laser (R LD)CB temperature R laser CB temperature is outside the
error occurred. specified range.
Shut down scanner with Replace the LDD27 circuit board.

representative.
3-36

E-LP-2581 B-laser (B-LD) CB temperature B laser CB temperature is outside the
error occurred. specified range.
Shut down scanner with Replace the LDD27 circuit board.

3
representative.
W-LP-2590 Door opened. (Cause of the error message)
Door is opened during maintenance Close the door.
mode.
W-LP-2591 Cannot be performed due to the (Cause of the error message)
lack of conditions Operation is directed when the Check the operation conditions.
conditions are not met.
W-LP-2601 Paper jam in processor (6). Paper is not fed out within the
specified time.
Check it. ### sheets remain. (Causes of the error message)
1. Paper jamming 1. Remove paper.
2. Faulty dryer exit section paper 2. Replace D771.
sensor (D771)
3. Incorrectly set processing rack, 3. Set the rack properly.
crossover rack, dryer rack, etc.
4. Faulty dryer rack or abnormal 4. Replace the dryer rack.
drying temperature control
5. Faulty dryer exit section 5. Replace the faulty part(s) in the
dryer exit unit.
W-LP-2602 Paper remains in processor. Power is turned OFF while paper Check the processor and dryer
remains in processor. sections and dryer exit unit. If paper
remains, remove it.
W-LP-2603 Paper remains in dryer exit unit. Paper remains in the dryer exit
section when the processor is driven.
1. Paper remains in the dryer exit 1. Remove paper.
unit.
harness between the feeding path repair or replace it.
switching paper sensor (D771)
board
W-LP-2604 Sorter operation(M810/D810) Sorter malfunction.
abnormal. (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected or broken sorter 1. Connect the cable correctly, or
Shut down scanner with cable repair or replace it.
restart it. If problems persist, harness between the sorter tray repair or replace it.
consult your technical stop position sensor (D810) and
representative. SWA3 on the SWA23 circuit board
harness between the sorter drive repair or replace it.
motor (M810) and SWA2 on the
SWA23 circuit board
6. Faulty SWA23 circuit board 6. Replace the SWA23 circuit board.
7. Tray and chain setting position 7. Install the sorter chain and trays
error. Loaded by interference. properly.
3-37

E-LP-2606 Replenisher cartridge opening Replenisher cartridge section
drive motor (M720,D722,D723) malfunction.
failure. (Causes of the error message)
About 130 3R-size sheets can harness between the cartridge repair or replace it.
still be printed without opening motor (M720) and CTL13
replenishment. on the CTL27 circuit board
Consult your technical harness between the replenisher repair or replace it.
representative. cartridge upper/lower sensor
(D722/D723) and CTL29 on the
CTL27 circuit board
harness between the replenisher repair or replace it.
door open/close detecting
5. Faulty D722/D723 5. Replace D722/D723.
E-LP-2608 Communication error occurred in Communication time-out with
printer(GMC27-CTL27). processor occurred.
emergency stop button and harness between the CTL27 and repair or replace it.
restart it. If problems persist, GMC27 circuit boards
consult your technical 2. Faulty CTL27 circuit board 2. Replace the CTL27 circuit board
representative. 3. Faulty GMC27 circuit board 3. Replace the GMC27 circuit board
W-LP-2609 Dryer section cover (D763) is Processing tank’s or accumulating
open. section’s cover is opened during
paper processing.
Processing cancelled. Paper may (Causes of the error message)
remain. 1. Dryer unit or dryer belt unit is 1. Close the dryer unit or dryer belt
opened. unit.
2. Interlock switch is activated due to 2. Close the dryer unit or dryer belt
vibration, etc. because the dryer unit.
unit or dryer belt unit is installed
improperly.
harness between the dryer section repair or replace it.
open/close cover open/close
sensor (D763) and PWR3 on the
PWR27 circuit board
W-LP-2611 Dryer section cover (D763) is Processing tank’s or dryer section’s
open. cover is open when starting
processing.
Close the dryer section cover. (Causes of the error message)
1. Dryer unit or dryer belt unit is 1. Close the dryer unit or dryer belt
opened. unit.
2. Interlock switch is activated due to 2. Close the dryer unit or dryer belt
vibration, etc. because the dryer unit.
unit or dryer belt unit is installed
improperly.
harness between the dryer section repair or replace it.
open/close cover open/close
sensor (D763) and PWR3 on the
PWR27 circuit board
3-38

E-LP-2614 P1 processing tank temperature Solution temperature does not rise
not rising. more than 1 °C within 30 minutes.
The heaters (H700 to H703) 1. Abnormal heater system ü
ï
turned off. 2. Abnormal temperature sensor ï
ý (See Subsection 3.3.4)

system
3. Abnormal circulation system
ï
ï
þ
3
representative.
E-LP-2615 P2 processing tank temperature Solution temperature does not rise
not rising. more than 1 °C within 30 minutes.
ï
system ï
ï
Shut down scanner with 3. Abnormal circulation system þ
representative.
E-LP-2616 PS1/2 processing tank Solution temperature does not rise
temperatures not rising. more than 1 °C within 30 minutes.
ï
system ï
ï
representative.
E-LP-2617 PS3 processing tank Solution temperature does not rise
temperatures not rising. more than 1 °C within 30 minutes.
ï
system ï
ï
representative.
E-LP-2618 Dryer section temperature not Dryer section temperature does not
rising. rise more than 1 °C in a minute at
heat up.
The heaters (H760 to 762) turned (Causes of the error message)
ü
off. 1. Cover around the dryer section is ï
ï
open. ï
ï
Shut down scanner with 2. Abnormal dryer heater system ý
ï (See Subsection 3.3.5)
emergency stop button and 3. Abnormal dryer temperature ï
ï
restart it. If problems persist, sensor ï
consult your technical 4. Abnormal dryer fan system þ
representative.
E-LP-2619 P1 processing tank temperature P1 temperature is abnormal.
is out of range. (Causes of the error message)
1. Abnormal heater system ü
ï
The heaters (H700 to H703) 2. Abnormal temperature sensor ï
turned off. system ï
ï
3. Abnormal circulation system þ
representative.
3-39

E-LP-2620 P2 processing tank temperature P2 temperature is abnormal.
ï
ï
representative.
E-LP-2621 PS1/2 processing tank PS1/2 temperature is abnormal.
temperature is out of range. (Causes of the error message)
ï
ï
representative.
E-LP-2622 PS3 processing tank temperature PS3 temperature is abnormal.
ï
ï
representative.
E-LP2623 Dryer section temperature is out Dryer section temperature is
of range. abnormal.
The heaters (H760 to 762) turned 1. Abnormal dryer heater system ü
ï
off. 2. Abnormal dryer temperature ï
sensor system ï
ï
Shut down scanner with 3. Abnormal dryer fan system þ
representative.
E-LP-2624 P1 safety thermostat (D700) Safety thermostat in the P1
activated. processing tank is activated.
ü
The heaters (H700 to H703) 1. Abnormal heater system ï
ï
ï
system ý
ï (See Subsection 3.3.4)
Shut down scanner with 3. Abnormal circulation system ï
ï
emergency stop button and 4. Abnormal heater safety thermostat ï
restart it. If problems persist, system þ
representative.
E-LP-2625 P2 safety thermostat (D701) Safety thermostat in the P2
ü
ï
ï
system ý (See Subsection 3.3.4)
ï
ï
representative.
3-40

E-LP-2626 PS1/2 safety thermostat (D702) Safety thermostat in the PS1/2
ü
ï
ï

system
3. Abnormal circulation system
ý
ï
ï
((See Subsection 3.3.4) 3
ï
representative.
E-LP-2627 PS3 safety thermostat (D703) Safety thermostat in the PS3
ü
ï
ï
system ý (See Subsection 3.3.4)
ï
ï
representative.
E-LP-2628 Safety thermostat in dryer section Safety thermostat in dryer section is
(D760) activated. activated.
The heaters (H760 to 762) turned (Causes of the error message)
ü
off. 1. Abnormal dryer heater system ï
ï
2. Abnormal dryer temperature ï
ï
Shut down scanner with sensor system ý (See Subsection 3.3.5)
emergency stop button and 3. Abnormal dryer fan system ï
ï
ï
restart it. If problems persist, 4. Abnormal dryer heater safety ï
consult your technical thermostat system þ
representative.
W-LP-2629 P1 solution level (FS700) has Solution level in P1 processing tank is
fallen. lowered.
Temperature adjustment stopped. 1. Solution leakage ü
ï
2. Abnormal solution level sensor ï
system ï
ï
3. Abnormal replenisher system þ
W-LP-2630 P2 solution level (FS701) has Solution level in P2 processing tank is

fallen. lowered.
ï
system ï
ï
W-LP-2631 PS1 solution level (FS702) has Solution level in PS1 processing tank
fallen. is lowered.
ï
system ï
ï
fallen. is lowered.
ï
system ï
ï
3-41

fallen. is lowered.
Temperature adjustment 1. Solution leakage ü
ï
stopped. 2. Abnormal solution level sensor ï
system ï
ï
W-LP-2641 P1R replenisher pump (PU721) (Causes of the error message)

malfunctions. 1. Pump malfunction due to bent or 1. Repair or replace the hose.
clogged hose
If problems persist, consult your 2. Faulty replenisher pump (due to 2. Replace the pump.
technical representative. hardened bellows, faulty rotation
sensor or motor)
W-LP-2642 P2RA replenisher pump (PU722) (Causes of the error message)
clogged hose
sensor or motor)
W-LP-2643 P2RB replenisher pump (PU723) (Causes of the error message)
clogged hose
sensor or motor)
W-LP-2647 PSR replenisher pump (PU724) (Causes of the error message)
clogged hose
sensor or motor)
W-LP-2648 PSR solution level has fallen. PSR upper limit sensor detects “no On Menu 0624, check FS748 and
solution”. actual solution level.
Pour 8L of replenisher and then (Causes of the error message)
put two FSC tablets into the port. 1. PSR is empty. 1. Replenish with 8 liters of FRSS
and put 2 FSC tablets into the port.
harness between the PSR upper repair or replace it.
level sensor (FS723) and CTL28
on the CTL27 circuit board
3. Faulty FS723 3. Replace FS723.
W-LP-2649 PSR replenisher empty. PSR lower limit sensor detects “no On Menu 0624, check FS748 and
solution”. actual solution level.
Printing cancelled. (Causes of the error message)
1. PSR is empty. 1. Replenish with 8 liters of FRSS
Pour 8L of replenisher and then and put 2 FSC tablets into the port.
put two FSC tablets into the port. 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the harness correctly, or
harness between the PSR lower repair or replace it.
level sensor (FS727) and CTL28
W-LP-2650 Waste solution tank nearly full. Internal waste solution sensor
detects “Solution exists”.
Collect the solution in the (Causes of the error message)
recovery tank in the W2 manner. 1. Waste solution tank is full. 1. Collect waste solution
harness between the waste repair or replace it.
solution level sensor (FS728) and
JNE6 on the JNE23 circuit board
3. Dirty FS728 3. Clean FS728.
3-42

W-LP-2651 Waste solution tank full. Internal waste solution sensor
detects “Solution full”.
Printing stopped. (Causes of the error message)
1. Waste solution tank is full. 1. Collect waste solution.
Collect the solution in the 2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the harness correctly, or
recovery tank in the W2 manner. harness between the waste
solution level sensor (FS728) and
3
CTL15 on the CTL27 circuit board
3. Dirty FS728 3. Clean FS728.
E-LP-2657 P1R replenishment flow volume Accumulated output amount of
or its solution level abnormal. solution to P1R upper level sensor
exceeds the specified value
About 130 3R-size sheets can (2498.0 ml).
still be printed without (Causes of the error message)
replenishment. 1. Faulty P1R pump (PU721) 1. (See Subsection 3.3.7)
2. Faulty P1R stirring valve (S731) 2. (See Subsection 3.3.9)
Consult your technical 3. Faulty P1R cartridge washing 3. (See Subsection 3.3.9)
representative. valve (S728)
4. Faulty P1R upper level sensor 4. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
(FS720) Take appropriate corrective
measures. (See Subsection
3.3.11)
5. Bent or clogged P1R hose 5. Repair or replace the hose.
E-LP-2658 P2RA replenishment flow volume Accumulated output amount of
or its solution level abnormal. solution to P2RA upper level sensor
replenishment. 1. Faulty P2RA pump (PU722) 1. (See Subsection 3.3.7)
2. Faulty P2RA cartridge washing 2. (See Subsection 3.3.9)
Consult your technical valve (S729)
representative. 3. Faulty P2RA upper level sensor 3. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
3.3.11)
4. Bent or clogged P2RA hose 4. Repair or replace the hose.
E-LP-2659 P2RB replenishment flow volume Accumulated output amount of
or its solution level abnormal. solution to P2RB upper level sensor
replenishment. 1. Faulty P2RB pump (PU723) 1. (See Subsection 3.3.7)
2. Faulty P2RB cartridge washing 2. (See Subsection 3.3.9)
Consult your technical valve (S730)
representative. 3. Faulty P2RB upper level sensor 3. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
3.3.11)
4. Bent or clogged P2RB hose 4. Repair or replace the hose.
I-LP-2662 Performing evaporation Performing evaporation correction. Wait for a evapration correction.
correction.
Warming-up will be started after

the evaporation correction.
Please wait. (Max 25 min.)
3-43

E-LP-2663 P1R replenishment Accumulated output amount of
pump(PU721) or lower limit solution between P1R upper and
sensor(FS724) abnormal. lower sensors exceeds the specified
value.
About 130 3R-size sheets can (Causes of the error message)
still be printed without 1. Faulty P1R pump (PU721) 1. (See Subsection 3.3.7)
replenishment. 2. Faulty P1R lower level sensor 2. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
Consult your technical measures. (See Subsection
representative. 3.3.11)
3. Incorrect default setting of pump 3. Perform Menu 0620 “Replenisher
output amount Pump Output Measurement/
Setting”.
4. Bent or clogged P1R hose 4. Repair or replace the hose.
E-LP-2664 P2RA replenishment flow volume Accumulated output amount of
or its solution level abnormal. solution between P2RA upper and
lower sensors exceeds the specified
About 130 3R-size sheets can value.
replenishment. 1. Faulty P2RA pump (PU722) 1. (See Subsection 3.3.7)
2. Faulty P2RA lower level sensor 2. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
Consult your technical (FS725) Take appropriate corrective
representative. measures. (See Subsection
3.3.11)
Setting”.
4. Bent or clogged P2RA hose 4. Repair or replace the hose.
E-LP-2665 P2RB replenishment flow volume Accumulated output amount of
or its solution level abnormal. solution between P2RB upper and
lower sensors exceeds the specified
About 130 3R-size sheets can value.
replenishment. 1. Faulty P2RB pump (PU723) 1. (See Subsection 3.3.7)
2. Faulty P2RB lower level sensor 2. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
Consult your technical (FS726) Take appropriate corrective
representative. measures. (See Subsection
3.3.11)
Setting”.
4. Bent or clogged P2RB hose 4. Repair or replace the hose.
W-LP-2671 Replenisher door (D724) open. Replenisher box door is open.
Close it. 1. The replenisher box door is open. 1. Close the replenisher box door.
2. Poorly connected or broken 2. Connect the connector properly, or
harness between the replenisher repair or replace it.
box door open/close detecting
W-LP-2672 Mix the replenisher. When the PSR upper limit level
sensor detects “no solution”
Add water up to the grid section (Causes of the error message)
of the water supply port (6L to 1. PSR replenisher solution level is 1. Add (about 8 liters of) FRSS until
14L). low. this message disappears.
2. Faulty replenisher solution level 2. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
sensor system
3-44

E-LP-2673 Opening of replenisher cartridge When a lower level sensor does not
failed. detect “solution exists” within a
specified time after the cartridge is
Consult your technical opened.
representative. (Causes of the error message)
1. Replenisher cartridge is opened
improperly.
1. (See Subsection 3.3.12)
3
2. Clogged replenishment hose. 2. (See Subsection 3.3.12)
3. Faulty lower level sensor system 3. (See Subsection 3.3.12)
W-LP-2674 Replenisher cartridge is empty or When the lower level sensor detected
not installed. “no solution in all tanks” within the
specified time after the valve was
Insert a new replenisher opened.
cartridge. (Causes of the error message)
1. An empty replenisher cartridge is 1. Install a new replenisher cartridge.
installed.
2. Faulty replenisher tank lower level 2. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
sensor system
3. Faulty replenisher cartridge setting 3. Replace D721.
sensor (D721)
E-LP-2675 P1R replenisher cartridge P1R replenisher upper level sensor
washing valve (S728) or P1R detects “no solution”
replenisher stirring valve (S731) (Causes of the error message)
malfunctions. 1. Faulty P1R stirring valve (S731) 1. (See Subsection 3.3.9)
2. Faulty P1R cartridge washing 2. (See Subsection 3.3.9)
About 130 3R-size sheets can valve (S728)
still be printed without 3. Faulty auto washing pump 3. (See Subsection 3.3.8)
replenishment. (PU720)
4. Faulty P1R upper level sensor 4. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
Consult your technical (FS720)
representative. 5. Air “frapped in” the hose used for 5. Perform Menu 0621 “Auto
washing pumps Cleaning Output Measurement/
Setting”.
E-LP-2676 P2RA replenisher cartridge P2RA replenisher upper level sensor
washing valve (S729) detects “no solution”
malfunctions. (Causes of the error message)
1. Faulty P2RA cartridge washing 1. (See Subsection 3.3.9)
3. Faulty P2RA upper level sensor 3. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
Setting”.
E-LP-2677 P2RB replenisher cartridge P2RB replenisher upper level sensor
washing valve (S730) detects “no solution”
malfunctions. (Causes of the error message)
1. Faulty P2RB cartridge washing 1. (See Subsection 3.3.9)
3. Faulty P2RB upper level sensor 3. (See Subsection 3.3.10)
Setting”.
W-LP-2678 Sorter nearly full. “Sorter full” is detected.
Collect prints from sorter. 1. Sorter is full. 1. Remove print(s) from the sorter.
harness between the sorter full repair or replace it.
sensor (D811) and SWA4 on the
SWA23 circuit board
3-45

W-LP-2679 Sorter full. “Sorter completely full” is detected.
Stop printing. 1. Sorter is full. 1. Remove print(s) from the sorter.
Collect prints from sorter. harness between the sorter full repair or replace it.
sensor (D811) and SWA4 on the
SWA23 circuit board
W-LP-2680 Number of prints exceeds limit. Accumulated output amount of P1R
replenisher exceeds the specified
Stop printing. range.
Error in the replenishment system Clear the error, and then take
has not been solved. appropriate corrective measures.
(See Subsection 3.3.11)
I-LP-2681 Mixing replenisher. A specified amount of processing is –
performed while mixing new
Please wait. replenisher
I-LP-2684 Processing paper. Pre-operational or post-operational Wait until processing is completed.
check is attempted while printing.
Please wait.
I-LP-2689 Last replenishment solution Last cartridge opening is detected. –
prepared.
Replace replenisher cartridge.

I-LP-2690 Processing paper. Control strip processing is performed –
during paper processing.
Please wait.
Perform control strip processing

after paper processing.
I-LP-2691 Solution remains in replenisher Replenisher tank lower level sensor
tank. detects “Solution exists”.
Shut down scanner with 1. At the time of installation, when 1. Drain solution remaining in the
emergency stop button and solution mixing is performed again replenisher tank.
restart it. If problems persist, after error recovery, a lower level
consult your technical sensor detects “Solution exists”
representative. because solution remains in the
replenisher tank.
2. Faulty lower level sensor (FS724/ 2. Replace FS724/FS725/FS726.
FS725/FS726)
I-LP-2692 Intermittent operation. Auto intermittent driving is in –
progress.
Please wait.
I-LP-2694 Temperature adjustment of The processor tanks are under –
processing tanks is process. warming up.
Please wait.
E-LP-2761 Rotating of dryer fan (F760) Dryer fan rotation detecting function
abnormal. is abnormal.
The heaters (H760 to H762) 1. Poorly connected or broken 1. Connect the harness correctly, or
turned off. harness between the dryer fan repair or replace it.
(F760) and CTL19 on the CTL27
emergency stop button and 2. Faulty F760 2. Replace F760.
restart it. If problems persist, 3. Faulty CTL27 circuit board 3. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
representative.
3-46

I-LP-2765 Warming the dryer section. Initial dryer temperature control is in
(Max 5 min) progress.
When the power is turned OFF and Wait until dryer warming up is
ON, dryer initialization is performed. completed (maximum of 5 minutes).
During initialization, printing cannot
be performed.
3
W-LP-2766 Printing stopped. During paper processing, processor
drive is stopped forcibly.
Faulty processor drive/stop button on Replace the operation panel.
the operation panel
I-LP-2767 Replenisher pump activating. Replenisher pump is in operation.
Please wait. Post operational check is attempted Wait until the replenisher pump stops.
while the replenisher pump is in
operation.
W-LP-2768 Replenisher tank empty. (Cause of the error message)
Maintenance operation is started with Pour replenisher in the tank.
Operation cannot be started. replenisher tank empty.
W-LP-2769 Solution level has fallen. (Cause of the error message)
Maintenance operation is started with Recover processing tank level.
Operation cannot be started. low processing tank level.
I-LP-2770 Upon completion of temperature Waiting dryer warming-up to start
adjustment in Dryer section, printing
printing will be started. (Max 5 (Cause of the error message)
min) Tried printing during dryer warming- Wait until warming-up is completed.
up
E-LP-2773 Error occurred in AD converter. Faulty AD converter on CTL27 circuit
Heater(H700 to H703, H760 to board
H762) was turned off. (Causes of the error message)
1. Disconnected temperature sensor 1. Connect the connector securely or
Shut down scanner with connector replace the harness.
emergency stop button and 2. Faulty temperature sensor 2. Replace the temperature sensor.
restart it. If problems persist, 3. Faulty AD converter 3. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
representative.
E-LP-2774 Error occurred in The temperature sensor detects
thermometer(TS700 to TS703 or temperature that exceeds the range
TS760). in the conversion table.
Heater(H700 to H703, H760 to 1. Disconnected temperature sensor 1. Connect the connector securely or
H762) was turned off. connector replace the harness.
2. Faulty temperature sensor 2. Replace the temperature sensor.
Shut down scanner with 3. Faulty AD converter 3. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
representative.
I-LP-2775 Forced processor drive is in Control strip processed during the To stop the processor, press the
progress. processor is driven from the [PROC. DRIVE] key on the operation
operation panel. panel.
Please wait.
W-LP-2776 Abnormal rotation detection of P2 FAN_ER6 CTL: Fan (F701) stop
heater cooling fan (F701). detection
Consult your technical 1. P2 cooling fan blocked with foreign 1. Remove foreign matter from the
representative. matter fan.
2. Disconnected fan connector 2. Connect the connector securely.
3. Faulty cooling fan 3. Replace the fan.
3-47

W-LP-2777 Processing section tank cover Processor cover opened during
(D762A/B) is open. processing paper.
Processing canceled. Paper may 1. The processor cover is opened. 1. Close the cover.
remain. 2. Incorrectly installed processor 2. Install the cover correctly.
cover
3. Faulty cover open/close sensor 3. Replace the sensor.
4. Broken sensor harness 4. Repair or replace the harness.
W-LP-2778 Processing section tank cover Processing cover opened when
(D762A/B) is open. starting processing.
Close the processing section 1. The processor cover is opened. 1. Close the cover.
tank cover. 2. Incorrectly installed processor 2. Install the cover correctly.
cover
W-LP-2779 Dryer exit section cover (D766) is Dryer exit section cover opened
open. during processing.
Processing canceled. Paper may 1. The dryer exit section cover is 1. Close the cover.
remain. opened.
2. Incorrectly installed dryer exit 2. Install the cover correctly.
section cover
W-LP-2780 Dryer exit section cover (D766) is Dryer section cover opened when
open. starting processing.
Close the dryer exit section cover. 1. The dryer exit section cover is 1. Close the cover.
opened.
2. Incorrectly installed dryer exit 2. Install the cover correctly.
section cover
I-LP-2781 Night temperature control not Night-time preheating is unnecessary
required. because processing solution
temperature is high enough.
The system is shut down. Temperature of all tanks is more than
30 °C when starting night-time
preheating.
W-LP-2782 Time to replace blades in Two years elapsed after the blades Replace the blades and click the
processor section. have been replaced. [Replace] button in Menu 1640
“Installation Information Setup”
Consult your technical screen.
representative.
E-LP-2801 Exhaust fan (F600/F601/F602)/ FAN_ER3 CTL: Fan stop detection 3
electrical section cooling fan (F600, F602 and F631)
(F631) malfunction. (Causes of the error message)
1. Disconnected fan connector 1. Connect the connector securely.
Consult your technical 2. Faulty fan 2. Replace the fan.
representative.
E-LP-2802 Feed section exhaust fan (F604) FAN_ER4 CTL: Fan stop detection 4
malfunction. (F604)
Consult your technical 1. Disconnected fan connector 1. Connect the connector securely.
representative. 2. Faulty fan 2. Replace the fan.
E-LP-2803 Feed section cooling fan(F607) FAN_ER5 CTL: Fan stop detection 5
abnormal. (F607)
3-48

E-LP-2854 Power source section cooling FAN_ER2 CTL: Fan stop detection 2
fan(F630) abnormal. (F630)
E-LP-2860 Processor tank exhaust fan FAN_ER7 CTL: Fan stop detection 7 3
(F704) malfunction. (F704)
Shut down scanner with 1. Disconnected fan connector 1. Connect the connector securely.
emergency stop button and 2. Faulty fan 2. Replace the fan.
representative.
E-LP-2861 Fuse in CTL27 circuit board D+5Va_FUSE_ER CTL: Printer 5V
blown. fuse (F201) burned out detection
Shut down scanner with 1. Faulty 5V supply 1. Check the 5V supply and if
emergency stop button and necessary, replace the PWR27
restart it. If problems persist, circuit board.
consult your technical 2. Faulty 5V supply on CTL27 circuit 2. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
representative. board
E-LP-2862 Fuse in CTL27 circuit board D+5Va_FUSE_ER CTL: Processor
blown. 5V fuse (F202) burned out detection
consult your technical 2. Faulty 5V supply on CTL27 circuit 2. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
representative. board
E-LP-2863 Fuse in OPA27 circuit board D+5Va_FUSE_ER CTL: Optional
blown. magazine system 5V fuse (F251)
burned out detection
emergency stop button and 1. Faulty 5V supply 1. Check the 5V supply and if
restart it. If problems persist, necessary, replace the PWR27
consult your technical circuit board.
representative. 2. Faulty 5V supply on CTL27 circuit 2. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
board
E-LP-2864 24V power supply failure P+24V_FAIL CTL: 24V error
occurred in CTL27 circuit board. detection (CTL)
Shut down scanner with 1. Faulty DC power supply 1. Replace the DC power supply.
emergency stop button and 2. Faulty CTL27 circuit board 2. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
representative.
E-LP-2865 24V power supply failure P+24V_FAIL OPA: 24V error
occurred in OPA27 circuit board. detection (OPA)
Shut down scanner with 1. Faulty DC power supply 1. Replace the DC power supply.
emergency stop button and 2. Faulty OPA27 circuit board 2. Replace the POA27 circuit board.
representative.
E-LP-2866 Fuse in PWR27 circuit board PWR_FUSE_ER: PWR circuit board
blown. +24V20 power supply fuse burned
out detection
consult your technical 2. Faulty PWR27 circuit board 2. Replace the PWR27 circuit board.
representative.
3-49

E-LP-2867 An error occurred in CTL27 CAN_tn_ON CTL/OPA: No CAN
circuit board. termination of CTL27 circuit board
(without optional sorter); no CAN
Shut down scanner with termination of OPA27 circuit board
emergency stop button and (with optional sorter); or faulty CPU
restart it. If problems persist, (Causes of the error message)
consult your technical 1. Faulty CAN connection 1. Check CAN connection.
representative. 2. Faulty CTL27 circuit board 2. Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
E-LP-2868 A hardware failure occurred in ADC Busy error (AD convert failure)
CTL27 circuit board. (Cause of the error message)
Faulty CTL27 circuit board Restart the system. If the error
Shut down scanner with occurs again, replace the CTL27
emergency stop button and circuit board.
representative.
E-LP-2869 An error occurred during FCAN API internal failure
communication with CTL27 (Causes of the error message)
circuit board. 1. Faulty CAN connection 1. Check CAN connection
2. Faulty CTL27 circuit board 2. Restart the system. If the error
representative.
E-LP-2870 An error occurred in CTL27 FCAN Config not set up
circuit board. (Cause of the error message)
Faulty CTL27 circuit board. Restart the system. If the error
representative.
E-LP-2871 LDD27 circuit board power 24V power supply failure detection
source abnormal. (Cause of the error message)
A+24V power not supplied to LDD27 Check A+24V supply and if
Shut down the scanner with circuit board necessary, replace the PWR27 circuit
emergency stop button and board.
representative.
+5V power not supplied to LDD27 Check +5V supply and if necessary,
Shut down the scanner with circuit board replace the PWR27 circuit board.
representative.
+12V power not supplied to LDD27 Check +12V supply and if necessary,
representative.
3-50

E-LP-2874 LDD27 circuit board power (-)12V power supply failure detection
A-12V power not supplied to LDD27 Check A-12V system and replace the
Shut down the scanner with circuit board PWR27 circuit board.
3
representative.
E-LP-2876 LDD circuit board power source Interlock power supply (+12V) error
abnormal. detection
Shut down the scanner with IL+12V power not supplied to LDD27 Check IL+12V system and replace
emergency stop button and circuit board the LDD27 circuit board.
representative.
E-LP-2877 LDD27 circuit board power L+9Vpower supply error detection
Abnormal BL+9V power circuit on Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
Shut down the scanner with LDD27 circuit board
representative.
E-LP-2878 LDD27 circuit board power L+5Vpower supply error detection
source abnormal. (Causes of the error message)
1. Abnormal RL+5V power circuit on 1. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
emergency stop button and 2. Abnormal GL+5V power circuit on 2. Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
restart it. If problems persist, LDD27 circuit board
representative.
E-LP-2879 LDD27 circuit board power A+5Vpower supply error detection
Abnormal A+5V power circuit on Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
representative.
E-LP-2880 LDD27 circuit board power A-5Vpower supply error detection
Abnormal A-5V power circuit on Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
representative.
E-LP-2883 LDD27 circuit board A/D A/D reference voltage error detection
converter abnormal. (Cause of the error message)
Abnormal REF+5V power circuit on Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
Consult your technical LDD27 circuit board
representative.
E-LP-2886 LDD27 circuit board fuse (+24V) power supply fuse burned out
blowout. detection
Shut down the scanner with 1. Faulty A+24V supply 1. Check A+24V supply and if
representative.
3-51

E-LP-2888 LDD27 circuit board fuse (+12V) power supply fuse burned out
blowout. detection
Shut down the scanner with 1. Burned out A+12V power supply 1. Check A+12V system and replace
emergency stop button and fuse the PWR27 circuit board.
representative.
E-LP-2889 LDD27 circuit board fuse (-12V) power supply fuse burned out
blowout. detection
Shut down the scanner with 1. Burned out A-12V power supply 1. Check A-12V system and replace
emergency stop button and fuse the PWR27 circuit board.
representative.
E-LP-2592 Exposing process failed. Exposure time-out detection
Remove paper in printer and Paper is detected but exposure Remove paper from the printer.
close door. process does not complete within the
specified time.
If problem persists, consult your
E-LP-2893 LDD27 circuit board power P+5V power supply error detection
No P+5V power supply to LDD27 Check P+5V supply and if necessary,
representative.
E-LP-2894 LDD27 circuit board power LDR power supply error detection
Abnormal R+5V or R-5V power circuit Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
Shut down the scanner with on LDD27 circuit board
representative.
E-LP-2895 LDD27 circuit board power LDB power supply error detection
Abnormal B+5V or B-5V power circuit Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
Shut down the scanner with on LDD27 circuit board
representative.
E-LP-2897 LDD27 circuit board power SL+8V power supply error detection
Abnormal SL+8V power circuit on Replace the LDD27 circuit board.
representative.
W-Q0-4001 Selected job is not found. – Check the job ID, then select it again.
Check the job ID, then select it

again.
W-Q0-4002 Selected job is not found in the – Check the job ID, then select it again.
list.
Check the job ID, then select it

again.
3-52

W-Q0-4003 Job ID is not selected. – Check the job ID, then press the
[Run] button again.
Check the job ID, then press
[Run] again.
W-Q0-4004 Specified job cannot be – Select another job.
performed. 3
Select another job.
E-Q0-4015 Cannot disconnect from server/ (Cause of the error message) Check the network connection of the
DIC2. An error occurred when DIC2 referring to Subsection 3.3.13.
disconnecting communication
If problems persist after restart, between the server and DIC2 (only
consult your technical when the system is shut down).
representative. Communication between the server
and DIC2 cannot be disconnected.
E-Q0-4016 Connection error to server/DIC2 (Cause of the error message) Check the network connection of the
occurred. Check connection to Communication error between the DIC2 referring to Subsection 3.3.13.
server/DIC2, then retry it. server and DIC2
To continue processing with

stand-alone mode, select [Stand-
alone] in “Server/DIC2
Operation Environment Setup”
screen.
When “Stand-alone Mode” is

selected, status
E-Q0-4019 Connection error occurred. (Cause of the error message) Check the network connection of the
Connection error DIC2 referring to Subsection 3.3.13.
Couldn’t find destination to which (WFMonitor is not found.)
server/DIC2 is connected.
Check network connection. If this

error persists, consult your
W-Q0-4020 Cannot operate this job because – Select another job, or retry it after the
it is being processed. process is completed.
Select another job, or retry it after

the process is completed.
E-Q0-4025 Error occurred in the job. (Cause of the error message) Check the processing status of the
An error occurred in a job in this job or order. If an error is found, take
Check the job or order. device. an appropriate measure. If the
problem persists, issue the order
again.
I-Q0-4027 Cancel this job? – –
W-Q0-4028 This job was deleted or changed. – Press the [Refresh] button to refresh
the displaying list, make necessary
Couldn’t execute job. adjustments, and then try again.
Press [Refresh] to refresh the

displaying list.
Couldn’t correct nor add job. adjustments, and then try again.

displaying list.
3-53

Couldn’t cancel job. adjustments, and then try again.

displaying list.
Couldn’t set express to job. adjustments, and then try again.

displaying list.
Couldn’t cancel express setting adjustments, and then try again.
for job.

displaying list.
Couldn’t hold job. adjustments, and then try again.

displaying list.
Couldn’t cancel holding job. adjustments, and then try again.

displaying list.
W-Q0-4035 Processing job. – Wait until it is completed, and then
retry it.
Couldn’t execute job.
Please wait for a moment, then

retry it.
retry it.
Couldn’t correct nor add job.

retry it.
retry it.
Couldn’t cancel job.

retry it.
retry it.
Couldn’t set express to job.

retry it.
retry it.
Couldn’t cancel express setting
for job.

retry it.
3-54

retry it.
Couldn’t hold job.

retry it.
3
retry it.
Couldn’t cancel holding job.

retry it.
I-Q0-4042 Film size and film type selected in – To continue printing, press the [OK]
this job are not supported by the button. To replace the carrier, press
current carrier. the [Cancel] button.
To continue printing, press [OK]

button.To replace the carrier,
press [Cancel] button.
E-SP-4101 Film scanner is not connected. USB connection is OFF when
starting.
Turn on the power and then try (Causes of the error message)
again. 1. Scanner power supply is OFF. 1. Turn ON the film scanner.
2. Disconnected USB cable 2. Connect the USB cable correctly.
I-SP-4102 Upgrading the film scanner. CBF file version and installed one Wait until update is completed.
mismatch
It takes about 10minutes.
I-SP-4103 Upgrading of the scanner is Upgrade is completed. Restart the film scanner.
completed.
Restart the film scanner.

W-SP-4104 Turn on the power to the film USB connection is OFF when
scanner or connect the USB scanner correction of pre-operational
cable. check or menu for film is selected in
production screen.
1. Scanner power supply is OFF. 1. Turn ON the film scanner.
2. Disconnected USB cable 2. Connect the USB cable correctly.
W-SP-4105 Film scanner is starting up. Scanner correction of pre-operational
check or start of maintenance menu
Wait until the film scanner starts is requested when initializing the film
up and then try again. scanner.
1. Scanner correction of pre- 1. Wait until scanner initialization is
operational check is requested. completed.
2. Start of maintenance menu is 2. Restart the scanner and perform
requested. the maintenance menu.
W-SP-4106 Operation cannot be switched to (Causes of the error message)
other services because the 1. Menu is changed during scanning. 1. Wait until scanning is completed.
scanner is in operation. 2. Menu is changed during scanner 2. Wait until scanner correction is
correction. completed.
3. Menu is changed during start of 3. Wait until the film scanner start-up
film scanner. is completed.
I-SP-4107 Upgrading the carrier software. Carrier program file stored in the PC
HDD and one in the carrier differs.
It takes about 5minutes. (Causes of the error message)
1. Updated film scanner software 1. Wait until upgrading of software is
completed.
2. Damaged version information file 2. Wait until upgrading of software is
in HDD completed.
3-55

E-SP-4108 Film scanner ID is invalid. Scanner ID is (0xFFFFFFFF).
Consult your technical Unregistered film scanner ID Register ID in Menu 0344 “Film
representative. Scanner ID Registration”.
E-SP-4109 The parameter of CTL circuit Checking shipping, installation, start
boards is invalid. of working or actual optical
magnification information
Consult your technical (Causes of the error message)
representative. 1. Replaced CTL25 circuit board. 1. Perform reading in Menu 0350
“Scanner Parameter Check/
Update”.
2. Damaged data in circuit board 2. Perform reading in Menu 0350
“Scanner Parameter Check/
Update”.
E-SP-4110 The parameter of CCD circuit Checking AD timing or OFD voltage
boards is invalid. information
Consult your technical 1. Replaced CCD unit 1. Perform “OFD Voltage Adjustment”
representative. and “Gray Pixel Detection” in Menu
0351 “CCD Adjustment”.
2. Damaged data in circuit board 2. Perform “OFD Voltage Adjustment”
and “Gray Pixel Detection” in Menu
0351 “CCD Adjustment”.
E-SP-4112 Error occurred during LED self- LED self diagnose result is
diagnosis. degeneracy by condition variation
information.
1. Abnormal software 1. Restart the system. If the error
occurs again, reinstall the
software.
2. Disconnected connector from 2. Connect the connector securely.
CTL25 circuit board
3. Faulty LED circuit board 3. Replace the LED circuit board.
4. Faulty DLE25 circuit board 4. Replace the DLE25 circuit board.
5. Faulty CPU on CTL25 circuit board 5. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
E-SP-4113 Error occurred during Piezoelectric self diagnose result is
piezoelectric actuator self- degeneracy by condition variation
diagnosis. information.
software.
2. Disconnected connector from 2. Connect the connector securely.
CTL25 circuit board
3. Faulty PZR22 circuit board 3. Replace the PZR22 circuit board.
4. Faulty CPU on CTL25 circuit board 4. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
E-SP-4114 Scanner light source is in LED light source is degeneracy by
abnormal state. condition variation information.
1. Abnormal temperature control 1. Refer to the message displayed at
the same time.
2. Error in self diagnosis at start-up 2. Refer to the message displayed at
the same time.
E-SP-4115 An unknown lower mask type is Lower mask type is “0” (no effect) by Refer to W-SP-4426 if it is displayed.
recognized. condition variation information of auto
film carrier.
Install the carrier again. (Causes of the error message)
1. Lower mask in carrier not installed. 1. Install the lower mask into the
If problems persist, consult your carrier.
technical representative. 2. Mask detection failed. 2. Install the lower mask into the
carrier.
3-56

E-SP-4116 Installed lower mask is different Mask type set up differs from
from the one specified on screen. detected one by condition variation
information.
1. Set up mask is “full” but mask in 1. Match the set lower mask type to
carrier is “half”.
2. Set up mask is “half” but mask in
that of the mask in the carrier.
2. Match the set lower mask type to
3
carrier is “full”. that of the mask in the carrier.
E-SP-4117 Upgrading of the scanner system Result of downloading to circuit board
failed. with different version is abnormal.
Restart the film scanner. If 1. USB not connected during 1. Reconnect the USB cable.
problems persist, consult your upgrading
technical representative. 2. Turned OFF film scanner during 2. Turn ON the film scanner.
upgrading.
I-SP-4118 Film scanner is starting up. Film scanner is initializing when the
PC is under initialization.
Please wait. (Cause of the error message)
Film scanner starting up. Wait until the film scanner start-up is
completed.
E-SP-4119 Free space on the C drive is less This message appears when the free Reserve more than 1GB of free
than 1GB. space on the “C” drive is less than space on the “C” drive by deleting
1GB during initialization. unnecessary files.
Film input service cannot be
performed.

representative.
E-SP-4180 Initializing of communication for • Double started communication
USB failed. driver process (LukeUsbDp.exe)
• PC object creation failed
Restart the film scanner. If • Control section USB drive process
problems persist, consult your (LukeUsbDp.exe) failed
technical representative. (Causes of the error message)
1. Incorrectly installed DIC2 1. Reinstall the S2 software.
2. Abnormal software 2. Reinstall the S2 software.
E-SP-4184 Couldn’t generate log file. Main control D drive capacity will Delete unnecessary files from the D
below 100MB. drive of the HDD.
Restart the film scanner. If
problems persist, consult your
E-SP-4185 A communication error occurred Pre-starting inspection detects error. Restart the system. If the error
between Imaging Controller and (Causes of the error message) occurs again, reinstall the software.
CTL circuit boards. 1. Abnormal software
2. Failed transmission/reception:
Restart the film scanner. If Electrical noise occurred
problems persist, consult your 3. Failed transmission/reception:
technical representative. Faulty connection
4. Failed transmission/reception:
Abnormal software
5. Timeout: Closed LukeUsbDp.exe
or abnormal software
W-SP-4186 The USB Ver.1.1 is connected LukeUsbDp.exe detects USB ver.1.1. –
between SP500 and Imaging (Causes of the error message)
Controller. 1. The PC’s USB is not USB Version
2.0.
Connect the USB Ver.2.0 2. The hub for USB Version 1.1 is
correctly. connected.
3. Poorly connected connector
3-57

W-SP-4311 Carrier is not installed. Scanner PC detects no carrier when
it receives scanner correction,
Install the carrier. leading end frame detection or
scanning command.
1. Carrier initializing or removed. 1. Install the carrier and wait until its
initialization is completed, then
perform the operation.
2. Communication error 2. Clear the cause of error.
I-SP-4312 Correcting the scanner. Please (Cause of the error message) Wait until the scanner correction is
wait a moment. Correcting scanner completed.
It takes about 1minute.

I-SP-4314 The scanner temperature control (Cause of the error message)
is not completed. LED temperature control not Wait until the LED is warmed up.
completed.
Please wait.
After the completion of

temperature control, the selected
menu will be automatically
started.
W-SP-4316 The holder is installed in the (Cause of the error message)
carrier. Holder installed in manual film carrier. Remove the holder and close the
calibration cover.
Couldn’t perform the scanner
correction.
Remove the holder.

W-SP-4318 The film remains in the carrier. (Cause of the error message)
Film inserted when pre-operational Remove the film and perform the
Couldn’t perform the scanner check scanner correction. scanner correction.
correction.
Remove the film, and then

perform the scanner correction.
W-SP-4322 Temperature control error is in Error occurs in LED temperature Check LED light source temperature
the scanner section. control. and condition of the CTL25 circuit
(Causes of the error message) board in Menu 0341 “I/O Check”.
It is possible to continue printing, 1. Abnormal harness between LED 1. Reconnect or replace the harness.
but the color of the printing may and CTL circuit boards
vary a little. 2. Faulty LED light source assembly 2. Replace the LED light source
assembly.
I-SP-4323 You cannot change mask, film (Causes of the error message)
type and film feeding method in 1. Changed film type after insertion 1. Reset after removing the film.
scanning.
2. Changed film type, feed method, 2. Reset after removing the film.
Remove film and set again. underexposure level or lower mask
type during inserting film
3. Changed film type, feed method or 3. Reset after removing the film.
lower mask type during scanning
I-SP-4324 Scanning conditions are not Scanning condition calculation failed
decided. when starting scanning.
Check if the diffusion box, carrier 1. Memory exception 1. Restart the system.
or mask is correctly installed.
3-58

W-SP-4331 The parameter to request pre- Mask information not set.
scanning is incorrect. (Cause of the error message)
Wrong print size setting out of order Check the print size setting in Menu
Check the carrier, film mask and 0220 “Print Size Setup” and correct it.
the print size.
If this error persists, consult your

3
W-SP-4335 The scanner correction hasn’t Scanned with carrier not performed Perform the scanner correction in the
been performed with this carrier. scanner correction pre-operational check screen.
Perform the scanner correction.

W-SP-4337 Film holder was removed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Holder not installed or installed 1. Install the holder correctly.
To continue operation, insert the improperly.
film holder again. 2. Calibration cover closed. 2. Open the calibration cover.
3. Faulty bit sensor 3. Check the bit sensor in Menu 0422
To quit operation, click [i] button “MFC10AR Input Check” and
at the lower left-hand side of the replace the SSA25 circuit board.
screen and then click [Stop the
order] button.
W-SP-4341 The range for cropping is (Cause of the error message)
incorrect. Exceeded cropping range Perform cropping within the image.
Perform cropping with the image.

W-SP-4343 Pre-scan failed. (Causes of the error message) Refer to the message displayed at
1. Film feed error occurred during the same time.
Perform it again. pre-scanning If another message is not displayed,
2. Pixel shift error occurred in perform Menu 0420 “Mask Position
If this error persists, consult your scanning light source section Adjustment”.
technical representative. during pre-scanning
3. Incorrect scanning range set for
pre-scanning
W-SP-4344 Pre-scan failed. (Causes of the error message) Refer to the message displayed at the
1. Film feed error occurred during same time.
Perform it again. pre-scanning If another message is not displayed,
technical representative. during pre-scanning
pre-scanning
W-SP-4345 Fine-scan failed. (Causes of the error message) Refer to the message displayed at the
1. Film feed error occurred during same time.
Perform it again. fine-scanning If another message is not displayed,
technical representative. during fine-scanning
fine-scanning
W-SP-4346 Couldn’t read the bar code on the (Causes of the error message)
film. 1. Notched or edge-fogged film 1. Check the film and continue
scanning if necessary.
Continue processing. 2. Film without bar-code 2. Check bar-code and continue
scanning if necessary.
W-SP-4348 A film is not inserted into the Leading end frame is detected before
carrier. receiving film insertion signal.
Insert a film, and then retry 1. Incorrectly inserted film 1. Insert the film correctly.
printing. 2. Abnormal software 2. Restart the system. If the error
software.
3-59

W-SP-4349 A film type is not selected. Scanner detects leading end frame
without setting original type.
Select a film type, and then retry (Causes of the error message)
printing. 1. Incorrectly set film type 1. Set film type correctly
software.
E-SP-4350 Reading of scanning condition Scanning condition parameter
file failed. reading failed.
System may not be installed Abnormal software Restart the system. If the error
properly. occurs again, reinstall the software.

representative.
W-SP-4355 Writing data to hard disk failed. Disk writing failure
Consult your technical 1. Lack of HDD capacity 1. Delete unnecessary files from the
representative. HDD.
2. Faulty software 2. Restart the system software.If the
error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
3. Faulty HDD 3. Replace the HDD.
W-SP-4356 Reading data from hard disk Reading from disk failure
failed. (Causes of the error message)
Consult your technical error occurs again, reinstall the
representative. system software.
W-SP-4357 No files are found in the hard Search disk file failure
disk. (Causes of the error message)
Consult your technical error occurs again, reinstall the
representative. system software.
W-SP-4358 Close the calibration cover. Calibration cover not closed. Close the calibration cover.
Couldn’t perform the scanner

correction.
I-SP-4363 The scanner temperature control (Cause of the error message)
is not completed. LED light source temperature control Wait until temperature control is
not completed. completed.
Please wait.
After the completion of

temperature control, the selected
menu will be automatically
started.
I-SP-4365 Closing the maintenance (Cause of the error message)
process. Maintenance process finishing Wait a moment.
Please wait.
E-SP-4369 Scanning conditions are not Scanning condition (combination of
decided. diffusion box, carrier and mask)
decision error
Check if the diffusion box, carrier (Cause of the error message)
or mask is correctly installed. Incorrectly seated mask Install the mask correctly.

3-60

E-SP-4370 An incorrect scanning condition Entered parameter (magnification,
was entered. range etc.) is zero or below.
Check the printing magnification 1. Incorrect print size value is set up. 1. Set print size up correctly.
and the scanning range. 2. Damaged scanning parameter in 2. Reinstall the system software.

HDD
3
W-SP-4372 The printing magnification Printing magnification exceeds upper
exceeds the upper limit. limit.
Decrease the printing Damaged scanning condition Restart the system software.If the
magnification. parameter file in HDD error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
W-SP-4373 The printing magnification Printing magnification exceeds lower
exceeds the lower limit. limit.
Increase the printing Damaged scanning condition Restart the system software.If the
magnification. parameter file in HDD error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
W-SP-4374 The cropping range is too small. Too small cropping range Increase the cropping range.
Increase the cropping range.

W-SP-4379 Processing the former film. Next processing cannot be performed Restart the system software.If the
due to processing previous film error occurs again, reinstall the
Retry printing after it is system software.
completed.
W-SP-4381 Carrier initialization failed. NC100AR carrier is inoperable at pre- Remove the carrier and reinstall it. If
operational checks. another error occurs, take measures
Couldn’t perform the scanner against it.
correction.
Install the carrier again.

W-SP-4383 Couldn’t perform the scanner Scanner correction demand is Execute scanner correction again.
correction. received during stabilizing
temperature control and temperature
Perform the scanner correction control error occurs before it
again. stabilizes.
W-SP-4384 Carrier is not installed. Scanner correction demand is Wait until the carrier initialization
received when the carrier is not completes and perform the scanner
Couldn’t perform the scanner installed. correction again.
correction.
Install the carrier.

W-SP-4386
E-SP-4390 A communication error occurred No response from the DIC2
between the scanner and (Cause of the error message)
Imaging Controller. Abnormal software Restart the system. If the error
occurs again, reinstall the software.
Restart Imaging Controller
section. If problems persist,
representative.
E-SP-4392 A communication error occurred No response from carrier module
between the scanner and the (Cause of the error message)
carrier. Abnormal software Restart the system. If the error
3-61

E-SP-4393 A communication error occurred No response from scanner module
between the scanner and the (Cause of the error message)
scanner section. Abnormal software Restart the system. If the error
E-SP-4395 A communication error occurred No response from image creation
between the scanner and image module
generating section. (Cause of the error message)
Abnormal software Restart the system. If the error
Restart the film scanner. If occurs again, reinstall the software.
I-SP-4396 Center memory space is Cannot be obtained center memory
insufficient. space
Please wait. Abnormal software Restart the system. If the error
I-SP-4399 Initialization is in progress. (Cause of the error message)
Initializing Wait until initializing is completed.
Please wait.
E-SP-4401 A time-out error occurred during No response obtained as against
the CTL circuit board command command to H8S
was issued. (Causes of the error message)
1. Software overloaded 1. Restart the system. If the error
Restart the film scanner. If occurs again, reinstall the system
problems persist, consult your software.
technical representative. 2. Abnormal harness 2. Reconnect the connector or repair
the harness.
the harness.
the harness.
the CTL circuit board command command to DSP
the harness.
3-62

Imaging Controller command was command to DIC2
issued. (Causes of the error message)
1. Disconnected USB cable 1. Connect the USB cable to the
Restart the film scanner. If DIC2 and the scanner correctly.
2. Abnormal PPC software in CTL25
circuit board
2. Check that the LED on the CTL25
circuit board lights. If not, replace
3
the CTL25 circuit board.
occurs again, reinstall the system
software.
the auto dark correction table command of automatic darkness
was being created. correction to DSP
Restart the film scanner. If 1. Faulty harness between CCD and 1. Connect the harness correctly or
problems persist, consult your CTL repair it.
technical representative. 2. Faulty CTL25 circuit board 2. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
3. Faulty CCD circuit board 3. Replace the CCD unit.
E-SP-4408 The downloading of the data from No downloading completion
Imaging Controller failed. information received when
downloading response from DIC2 is
Restart the film scanner. If not good.
problems persist, consult your (Causes of the error message)
technical representative. 1. Disconnected USB cable 1. Connect the USB cable to the
DIC2 and the scanner correctly.
2. Abnormal PPC software in CTL25 2. Check that the LED on the CTL25
circuit board circuit board lights. If not, replace
the CTL25 circuit board.
software.
E-SP-4409 Downloading of the data to the Program downloading to DSP failed.
DSP failed. Causes of the error message)
Restart the film scanner. If 2. Abnormal software 2. Restart the system. If the error
problems persist, consult your occurs again, reinstall the system
technical representative. software.
E-SP-4410 Uploading of the data to Imaging Uploading response from DIC2 is
Controller failed. not good.
Restart the film scanner. If 1. Faulty USB IF between CTL and 1. Connect the USB cable correctly
problems persist, consult your DIC2 or replace the cable and IF parts.
technical representative. 2. Faulty DIC2 HDD 2. Restart the system. If the error
software or replace the HDD.
E-SP-4411 Creating of the bright correction Brightness correction response Restart the system software. If the
file information failed. failure same error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
Restart the system. If problems
persist, consult your technical
representative.
3-63

W-SP-4412 Auto focus failed. Peak detecting retry over at AF
execution
Check if the film is set correctly. (Causes of the error message)
1. Film (error occurs by specific 1. Correct the film (replace the
frame or film) mount).
• Low contrast
• Heavily curled films
• Excessively thin or thick mounts
2. Carrier (situation is changed by 2. Remove the carrier and reinstall it
carriers or masks) or perform carrier self-diagnostics.
• Carrier not seated on carrier
base correctly
• Mask not seated correctly
• Faulty carrier pressure system
3. Scanner (frequent causes) 3. Close “I/O Check” screen to check
• Abnormal focus position the mechanical initializing error
adjustment value and then inspect the lens.
• Loss of synchronization of lens
motor
W-SP-4413 Auto focus failed. No contrast at AF
Check if the film is set correctly. 1. Abnormal focus position 1. Perform the focus position
adjustment value adjustment.
2. Low contrast film 2. –
3. Scanned without film in MFC10AR 3. Insert a film and execute the
operation again.
E-SP-4414 Auto focus failed. Motor error at AF (AF error received
from H8S)
Restart the system. If problems (Cause of the error message)
persist, consult your technical Faulty harness between CCD25 and Reconnect, repair or replace the
representative. CTL25 circuit board harness.
E-SP-4415 A time-out error occurred when No action from DSP at starting up
the DSP is started up. (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected connector to 1. Connect the connector correctly.
Restart the system. If problems CCD25 circuit board
persist, consult your technical 2. Faulty cable between CTL25 and 2. Replace the cable.
representative. CCD25 circuit boards
4. Faulty CCD25 circuit board 4. Replace the CCD unit.
E-SP-4421 The LED rated current exceeds At CCD auto adjusting
the limit during the OFD voltage (Causes of the error message)
adjustment. 1. Shielding in optical path 1. Remove the shielding.
2. Faulty CCD or CCD25 circuit 2. Replace the CCD unit.
Restart the system. If problems board
persist, consult your technical 3. Faulty LED-B 3. Replace the LED assembly.
representative.
I-SP-4422 Performing the dark correction. Darkness correction is processing. Wait until correction is completed.
Please wait.
I-SP-4423 The full mask is not installed in At scanner correction, brightness
the carrier. correction or defect pixel creating
Install it. 1. No 135F lower mask 1. Install the 135F mask.
2. 135 upper mask is half-frame 2. Install the 135F mask.
mask.
3. Not seated 135F lower mask 3. Install the 135F lower mask or
replace the mask.
4. Foreign matter in scanner opening 4. Remove the foreign matter.
5. Scanner optical axis misalignment 5. Adjust the optical axis.
3-64

W-SP-4424 The half mask is not installed in At scanner correction, brightness
the carrier. correction or defect pixel creating
Install it. 1. No 135H lower mask 1. Install the 135H mask.
2. Upper mask is full-frame mask. 2. Install the 135H mask.
3. Not seated 135H lower mask 3. Install the 135H lower mask or
replace the mask.
3
W-SP4425 Detecting of the mask failed. At scanner correction, brightness
correction or defect pixel creating
Install the carrier and the mask (Causes of the error message)
correctly. 1. Required 135 upper and lower 1. Install the required 135 mask.
mask not installed
2. Diffusion plate of 135 lower mask 2. Fit the diffusion plate to the 135
removed lower mask or replace the mask.
W-SP-4426 Detecting of the mask failed. At scanner correction, brightness
correction or defect pixel creating
Install the carrier and the mask (Causes of the error message)
correctly. 1. Required 135 upper and lower 1. Install the required 135 mask.
mask not installed
2. Diffusion plate of 135 lower mask 2. Fit the diffusion plate to the 135
removed lower mask or replace the mask.
W-SP-4431 The LED temperature is not (Causes of the error message)
stabilized. 1. Increased LED temperature due to 1. Decrease the room temperature.
too high a room temperature (32˚C
or higher)
2. Blocked opening for light source 2. Clear the opening.
section exhaust fan
3. Clogged scanner air filter 3. Clean the air filter.
4. Too low a room temperature(10˚C 4. Increase the room temperature.
or lower)
5. Faulty LED heater or LED light 5. Replace the LED heater and
source temperature sensor sensor assembly.
6. Faulty LED heater or LED light 6. Replace the harness.
source temperature sensor
harness
7. Faulty DLE25 circuit board 7. Replace the circuit board.
E-SP-4435 All channels for IR-LED are Startup initializing
disconnected. (Causes of the error message)
1. Faulty harness between DLE25 1. Reconnect, repair or replace the
Consult your technical and LED25 circuit boards harness.
representative. 2. Faulty LED25 circuit board 2. Replace the circuit board.
E-SP-4436 All channels for B-LED are Startup initializing
E-SP-4437 All channels for G-LED are Startup initializing
3-65

E-SP-4438 All channels for R-LED are Startup initializing
E-SP-4443 Temperature control interface (Causes of the error message)
connector is disconnected. 1. Disconnected temperature control 1. Connect the connector securely.
IF connection on CTL circuit board
Consult your technical 2. Broken temperature control IF 2. Repair or replace the harness.
representative. harness
E-SP-4444 Light source temperature Temperature exceeds sensor upper
exceeds the upper limit. limit and HW limiter activates.
Consult your technical 1. Temperature exceeds upper limit 1. Replace the LED assembly.
representative. (60°C).
2. Faulty temperature control circuit 2. Replace the DLE25 circuit board.
on DLE25 circuit board.
E-SP-4446 The fuse is blown out. (Causes of the error message)
1. Fuse (Fu1) burned out 1. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
(CTL25 CB) 2. Faulty voltage detecting circuit on 2. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
CTL25 circuit board
representative.
CTL25 circuit board
representative.
CTL25 circuit board
representative.
E-SP-4449 Piezoelectric actuator short- (Causes of the error message)
circuit. 1. Short circuit of piezoelectric 1. Replace the CCD unit.
actuator
It is possible to continue printing, 2. Faulty PZR22 circuit board 2. Replace the PZR22 circuit board.
but the resolution may be 3. Broken ON signal harness on 3. Repair or replace the harness.
deteriorated when you print with PZR22 circuit board
larger sizes than 4R.

representative.
E-SP-4450 Piezoelectric actuator short- (Causes of the error message)
circuit. 1. Short circuit of piezoelectric 1. Replace the CCD unit.
actuator
It is possible to continue printing, 2. Faulty PZR22 circuit board 2. Replace the PZR22 circuit board.
but the resolution may be 3. Broken ON signal harness on 3. Repair or replace the harness.
deteriorated when you print with PZR22 circuit board
larger sizes than 4R.

representative.
E-SP-4451 Electrical failure occurred. (Cause of the error message)
Short circuit in PZR22 circuit board Replace the PZR22 circuit board.
(PZR22 CB)

representative.
3-66

E-SP-4452 Exhaust fan stopped. (Causes of the error message)
1. Broken harness between CTL and 1. Repair or replace the harness.
Restart the film scanner. If fan
problems persist, consult your 2. Faulty fan 2. Replace the fan.
E-SP-4453 Exhaust fan stopped. (Causes of the error message) 3
1. Broken harness between CTL and 1. Repair or replace the harness.
Restart the film scanner. If fan
problems persist, consult your 2. Faulty fan 2. Replace the fan.
E-SP-4454 Error detected while checking (Causes of the error message)
RAM on CPU. 1. Faulty RAM 1. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
2. Faulty communication circuit on 2. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
Restart the film scanner. If CTL25 circuit board
1. Fuse (F1) burned out 1. Replace the DLE25 circuit board.
(DLE25 CB) 2. Faulty voltage detecting circuit on 2. Replace the DLE25 circuit board.
DLE25 circuit board
Consult your technical 3. Short circuit in harness 3. Replace the DLE25 circuit board.
representative.
1. Broken LED heater (LH311/ 1. Replace the LED assembly.
(DLE25 CB) LH312) wire
2. Faulty LED heater (LH311/LH312) 2. Replace the LED assembly.
Consult your technical 3. Faulty DLE25 circuit board 3. Replace the DLE25 circuit board.
representative.
1. Broken LED (L301R, L302G, 1. Replace the four LED cables.
(DLE25 CB) L303B, L304IR) wire
2. Faulty LED (L301R, L302G, 2. Replace the LED assembly.
Consult your technical L303B, L304IR)
representative. 3. Faulty DLE25 circuit board 3. Replace the DLE25 circuit board.
E-SP-4562 Detecting of the AF Lens home M201 is driven specified pulses but
position failed. D201 does not detect lens.
2. Disconnected CTL1 or CTL2 2. Connect the connector securely.
connector
3. Faulty D201 or M201 3. Replace the D201 or M201.
position failed. D201 does not detect lens or
continue to detect lens.
Restart the film scanner. If (Causes of the error message)
problems persist, consult your 1. Abnormal software 1. Restart the system. If the error
technical representative. occurs again, reinstall the system
software.
2. Disconnected CTL1 connector 2. Connect the connector securely.
position failed. D201 does not detect lens.
connector
3-67

E-SP-4565 The AF Lens control is abnormal. M201 is driven specified pulses but
D201 continue to detect lens.
problems persist, consult your 1.Abnormal software 1. Restart the system. If the error
software.
connector
D201 continue to detect lens.
software.
connector
D201 does not detect lens.
software.
connector
E-SP-4569 The AF Lens control is abnormal. AF termination signal cannot be
received.
software.
E-SP-4601 The control for the CTL25 circuit Abnormal CTL25 circuit board signal
board is abnormal. distribution module
E-SP-4602 The control for the CTL25 circuit Abnormal initialization of CTL25
board is abnormal. circuit board signal distribution
module
software.
E-SP-4603 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board signal
board is abnormal. distribution module transmitting error
3-68

board is abnormal. distribution module reception error
2. Faulty CTL25 circuit board
software.
2. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
3
board is abnormal. distribution module reception error
board is abnormal. distribution module memory pool
obtaining error
software.
releasing error
software.
obtaining error
software.
releasing error
software.
board is abnormal. distribution module memory
semaphore error
problems persist, consult your 1. Overload (abnormal software) 1. Restart the system. If the error
software.
semaphore return error
software.
3-69

semaphore reference error
software.
E-SP-4613 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board starting system
board is abnormal. initialization failed.
Restart the film scanner. If 1. Overload (abnormal software) 1. Restart the system. If the error
E-SP-4614 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board starting task
board is abnormal. creation failed.
E-SP-4615 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board starting mail box
E-SP-4616 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board starting alarm
board is abnormal. handler creation failed.
E-SP-4617 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board starting fixed
board is abnormal. length memory pool creation failed.
Restart the film scanner. If 1. Overload (abnormal software) 1 Restart the system. If the error
E-SP-4618 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board starting variable
board is abnormal. length memory pool creation failed.
E-SP-4619 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board starting event
E-SP-4620 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board starting task start
board is abnormal. failed.
3-70

E-SP-4621 The control for the CTL25 circuit CTL25 circuit board serial
board is abnormal. communication parity error
Restart the film scanner. If 1. Noise in signal transmission line 1. Press [Enter] to clear the error and
problems persist, consult your continue operation
technical representative. 2. Software overload (abnormal
software)
2. Restart the system. If the error
3
software.
board is abnormal. communication framing error
technical representative. 2. Software overload (abnormal 2. Restart the system. If the error
software) occurs again, reinstall the system
software.
board is abnormal. communication parity and framing
error
problems persist, consult your 1. Noise in signal transmission line 1. Press [Enter] to clear the error and
technical representative. continue operation
2. Software overload (abnormal 2. Restart the system. If the error
software.
3. Faulty CTL25 circuit board 3 Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
board is abnormal. communication overrun error
software.
board is abnormal. communication overrun and parity
error
software.
board is abnormal. communication overrun and framing
error
software.
3-71

board is abnormal. communication overrun, framing and
parity error
software.
board is abnormal. communication sending timeout
software.
board is abnormal. communication sending error
software.
board is abnormal. communication reception error
software.
board is abnormal. communication retry over
software.
E-SP-4632 An error occurred during (Causes of the error message)
to accessing of the CTL25 circuit 1. Software overload (abnormal 1. Restart the system. If the error
E-SP-4658 board external memory. software) occurs again, reinstall the system
software.
Restart the film scanner. If 2. Faulty CTL25 circuit board 2. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
W-SP-4659 The adjustment data for the (Causes of the error message)
CTL25 circuit board external 1. Software overload (abnormal 1. Restart the system. If the error
memory is corrupted. software) occurs again, reinstall the system
software.
3-72

E-SP-4660 The control for the CTL25 circuit (Causes of the error message)
to board is abnormal. 1. Software overload (abnormal 1. Restart the system. If the error
E-SP-4664 software) occurs again, reinstall the system
Restart the film scanner. If software.
problems persist, consult your 2. Faulty CTL25 circuit board 2. Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
3
E-SP-4665 An error occurred during (Causes of the error message)
accessing of the CTL25 circuit 1. Abnormal software 1. Restart the system. If the error
board external memory. occurs again, reinstall the system
software.
E-SP-4742 The setting for the piezoelectric (Cause of the error message)
actuator failed. Faulty CTL25 circuit board Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
Restart the system. If problems

representative.
W-SP-4744 Scanning was cancelled. Canceling executed
1. [Cancel] button is clicked during 1. Scan again if scanning is not
scanning completed.
2. Faulty keyboard 2. Replace the keyboard.
W-SP-4745 Setting of the dark correction At the time of scanning correction or
table failed. auto darkness correction
Restart the system. If problems Faulty CTL25 circuit board Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
representative.
E-SP-4748 The AE retry-over occurred. At the time of AF, scanner correction,
brightness correction, or AE
Restart the system. If problems (Causes of the error message)
persist, consult your technical 1. Faulty harness between CCD25 1. Reconnect or replace the harness.
representative. and CTL25 circuit boards
2. LED light amount too large 2. Perform Menu 0349 “LED Light
Amount Adjustment”.
3. Faulty CCD 3. Replace the CCD unit.
E-SP-4749 The retry-over of the DC offset At the time of starting up, scanner
adjustment occurred. correction, darkness correction or
auto darkness correction
persist, consult your technical 1. Faulty coaxial cable between 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
representative. CCD25 and ADC25 circuit boards
2. Faulty serial transmission cable 2. Reconnect or replace the cable.
between CCD25 and CTL25 circuit
boards
3. Faulty CTL25 circuit board 3. Replace the circuit board.
E-SP-4750 The listing-up overflow occurred Gray pixels more than the specified
in detecting the defected pixels. number of pixels were detected (Full
mode: 300 pixels, 1/4 mode: 100
Restart the system. If problems pixels, 1/8 mode: 100 pixels).
persist, consult your technical (Causes of the error message)
representative. 1. Faulty CCD unit 1. Restart the system software. If the
error occurs again, replace the
CCD unit.
2. Optical axis shifted 2. Perform Menu 0345 “Optical Axis
Adjustment”.
3. Foreign matter in optical path 3. Remove the foreign matter.
3-73

E-SP-4751 The five continuous defected Continuous five gray pixels in a
pixels were found. vertical or horizontal direction were
detected.
persist, consult your technical 1. Faulty CCD unit 1. Replace the CCD unit.
representative. 2. Optical axis shifted 2. Perform Menu 0345 “Optical Axis
Adjustment”.
E-SP-4752 The listing-up overflow of Gray pixels more than the specified
defected pixels occurred and the number of pixels were detected. Or
five continuous defected pixels continuous five gray pixels in a
were found. vertical or horizontal direction are
detected.
persist, consult your technical 1. Faulty CCD unit 1. Replace the CCD unit.
representative. 2. Optical axis shifted 2. Perform Menu 0345 “Optical Axis
Adjustment”.
E-SP-4753 The voltage adjustment for the Condition met error judgement at the
OFD1 failed. time of OFD1 adjustment.
Restart the system. If problems 1. Faulty CCD unit 1. Replace the CCD unit.
persist, consult your technical 2. Optical axis shifted 2. Perform Menu 0345 “Optical Axis
representative. Adjustment”.
E-SP-4754 The voltage adjustment for the Condition met error judgment at the
OFD2 failed. time of OFD2 adjustment.
Restart the system. If problems 1. Faulty CCD unit 1. Replace the CCD unit.
persist, consult your technical 2. Optical axis shifted 2. Perform Menu 0345 “Optical Axis
representative. Adjustment”.
E-SP-4755 Electrical failure occurred. At the time of starting up, DC offset or
AD timing adjustment
(CCD CB) (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected PS3 connector 1. Reconnect the two connectors.
Restart the system. If problems to CCD unit
persist, consult your technical 2. Faulty CCD25 circuit board 2. Replace the CCD unit.
representative. 3. Faulty power supply unit 3. Replace the power supply unit.
E-SP-4756 The PLD communication error of At the time of starting up, DC offset or
the CCD circuit board occurred. AD timing adjustment
Restart the system. If problems 1. Poorly connected serial cable 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
persist, consult your technical connector between CTL25 and
representative. CCD 25 circuit boards
3. Faulty CCD25 circuit board 3. Replace the circuit board.
E-SP-4757 A communication error occurred Result of R/W from DSP to EEPROM
in the CCD circuit board external of CCD25 circuit board was NG.
memory. (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected serial cable 1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
Restart the system. If problems connector between CTL25 and
persist, consult your technical CCD 25 circuit boards
representative. 2. Faulty CTL25 circuit board 2. Replace the circuit board.
3. Faulty CCD25 circuit board 3. Replace the circuit board.
E-SP-4758 Setting of the dark correction At the time of scanner correction or
table failed. auto darkness correction
Restart the system. If problems Faulty CTL25 circuit board Replace the circuit board.
representative.
3-74

E-SP-4759 Electrical failure occurred. (Causes of the error message)
(CCD CB +20V) to CCD unit
Restart the system. If problems 3. Faulty power supply unit 3. Replace the power supply unit.
representative.
3
(CCD CB -5V) to CCD unit
representative.
(CCD CB -12V) to CCD unit
representative.
(CCD CB +12V) to CCD unit
representative.
W-SP-4763 The accumulation time in Auto- At the time of scanner correction or
exposure adjustment reaches the brightness correction creation
maximum value. (Causes of the error message)
Check if there is no preventive 2. Faulty harness between CCD25 2. Reconnect or replace the harness.
object in the optical path. and CTL25 circuit boards
3. Faulty CCD 3. Replace the CCD unit.
E-SP-4764 The external memory of DSP is Result of DSP outside memory R/W
abnormal. was NG.
Restart the system. If problems Faulty CTL25 circuit board Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
representative.
E-SP-4765 The control for the CTL25 circuit (Causes of the error message)
to board is abnormal. 1. Software overload (abnormal 1. Restart the system. If the error
E-SP-4771 software) occurs again, reinstall the system
E-SP-4772 An error occurred during Writing to EEPROM failed.
accessing of the CTL25 circuit (Causes of the error message)
board external memory. 1. Software overload (abnormal 1. Restart the system. If the error
W-SP-4801 Gaining of the image failed. Image obtaining failure
1. USB interface of CTL25 circuit 1. Restart the system software. If the
board or DIC2 is unstable. error occurs again, replace the
CTL25 circuit board.
2. Faulty application on CTL25 circuit 2. Restart the system software. If the
board error occurs again, replace the
CTL25 circuit board.
3. Faulty USB cable from CTL25 to 3. Reconnect or replace the cable.
DIC2
3-75

W-SP-4802 Auto focus failed. AF was executed without chart jig or Set the chart jig or film and execute
film in mask. again.
W-SP-4812 The floppy disk is not inserted At the time of spectral calibration FD
into the floppy disk drive. insertion
Insert the floppy disk. 1. FD not inserted 1. Insert the FD.
2. Not spectral calibration FD 2. Insert the correct FD.
3. Faulty FD drive 3. Replace the DIC2.
4. Faulty spectral calibration FD 4. Replace the FD.
I-SP-4813 Correct the scanner. At the time of scanner correction Install the MFC10AR carrier and
execution confirmation for spectral close the calibration cover.
Install the carrier. calibration
I-SP-4814 Set the next film in the carrier. Specifying mounted film for spectral Set the specified film.
calibration
No: ####
I-SP-4815 Reading the image. At the time of image scanning for Wait until reading is completed.
spectral calibration
Please wait.
I-SP-4816 Cancel the Measurement? Spectral calibration was canceled. Click [OK] to cancel.
I-SP-4817 Performing the scanner At the time of scanner correction Wait until correction is completed.
correction. execution
Please wait.
W-SP-4818 Image data judge error occurred. Spectral calibration image data
judgement error
Insert film again. (Causes of the error message)
1. Patches outside the frames 1. Contain the patches within the
frames.
2. Displayed image is not specified 2. Use the specified film.
film
W-SP-4819 Calculating of adjustment Spectral calibration parameter
parameter failed. calculating error
Measurement canceled. 1. Patches outside the frames 1. Contain the patches within the
frames.
2. Displayed image is not specified 2. Use the specified film.
film
W-SP-4820 Correcting of the scanner failed. Scanner correction for spectral
calibration failure
1. Removed carrier 1. Install the carrier.
2. Not set calibration cover 2. Set the calibration cover.
I-SP-4822 Measurement completed Spectral calibration completes Click [OK].
correctly. normally.
I-SP-4825 The parameters are mismatched. Mismatch of parameters detected Click the button.
when exiting “Scanner Parameter
Close? Check/Update”.
I-SP-4830 Adjusting the OFD voltage. Adjusting OFD voltage Wait until adjustment is completed.
Please wait.
I-SP-4831 Detecting of the gray pixels is Detecting gray pixels is completed. Click [OK].
completed.
W-SP-4832 Carrier is not installed correctly. Carrier differs from the one installed
when executing.
Check the carrier. (Cause of the error message)
Incorrect carrier installed Install the correct carrier.
3-76

E-SP-4833 Updating of the circuit board CXX circuit board parameter file
parameter files failed. update failure
Faulty software Restart the system software. If the
system software.
3
W-SP-4834 The dark correction failed. Darkness correction failure
Faulty CTL25 circuit board Replace the CTL25 circuit board.
E-SP-4836 A file accessing error occurred. File access error
Lack of HDD capacity Delete unnecessary files, template
and log files.
W-SP-4841 Adjusting of LED light amount LED light amount adjustment failure
failed. (Cause of the error message)
Faulty harness between CTL25 and Reconnect or replace the harness.
DLE25 circuit boards
W-SP-4843 The holder is installed in the Holder is installed. Remove the holder.
carrier.
Remove the holder.

W-SP-4844 Couldn’t find the circuit board No circuit board parameter file Restart the system software. If the
parameter file. error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
W-SP-4847 Creating of the bright correction Table creation failure at the time of
table failed. brightness correction
Perform the bright correction Faulty system software Restart the system software.If the
again. error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
I-SP-4851 The OFD voltage adjustment is OFD voltage adjustment is completed Click [OK].
normally completed. normally.
W-SP-4852 Couldn’t find the correct bright No brightness correction table Perform creation of the scanner
correction table. correction table creation.
Perform the scanner correction.

W-SP-4853
I-SP-4856 Select the correct mask type for NC100AR carrier 135F or 135H mask Select either one.
the bright correction table to be selection for brightness correction
created. table creation
Set the 135F mask or 135H

mask.
W-SP-4857 Carrier is not installed. Carrier is not installed. Install the carrier.
Install the carrier.

W-SP-4858 The auto correction failed. Mask position adjustment edge
detection error
Adjust mask position using the (Causes of the error message)
adjustment button. 1. Foreign matter in light path 1. Remove the foreign matter.
2. No lower mask in NC100AR 2. Install the lower mask.
3. 135H is selected with 135F mask 3. Perform again with the correct
installed in NC100AR condition.
4. 135F is selected with 135H mask 4. Perform again with the correct
W-SP-4859 The correction value exceeds the Mask position adjustment frame out
range. of range
Adjust mask position using the 1. Misaligned optical axis 1. Adjust the optical axis.
adjustment button. 2. Misaligned carrier optical axis 2. Replace the carrier or mask.
3. Incorrectly set mount frame 3. Insert the mount frame correctly.
3-77

W-SP-4860 Holder is not installed. Holder is not installed in MFC10AR Install the holder.
carrier.
Install a film holder.
W-SP-4865 Mount holder is not installed. Mount holder is required but another
holder is installed.
Install the mount holder. (Causes of the error message)
1. No mount holder or incorrect one 1. Install the correct mount holder.
2. Faulty holder sensor 2. Replace the SSA25 circuit board.
I-SP-4868 Adjusting LED light amount. Execution of LED light amount Wait until adjustment is completed.
adjustment
W-SP-4869 Carrier is not installed correctly. Abnormal NC100AR carrier operation
Install the carrier. Carrier error such as film remaining, Set the carrier to normal condition.
carrier installed with pressure cover
open, etc.
E-SP-4870 A communication error occurred Communication timeout between
between Imaging Controller DIC2 and CTL25 circuit board
section and CTL circuit boards. (Causes of the error message)
1. Faulty USB communication 1. Replace the cable.
2. Poorly connected USB cable 2. Reconnect the cable correctly.
W-SP-4874 Close the calibration cover. Calibration cover not installed
Calibration cover not installed. Close the cover.
I-SP-4879 Write the backup parameters in The [Reading] button was clicked in Click [OK].
the hard disk to the CB memory. “Scanner Parameter Check/Update”.
W-SP-4885 Registration failed because the (Causes of the error message)
specified optical magnification is 1. Misaligned optical axis 1. Adjust the optical axis.
out of the range. 2. Chart jig is not installed. 2. Install the chart jig.
W-SP-4886 Device parameter setup failed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Faulty CTL25 circuit board 1. Replace the CTL25 circuit board
2. Faulty DIC2 2. Replace DIC2.
I-SP-4887 Performing the dark correction. Executing darkness correction Wait until correction is completed.
Please wait.
I-SP-4888 Performing the bright correction. Executing brightness correction Wait until correction is completed.
Please wait.
I-SP-4889 Film scanner ID is written into Registering film scanner ID –
memory on circuit board.
OK?
I-SP-4890 No backup parameter. No backup parameter when
registering film scanner ID
Write only film scanner ID into (Cause of the error message)
memory on circuit board? ID of set film scanner is not Register the ID correctly
registered.
I-SP-4891 Film scanner ID registration Film scanner ID registration is –
completed. completed.
Turn off the power switch and

then turn on the power to the film
scanner again.
W-SP-4892 Maintenance cannot be started – Check whether or not the USB cable
because the film scanner is is connected. If not, connect the USB
turned off or USB cable is not cable properly.
connected.
I-SP-4893 Any data is stored in this FD. – –
To overwrite them, press [OK].
3-78

E-SP-4894 Insufficient FD free space. Insufficient FD capacity Replace the FD.
Check it.
E-SP-4895 Writing of files failed. Writing failed when saving.
Check the FD. 1. Write-protected FD is used. 1. Clear protection by setting the 3
write-protect tab in the “write-
enable” position.
2. Writing to FD failed 2. Replace the FD.
E-SP-4896 Reading of files failed. This message appears when reading Check the condition of the FD.
files from the FD failed. Insert the FD and then try again.
Check the FD.
E-SP-4897 Insufficient HDD free space. Insufficient HDD capacity Delete unnecessary files from the
HDD.
restart it.
If problems persist, consult your

W-SP-4898 FD is not inserted. Insert the FD.
I-SP-4899 FD remains in the FD drive. FD remains in the FD drive. Remove the FD from the FD drive.
Make sure that the access LED is

turned OFF, and then remove it
from the FD drive, then click the
[OK] button.
W-SP-4907 A film remains in the carrier. Film has been inserted. Insert a film after clicking the [Run]
button.
W-SP-4908 Film is not inserted. Film is not inserted. Insert a film as necessary.
W-SP4912 The operation was canceled. Operation was canceled.
1. Clicked [Stop] button 1. –
W-SP-4913 The number of times for Number of repeat times not set Enter one or higher.
repeating is not selected. (Causes of the error message)
Zero or below is entered for number
Set the number of times. of repeat times.
W-SP-4914 The operation is aborted. Abnormal termination Restart the system software. If the
system software.
I-SP-4915 Write the setting values to the Setup value is written in the monitor Click [OK].
monitor frame ratio information frame ratio file.
file.
OK?
I-SP-4917 Write the carrier installation Carrier installation information is Click [OK].
information to the FlashROM. written in FlashROM.
OK?
I-SP-4918 Writing the information to the Writing in FlashROM Wait until writing is completed.
FlashROM.
Please do not remove the carrier.

W-SP-4919 Enter numerals only for the (Causes of the error message)
carrier ID. 1. Entered characters except 1. Enter the correct ID.
numerical value in carrier ID
3-79

W-SP-4920 Enter numerals only for the serial Entered characters except numerical
No. of the circuit board. values in hardware Rev
1. Entered characters except 1. Enter the serial number correctly.
numerical value as circuit board
serial number
W-SP-4922 Install the NC100AR carrier. NC100AR is not installed.
1. NC100AR is not installed. 1. Install the NC100AR.
2. Incorrectly installed carrier 2. Install the carrier correctly.
3. Faulty plug-in connector harness 3. Reconnect or replace the harness.
4. Faulty CYA25 circuit board 4. Replace the circuit board.
W-SP-4923 Install the MFC10AR carrier. MFC10AR is not installed.
1. MFC10AR is not installed. 1. Install the MFC10AR.
3. Faulty plug-in connector harness 3. Reconnect or replace the harness.
4. Faulty CYB25 circuit board 4. Replace the circuit board.
I-SP-4924 Write the setting values to the Setup data is written in focus offset Click [OK].
focus offset adjustment file. adjustment file.
OK?
W-SP-4925 The setting of the offset values is This message appears when a Enter the correct value.
incorrect. character other than numeric
characters within the range is
entered.
I-SP-4930 Write the data to the FlashROM. FlashROM writing operation Click [OK].
OK?
I-SP-4931 Writing the data to the FlashROM writing Wait until writing is completed.
FlashROM.
Please do not remove the carrier.

W-SP-4933 An abnormality occurred during File I/O error
reading from the monitor frame (Cause of the error message)
ratio information file. Faulty HDD Restart the system software. If the
system software.
writing to the monitor frame ratio (Causes of the error message)
information file. 1. Faulty HDD 1. Restart the system software. If the
system software.
2. Lack of HDD capacity 2. Delete unnecessary files.
reading from the focus offset (Cause of the error message)
adjustment file. Faulty HDD Restart the system software. If the
system software.
writing to the focus offset (Causes of the error message)
adjustment file. 1. Faulty HDD 1. Restart the system software. If the
system software.
2. Lack of HDD capacity 2. Delete unnecessary files.
W-SP-4938 Writing of data failed. Previous reading failure Perform reading from the FlashROM
again and then writing.
Perform reading the data once,
and perform it again.
3-80

W-SP-4939 The carrier is not ready. Carrier was removed during
executing command.
If this error persists, consult your (Causes of the error message)
technical representative. 1. Carrier was removed. 1. Install the carrier.
2. Faulty plug-in connector 2. Replace the plug-in connector.
3. Faulty plug-in connector harness
4. Faulty carrier main circuit board
3.
4.
Replace the harness.
Replace the circuit board.
3
W-SP-4940 Enter alphabets or space only for Non-alphabetic character is entered
the revision number. as carrier Rev.
1. Non-alphabetic character instead 1. Enter an alphabetic letter or space.
of a letter or space is entered as
carrier Rev.
E-SP-4990 Data cannot be loaded because (Cause of the error message)
the scanner ID of the installed ID of set film scanner doesn’t match Insert the correct FD.
film scanner is different from the that of FD.
one saved in FD.
Check the FD.

E-SP-4991 There is no file to be saved. No file to be saved Insert the correct FD.
I-SP-4992 Information were saved in FD. Data saving is completed. –

[OK] button.
I-SP-4993 Information were loaded from FD. Data loading is completed. –

[OK] button.
E-SP-4994 The auto correction failed. Mask position adjustment range
detection error
Check it the holder or blank (Causes of the error message)
mount is installed properly. 1. Foreign matter in NC100AR 1. Remove the foreign matter.
2. No lower mask in NC100AR 2. Install the lower mask.
If this error persists, adjust mask 3. 135H is selected with 135F mask 3. Perform again with the correct
position using the adjustment installed in NC100AR condition.
button. 4. 135F is selected with 135H mask 4. Perform again with the correct
E-SP-4995 The correction value exceeds the Mask position adjustment frame out
range. of range
Check it the holder or blank 1. Misaligned optical axis 1. Adjust the optical axis.
mount is installed properly. 2. Misaligned carrier optical axis 2. Replace the carrier or mask.
3. Incorrectly set mount frame 3. Insert the mount frame correctly.
If this error persists, adjust mask
position using the adjustment
button.
W-Q0-5001 1-byte “ * ” cannot be used in – Enter another character.
search text.
Enter another character.

W-Q0-5002 Cannot operate this order – Select other orders, or wait until the
because it is being processed. process is completed.
Select other orders, or wait until

3-81

E-Q0-5009 Cannot disconnect from the (Cause of the error message) Check the network connection of the
server/DIC2. Communication between the server DIC2 referring to Subsection 3.3.13.
and DIC2 cannot be disconnected.
Check the connection. If
W-Q0-5011 Cannot reissue the order that – Select another order, and then press
was registered in order the [Reorder] button, or enter the
registration screen. same order again.
Select other order then press

[Reorder], or enter the order
again.
E-Q0-5012 Cannot reissue the order (Cause of the error message) The order cannot be issued again
because the image data is The order cannot be issued again. because the image data storage
expired. period has expired.
Register the order again.
again.
W-Q0-5013 Cannot reissue the order – Select another order, and then press
because the image data exceeds the [Reorder] button, or enter the
the limitation period. same order again.

again.
W-Q0-5014 Cannot reissue the order – Cancel the job in “Workflow Advisor”
because the job is being screen, or press the [Reorder] button
processed. again after the process is completed.
Cancel the job in “Workflow

Advisor” screen, or press
[Reorder] again after the process
is completed.
W-Q0-5015 Cannot fix the order because the – Cancel the job in “Workflow Advisor”
job is being processed. screen, or press the [Reorder] button
again after the process is completed.
Advisor” screen, or press
[Reorder] again after the process
is completed.
I-Q0-5017 Cannot find the specified order. – Try to search with another condition.
Search with other condition.

I-Q0-5018 Delete this order? – –
I-Q0-5019 Reissue this order? – –
W-Q0-5022 This Order was deleted or – Press the [Refresh] button to refresh
changed. the displaying list.
Couldn’t delete order.

displaying list.
W-Q0-5023 Processing order. – Please wait for a moment, and then
retry deleting the order again.
Couldn’t delete order.

retry it.
3-82

Couldn’t reissue order.

displaying list.
3
W-Q0-5025 Processing order. – Please wait for a moment, then retry
reissuing the order again.
Couldn’t reissue order.

retry it.
Couldn’t set express to order.

displaying list.
it.
Couldn’t set express to order.

retry it.

for order.

displaying list.
it.
for order.

retry it.
Couldn’t update order

information.

displaying list.
retry updating order information
Couldn’t update order again.
information.

retry it.
E-Q0-5034 Connection error occurred. (Cause of the error message) Check the network connection of the
Connection error DIC2 referring to Subsection 3.3.13.
Couldn’t find destination to which (MONITOR is not found.)
server/DIC2 is connected.
Check network connection. If this

error persists, consult your
3-83

I-Q0-5050 Changed quantity is not fixed. – To close the order after fixing
changed quantity, press the [OK]
To close the order after fixing button. To check it again, press the
changed quantity, press [OK]. To [Cancel] button.
check it again, press [Cancel].
I-Q0-5051 There is a product whose – 1. To fix quantity of all completed
quantity is not decided. orders, press the [All] button. To fix
them while ignoring the
To fix quantity of all completed uncompleted order, press the [OK]
orders, press [All]. To fix them button.
while ignoring the uncompleted 2. If the [OK] button is pressed, note
order, press [OK]. that you cannot bill the product
when its quantity is not fixed.
If [OK] is pressed, note that you
cannot bill the product when its
quantity is not fixed.
W-Q0-5052 Cannot continue operation – Cancel the job in “Workflow Advisor”
because any product is being screen, or retry it after the process is
processed. completed

Advisor” screen, or retry it after
W-Q0-5058 Cannot fix the order because the – Cancel the job in “Workflow Advisor”
job is being processed. screen, or retry it after the process is
completed.
Advisor” screen, or retry it after
I-Q0-5061 Limiting quantity for this product – Enter the value within “799200”
is “799200”.
Enter the value within “799200”.

I-Q0-5062 Limiting quantity for this product – Enter the value within “9980010”
is “9980010”.

I-Q0-5063 Limiting quantity for this product – Enter the value within “999”.
is “999”.

changed. the displaying list, and then try
updating product information again.
Couldn’t update production
information.

displaying list.
retry updating product information
Couldn’t update production again.
information.

retry it.
changed. the displaying list, and then try
updating product information again.
Couldn’t update order
information.

displaying list.
3-84

retry updating product information
Couldn’t update order again.
information.

retry it.
3
Cannot start up the program. abnormal. Check the status of the
DIC2 and installed software referring
If problems persist after restart, to Subsections 3.3.14 and 3.3.15.
representative.
W-Q0-6002 Reserving period for completed – Enter a date between 0 and 99.
order is incorrect.
Enter the date between 0 and 99.

W-Q0-6003 Reserving period for order image – Enter a date between 0 and 99.
file is incorrect.

W-Q0-6004 Reserving period for order image – Select days which are less than the
file is incorrect. setting range of “Complete Order
Retention Period” in the system
Select the days less than the management screen.
setting range of “Complete Order
Retention Period” in system
management screen.
W-Q0-6005 Incorrect period for production – Enter a date between 0 and 99.
information is set.

W-Q0-6006 Folder setting is incorrect. – Select the folder again.
Select folder again.

W-Q0-6007 Selected folder was not found. – Select the folder again.
Select folder again.

W-Q0-6008 Folder is not selected. – Select the folder.
Select folder.
I-Q0-6009 Read the product price. – Do not start the billing process until
reading of the product price
Do not start billing process until information is completed.
reading of product price
information is completed.
I-Q0-6010 Initial the system configuration – Restart the system after initializing it.
information.
Restart system after initializing it.

W-Q0-6011 Period for force deleting of order – Select days which are within the
is incorrect. setting range of “Complete Order
Select the days within the setting management screen.
range of “Complete Order
management screen.
I-Q0-6012 Delete the order forcibly? – –
3-85

W-Q0-6013 Server/DIC2 connecting error – Check the connection, then retry it.
occurred.
Check the connection, then retry

it.
W-Q0-6014 Server/DIC2 connecting error – Restart the system. If problem
occurred. persists, the operating environment is
abnormal. Check the status of the
Check the connection, then try it DICII and installed software referring
again. to Subsections 3.3.14 and 3.3.15.
W-Q0-6015 Order print size name is – Enter the correct order print size
incorrect. name.
Enter order print size name.

W-Q0-6016 Selected order print size name – Enter another order print size name.
already exists.
Enter another order print size

name.
W-Q0-6017 Length is incorrect. – Check the setting, then enter it again.
Check the setting, then enter it

again.
W-Q0-6018 Width is incorrect. – Check the setting, then enter it again.
Check the setting, then enter it

again.
W-Q0-6019 Length and width are incorrect. – Enter a length value which is greater
than the one for the width.
Enter length value larger than the
one for width.
I-Q0-6020 Reading of product price – –
information was completed.
I-Q0-6021 Writing of product price – –
information was completed.
I-Q0-6022 Initializing of system – –
configuration information was
completed.
I-Q0-6023 Forcible deleting process was – –
completed.
W-Q0-6024 Print size name to be deleted is – Select the order print size name.
not selected.
Select order print size name.

W-Q0-6025 Print size name to be changed is – Select the order print size name.
not selected.
Select order print size name.

I-Q0-6026 Delete order print size name? – –
W-Q0-6027 Server/DIC2 connecting error – 1. Check the connection.
occurred. 2. To discard the selected order print
size information, press the [OK]
Check the connection. button. To return to the screen,
press the [Cancel] button.
To discard the selected order
print size information, press [OK].
To return to the screen, press
[Cancel].
3-86

W-Q0-6028 Writing error of order print size – 1. Check the connection.
information occurred. 2. To discard the selected order print
size information, press the [OK]
Check the connection. button. To return to the screen,
press the [Cancel] button.
To discard the selected order
print size information, press [OK].
3
To return to the screen, press
[Cancel].
W-Q0-6029 Cannot get order print size – Restart the system. If problem
information. persists, the operating environment is
If problems persist after restart, DICII and installed software referring
consult your technical to Subsections 3.3.14 and 3.3.15.
representative.
Cannot get information. Process abnormal. Check the status of the
was canceled. DIC2 and installed software referring
If problems persist after restart,
representative.
I-Q0-6031 Start connection to Imaging – Retry it after completing all orders
Controller. that are currently processed.
Retry it again after completing all

orders that are currently
processed.
I-Q0-6032 Changes to Stand-alone mode. – Retry it after completing all orders
that are currently processed.
Retry it again after completing all
orders that are currently
processed.
representative.
W-Q0-6034 Time for level 1 is incorrect. – Set a time value between 0 and 60
min.
Set the time value between 0 and
60 min.
min.
60 min.
min.
60 min.
W-Q0-6037 Time for level cannot be – Set a different time.
duplicated.
Set another time.

W-Q0-6038 Emergency color cannot be – Set a different emergency color.
duplicated.
Set another emergency color.
3-87

W-Q0-6039 Reserving period is out of range. – Check “Production Information
Check “Production Information management screen, then select the
Retention Period” in system start and end date again.
management screen, then select
the start and end date again.
W-Q0-6040 Folder is not selected. – Select the folder.
Select the folder.

I-Q0-6041 File already exists. – –
Overwrite?
W-Q0-6042 Server/DIC2 connecting error – Check the connection, then try it
occurred. again.
Check the connection, then try it

again.
W-Q0-6043 Cannot get production – Check the connection, then try it
information. again.
Check the connection, then try it

again.
W-Q0-6044 Writing process failed. – Check the media. Restart the system,
and then try it again.
I-Q0-6045 Saving of production information – –
was completed.
representative.
representative.
representative.
E-Q0-6049 Registration needs surface – Select the surface type, and then try it
selection. again.
There is unregistered data.

Complete?
E-Q0-6050 Gaining of service time (Cause of the error message) Restart the system. If the problem
information failed. Service type information acquisition persists, the operating environment is
error abnormal. Check the status of the
Restart the system. software referring to Subsection
3.3.15.
If this error persists, reinstall the
software.
3-88

E-Q0-6053 Minute value is incorrect. (Cause of the error message) Check whether or not the service
Service time setting error time is set properly.
E-Q0-6054 Hour value is incorrect. (Cause of the error message) Check whether or not the service
Service time setting error time is set properly.
W-Q0-6055 Connecting to server/DIC2
failed.
– 1. Wait several minutes, then retry it.
2. To cancel the service time setting
3
then quit this screen, press the
Wait several minutes, then retry [OK] button.
it.
To cancel the service time setting

then quit this screen, press [OK].
W-Q0-6056 Writing of service time – 1. Wait several minutes, then retry it.
information failed. 2. To cancel the service time setting
then quit this screen, press the
Wait several minutes, then retry [OK] button.
it.
To cancel the service time setting

then quit this screen, press [OK].
I-Q0-6057 Initializing... – Wait until it is completed.
Wait for a moment.

E-Q0-6058 Computer Name is incorrect. (Cause of the error message) Check the network environment such
Computer name setting error as the computer name.
E-Q0-6059 Initializing of system (Cause of the error message) Click the [Initialization] button again
configuration failed because an Initialization failed. after the order processing is
uncompleted order exists. completed or deleted.
Complete the order or delete it,

then press [Initialization] again.
E-Q0-6060 Working time is not set correctly. (Cause of the error message) Working time set in “System
Working time setting error Operation Setup and Check” -
“Delivery Reply Setup” is incorrect.
Set the correct working time.
E-Q0-6061 Spare time is not set correctly. (Cause of the error message) Spare time set in “System Operation
Spare time setting error Setup and Check” - “Delivery Reply
Setup” is incorrect. Set the correct
working time.
E-Q0-6062 Magazine replace time is not set (Cause of the error message) Magazine replacement time set in
correctly. Magazine replacement time setting “System Operation Setup and Check”
error - “Delivery Reply Setup” is incorrect.
Set the correct working time.
E-Q0-6063 Gaining of resource information (Cause of the error message) Restart the system. If the problem
failed. Abnormal operating environment persists, the operating environment is
Cannot open the start-up screen. DIC2 and installed software referring
Reinstall the system.
E-Q0-6064 Gaining of resource information (Cause of the error message) Restart the system. If the problem
failed. Abnormal operating environment persists, the operating environment is
Cannot open the start-up screen. DIC2 and installed software referring
Reinstall the system.
E-Q0-6065 Service time setting is incorrect. (Cause of the error message) Service time set in “System
Service time setting error Operation Setup and Check” -
Check that opening and closing “Holiday/Opening Time Setup” is
times are correctly set. incorrect. Set the correct working
time.
3-89

E-Q0-6066 Same date is already registered. (Cause of the error message) Set the holiday setting in “System
Holiday setting error Operation Setup and Check” -
“Holiday/Opening Time Setup”.
E-Q0-6067 Data is not selected. (Cause of the error message) Restart the system. If the problem
Data selection error persists, the operating environment is
E-Q0-6068 Error data is not set correctly. (Cause of the error message) Restart the system. If the problem
Error data setting error persists, the operating environment is
W-Q0-6069 Gaining of printer information – Restart the system. If problem
failed. persists, the operating environment is
Restart the system. DICII and installed software referring
E-Q0-6070 Notice Application Software is not (Cause of the error message) Restart the system. If the problem
selected. Notification application software is persists, the operating environment is
not selected. abnormal. Check the status of the
I-Q0-6071 Delete selected holiday data. – –
E-Q0-6072 Working day settings are (Cause of the error message) Set the holiday setting in “System
incorrect. Working time setting error Operation Setup and Check” -
“Holiday/Opening Time Setup”.
Check that the check marks are
properly added to days’ boxes.
W-Q0-6075 Reading process failed. – Restart the system. If problem
persists, the operating environment is
DICII and installed software referring
W-SP-7001 Carrier was removed. Carrier was removed with a film
remaining in it during film feeding
Remove film and then install the (Causes of the error message)
carrier. 1. Carrier was removed during film 1. Reinstall the carrier.
feeding
2. Broken plug-in connector/harness 2. Replace the plug-in connector.
W-SP-7002 Carrier sensor not calibrated CYA25 sensor calibration error
correctly. (Causes of the error message)
1. Dust or dirt adhered to glass of 1. Clean the glass.
Remove the carrier and then upper or lower feed lane
clean the glass surface of the 2. Alcohol stains on inside of glass 2. Clean the glass.
upper and lower feeding lanes due to use of cotton swab soaked
with a dried cotton swab. with alcohol
3. Poorly connected or broken sensor 3. Reconnect or replace the harness.
harness
4. Faulty or deteriorated sensor LED 4. Replace the sensor LED.
5. Faulty or deteriorated sensor 5. Replace the sensor.
E-SP-7006 Upgrading of carrier software Carrier upgrading file does not exist.
1. File does not exist. 1. Reinstall the system software.
Consult your technical 2. File reading failure 2. Upgrade the system software
representative. again. If the error occurs again,
reinstall the system software.
3-90

E-SP-7007 Upgrading of carrier software Incorrect contents in carrier
failed. upgrading file
Consult your technical 1. Faulty upgrading file 1. Reinstall the system software.
representative. 2. Faulty CYA25 circuit board 2. Replace the circuit board.
W-SP-7008 Because the version of the carrier Upgrading instruction was canceled. Remove and reinstall the carrier. 3
software is incorrect, this carrier Click [Yes] in the dialog box to
cannot be used. upgrade the system.
Install the carrier again, and then

upgrade the software.
W-SP-7009 The carrier was removed during Carrier was removed during Reinstall the carrier and perform
upgrading of the software. upgrading carrier. upgrading again.
Install the carrier again, and then

upgrade the software.
E-SP-7010 Writing FlashROM data into (Causes of the error message)
carrier failed. 1. Poorly connected plug-in 1. Remove and reinstall the carrier.
connector
Consult your technical 2. Faulty CYA25 circuit board 2. Replace the circuit board.
representative. 3. Faulty JNC25 circuit board 3. Replace the JNC25 circuit board.
4. Poorly connected or broken 4. Connect the flexible cable (FFC)
flexible cable (FFC) correctly, or replace the cable.
connector
W-SP-7012 Upgrading of carrier software Carrier program transfer failure
1. Poorly connected plug-in 1. Remove and reinstall the carrier.
Consult your technical connector
3. Faulty JNC25 circuit board 3. Replace the JNC25 circuit board.
connector
connector
W-SP-7015 File not found in hard disk. File was searched with adjustment
and maintenance function, but it did
not exist.
Restart the system
1. No target file ü
ý
software. If the error
2. File transfer failure
þ occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
3-91

E-SP-7019 Reading FlashROM data from Abnormal carrier/carrier FlashROM
carrier failed. data
Consult your technical 1. Poorly connected plug-in 1. Remove and reinstall the carrier.
representative. connector
E-SP-7020 Reading FlashROM data from Abnormal carrier/carrier FlashROM
carrier failed. data
Consult your technical 1. Poorly connected plug-in 1. Remove and reinstall the carrier.
representative. connector
W-SP-7024 Upper feed section is unlocked. (Causes of the error message)
1. Open upper feed section 1. Close the upper feed section.
Remove the carrier, and then lock 2. Faulty upper feed section open/ 2. Replace the sensor.
the upper feed section. close sensor (D421)
3. Faulty harness 3. Reconnect or replace the harness.
E-SP7025 Writing FlashROM data into Writing to FlashROM failure
carrier failed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Poorly connected plug-in 1. Remove and reinstall the carrier.
Consult your technical connector
W-SP-7071 Carrier not installed correctly or (Causes of the error message)
no carrier installed. 1. Carrier is not installed. 1. Install the carrier.
2. Incorrectly installed carrier. 2. Install the carrier correctly.
Install carrier correctly. 3. Faulty plug-in connector 3. Replace the plug-in connector.
4. Faulty carrier circuit board 4. Replace the circuit board.
E-SP-7074 A communication error occurred Serial communication error between
between the CTL CB and carrier. CTL25 circuit board and carrier
Carrier is not installed correctly. 1. Faulty plug-in connector 1. Clean or replace the plug-in
connector.
Install the carrier again. If 2. 5V power supply to carrier is faulty. 2. Repair or replace the 5V power
problems persist, consult your supply.
technical representative. 3. No response from carrier CPU 3. Replace the CYA25 circuit board.
4. No program in carrier 4. Replace the CYA25 circuit board.
E-SP-7075 A communication error occurred No response from the carrier
between the CTL CB and carrier. (software error)
Install the carrier again. 1. Abnormal software 1. Reinstall the carrier. If the error
occurs again, restart the system. If
If problems persist, consult your the error still occurs, reinstall the
technical representative. system software.
2. Faulty CYA25 circuit 2. Replace the CYA25 circuit board.
E-SP-7077 Writing FlashROM data from Faulty FlashROM Remove and reinstall the carrier. If
carrier failed. the error occurs again, restart the
system software. If the error still
Install the carrier again. occurs, replace the CYA25 circuit
board.
3-92

E-SP-7078 Reading FlashROM data from Faulty FlashROM Remove and reinstall the carrier. If
board.
3
E-SP-7079 Reading FlashROM data from Faulty FlashROM Remove and reinstall the carrier. If
board.
E-SP-7081 Carrier not installed correctly or Incorrectly inserted carrier
no carrier installed. (Causes of the error message)
Install the carrier again. 2. Faulty carrier sensor (plug-in 2. Replace the plug-in connector.
connector)
3. Faulty harness 3. Reconnect or replace the harness.
E-SP-7083 A power source failure (carrier Abnormal carrier +24V power supply
section +24V) was detected. (Causes of the error message)
Carrier is not installed correctly. 2. Poorly connected CYA1 connector 2. Reconnect the connector.
to CYA25 circuit board
Install the carrier again. If 3. Faulty CYA25 circuit board 3. Replace the circuit board.
problems persist, consult your 4. Poorly connected or broken 4. Connect the flexible cable (FFC)
technical representative. flexible cable (FFC) correctly, or replace the cable.
5. Poorly connected or broken plug-in 5. Connect the plug-in connector
connector correctly, or replace the cable.
section +12V) was detected. (Causes of the error message)
section -12V) was detected. (Causes of the error message)
W-SP-7087 The memory for diagnostics Software error Remove and reinstall the carrier. If
program was not allocated. the error occurs again, restart the
occurs, replace the CYA25 circuit
board.
W-SP-7090 Too long film. Software error Remove and reinstall the carrier, If
the error occurs again, restart the
Check the film. system software. If the error still
occurs, replace the CYA25 circuit
Remove carrier and then film. board.
3-93

W-SP-7091 It may be a black-and-white film ON/OFF combination was detected
or too many pieces of tape are 20 times with check tape sensor.
used. (Causes of the error message)
1. Scanned black/white film after 1. Select black/white for original type.
Check the film. selecting negative or reversal for
original type
2. Fed insufficiently desilvered film 2. Process the film correctly.
3. Fed film with 20 or more check 3. Peel check tapes off so their
tapes number is below 20.
W-SP-7095 Film remains in feeding lane. Proceeded to Setup and Remove the carrier, remove the film
Maintenance menu when 135 film and then reinstall the carrier.
Remove carrier and then film. remains in NC100AR
W-SP-7096 Film remains in feeding lane. Detected film by upstream perforation
sensor of NC100AR when exiting
Remove carrier and then film. from Setup and Maintenance. menu
1. Film remains in carrier. 1. Remove the film.
2. Dusty or dirty upstream perforation 2. Clean the sensor glass.
sensor (D402) glass
3. Faulty upstream perforation sensor 3. Replace the sensor or harness
(D402) or harness
4. Faulty flexible cable 4. Reconnect or replace the cable
5. Faulty JNC25 circuit board 5. Replace the circuit board.
W-SP-7097 Film remains in feeding lane. Detected film by downstream
perforation sensor of NC100AR when
Remove carrier and then film. exiting from Setup and Maintenance
menu.
2. Dusty or dirty downstream 2. Clean the sensor glass.
perforation sensor (D403) glass
3. Faulty downstream perforation 3. Replace the sensor or harness
sensor (D403) or harness
W-SP-7098 Film remains in feeding lane. Detected film by leading end sensor
of NC100AR when exiting from Setup
Remove carrier and then film. and Maintenance menu.
2. Dusty or dirty leading end sensor 2. Clean the sensor glass.
(D401)glass
3. Faulty leading end sensor (D401) 3. Replace the sensor or harness
or harness
W-SP-7100 Feeding of film failed. Detected 500 or more perforations by
135 upstream perforation sensor
Remove carrier and then film. (Causes of the error message)
1. Fed spliced film that has 500 or 1. Do not insert a film that has 500 or
more perforations more perforations
2. Dust or dirt adhered to upstream 2. Clean the glass.
3. Faulty upstream perforation sensor 3. Replace the sensor or harness.
(D402) or harness
4. Faulty flexible cable 4. Reconnect or replace the cable.
W-SP-7101 Feeding of film failed. – –
Remove carrier and then film.
3-94

W-SP-7102 Feeding of film failed. Detected 500 or more perforations by
135 downstream perforation sensor
1. Fed spliced film that has 500 or 1. Do not insert a film that has 500 or
more perforations more perforations
2. Dust or dirt adhered to
downstream perforation sensor
2. Clean the glass.
3
(D403) glass
3. Faulty downstream perforation 3. Replace the sensor or harness.
sensor (D403) or harness
W-SP-7103 Feeding of film failed. – –

W-SP-7104 Too long film. Fed film length of 1.7m or longer Do not insert a film longer than 1.7m.

W-SP-7105 Too short film. Film length was 74mm or shorter.
Remove carrier and then film. 1. Inserted film with two or less 1. Scan using the MFC10AR.
frames
2. Inserted fogged reversal film (two 2. Scan using the MFC10AR.
or less normal frames)
3. Faulty frame sensor (D407 to 3. Replace the sensor or harness.
D410) or harness
W-SP-7106 Inserting of film failed. NC100AR film loading reattempt
error
Remove carrier and then film. If (Causes of the error message)
problems persist, clean the 1. Blocked or hand-pulled film 1. Correct the film or scan using the
feeding rollers. MFC10AR.
2. Slipped film due to dirty feed 2. Clean the rollers.
rollers
3. Detected film by leading end 3. Insert the film fully to reach the
sensor (D401) but it did not reach rollers.
to feed rollers
4. Faulty feed motor (M401), drive 4. Replace the damaged parts.
system or harness
5. Faulty frame sensor (D407 to 5. Replace the sensor or harness.
D410) or harness
W-SP-7107 Inserting of film failed. Film loading error (one reattempt
after reaching frame sensor)
Remove carrier and then film. If (Causes of the error message)
problems persist, clean the 1. Blocked or hand-pulled film 1. Correct the film or scan using the
feeding rollers. MFC10AR.
2. Slipped film due to dirty feed 2. Clean the rollers.
rollers
3. Faulty feed motor (M401), drive 3. Replace the damaged parts.
system or harness
4. Faulty upstream perforation sensor 4. Replace the sensor or harness.
(D403) or harness
3-95

W-SP-7108 Feeding of film failed. Film leading end does not reach to
downstream perforation sensor.
1. Film slippage due to dust or dirt 1. Clean the roller.
adhered to feed roller
2. Blocked film end or film caught 2. Clear the film passage.
outside of carrier
3. Dust or dirt adhered to 3. Clean the sensor glass.
(D403) glass
4. Faulty downstream perforation 4. Replace the sensor, or the
sensor or harness harness.
W-SP-7109 Feeding of film failed. Film trailing end does not return to
upstream perforation sensor.
outside of carrier
3. Dust or dirt adhered to upstream 3. Clean the sensor glass.
4. Faulty 135 upstream perforation 4. Replace the sensor, or the
sensor or harness harness.
W-SP-7110 Perforation rupture exists. Film damage (8.2mm or longer
to perforation length) was detected
W-SP-7120 Frame position may not detected (upstream/right-feed/leading end
correctly. near upstream perforation sensor).
Remove carrier and then film, 1. Breaks in film 1. Correct the film.
and mend the rupture. 2. Film slippage due to dust or dirt 2. Clean the roller.
outside of carrier
4. Dust or dirt adhered to upstream/ 4. Clean the sensor glass.
(D402/D403) glass
5. Faulty upstream/downstream 5. Replace the sensor, or the
perforation sensor or harness harness.
W-SP-7121 Feeding of film failed. Blocked perforation (8.2mm or longer
to between perforations) was detected
W-SP-7131 Remove carrier and then film. (upstream/right-feed/leading end
near upstream perforation sensor).
1. Perforation blocked with splicing 1. Remove the splicing tape scan
tape, etc. using MFC10AR.
outside of carrier
(D402/D403) glass
3-96

W-SP-7132 Feeding of film failed. Perforation error range exceeds
to ±5mm when correcting feed at
W-SP-7142 Remove carrier and then film. perforation decision (upstream/right-
feed/trailing end near upstream
perforation sensor).
3
outside of carrier
(D402/D403) glass
W-SP-7171 Writing FlashROM data into Writing to FlashROM failure
1. Poorly connected plug-in 1. Remove and reinstall the carrier. If
Consult your technical connector the error occurs again, replace the
representative. plug-in connector.
E-SP-7172 Reading FlashROM data from Abnormal carrier/FlashROM data
1. Poorly connected plug-in 1. Remove and reinstall the carrier. If
Consult your technical connector the error occurs again, replace the
representative. plug-in connector.
W-SP-7180 The sensor for feeding lane CYA25 sensor calibration error
cannot be calibrated correctly. (Causes of the error message)
1. Dust or dirt adhered to frame 1. Clean the glass.
Remove the carrier, and then sensor (D407 to D410) glass
clean the glass surface of the 2. Faulty frame sensor (DBF/LBF) 2. Replace the sensor circuit board.
upper and lower feeding lanes 3. Poorly connected or broken 135 3. Reconnect or replace the harness.
with a dry cotton swab. frame sensor harness
W-SP-7185 Film remains in feeding lane. Detected remaining film on frame
sensor of NC100AR carrier when
Remove carrier and then film. exiting from maintenance menu
1. Film remains on frame sensor 1. Remove the film.
(D407 to D410)
2. Dust or dirt adhered to frame 2. Clean the glass.
sensor (D407 to D410) glass
3. Faulty frame sensor (D407 to 3. Replace the sensor.
D410)
4. Poorly connected or broken 4. Reconnect or replace the harness.
harness
3-97

W-SP-7186 Film remains in feeding lane. Detected remaining film on bar-code
1. Film remains on bar-code sensor 1. Remove the film.
(D405/D406)
2. Dust or dirt adhered to bar-code 2. Clean the glass.
sensor (D405/D406) glass
3. Faulty bar-code sensor (D405/ 3. Replace the sensor.
D406)
harness
W-SP-7187 Film remains in feeding lane. Detected remaining film on panorama
1. Film remains on panorama sensor 1. Remove the film.
(D411/D412)
2. Dust or dirt adhered to panorama 2. Clean the glass.
sensor (D411/D412) glass
3. Faulty panorama sensor (D411/ 3. Replace the sensor.
D412)
harness
W-SP-7188 Carrier is not installed correctly. (Causes of the error message)
1. Incorrectly inserted carrier plug-in 1. Install the carrier correctly.
Install the carrier again. connector
2. Foreign matter blocking carrier 2. Remove the foreign matter.
lock sensor (D102)
3. Faulty carrier lock sensor (D102) 3. Replace the sensor.
4. Faulty carrier lock mechanism 4. Replace the damaged parts.
I-SP-7213 Downloading the data to the Updating data from HDD to Wait until downloading is completed.
carrier. FlashROM
It takes about 40 seconds.

I-SP-7214 Uploading the data from the Uploading data from carrier to HDD Wait until uploading is completed.
carrier.
It takes about 40 seconds.

W-SP-7215 The version information stored in Carrier program file in HDD may not Restart the system software.If the
the hard disk was not known. exist or be damaged. error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
The version may be old, but you
can use the current carrier.
I-SP-7218 Too many frames in film. (Causes of the error message) Reduce the frames to 79 and below.
80 or more frames were detected
Printing is possible up to 79th during scanning.
frame.
3-98

W-SP-7219 Feeding of film failed. Downstream perforation sensor
detects film before upstream
Remove the carrier, and then perforation sensor. Previous right-
take out the film. feed scanned film is left in the carrier
(film exists on downstream
perforation sensor).
3
1. The previously scanned film is not 1. Remove the film.
removed.
2. Dust or dirt adhered to 2. Clean the glass.
(D403) glass
3. Faulty downstream perforation 3. Replace the sensor, or reconnect
sensor (D403) or harness or replace harness.
I-SP-7220 The downloader returned the Carrier program file in HDD may not Restart the system software.If the
error, so the version of the carrier exist or be damaged. error occurs again, reinstall the
was not known. system software.
The version may be old, but you

can use the current carrier.
I-SP-7221 To prevent film scratches, clean Cleaning message to prevent flow
the feeding lane. when inserting a reversal film after
360 or more frames are printed
consecutively.
Reversal film is inserted after more Clean the feed lane.
than 360 frames are fed.
W-SP-7223 Diffusion box is not installed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Carrier has been installed without 1. Install the diffusion box.
Remove the carrier, and then diffusion box.
install it. 2. Faulty diffusion box sensor (D422) 2. Replace the sensor.
3. Broken diffusion box sensor 3. Repair or replace the harness.
(D422) harness
W-SP-7224 Diffusion box is not installed. (Causes of the error message)
1. Carrier has been installed without 1. Install the diffusion box.
Remove the carrier, and then diffusion box.
install it. 2. Faulty diffusion box sensor (D484) 2. Replace the sensor.
3. Broken diffusion box sensor 3. Repair or replace the harness.
(D484) harness
W-SP-7225 The carrier software must be Mismatched software version Reinstall the carrier to update
upgraded. between DIC2 and carrier software automatically.
Install the carrier again.
3-99
3.3 Trouble Shooting
3.3.1 Film Carrier
Install other carrier. Abnormal

Is there any abnormality?
Normal Check if for dust on pins of plug-in

connector in scanner side, and remove it. Solved
Check for connection error, breakage
or dust collection, and repair connector,
if necessary.
Not solved
END
(See 3.3.3 CTL25 Circuit Board)
Check for connection error, Solved
breakage or dust collection in carrier side,
and repair connector, if necessary.
Not solved END
Normal
Use “I/O Check (0448)”
to check sensor.
Malfunction
Malfunction
Check sensor harness.
Normal
Repair or replace harness.
Replace sensor.
Normal
Check operation of motor or solenoid.
Malfunction Check if there is any mechanical failure and

repair if necessary.
• Wear, loosening or coming-off of drive belt
Malfunction
Inspect motor or solenoid harness.
Normal
Normal
Replace motor or solenoid.
Malfunction
In case of feed system, Solved

replace drive circuit board.
Not solved
END
Replace CYA25, CYB25 or

JNC25/PDC25 circuit board.
Note:
Note: CYA25 circuit board: For NC100AR
CYB25 circuit board: For MFC10AR
JNC25/PDC25 circuit board: For NC100AR
3-100
3.3.2 CTL25 Circuit Board
Come-off or
Sensor abnormal. Use “I/O Check (0341)” to check sensor abnormal sound
and motor. Motor driven?
3
Motor not driven.
Fuse F001 on CTL25 Check mechanical operation,
circuit board burnt out? and repair or replace.
Not
burnt out Burnt out
On “I/O Check (0341)”, other output Operated not at all
Only same fuse system normally operated?
system not operated
Other operated
Turn off power supply, check for short-circuit q
of fuse system and repair if necessary.
Check if there is a Malfunction

connection error or disconnection of harness
between CTL25 circuit board and motor.
Normal
Restart system. Repair or replace harness.
Replace motor. Solved

Solved?
Not solved
END
Replace CTL25 circuit board.
Check if there is a connection error or Malfunction

disconnection of harness between CTL25
circuit board and sensor.
Normal
Replace sensor. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
Replace CTL25 circuit board.
Check and repair or replace harnesses

the between the DC power supply unit Solved
and the CTL3, CTL7 and CTL9 connectors
on the CTL25 circuit board.
Solved?
Not solved END
Replace the DC power supply unit.
3-101
3.3.3 Replenisher Cartridge Box Malfunction
Open
Replenisher box door open?
Closed The harness between the replenisher box

door open/close sensor (D724) and PWR3 Yes
on the PWR27 circuit board is poorly
connected or broken?
No
Connect harness correctly,
or repair or replace it.
Replace the replenisher box door open/close

sensor (D724).
Fig-1 Screwdriver
Insert screwdriver into the hole and
press the lock arm to release the lock.
Fig-1
Open
Replenishment cartridge open?
Closed
R3-344
Are solution levels of P1R, P2RA and P2RB No
above the upper level sensor?
Yes
Is the harness between the replenisher cartridge Yes
box lower sensor (D723) and CTL29 on the CTL27
circuit board poorly connected or broken?
No
Is the harness between the replenisher cartridge Yes
box upper sensor (D722) and CTL9 on the CTL27
circuit board is poorly connected or broken?
No
or repair or replace it.
Replace the replenisher cartridge box Solved

lower sensor (D723).
Solved?
Not solved
Replace the replenisher cartridge box Not solved
upper sensor (D722).
Solved?
Solved
Replace the CTL27 circuit board.
1. Pour in water so that all replenisher levels are

above the upper level sensor.
2. Close and open replenisher cartridge box door.
3-102
Is the harness between the cartridge opening Yes

motor (M720) and CTL13 on the CTL27
circuit board is poorly connected or broken?
No
3
Replace the cartridge opening Solved

motor (M720).
Solved?
Not solved
1. Install new replenisher cartridge.

2. Close replenisher cartridge box door.
• Cartridge opened and diluting starts.
3-103
3.3.4 Processing Solution Temperature Abnormality
Cool
Touch heater surface.
<Heater>
Warm
To “Temperature sensor”,
“Processing solution circulation”,
Is the harness between the heater and the
“Safety thermostat”, “Heater cooling fan”
PAC27 circuit board poorly
connected or broken? Yes
P1: H700 to PAC7
P2: H701 to PAC7
PS1/2: H702 to PAC7
PS3: H703 to PAC7
No

Replace heater Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
Replace the PAC27 circuit board.
<Temperature sensor>
Compare display values with measured Abnormal

values on “Processor Temperature
Calibration (0623)”.
Normal
Is the harness between the solution
thermometer and the CTL27 circuit board is
poorly connected or broken? Yes
P1: TS700 to CTL26
P2: TS701 to CTL26
PS1/2: TS702 to CTL26
PS3: TS703 to CTL26
No
To “Processing solution circulation”,
“Safety thermostat”,
“Heater cooling fan” Connect harness correctly,
Replace processing solution Solved

temperature sensor.
Solved?
Not solved END
3-104
<Processing solution circulation>
Remove circulation filter from sub-tank. NO

Is solution surface inside sub-tank swirling?
YES
Is the harness between the circulation

pump and the CTL27 circuit board
poorly connected or broken?
Yes
P1: PU700 to CTL14
P2: PU701 to CTL14
PS1: PU702 to CTL14
PS2: PU703 to CTL14
PS3: PU704 to CTL14
No

Replace circulation pump. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
Replace circulation filter. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
Yes
Pipes or nozzles clogged?
No
Correct clogging.
To “Safety thermostat”,
“Heater cooling fan”
3-105
<Safety thermostat>
Safety thermostat operated on

“Processor Input Check (0624)”?
Operating temperature:64°C
Returned temperature:42°C
Not operated
P1
Operating temperature: 64°C
P2
Returned temperature: 42°C
PS1/2
Operating temperature: 80°C
PS3
Returned temperature: 42°C
Operated To “Heater cooling fan”
No
Return at below 42°C?
Yes
Is the harness between the safety
thermometer and the PAC27 circuit board
is poorly connected or broken? Yes
P1: D700 to PAC5
P2: D701 to PAC5
PS1/2: D702 to PAC5
PS3: D703 to PAC5
No
Determine the cause of high temperature. Connect harness correctly,

Replace safety thermostat. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
<Heater cooling fan>
Heater cooling fan turned ON/OFF on Abnormal

“Processor I/O Check (0642)”?
Normal
Is the harness between the heater
cooling fan and the CTL27 circuit board Yes
is poorly connected or broken?
F701 to CTL11
No
Clean fan filter. Connect harness correctly,

Solved
Replace fan.
Solved?
Not solved END
3-106
3.3.5 Dryer Temperature Abnormality
Removed
Cover around dryer section removed?
3
Not removed
Install correctly.
To “Dryer heater”, “Dryer temperature sensor”,

“Dryer heater safety thermostat”, “Dryer fan”.
<Dryer heater>
Touch dryer section. Not risen

Temperature risen?
Risen
The following protection devices are Tripped

tripped?
Circuit protector: CP3, CP4, CP5
Not tripped
To “Dryer temperature sensor”,
“Dryer safety thermostat”, Check short-circuit, repair it if necessary.
“Dryer fan”
Are any of the following harnesses Yes

•Dryer heater (H760) and SSR1 to SSR3.
No

Is the harness between the SSR1, SSR2, Yes

SSR3 and PAC3 on the PAC27 circuit board
No

Replace dryer heater. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
3-107
<Dryer temperature sensor>
Dryer temperature risen on Not risen

“Processor Temperature Calibration (0623)”?
Risen
Is the harness between the dryer

thermometer (TS760) and CTL26 Yes
poorly connected or broken ?
No
To “Safety heater thermostat”,
“Dryer fan” Connect harness correctly,
Replace the dryer thermometer (TS760). Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
<Dryer heater safety thermostat>
Dryer heater safety thermostat Operated

(D760) operated on
Not operated
Depress the recovery button on the Not solved

safety thermostat.
Solved?
Solved
Is the harness between the dryer heater
To “Dryer fan” Yes
safety thermostat (D760) and PAC4 on
the PAC27 circuit board poorly
END
No

Replace dryer heater. Solved

Solved?
Not solved
END
3-108
<Recovery of Safety Thermostat> Recovery Button
1. Remove the dryer fan (F760) (see Subsection

15.2.2).
2. Depress the recovery button on the dryer heater 3

safety thermostat.
3. Reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of

removal.
R3-490
<Dryer fan>
Dryer fan (F760) turned ON/OFF on Abnormal

Normal
Is the harness between the dryer fan Yes
(F760)and CTL22 on the CTL27 circuit
board poorly connected or broken?
No
Clean dryer air filter.
Open the dryer belt unit and make sure
there is no paper in abnormal position.
Replace dryer fan. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
3-109
3.3.6 Processing Solution Tank Level Lowering
Remove circulation filter from sub-tank,

and measure solution level from Lowering
upper surface of sub-tank.
less than 65mm: Normal
more than 65mm: Lowering
Normal
Leakage
Leakage in processing solution system?
Normal
To “Processing solution level sensor diagnostics” Repair leakage.

Prepare processing solution.
To “3.3.7 Replenisher Pump Diagnostics”
<Processing solution level sensor diagnostics>
Remove processing solution level sensor,

soak it into water container. Abnormal
Sensor turned ON/OFF on
Normal
Are any of the following harnesses

between the solution level sensors and
the CTL27 circuit board are poorly
connected or broken? Yes
P1: FS700 to CTL29
P2: FS701 to CTL29
PS1: FS702 to CTL29
PS2: FS703 to CTL29
PS3: FS704 to CTL29
To “3.3.7 Replenisher Pump Diagnostics” No

3-110
3.3.7 Replenisher Pump Diagnostics
No
Menu 0625 “Processor Operating Condition
Setup” is set properly? 3
Yes
Set correctly.
Perform Menu 0620 “Pump Output Abnormal

Measurement/Setting.
Normal?”
Normal
Hose clogged or bent in Yes

replenishment system?
No
To “3.3.8 Rack Auto Cleaning System
Correct hose clogging or bending.
Are any of the following harnesses

between the replenisher pumps
and the CTL27 circuit board are
poorly connected or broken? Yes
P1R: PU721 to CTL12
P2RA: PU722 to CTL12
P2RB: PU723 to CTL12
PSR: PU724 to CTL12
No

Replace replenisher pump.
Perform Menu 0620 “Replenisher Pump Normal

Output Measurement/Setting.”
Normal?
Abnormal END
3-111
3.3.8 Rack Auto Cleaning System Diagnostics
Perform Menu 0621 “Auto Cleaning Normal

Output Measurement/Setting”.
Normal?
Abnormal END
Is the harness between the auto washing Yes

pump (PU720) and CTL13 on the CTL27
circuit board poorly connected
or broken?
No Connect harness correctly,
Replace the auto washing pump (PU720)

Normal
and then perform Menu 0621 “Auto Cleaning
Output Measurement/Setting”.
Normal?
Abnormal END
Is the harness between the No.2 Yes

crossover rack auto washing valve (S720)
and CTL16 on the CTL27 circuit board
No repair or replace it.
Is the harness between the No.3

crossover rack auto washing valve (S721) Yes
and CTL16 on the CTL27 circuit board
Is the harness between the dryer entrance

Yes
squeegee rack auto washing valve (S722) and
CTL16 on the CTL27 circuit board poorly
Replace the No.2 crossover rack auto

washing valve (S720) and then perform Normal
Menu 0621 “Auto Cleaning Output
Measurement/Setting”.Normal?
Abnormal END
Replace the No.3 crossover rack auto

washing valve (S721) and then perform Menu Normal
0621 “Auto Cleaning Output
Abnormal END
Replace the dryer entrance squeegee

rack auto washing valve (S722) and then Normal
perform Menu 0621 “Auto Cleaning Output
Abnormal END
3-112
3.3.9 P1R Stirring Valve/Replenisher Cartridge Washing Valve

Diagnostics
Operate valve on Menu 0642

“I/O Check”. Operating sound heard?
3
P1R cartridge washing valve: S728 Heard
P2RA cartridge washing valve: S729
P2RB cartridge washing valve: S730
P1R stirring valve: S731
Not heard
Stirring, cartridge washing hose Yes

clogged or bent?
No
To “3.3.8 Rack Auto Cleaning Repair hose clogging and bending.

System Diagnostics”
Is the harness between the valve (S728/S729/ Yes

S730/S731) and CTL15 on the CTL27 circuit board
is poorly connected or broken?
No

Replace valve (S728/S729/S730/S731). Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
3-113
3.3.10 Replenisher Level Sensor Diagnostics
Check level sensor and actual level on Abnormal

“Processor I/O Check (0642)”.
Normal
Is the harness between the level sensor
and the CTL28 on the CTL27 circuit
board is poorly connected or broken?
P1R upper level sensor: FS720
P1R lower level sensor: FS724 Yes
P2RA upper level sensor: FS721
P2RA lower level sensor: FS725
P2RB upper level sensor: FS722
P2RB lower level sensor: FS726
PSR upper level sensor: FS723
PSR lower level sensor: FS727
No
To “3.3.7 Replenisher Pump Diagnostics”
3.3.11 Return Action after Replenishment System Error
All solution levels of the P1R, P2RA Yes

and P2RB tanks aligned around
upper level sensor?
No Upper level sensors of all tanks ALL “Yes”
indicate “YES” on
Drain all replenishers from the P1R, Not all “Yes”
P2RA and P2RB tanks.
Pour a small amount of water to

make indicator(s) of upper level sensor(s)
Show “YES”.
Install new replenisher cartridge.
Open and close replenisher

cartridge box door.
Perform “PROC.INST.MODE” -
“INSTALLATION” - “MIX REPLENISH”.
3-114
3.3.12 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Malfunction
Remove replenisher cartridge. Yes

Solution remained in cartridge due to
opening malfunction? 3
No
Yes
Opening parts damaged or abnormal?
No
Replace parts.
To “3.3.11 Return Action after
Replenishment System Error”
Any object remained in opening Yes

nozzle hopper section?
No
Remove object.
Hose between hopper section Yes

and tank clogged?
No
Correct clogging.
To “Replenishment Level Sensor To “3.3.11 Return Action after

Diagnostics (See Subsection 3.3.10)” Replenishment System Error”
3-115
3.3.13 Checking Network Connection/Environment
[1] By using My Network, check whether or not the target machine can be recognized.
[2] Check whether or not the HUB is turned ON.
[3] Check whether or not the network cables are connected properly.
[4] Check whether or not the network parameters such as the IP address and subnet mask are correctly set on each
PC.
[5] Check whether or not the name of the server to be connected is set properly on the setup and maintenance
menu.
3.3.14 2
Checking the Status of the DIC2
[1] Check whether or not the free space on the hard disk is sufficient.
[2] Check whether or not any special peripheral devices are connected.
3.3.15 Checking the Status of Installed Software
[1] If an error occurs immediately after installation, check whether or not the installation work is performed properly.
[2] When the installation work is performed properly, if an error occurs while the system is in operation,
check whether or not any applications were installed immediately before the error occurred.
3.3.16 Checking the Processing Status of the Job/Order
[1] Check whether or not any errors or unusual conditions are found in the job/order.
3-116
4. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
4.1 Update...................................................................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Update ........................................................................ 4-2
4.2 DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Reinstallation............................................ 4-4

4.2.1 BIOS Setup............................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Partition Confirmation............................................................................................. 4-6
4.2.3 User Account Setup ................................................................................................ 4-9 4
4.2.4 Driver Installation and Computer Name Registration ........................................ 4-11
4.2.5 Taskbar Setting...................................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.6 Classic View and Screen Saver Setting .............................................................. 4-15
4.2.7 Time Zone Setting ................................................................................................. 4-17
4.2.8 Local Area Connection Setup .............................................................................. 4-18
4.2.9 Windows XP Auto Configuration ......................................................................... 4-19
4.2.10 MSDE2000SP3a (MSDE) Installation.................................................................... 4-21
4.2.11 Internet Information Services (IIS) Installation ................................................... 4-22
4.2.12 Microsoft .Net Framework V1.1 Installation ........................................................ 4-25
4.2.13 DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Installation ............................................................... 4-28
4.2.14 Optional Software Installation.............................................................................. 4-30
4.2.15 Antivirus Software Installation............................................................................. 4-30
4.2.16 Scanner Data Loading (Scanner Backup & download (Menu 0326))................ 4-31
4.2.17 Printer Data Loading (Printer Backup & download (Menu 1622)) ..................... 4-32
4.2.18 Data Set Tool Creating .......................................................................................... 4-33
4.2.19 Launcher Menu Registration (Menu 1024) .......................................................... 4-37
4-1
4.1 Update
4.1.1 DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Update
1. Insert the S2 update CD into the CD drive.
S2 Update CD
R3-318-1
2. Restart the PC.
3. Select [S2 Software] and then click the [Install]

button.
4. Click the [Yes] button.
4-2
4.1 Update
• After approximately thirty minutes, the “Setup

Complete (A-100)” dialog box appears.
5. Remove the S2 update CD from the CD drive.
6. Click the [OK] button.
• The system restarts.
If the machine stops during starting up or the system

freezes when changing the screen, initialization of the
PC and reinstallation of Windows XP may clear the
problem.
After reinstallation of Windows XP, reinstall the DIC II
(S2) software as described in this section. S2 Update CD
NOTE: If the software update for SP-500 is necessary, it is R3-358-2

performed automatically during reinstallation.
If the software update for LP-5000 is necessary, a
dialog box appears during reinstallation. Update is
performed by selecting “YES” in the dialog box.
4-3
4.2 DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Reinstallation
4.2.1 BIOS Setup
1. Start the PC and immediately press the key

indicated by the white characters on the black
background.
NOTE: Refer to Manual for the PC for the key to display

the BIOS setup screen.
• The BIOS setup screen appears.
2. Select “Advanced” on the menu bar.
3. Select “Enable” for “Hyper-Threading:”
4-4
4. Select “Exit” on the menu bar.
5. Press the [Esc] key.
6. Press the [Enter] key.
• The PC restarts and the Windows XP starts up.
4-5
4.2.2 Partition Confirmation
1. Select the [Start] button and then the [Control

Panel] icon.
• The “Control Panel” screen appears.
2. Click “Switch to Classic View”.
• The “Control Panel” screen changes to the

classic view.
3. Double click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
4-6
• The “Administrative Tools” screen appears.
4. Double click the [Computer Management] icon.
5. Click the [Disk Management] icon.
6. Make sure of the file system and capacity for C

and D drive partition.
In the case of 160 GB HDD:

Volume File System Capacity
(C:) NTFS 20 GB min.
(D:) NTFS 140 GB min.
7. Make sure “CD-ROM 0” is “DVD (N:).

If it is not (N:), change by taking the following
steps.
4-7
1) Right click the [CD-ROM 0] icon and select

“Drive letter & path change”.
2) Click the [Change] button.
3) Click the [▼] button and select “N”.
4) Click the [OK] button.
8. Right click the [New Volume (D: )] icon.
4-8
9. Make sure “NTFS” is entered in the “File system”

box.
11. Select “D drive” in the “Drive Change” dialog box.
12. Click the [OK] button. 4

• Formatting of the drive (D: ) starts.
4.2.3 User Account Setup
1. Click the [Start] button and then [Control Panel]

icon.
2. Double click the [User Accounts] icon.
3. Click the [Change an account] button.
4-9
4. Click the [FRONTIER] icon.
NOTE: If there is no [FRONTIER] icon, select the

[Change my name] button, enter “FRONTIER”
and click the [Change Name] button.
5. Click the [Create Password] button.
4-10
6. Enter “FRONTIER” both in “Type the new

password:” and “Type a new password again to
confirm:”
7. Click the [Create Password] button.
8. Click the [X] buttons to close all opened screens.
4.2.4 Driver Installation and Computer Name Registration
1. Install required drivers (see Installation Manual for

each device).
2. Click the [Start] button and then the [Control

Panel] icon.
3. Double click the [System] icon.
4-11
4. Click the “Hardware” tab.
5. Click the [Device Manager] button.
6. Make sure there is no “?” mark.
NOTE: If there is a “?” mark, install the driver.
4-12
7. Click the “Computer Name” tab.
8. Click the [Change] button.
9. Enter “FE-FRONTEND” in “Computer name:”
NOTE: Entering of another name may be required

according to the network environment.
4-13
4.2.5 Taskbar Setting
1. Right click the taskbar.
2. Select “Properties”.
3. Click the “Taskbar” tab.
4. Add a checkmark [✓] to “Auto-hide the taskbar”.
5. Click the [Apply] and then the [OK] buttons.
4-14
4.2.6 Classic View and Screen Saver Setting
1. Right click the taskbar.
2. Select “Properties”.
3. Click the “Start Menu” tab.
4. Select “Classic Start menu”
5. Click the [Apply], then [OK] buttons.
6. Click the [Start] button and then the [Control

Panel] icon.
7. Double click the [Display] icon.
4-15
8. Click the [▼] button and select “Windows Classic”.
9. Click the “Screen Saver” tab.
10. Click the [▼] button and select “(None)”.
4-16
4.2.7 Time Zone Setting
1. On the “Control Panel” screen, double click the

[Date and Time] icon.
2. Click the “Time Zone” tab.
3. Click the [▼] button and select the appropriate

time zone.
4-17
4.2.8 Local Area Connection Setup
1. On the “Control Panel” screen, double click the

[Network Connections] icon.
2. Double click the [Local Area Connection] icon.
3. Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and add a

checkmark [✓].
4. Click the [Properties] button.
4-18
5. Select “Use the following IP address:” and enter

following IP address and subnet mask values.
IP address: 192.168.1.12
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.224
NOTE: • Normally enter 12 for the last 2 digits of IP

address.
• If the PC (DIC2) is connected to the already 4
used network, appropriate IP address and
subnet mask should be entered. For the last 2
digits of the IP address, 01 to 31 except 11 can
be selected.
4.2.9 Windows XP Auto Configuration
1. Insert the S2 CD into the CD drive.
S2 CD
R3-318-2
4-19
2. Double click the [My computer] icon.
3. Double click the [(N)] drive icon.
4. Double click the [Tools] folder.
5. Double click the [OsAutoConfig] folder.
6. Double click the [BeforeConfig. bat] icon.
4-20
7. Press the [Enter] key.
8. Click the [Start] button and the [Turn Off

Computer] icon.
9. Click the [Restart] icon.
• The PC restarts. 4
4.2.10 MSDE2000SP3a (MSDE) Installation
NOTE: If the installer CD starts up automatically, proceed to

Step 4.
1. Click the [FRONTIER] icon, enter “FRONTIER”

and click the [Enter] key.
2. Right click the [Start] button and select “Explore”.
3. Click the [(N: )] drive icon.
4. Double click the [EZ171] folder.
5. Double click the [setup] icon.
4-21
6. Select the [MSDE2000 SP3a] icon and click the

[Install] button.
4.2.11 Internet Information Services (IIS) Installation
1. Select the [IIS Install] icon and click the [Install]

button.
2. Click the [Add/Remove.....] button.
4-22
3. Select “Internet Information Service (IIS)” and add

a checkmark [✓].
4. Click the [Next] button.
5. Replace the S2 CD in the CD drive with the

“Windows XP” CD.
“Windows XP” CD
R3-318-3
4-23
6. Change “Copy files from:” to “N:\i386”.
8. Click the [Finish] button.
9. Replace the “Windows XP” CD in the CD drive

with the S2 CD.
S2 CD
R3-318-2
4-24
4.2.12 Microsoft .Net Framework V1.1 Installation
1. Right click the [Start] button, select “Explore” and

click the [(N: )] drive icon.
2. Click the [EZ171] folder.
3. Double click the [setup] icon.

4
4. Click the [Microsoft .Net Framework V1.1] icon.
5. Click the [Install] button.
4-25
7. Select “I agree” and click the [Install] button.
9. Click the [Start] button, then the [Setting] and

[Control Panel] icon.
4-26
10. Double click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
11. Make sure the [Microsoft .Net Framework 1.1

Wizards] icon exists.
12. Close the “Administrative Tools” screen.
13. Click the [Close] button.
4-27
14. Remove the S2 CD from the CD drive.
S2 CD
R3-358-2
• The Windows XP starts up.
4.2.13 DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Installation
1. Click the [FRONTIER] icon.
2. Insert the S2 CD into the CD drive.
S2 CD
R318-2
4-28
3. Right click the [Start] button, select “Explorer” and

click the [(N: )] drive icon.
NOTE: If the installer CD starts up automatically,

proceed to Step 5.
4. Click the [EZ171] folder.
5. Double click the [setup] icon. 4
6. Select [S2 Software].
7. Click the [Install] button.
4-29
• After approximately twenty minutes, the “Setup

Complete (A-100)” dialog box appears.
9. Remove the S2CD from the CD drive.
• The FRONTIER system starts up.
S2 CD
R3-358-2
4.2.14 Optional Software Installation
If necessary, install optional software by referring to

its installation manual.
4.2.15 Antivirus Software Installation
Install the antivirus software by referring its

Installation Manual.
NOTE: The following folders should be excluded from real

time scanning of the antivirus software.
Excluded Folders
C:\PNS
D:\Fujifilm
D:\BackupLog
D:\Expcond
D:\Overlay
D:\Template
C:\F-DIA
C:\ProgramFiles\Microsoft SQL Server
4-30
4.2.16 Scanner Data Loading (Scanner Backup & download

(Menu 0326))
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [03 Scanner

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0326 Scanner
Backup & download] buttons.
4
2. Insert the “Scanner Backup Data FD” into the FD

drive of the PC.
3. Click the [OK] button in the “Data load” box.
Scanner Backup Data FD

R3-320-01
4-31
4. Remove the FD and click the [OK] button.
Scanner Backup
Data FD
R3-321-01
4.2.17 Printer Data Loading (Printer Backup & download

(Menu 1622))
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [15 Printer

Maintenance] → [1520 Printer Maintenance
Startup] → [1622 Printer Backup & download] →
[Enter] buttons.
2. Insert the “Printer Backup Data FD” into the FD

drive of the PC.
3. Click the [OK] button in the “Data load” box.
Printer Backup Data FD

R3-320-02
4-32
4
4. Remove the FD and click the [OK] button.
Printer Backup Data FD

R3-321-02
4.2.18 Data Set Tool Creating
1. Prepare a new formatted floppy disk and specify it

with “Data Set Tool”.
2. Insert the “Data Set Tool” FD into the FD drive.
DST (Data Set Tool) FD

R3-320-03
4-33
3. Insert the S2 CD into the CD-R drive.
S2 CD
R3-318-2
4. Click the [99 Special Operations] and [9941

Explorer] buttons.
5. Click the [DVD-RAM Drive (N: )] icon.
4-34
6. Click the [Tools] folder.
7. Double click the [DataSetTool.bat] icon.
• The files are saved into the FD.
8. Click the [3 1/2 Floppy (A: )] icon.
9. Double click the [DataSetTool.exe] icon.
4-35
10. Add a checkmark [✓] to the “FD Backup” box and

click the [System → FD] button.
• The data set tool is saved into the FD.
13. Click the [End] and [X] buttons.
4-36
14. Remove the “Data Set Tool” FD from the FD drive.
Data Set Tool FD

R3-321-03
15. Remove the S2 CD from the CD drive.
S2 CD
R3-358-2
4.2.19 Launcher Menu Registration (Menu 1024)
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [10.

Register/Delete] → [1024 Launcher Menu Regist/
Delete] buttons.
4-37
2. Insert the DST (Data Set Tool) FD into the FD

drive.

R3-320-03
3. Select “Other 1” for “Icon” and Enter “DST” in

“Application Name”.
4. Click the [Brows.] button.
5. Click the pull down [▼] button and select the [3 1/2
Floppy [A: ] ] icon.
6. Click the [Open] button.
7. Select the “Data Set Tool. exe” icon and click the
[Open] button.
4-38
• “A:\DataSetTool.exe” appears in the “Path” box.
8. Remove the DST FD from the FD drive.

R3-321-04
4-39
5. MAINTENANCE MENU
5.1 Operational Procedure ........................................................................... 5-4
5.2 System Operation Setup and Check (01) ............................................. 5-6

5.2.1 Image Export Settings (0101) ................................................................................. 5-6
5.2.2 Media Production Information (0120) .................................................................... 5-6
5.2.3 Print Production Information (0123) ...................................................................... 5-8
5.2.4 Equipment Name Set (0124) ................................................................................. 5-10
5.2.5 Timer Waiting Time Setup (0125) ......................................................................... 5-10
5.2.6 Installation Information Reference (0126) ........................................................... 5-11
5.2.7 Media Cumulative Production Information (0127).............................................. 5-11
5
5.2.8 Print Cumulative Production Information (0128)................................................ 5-13
5.2.9 Media Input Environment Setup (0136) ............................................................... 5-14
5.2.10 Writing Service Output Settings (0137) ............................................................... 5-16
5.2.11 Photo Copy Environment Setup (0138) ............................................................... 5-17
5.2.12 Media Attachment Index Print Setting (0139) ..................................................... 5-18
5.2.13 Installation Information Setup (0140) .................................................................. 5-18
5.2.14 Clear Error Log (0141)........................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.15 Periodical Message Setting (0146)....................................................................... 5-20
5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (02) ................................................ 5-21

5.3.1 Print Size Setup (0220).......................................................................................... 5-21
5.3.2 Monitor Adjustment (0222) ................................................................................... 5-23
5.3.3 Special Film Channel Setting (0223).................................................................... 5-24
5.3.4 Monotone Correction Setting (0224).................................................................... 5-26
5.3.5 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (0225)................................................................... 5-27
5.3.6 Back Printing Format (0226)................................................................................. 5-40
5.3.7 Index Conditions (0227) ........................................................................................ 5-43
5.3.8 Image Correction Setup (0240)............................................................................. 5-44
5.3.9 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag. Setting (0241)............................................... 5-45
5.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (03)............................................... 5-46

5.4.1 Input Check (0320)................................................................................................. 5-46
5.4.2 AF Function Setup (0323) ..................................................................................... 5-46
5.4.3 Image Scanning Condition Method (0324) .......................................................... 5-47
5.4.4 Film Scanner Installation Information Reference (0325) ................................... 5-48
5.4.5 Scanner Backup & download (0326).................................................................... 5-48
5.4.6 I/O Check (0341)..................................................................................................... 5-49
5.4.7 Carrier Inclination Display (0342)......................................................................... 5-50
5.4.8 CCD Data Display (0343)....................................................................................... 5-51
5.4.9 Film Scanner ID Registration (0344) .................................................................... 5-52
5.4.10 Optical Axis Adjustment (0345)............................................................................ 5-53
5.4.11 Spectral Calibration (0348) ................................................................................... 5-55
5.4.12 LED Light Amount Adjustment (0349)................................................................. 5-58
5.4.13 Scanner Parameter Check/Update (0350) ........................................................... 5-59
5.4.14 CCD Adjustment (0351)......................................................................................... 5-60
5.4.15 Working Information Display (0352) .................................................................... 5-62
5-1
5.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (04) ................................................. 5-63
5.5.1 NC100AR Fixed Feeding Setup (0400)................................................................. 5-63
5.5.2 Mask Position Adjustment (0420) ........................................................................ 5-63
5.5.3 NC100AR Input Check (0421) ............................................................................... 5-66
5.5.4 MFC10AR Input Check (0422)............................................................................... 5-66
5.5.5 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (0425) ....................................................................... 5-67
5.5.6 Focus Offset Adjustment (0441) .......................................................................... 5-68
5.5.7 NC100AR Sensor Calibration Information (0443) ............................................... 5-70
5.5.8 NC100AR ID Registration (0446) .......................................................................... 5-71
5.5.9 MFC10AR ID Registration (0447).......................................................................... 5-72
5.5.10 NC100AR I/O Check (0448) ................................................................................... 5-73
5.5.11 NC100AR Machine Data Setup (0451).................................................................. 5-74
5.5.12 NC100AR Feeding Operation Check (0455) ........................................................ 5-75
5.6 Order Control and Maintenance (09)................................................... 5-76

5.6.1 Workflow Adviser Environment Setup (0920)..................................................... 5-76
5.6.2 System Operation Setting Setup (0921) .............................................................. 5-76
5.6.3 2 Operation Setting Setup (0923) .................................................... 5-78
Server/DIC2
5.7 Register/Delete (10) .............................................................................. 5-79

5.7.1 Shop Logo Regist/Delete (1020)........................................................................... 5-79
5.7.2 Template Regist/Delete (1021).............................................................................. 5-80
5.7.3 Holiday File Regist/Delete (1022) ......................................................................... 5-80
5.7.4 Custom Button Regist/Save (1023)...................................................................... 5-80
5.7.5 Launcher Menu Regist/Delete (1024)................................................................... 5-83
5.8 System Operation Setup and Check (16) ........................................... 5-84

5.8.1 Timer Setup (1621) ................................................................................................ 5-84
5.8.2 Printer Backup & download (1622) ...................................................................... 5-85
5.8.3 Installation Information Reference (1626) ........................................................... 5-86
5.8.4 Installation Information Setup (1640) .................................................................. 5-86
5.9 Print Condition Setup and Check (17) ................................................ 5-88

5.9.1 Paper Condition Setup (1700) .............................................................................. 5-88
5.9.2 Paper Magazine Registration (1721) .................................................................... 5-90
5.9.3 Paper Condition Method Setup (1742)................................................................. 5-93
5.9.4 Paper Surfaces Display Setup (1743) .................................................................. 5-93
5.10 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (05) ................................................. 5-94

5.10.1 Magazine Feed Length Adjustment (0520).......................................................... 5-94
5.10.2 G Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (0522) ............................................ 5-95
5.10.3 Paper Feed (0523).................................................................................................. 5-96
5.10.4 Printer Temperature Display (0524) ..................................................................... 5-97
5.10.5 Printer Input Check (0525) .................................................................................... 5-97
5.10.6 Image Position/Angle Fine Adjustment (0527) ................................................... 5-98
5.10.7 Printer Function Select (0528)............................................................................ 5-100
5.10.8 Printer I/O Check (0540) ...................................................................................... 5-101
5.10.9 Test Pattern Printing (0541)................................................................................ 5-102
5.10.10 Laser Exposure Check (0542) ............................................................................ 5-104
5.10.11 R Laser (R-LD) Data (0543) ................................................................................. 5-104
5-2
5.10.12 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (0544).............................................................................. 5-104
5.10.13 B Laser (B-LD) Data (0545) ................................................................................. 5-105
5.10.14 Scan/Scan Home Position Parameter (0546) .................................................... 5-105
5.10.15 Main Scan/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjust (0547)......................................... 5-106
5.10.16 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (0548).............................................. 5-107
5.10.17 Laser History Display (0549) .............................................................................. 5-109
5.10.18 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (0550).............................................. 5-110
5.10.19 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (0551) ...................................................... 5-110
5.10.20 Filter Exchange Log (0552)................................................................................. 5-111
5.10.21 Drawing Position Sensor Adjustment (0553).................................................... 5-111 5
5.10.22 Image Position Initialization (0554).................................................................... 5-112
5.10.23 Sub-scan Feeding Speed Adjustment (0555).................................................... 5-113
5.10.24 Sub-Scan Soft Nip Adjustment (0557) ............................................................... 5-114
5.10.25 Sensor Current Value Setting (0559) ................................................................. 5-115
5.10.26 Printer Operation Data Display (0560) ............................................................... 5-116
5.10.27 Data Saving (0561)............................................................................................... 5-117
5.10.28 Data Download (0562) ......................................................................................... 5-117
5.11 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (06) ......................................... 5-118

5.11.1 Pump Output Measurement/Setting (0620) ....................................................... 5-118
5.11.2 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (0621)......................................... 5-120
5.11.3 Low Volume Processing Setup (0622)............................................................... 5-122
5.11.4 Processor Temperature Calibration (0623) ....................................................... 5-122
5.11.5 Processor Input Check (0624) ............................................................................ 5-125
5.11.6 Processor Operating Condition Setup (0625)................................................... 5-126
5.11.7 Processing Temperature Setting (0640)............................................................ 5-127
5.11.8 Processor I/O Check (0642) ................................................................................ 5-128
5.11.9 Processor Operation Data Display (0643) ......................................................... 5-129
5.12 Self-Diagnostic (23) ............................................................................ 5-130

5.12.1 Paper Feed Check (2340) .................................................................................... 5-130
5.13 Printer Registration (15)..................................................................... 5-134

5.13.1 Printer Registration (1540).................................................................................. 5-134
5.14 Special Operations (99)..................................................................... 5-135

5.14.1 Paint (9940) .......................................................................................................... 5-135
5.14.2 Explorer (9941)..................................................................................................... 5-135
5.14.3 Command (9942).................................................................................................. 5-136
5.15 DST (Data Set Tool) Update ............................................................... 5-137
5-3
5.1 Operational Procedure
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] button on the

main menu screen.
• The password dialog box appears.
2. Enter “7777” in the “Password” box using the

operation or full keyboard.
• The “Setup and Maintenance” menu screen

appears.
4. Click the desired group from the left-hand group

list.
5-4
5.1 Operational Procedure
• The item list appears in the right-hand half of the

menu screen.
5. Click the desired item.
• Each screen appears.
Reference: The screen number can be entered to

display each screen except under
“1520 Printer Setup and Maintenance”
by following the steps below. 5
1) Press the [F1] key.
• The “Screen No. Entry” dialog box appears.
2) Enter the screen number using the numeric

keys of the operation, or full keyboard.
• Each screen appears.
6. Upon completion of the setup and maintenance

operations, click the [Close], [Cancel] or [OK]
button to quit the screen.
• Operation returns to the menu screen.
7. Click the [Printing] button.
• The order information screen appears.
5-5
5.2 System Operation Setup and Check (01)
5.2.1 Image Export Settings (0101)
This procedure sets applicable boundaries of the

center cropping.
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [01 System

Operation and Check] → [0101 Image Export
Settings] buttons.
2. Select “Both” or “Print Only” for “Center Cropping

for Export/Print”.
5.2.2 Media Production Information (0120)
This procedure displays the production information.

The data can be cleared in this menu.

Operation Setup and Check] → [0120 Media
Production Information] buttons.
2. Confirm and save the production information for

[Film], [Media] or [All].
3. Record the production information.
4. To save the data into a FD, follow these steps.
1) Click the [FD Save] button.
2) Select [Starting date] and [Saving days].
5-6
3) Insert a formatted FD into the FD drive of the

PC.
5
FD
Z2041
• The data is saved into the FD.
5) Remove the FD from the FD drive.
• The dialog box disappears.
FD
5. To clear any data, follow these steps. Z2042
1) In “Input Type”, choose which data you wish to

clear.
2) Click the [Clear] button.
• The data is cleared.
5-7
7. Click the [Administration] button to select the

saving period (saving days) and the punctuation
type for saving data.
5.2.3 Print Production Information (0123)
This procedure displays the production information.

The data can be cleared in this menu.

Operation Setup and Check] → [0123 Print
Production Information] buttons.
2. Select “Negative”, “Reversal”, “Media” or “All” from

the “Input Type” box.
• The information of the input type is displayed.
3. Record the production information.

An asterisk (∗) indicates duplicate size
4. To save the data to a FD, follow the steps below.

PC.
FD
Z2041
5-8
5
5. To clear the data, follow the steps below.
1) Click the [Clear] button. FD
Z2042
• The “Clear production information?” dialog

box appears.
• The data is cleared and clearing date

appears.
5-9
5.2.4 Equipment Name Set (0124)
Set up the device name to be used in the system and

its identifier when creating an order.

Operation Setup and Check] → [0124 Equipment
Name Set] buttons.
2. Set up the following items.
- Device Name for scanner or DIC2

- Order Identifier
5.2.5 Timer Waiting Time Setup (0125)
This procedure sets up the sorter information display

time, waiting time for monitoring and waiting time for
the position adjustment of the 1st frame.

Operation and Check] → [0125 Timer Waiting
Time Setup] buttons.
Sort Info. Display Time: Time period during the

number of prints and sort number are
displayed when pressing the [Sort] key or
during auto sorting.
Waiting time for monitoring: Waiting time for 1- or 6-

frame display during pre-scanning. This
function can only be activated when the “Auto”
film feed mode is used.
Waiting time for the pos. adjust of the 1st frame: Time
the black-and-white image is displayed after
inserting the film for adjusting the position of
the leading end frame.
NOTE: The black-and-white image will disappear in 20

seconds to protect the CCD.
2. Move the cursor to the “sec.” box.
3. Change the time by clicking the [▲] or [▼] button.
5-10
5.2.6 Installation Information Reference (0126)
This procedure displays the scanner and printer

installation information.

Operation and Check] → [0126 Installation
Information Reference] buttons.
2. Check the installation information. 5

5.2.7 Media Cumulative Production Information (0127)
Confirm the media cumulative production information.

Cumulative Production Information] buttons.
2. Select “Film”, “Media” or “All” from the “Input Type”

box.
3. Record the media cumulative production

information.
4. To save the data into a FD, follow these steps.
2) Select “Starting date” and “Saving days”.
5-11

PC.
FD
Z2041
FD
6) Click the [OK] button. Z2042
5-12
5.2.8 Print Cumulative Production Information (0128)
This procedure displays the print cumulative

production information.

Operation Setup and Check] → [0128 Print
Cumulative Production Information] buttons.
2. Select “Negative”, “Reversal”, “Media” or “All” from 5

the “Input Type” box.
• The information of the input type is displayed.
3. Record the print cumulative production

An asterisk (∗) indicates duplicate size.
information.
4. To save the data to a FD, follow the steps given on

the next page.

PC.
FD
Z2041
5-13
FD
Z2042
5.2.9 Media Input Environment Setup (0136)
Set up the reading media drives and items for each

image file format.

Operation Setup and Check] → [0136 Media Input
Environment Setup] buttons.
● Setting the Media Drive
1) Select the “Media Drive” tab.
2) Click the arrow button to select the media.
3) Enter the media name in the “Name”, then

select the drive letter with the arrow button.
4) Add a checkmark [✓] to “Auto”.
5) Click the [OK] button. The settings including

those in the “Readable Format” tab screen are
saved.
5-14
● [Readable Format] Settings
1) Select the “Readable Format” tab.
2) In the “Service On/Off” columu, add a

checkmark [✓] to the format (Exif-jpeg, BMP,
TIFF, etc.) to be used during reading the
image file.
3) Set up the “Limited Image Size” for each

format. 5
4) In the “Display On/Off in Error File” columu,
add a checkmark [✓] to the format whose error
file is to be listed up when the reading failure
occurs.
5) To list the error file, select “ON” for “Error File

List”.
6) Select the media reading mode “Select Frame

Mode” for image files.
• Normal Mode (default): Reads all image files

stored in the media, so it takes a long time to
read files.
• Fast Mode: Reads only the directory/file

name for searching images to shorten the
reading time.
7) Click the [OK] button. The settings including

those in the “Media Drive” tab screen are
saved.
5-15
5.2.10 Writing Service Output Settings (0137)
Perform the settings for the writing service.

Operation Setup and Check] → [0137 Writing
Service Output Settings] buttons.
●CD-R Writing
1) “CD-R Drive”
(1) Select drive name for “Drive Name”.
(2) Select the writing drive for “Drive”.
2) “CD-ROM Drive”
(1) Select the reading drive for “Drive”.
3) Checkmark [✓] “Verify after writing (new CD-

R)” box to verify after new writing or “Verify
after writing (additional data)” box to verify
after additional writing.
●Media Drive
1) Click the [Media Drive Setting] button.
2) Select “Drive Type”.
3) Input “Drive Name”.
4) Select “Output Path” for [Brows.] button.
• Operation returns to the “Writing Service Output

Settings (0137)” screen.
5-16
2. Click the [Service Type Setting] button.
1) Register the service type by selecting the

combination of “Media Type”, “File Format”
and “Image Size (Base)”.
2) Click the [Set] button.
• Operation returns to the “Writing Service

Output Settings (0137)” screen.
5
5.2.11 Photo Copy Environment Setup (0138)
Set up the flatbed scanner information for photo copy

service (Print-to-Print).
1. Click [Setup and Maintenance] → [01 System

Operation Setup and Check] → [0138 Photo Copy
Environment] buttons.
2. Select the model name of the connected scanner

in the “Device Name” list.
3. Select the scanner source name (logical device

name) in the “TWAIN Source” list.
5-17
5.2.12 Media Attachment Index Print Setting (0139)
Set up the print size for media attachment index.

Attachment Index Print Setting] buttons.
2. Select the print size for “Small Index” and “Large

Index”.
5.2.13 Installation Information Setup (0140)
This procedure sets the installation information.

After setting up, restart the system to activate the new
settings.

Operation Setup and Check] → [0140 Installation
Information Setup] button.
2. Set the delivery date, startup date.
3. Enter the “Lab ID”.
4. Select the “NOT USED” or “USE” for “Film

Scanner”.
5. Select the “No” or “Yes” for “Printer Maintenance”.
6. When “Yes” is selected for “Printer Maintenance”,

register the LP-5000 as described below.
NOTE: Following procedure should be performed after

changing “Printer Name”, “IP Address” or
“Printer Master”.
5-18
1) Click the [Regist] button.
(1) Select the LP-5000 to be registered and

click the [Register] button.
(2) Click the [OK] button.

5
8. Perform the post-operational checks to shut down

the system and then restart the system.
• The new settings are activated.
5.2.14 Clear Error Log (0141)
This procedure clears the system error and printer

error information.

Operation Setup and Check] → [0141 Clear Error
Log] buttons.
2. Select the item to be cleared and click the [Clear]

button.
• The “Log Clear Confirmation” dialog box

appears.
• The selected information is cleared.
5-19
5.2.15 Periodical Message Setting (0146)
This menu sets up display of the periodical

maintenance message.

Operation Setup and Check] → [0146 Periodical
Message Setting] buttons.
2. Normally select “Yes [Weekly check]” for

“Periodical check message display”.
3. Click the [▼] button and select initial setting from

the calendar.
5-20
5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (02)
5.3.1 Print Size Setup (0220)
This procedure sets the print size to be used.
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [02 Print

Condition Setup and Check] → [0220 Print Size
Setup] buttons.
• Normally, sizes are registered as shown in the table below.
No. Print Size Width [0.1mm] Length [0.1mm] Display Border Simple Setting
1 89C 89.0 127.0 ON BL 1
2 89P 89.0 254.0 ON BL
3 89H 89.0 158.0 ON BL
4 102C 102.0 152.0 ON BL 2
5 102P 102.0 254.0 ON BL
6 102H 102.0 178.0 ON BL
7 3R 127.0 89.0 ON BL 3
8 3RBD 127.0 89.0 OFF BD
9 5R 127.0 178.0 OFF BL
10 5RBD 127.0 178.0 OFF BD
11 4R 152.0 102.0 ON BL 4
12 4RBD 152.0 102.0 OFF BD
13 6R 152.0 203.0 OFF BL
14 6RW 152.0 216.0 OFF BL
15 8R 203.0 254.0 ON BL 5
16 8RW 203.0 305.0 OFF BL
17 A5 210.0 148.0 OFF BL
18 A4 210.0 297.0 OFF BL
5-21
2. Allocate Buttons 1 to 6 in the “Simple Setting” box

for the six most frequently used print sizes.
3. Select the print size to be modified or registered

from the list.
• ID [No.], Name, Width, Length, Border, four

border values and Display(ON/OFF) are
displayed.
4. Move the cursor to the print size to be used, select

“ON” or “OFF” shown in the “Display”.
• If you select “ON”, the description appears in the

list. If you select “OFF”, nothing appears in the
list.
5-22
5.3.2 Monitor Adjustment (0222)
This procedure sets the color balance of the monitor

for each input type.

Condition Setup and Check] → [0222 Monitor
Adjustment] buttons.
2. Make a print without color and density correction 5

with a normal film using the master channel for
“Custom Setting”.
3. Select the input type to be adjusted in the “Input

Type” box.
Input Type: Negative
Reversal
Black/White negative
DSC
Media
Fujicolor CD
Print
4. On the view and order screen, correct the pre-

scanned image so that it matches the print using
the C, M and Y keys.
5. Multiply each of the correction values by the “Key

Step Width Setup” value of Menu 0225 “Custom
Setting Regist/Delete”. Then enter the results in
the respective boxes on the screen.
●Example
“Key Step Width Setup” values of the master
channel (0):
C: 8
M: 8
Y: 8
Correction values in Step 2:

C: +2
M: –1
Y: 0
Correction values to be entered:

C: 8 × 2 = 16
M: 8 × –1 = –8
Y: 8 × 0 = 0
5-23
5.3.3 Special Film Channel Setting (0223)
This procedure registers or deletes the channel for

the DX code of special monotone films (which use
color processing). Also fine-adjusts the slope (for
color) and balance (for black & white).

Condition Setup and Check] → [0223 Special Film
Channel Setting] buttons.
●Film Name Registration
1) On the view and order screen, insert the film

to be registered to pre-scan it.
2) Click the [i] button at the lower left-hand corner

of the screen.
• The “System Information and Operations

Setup” dialog box appears.
3) Click the button of the “Status Display”.
5-24
• The “Status Display” dialog box appears.
4) Record the DX code.
5) Open the Menu 0223 screen.
6) Enter the DX code recorded into the “DX

Code” box.
7) Enter the film name in the “Film Name” box

using the full keyboard. 5
8) Click the [Regist.] button.
●Channel Setup
NOTE: Before setting channel, register the DX code and

film name.
1) Enter the channel number to be registered in

the “CH No.” box. There are 128 film channels.
2) Enter the film name in the box next to the “CH

No.” box.
3) Select “Register”.
• The registered channel is added to the

“Process 1” on the order information screen
that appears when the DX code cannot be
read.
4) Select the tone in the “Tone” box.

Tone: Color
Sepia 1
Sepia 2
B/W
5) Set “Balance/Slope Setup” values for color

and “Balance” values for black & white.
6) Enter the DX code registered in “Film Name

Registration” into the “DX Code” box.
• The DX code is listed in the “Registered DX

Code” box.
5-25
●Deleting
1) Select the channel number to be deleted in the

“CH No.” box.
• The DX code and name are displayed in the

“Registered DX Code” box.
2) Click the [Delete] button.
• The DX code is deleted.
5.3.4 Monotone Correction Setting (0224)
Follow this procedure to fine-adjust the balance

values for the correction type indicated in the
“Monotone Correction” button on the “Process 1”
screen.

Condition Setup and Check] → [0224 Monotone
Correction Setting] buttons.
2. Select the input type to be adjusted in the “Input

Type” box.
Reversal
DSC
Media
Fujicolor CD
Print
3. Select the correction type to be adjusted in the

“Correction” box.
Correction: B/W
Sepia 1
Sepia 2
User B/W
User Sepia 1
4. Change the balance values.
5-26
5.3.5 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (0225)
Printing is normally performed according to the

condition of the master “0” channel.
The 65 (0 + 64) custom conditions can be set up
according to each input type. The custom conditions
can be selected on the order information screen.
The condition editing items differ depending on the
input type (Negative, Reversal or Black & White
Negative), or whether of optional “Tone Selection 5
Software (S4)” is installed or not.

Condition Setup and Check] → [0225 Custom
Setting Regist/Delete] buttons.
2. Select the input type to be set up.

Reversal
Black & White Negative
DSC
Media
Fujicolor CD
Print
3. Select the custom setting number to be set up.
4. Enter the name for the back printing of custom

setting in the “Name” box using the full keyboard.
5. Click the [Cond. Edit] button.
• The “Initial Value Selection” dialog box appears.
6. Select the custom setting number to be used as

the initial value.
5-27
● Input Type: Negative
• The “1.Corr. Level/Tone/Hypertone” panel

appears.
1) Set up “Correct Level”, “Tone Adjust” and

“Hypertone”.
<Correct Level>
Color/Density
Tone Correction Hypertone
Correction
Full Correction ON ON ON
Tone Fixing OFF OFF OFF
L-CORR ON (Low correction)
Condition Confirm OFF OFF OFF
<Tone Adjustment>
Standard
All Hard
All Soft
Highlight Hard
Highlight Soft
Shadow Hard
Shadow Soft
<Hypertone>
Hypertone Process: Yes No
Highlight Level: Lower
Low
Normal
High
Higher
Shadow Level: Lower
Low
Normal
High
Higher
Mode: Mode 1 (Normal
Hypertone Mode)
Mode 2 (Acceptance
rate priority mode;
improving backlight and
contrast)
2) Click the “2.Key Step Width/BL-SL” tab.
5-28
• The “2.Key Step Width/BL-SL” panel

appears.
3) Set up the key step width and balance/slope.
<Key Step Width Setup>

C, M, Y: Normally enter “8”.
Dc, Dm, Dy: Normally enter “15”.
<BL/SL Setup>
Normally enter “0”. 5
Change the setting only when the whole slope
condition is biased.
4) Click the “3.Sharpness/Grain Control” tab.
• The “3.Sharpness/Grain Control” panel

appears.
5) Select “Hyper-sharpness” for “Sharpness

process”. Set up “Sharpness”, “Grain Control”
Process, “Sharpness Large-size Setup” and
“Minimizing Color Spreading”.
<Sharpness>
Sharpness Level: Low 3
Low 2
Low 1
Normal
High 1
High 2
High 3
Under Level: –2
–1
0
(Sharpness can be set individually only for
under level.)
<Grain Control Process>

Grain Coarseness
Higher Invisible
High
Normal ↑
Low
Lower Visible
5-29
<Sharpness Large-size Setup>

Sharpness can be set up individually for large-
size prints exceeding the magnification
entered in the “Magnification” box.
–2
–1
0
+1
+2
<Minimizing Color Spreading>

Yes: Minimizing color spreading in white
areas when printing black and white
fine grids, stripes, etc.
6) Click the “4.Saturation” tab.
• The “4.Saturation” panel appears.
7) Set up the “Saturation”.
<Saturation>
Color vividness can be adjusted.
Range is –9 to +9 but normally enter “0”.
8) Click the “Gradation/Bright” tab.
• The “Gradation/Bright” panel appears.
NOTE: The “Gradation/Bright” panel can be used

after installing the optional “Tone Selection
Software (S4)”.
● Input Type: Reversal
NOTE: The “Reversal Special Settings” panel cannot be

used.
• The “1.Corr. Level/Tone/Hypertone” panel

appears.
1) Set up “Correct Level” and “Tone Adjustment”.
<Correct Level>
Color/Density Hypertone
Tone Correction
Correction
Full Correction ON ON ON
Tone Fixing OFF ON OFF
Condition Confirm OFF OFF OFF
5-30
<Tone Adjustment>
Standard
All Hard
All Soft
Highlight Hard
Highlight Soft
Shadow Hard
Shadow Soft

5
appears.
NOTE: • Click the [Default] button to return to the initial

values.

C, M, Y: Normally enter “4”.
<BL/SL Setup>
Normally enter “0”.

appears.

process”. Set up “Sharpness”, “Grain Control
Process”, “Sharpness Large-size Setup” and
<Sharpness>
Low 2
Low 1
Normal
High 1
High 2
High 3

Grain Coarseness
Higher Invisible
High
Normal ↑
Low
Lower Visible
5-31

Sharpness can be setup individually for
large-size prints exceeding the
magnification entered in the
“Magnification” box.
–2
–1
0
+1
+2

6) Click the “4.Saturation” tab.
• The “4.Saturation” panel appears.
7) Set up the saturation.
<Saturation>
8. Click the “Gradation/Bright” tab.
• The “Gradation/Bright” panel appears.
NOTE: The “Gradation/Bright” panel can be used after

installing the optional “Tone Selection Software
(S4)”.
● Input Type: Black & White Negative
• The “1Corr. Level/Tone/Hypertone” panel

appears.
1) Set up “1Correct Level” and “Tone

Adjustment”.
<Correct Level>
Tone Correction Color/Density
Correction
Full Correction ON ON
Tone Fixing OFF ON
Condition Confirm OFF OFF
5-32
<Tone Adjustment>
Standard
All Hard
All Soft
Highlight Hard
Highlight Soft
Shadow Hard
Shadow Soft

5
appears.
NOTE: Click [Default] to return to the initial values.

<BL/SL Setup>

appears.

process”. Set up “Sharpness”, “Grain Control
Process”, “Sharpness Large-size Setup” and
<Sharpness>
Low 2
Low 1
Normal
High 1
High 2
High 3
Under Level: -2
-1
0
(Sharpness can only be set individually for under

level.)
5-33

Grain Coarseness
Higher Invisible
High
Normal ↑
Low
Lower Visible

Sharpness can be setup individually for
large-size prints exceeding the
magnification entered in the
“Magnification” box.
–2
–1
0
+1
+2

6) Click the “Gradation/Bright” tab.
The “Gradation/Bright” panel appears.
NOTE: The “Gradation/Bright” panel can be used

after installing the optional “Tone Selection
Software (S4)”.
● Input Type: DSC
• The “1.Corr. Level/Tone/Hypertone” panel appears.
1) Set up “Hypertone”.
<Hypertone>
Mode: Mode 1 (Automatic Correction Mode:
Full and light are switched
automatically.)
Mode 2 (Light Correction Mode)
Mode 3 (Full Correction Mode: It takes
more time compared to Mode 2.)
2) Click the “2. Key Step Width/BL-SL” tab.
5-34
• The “2. Key Step Width/BL-SL” panel

appears.

C,M,Y: Normally enter “8”.
Dc,Dm,Dy: Normally enter “15”.
<BL/SL Setup>
Normally enter “0”. 5
4) Click the “3. Sharpness/Grain Control” tab.
• The “3. Sharpness/Grain Control” panel

appears.
5) Select “Sharpness process” and set up

“Sharpness” for “Hyper-sharpness”.
<Sharpness>
Sharpness Level: Low3
Low2
Low1
Normal
High1
High2
High3
6) Click the “4. Saturation/Auto Correction” tab.
• The “4. Saturation/Auto Correction” panel

appears.
7) Set up “Saturation” and “Auto Correction”.
<Saturation >
<Auto Correction >

Density Correction: Normally enter “100”.
Color Correction: Normally enter “100”.
8) Click the “5. Gradation/Bright” tab.
• The “5. Gradation/Bright” panel appears.
NOTE: The “5. Gradation/Bright” panel can be

used after installing the optional “Tone
Selection Software (S4)”.
5-35
● Input Type: Media

appears.

<BL/SL Setup>
Change setting only when the whole slope

appears.
4) Select “Sharpness process” for “Hyper-

sharpness”.
5) Click the “4. Saturation” tab.
• The “4. Saturation” panel appears.
6) Set up “Saturation”.
<Saturation >

5-36
● Input Type: FUJICOLOR CD

appears.

C,M,Y: Normally enter “8”. 5
<BL/SL Setup>

appears.

<Sharpness>
Low2
Low1
Normal
High1
High2
High3
<Saturation >

5-37
● Input Type: Print

appears.
2) Set up the key step width, balance/slope and

contrast setup.

Dc,Dm,Dy Normally enter “15”.
<BL/SL Setup>
<Gamma Corr. Value>


appears.

<Sharpness>
Low2
Low1
Normal
High1
High2
High3
5-38
<Saturation >

• The condition panel disappears and operation

returns to the “Custom Setting Regist/Delete”
screen.
• The “Status” changes to “Use”.
10. To delete the custom condition, select the number

to be deleted and click [Delete].
5-39
5.3.6 Back Printing Format (0226)
Select the “Common” or “Custom” for “Format

Setting”.
If “Common” is selected, back printing is always
output in the same pattern.
Select the back printing format for the “135/Others”,

“Media”, “Printer” or “Index”.

Condition Setup and Check] → [0226 Back
Printing Format] buttons.
●135/Others
1. Select the desired printing item from No. “1” to “7”.
2. Move the cursor to the “User ID” or “Private

Characters” box and enter the user ID or private
characters using the numeric keys of the
operation or full keyboard.
NOTE: The maximum number of characters is three for

the user ID and thirty-five for private characters.
●Media
1. Click the “Media” tab.
2. Select the “CD-R Copy”, “Media Print” or “DSC

Print” for “Input Type”.
3. Select the desired printing item from No.”1” to “3”.
5-40
●Print
1. Click the “Print” tab.
2. Select the desired printing item from No.”1” or “2”.
●Index
1. Click the “Index” tab.
2. Select the “135 Index”, “CD-R Index” or “DSC

Index” for “Input Type”.
3. Select the desired printing item from No.”1” or “2”.
Correction Data:
I A RR WSS KK LD R CMY DDD
Density correction
CMY correction
Red eye
Lens correction/Retouch
Gradation level
Custom setting correction combination
Custom setting No.
Auto correction condition
Input mode
User ID : ABC_ Mag. : MMMM

Correction Data : IARRWSSKKLDR CMYDDD Sort No. : SORT
Order No. : aaaaaa Image Name : IMG
DI Order No. : ORDERN Film Type Info. : ORIGINAL
Job No. : Jnn Image File : <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.xxx>
Frame No. : <FFFFF> Image No. : ccc
Custom Setting : CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Q’ty : pppp
Retrieve No. : SSSSS Correction Key : CMYDDD
Serial No. : Sno Lab ID : LABID
Private : PP.........PP CHP Sheet : HHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Date : YYYYMMDD Correction Data : COLOR_DENSITY_CORRECTION
NOTE: Refer to the Operating Instructions Manual for details of the correction data.
5-41
●135/Others
Input Type No. Printing Item Back Printing Format
User ID+Correction Data+Order No.+ ABC IARRWSSKKLDRCMYDDD SORT ORDERN
1 DI Order No.+Job No.+Frame No.+ Jnn <FFFFF> CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Custom Setting+Retrieve No. SSSSS
Serial No.+Correction Data+Order No.+ Sno IARRWSSKKLDRCMYDDD SORT ORDERN
2 DI Order No.+Job No.+Frame No.+ Jnn <FFFFF> CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Custom Setting+Retrieve No. SSSSS
DI Order No.+Job No.+Private+Frame ORDERN Jnn PP.........PP <FFFFF>
3
No.Å|Custom Setting+Retrieve No. CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC SSSSS
DI Order No.+Job No.+Date+Private+ ORDERN Jnn YYYYMMDDPP.........PP <FFFFF>
4
— Frame No.+Custom Setting+Retrieve No. CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC SSSSS
Mag.+Correction Data+Order No.+ MMMM IARRWSSKKLDRCMYDDD SORT
5 DI Order No.+Job No.+Frame No.+ ORDERN Jnn <FFFFF>
Custom Setting+Retrieve No. CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC SSSSS
Sort No.+User ID+Correction Data+
SORT ABC IARRWSSKKLDRCMYDDD ORDERN
6 DI Order No.+Job No.+Image Name+
Jnn IMG ORIGINAL SSSSS
Film Type Info.+Retrieve No.
Order No.+Correction Data+DI Order No.+
aaaaaa COLOR_DENSITY_CORRECTION
7 Job No.+Frame No.+Retrieve No.
ORDERN Jnn <FFFFF> SSSSS
(40 characters per line)
●Media
Image File Name+Order No.+DI Order <xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.xxx> aaaaaa ORDERN
1
No.+Job No.+Image No.+Q’ty+Correction Key Jnn IMG pppp CMYDDD
CD-R Copy Sort No.+User ID+Correction Data+
Media Print 2 DI Order No.+Job No.+Image Name+
DSC Print Film Type Info.+Retrieve No.
Order No.+Correction Data+DI Order No.+ aaaaaa COLOR_DENSITY_CORRECTION
3
Job No.+Image Name(40 characters per line) ORDERN Jnn IMG
●Print
ID+DI Order No.+Job No.+Image No.+
1 ID+ORDERN Jnn IMG pppp CMYDDD aaaaaa
Q’ty+Correction Key+Order No.
— Sort No.+User ID+Correction Data+
2 DI Order No.+Job No.+Image Name+
Film Type Info.+Retrieve No.
●Index
Input Type No. Printing Item Back Printing Fromat
Order No.+User ID+Lab ID+CHP Sheet+DI aaaaaa ABC LABID HHHHHHHHHHHHHH
1
Order No.+Job No. ORDERN Jnn
135 Index
Sort No.+User ID+Lab ID+CHP Sheet+DI SORT ABC LABID HHHHHHHHHHHHHH
2
CD-R Index 1 Order No.+DI Order No.+Job No. aaaaaa ORDERN Jnn
1 Order No.+DI Order No.+Job No.+Q'ty aaaaaa ORDERN Jnn pppp
DSC Index Sort No.+User ID+Lab ID+CHP Sheet+DI SORT ABC LABID HHHHHHHHHHHHHH
2
5-42
5.3.7 Index Conditions (0227)
Select the condition of the index printing.

Condition Setup and Check] → [0227 Index
Conditions] buttons.
●135
5
1. Select the “Reflect” or “No Reflect” for “Red-eye
Mark Setting”.
2. Click the [▼] button in the desired box and select

the format.
Logo: FUJICOLOR*INDEX PRINT

FUJICOLOR INDEX PRINT
INDEX PRINT
Index Custom Logo: Can be registered on Menu
1020.
●Media

Mark Setting”.
2. Click the “Media” tab.

the format.
1020.
5-43
●Index for Media

Mark Setting”.
2. Click the “Index for Media” tab.

the format.
1020.
5.3.8 Image Correction Setup (0240)
This menu is used to enable image correction

condition setting and custom setting condition editing
by selecting “Yes” for each item.
Set the image correction type for each input type.

Reversal
DSC
Media
Fujicolor CD
Print

Condition Setup and Check] → [0240 Image
Correction Setup] buttons.
2. Set the seven items in the Hyper ACCS frame.
5-44
5.3.9 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag. Setting (0241)
This menu is used to change the basic magnification

for each print size.
The magnification can be changed by Magnification
Rate / 100 in the “Rate” box.

Condition Setup and Check] → [0241 Fine
Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting] buttons. 5
2. Select the carrier, mask and Input types.
3. Select the print size.
4. Select “Rate”
Range: 50 % to 200 %
5-45
5.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (03)
5.4.1 Input Check (0320)
This procedure displays the current status of each

sensor.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0320 Input Check]
buttons.
2. Click the [Next Page] button.
↓ [Next] [Previous] ↑
5.4.2 AF Function Setup (0323)
Auto focusing timing can be set up for each carrier,

mask and print size.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0323 AF Function
Setup] buttons.
2. Select “NC100AR” or “MFC10AR”.
●NC100AR
1) Select “Carrier Setting”, “Each Film or “Each Frame”.
“Carrier Setting”: Auto focusing is executed

when first scanning after the
NC100AR is installed.
“Each Film”: Auto focusing is executed
when a film is inserted, or
for every frame (large size)
more than specified
magnification.
5-46
Magnification Range: 0.2 to 42.0

“Each Frame”: Auto focusing is executed for
each frame.
●MFC10AR
1) Click the “MFC10AR” tab.
2) Select “Each Sorting” or “Each Frame” for

each holder.
“Each Sorting”: Auto focusing is executed for 5
each sorting.
“Each Frame”: Auto focusing is executed for
each frame.
5.4.3 Image Scanning Condition Method (0324)
Select the scanning condition when scanning digital

image export or small size prints.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0324 Image
Scanning Condition Method] buttons.
2. Select “Image Quality” or “Performance” for

“Scanning Condition Setup for Digital Image
Export”.
“Image Quality”: Image quality is high but

processing speed is reduced.
“Performance”: Image quality is standard but
processing speed is increased.
3. Select “Normal” or “High Quality” for “Scanning

Condition Setup for Small Size.
“Normal”: Image quality is standard but

processing speed is increased.
“High Quality”: Image quality is high but
processing speed is reduced.
5-47
5.4.4 Film Scanner Installation Information Reference (0325)
Displays the film scanner installation information.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0325 Film Scanner
Installation Information Reference] buttons.
2. Check the film scanner installation information.
5.4.5 Scanner Backup & download (0326)
This menu is used to back up the data into a FD, or

load the data from a FD.

Backup & download] buttons.
●For data backup
1) Insert a FD into the FD drive.
2) Click the [OK] button for “Data backup”.
3) Take out the FD from the FD drive.
• Operation returns to the FD Data

Management [0326] screen.
5-48
●For data load
1) Insert the FD into the FD drive.
2) Click the [OK] button for “Data load”.
• Operation returns to the FD Data 5

Management [0326] screen.
5.4.6 I/O Check (0341)
This procedure displays the status of motors, fans

and sensors.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0341 I/O Check]
buttons.
• The status of each part is displayed in real time.
NOTE: Refer to Section 18.1 “I/O Parts Diagram” for

parts location.
2. Press any button to specify an operation.

• The selected operation is performed.
5-49
5.4.7 Carrier Inclination Display (0342)
This procedure checks the status of the carrier

inclination.
NOTE: If the difference value is more than 100, inspect the

film carrier.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0342 Carrier
Inclination Display] buttons.
2. Insert a film into the carrier.
3. Click the [Run] button.
• The auto focusing is started and the vertical and

horizontal focusing pulses of the carrier and
difference value between the maximum and
minimum positions are displayed.
5-50
5.4.8 CCD Data Display (0343)
Use this menu to confirm the CCD settings when

there is a CCD-related irregularity or when lines or
other abnormality appear on prints due to dust or dirt
on the CCD, or if malfunctioning of the light source
LED is suspected.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0343 CCD Data 5
Display] buttons.
NOTE: Do not try to change “Output Mode” and “Test

Pattern”.
●Dust Checking
1) Set up the following items.
Output mode: CDS

Operate: Fill-in
Scanner Correction Setup : Checkmark (✓) “Dark
corr.” and “Gray Pixel”.
LED Light/Current Value: Checkmark (✓) “G”.
2) Click the [AE] button.
• The accumulated time is indicated in the

“Accumu. Time” box of “CCD Setup”.
3) Enter the value of accumulated time ×1.2 to

1.3 in the “Accumu. Time” box.
4) Click the [Update] button.
• The real time-image is displayed.
5) Find a black part (caused by dust) by

enlarging, reducing or moving the position.
Enlarging: [Shift] key + Clicking left-hand

button of mouse
Reducing: [Shift] key + Clicking right-hand
button of mouse
Moving: Clicking left-hand button of mouse.
6) Move the pointer (yellow lines) and enlarge the

image by clicking the left-hand button of the
mouse while pressing the [Shift] key.
5-51
7) Click the [Line Data Display Switching] button.
• Make sure the CCD output is reduced (graph

is deformed) at the dust position.
8) Clean the diffusion box, lens dustproof glass

or LED light source cover when any dust is
found.
• Operating returns to the menu screen.
5.4.9 Film Scanner ID Registration (0344)
This menu is used to register the film scanner ID into

the memory on the circuit board.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0344 Film Scanner
ID Registration] buttons.
2. Enter film scanner ID in the “Film Scanner” box.
NOTE: Normally ID entering is unnecessary because it

is automatically registered.
3. Click the [Set] button.
5. Turn OFF the power of the film scanner and then

restart up it.
NOTE: Make sure the film scanner is turned OFF

completely before restarting the film scanner.
5-52
5.4.10 Optical Axis Adjustment (0345)
This procedure adjusts the optical axis of the image

by moving the camera unit.
1. Install the focusing chart jig to the carrier and set

them to the film scanner.
Focusing Chart Jig

R3-170

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0345 Optical Axis
3. Click the [AF] button.
• The calculated values are displayed in the “Axis

error.” and “Image rotate” columns in real time
and “Opt. mag.”.
5-53
4. If the data is out of range, loosen the screws

securing the camera unit and adjust the optical
axis.
Acceptable Range
Out of optical axis Front (–)/Rear (+): ±5
Left (–)/Right (+): ±5
Image rotation Left (–)/Right (+): ±1
5. Tighten the screw after adjustment.
6. Click the [AF] button and make sure the data is

within the accepted range.
Camera Unit Screws (3)(Loosen)
R3-343
7. Click the [Optical mag. Setup] button and set up
the optical magnification.
Optical magnification: 0.581 to 0.587
NOTE: The optical magnification value is depending on

the carrier unit.
5-54
5.4.11 Spectral Calibration (0348)
After replacing the LED circuit board assembly or light

source unit, perform Menu 0349 “LED Light Amount
Adjustment” and then this Menu 0348 for reversal and
negative films.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0348 Spectral
Calibration] buttons. 5
Perform the spectral calibration using the following
tools.
Tools: Chart/FD set

Manual film carrier MFC10AR
135M Mount Holder
2. Insert the FD into the FD drive of the DIC2 (S2).
4. Install the manual film carrier MFC10AR to the

film scanner and close its calibration cover.
5-55
Calibration Cover
R3-144
• The scanner correction is performed.
6. Insert the “No. 1001xxxx”, “No.1002XXX” and

“No.1001XXXX”
“No.1003XXX” film into the 135M mount holder
and set it in the exposure position.
“No.1002XXXX”
“No.1003XXXX”
R3-157
5-56
5
NOTE: If the image on the screen is abnormal, click the
[Rereading] button to read the image again.
8. Adjust the position of the blocks so that they are at

the center of each patch by using the arrow keys.
10. Repeat Steps 6 to 9 for Chart Films No. 1004xxxx,

No.1005xxxx, No. 1006xxxx and No. 1007xxxx in
this order.
12. Remove the FD from the main control unit.
13. Repeat Steps 1 through 12 for the negative films.
5-57
5.4.12 LED Light Amount Adjustment (0349)
Adjust LED light amount when:

• the LED25 circuit board assembly is replaced.
• the light source unit is replaced.
• light amount is reduced.
After executing this menu, perform Menu 0348
“Spectral Calibration”.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0349 LED Light
Amount Adjustment] buttons.
2. Install the auto film carrier NC100AR.
NOTE: Do not insert a film.
• The result is displayed.
• Scanner Correction is executed and the

adjustment data is stored.
6. Perform Menu 0348 “Spectral Calibration”.
5-58
5.4.13 Scanner Parameter Check/Update (0350)
This menu checks parameters saved in the EEPROM

of the CTL25 and CCD25 circuit boards and the HD
of the main control unit, then displays the result by
“OK” or “NG”.
If “NG” is displayed, the [Reading] button become

effective.
5
[Reading] button: Reads the parameters saved in
the HD and writes them into the
circuit board when the circuit
board has been replaced.

Parameter Check/Update] buttons.
●Reading
Each button becomes effective when the circuit board

has been replaced.
1) Click the [Reading] button.
• The parameters saved in the HD are written into

the EEPROM.
5-59
5.4.14 CCD Adjustment (0351)
On this menu, perform overflow voltage adjustment

and gray pixel detection when the CCD unit has been
replaced.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0351 CCD
●Overflow Voltage Adjustment
1) NC100AR: Remove the carrier and then the

upper and lower masks.
MFC10AR: Close the calibration cover.
NOTE: Do not insert a film into the NC100AR or

holder into the MFC10AR.
2) Click the [OFD Voltage Adjustment] button.
3) Click the [Run] button.
5-60
• Result of adjustment is displayed.
• The adjustment data is stored.
6) Click the [Close] button.
• Operation returns to the CCD adjustment

main screen.
5
●Gray Pixel Detection
1) NC100AR: Remove the carrier and then the

upper and lower masks.
MFC10AR: Close the calibration cover.
NOTE: Do not insert a film into the NC100AR or

holder into the MFC10AR.
2) Click the [Gray Pixel Detection] button.
• Operation returns to the CCD adjustment

main screen.
5-61
5.4.15 Working Information Display (0352)
This menu displays working information of the

scanner for today and total.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0352 Working
Information Display] buttons.
5-62
5.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (04)
5.5.1 NC100AR Fixed Feeding Setup (0400)
On this menu, the feeding amount for the fixed

feeding mode of the 135 films can be adjusted.
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [04 Carrier

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0400 NC100AR
Fixed Feeding Setup] buttons.
2. Set up fixed feed frame lengths for the 135 full and 5
half sizes by clicking the [▼] and [▲] buttons.
Initial Value Input Range

135F 38.10mm 36.00 to 40.00mm
135H 19.40mm 19.00 to 20.00mm
5.5.2 Mask Position Adjustment (0420)
This menu is used to adjust the mask position relative Carrier Lock Button
to the monitor screen and prints.
This menu should be executed for all carriers and
masks to be used.
1. Set the auto film carrier NC100AR to the SP-500.
• The carrier type, carrier ID and mask type are

displayed.
NOTE: Do not insert a film.
NC100AR
R3-044

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0420 Mask Position
Adjustment]
5-63
3. Click the [Image Disp] button.
• The mask and adjustment frames are displayed.
4. Click the [Auto Correct] button.
• The mask opening position is corrected

automatically and the horizontal and vertical
correction values are displayed in the boxes.
5. If necessary, adjust position manually by clicking

the arrow buttons.
NOTE: Click the [Initialize] button to return to “0.0mm”

position.
• The adjustment data is fixed and operation

returns to the menu screen.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for the optional 135H

mask.
8. Replace the auto film carrier NC100AR with the

optional manual film carrier MFC10AR.
MFC10AR
Carrier Lock Button

R3-143
9. Click the [0420 Mask Position Adjustment] button.
• The carrier type and carrier ID are displayed.
NOTE: • Do not insert a film.

• For mount mask position adjustment, insert a
mount frame without a film into the holder and
select “135M” or “240M”.
10. Insert a film folder and click the [Image Disp]

button.
5-64
• The mask position and adjustment frames

appear.
11. Adjust the mask feed position so that the mask

position is nearly center of the adjustment frame
by turning the fine adjustment knob.
Fine Adjustment Knob

R3-154
12. Click the [Auto Correct] button.
• The mask position is corrected automatically

and the vertical correction values are displayed
in the boxes.
13. If necessary, adjust manually by clicking the arrow

buttons.
NOTE: Click the [Initialize] button to return to 0.0mm.
• The adjustment data is fixed and operation

returns to the menu screen.
15. Repeat Steps 9 through 14 for all optional film

holders.
5-65
5.5.3 NC100AR Input Check (0421)
The status of the sensors of the auto film carrier

NC100AR can be checked.

Input Check] buttons.
2. Click the [Next Page] button.
5.5.4 MFC10AR Input Check (0422)
The status of the sensors of the manual film carrier

MFC10AR can be checked.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0422 MFC10AR
Input Check] buttons.
5-66
5.5.5 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (0425)
The image frame size displayed after pre-scanning

can be set up on this menu.
The initial values are set to optimum condition.
Changing of this value may result in a mask frame,
etc. appearing on the monitor screen.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0425 Monitor Frame 5
Ratio Setup] buttons.
2. Change the monitor frame ratio by clicking the [▼]

and [▲] buttons.
NOTE: The default values are 95% for the NC100AR.
• The data is saved.

MFC10AR
Carrier Lock Button

R3-143
5-67
6. Click the [0425 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup]

button.
7. Change the monitor frame ratio by clicking the [▼]

and [▲] buttons.
NOTE: The default values are 95% for the MFC10AR.
5.5.6 Focus Offset Adjustment (0441)
This procedure sets up offset value of focus position

for each carrier and mask.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0441 Focus Offset
2. Change the offset value of the mask to be set up.
NOTE: Enter “0.00”mm normally.
5-68

6. Click the [0441 Focus Offset Adjustment] button.
MFC10AR
5
Carrier Lock Button
R3-143
7. Change the offset value of the film holder by

clicking the [▼] and [▲] buttons.
NOTE: Enter “0.00”mm normally.
5-69
5.5.7 NC100AR Sensor Calibration Information (0443)
This procedure calibrates the optical sensors and

displays the LED current setup and sensor output
data. The data can be read out and written in.

Sensor Calibration Information] buttons.
2. Make sure there is no film in the auto film carrier

NC100AR.
• The sensors are calibrated and the results are

displayed.
<Flash ROM Writing>
• The sensors are calibrated and the results are

displayed.
2) Click the [FlashROM Writing] button.
• The data is written to the FlashROM.
5-70
5.5.8 NC100AR ID Registration (0446)
This procedure is used to register the auto film carrier

ID and hard revision (modify history) numbers.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0446 NC100AR ID
Registration] buttons.
2. Install the auto film carrier NC100AR to be 5

registered.
• The carrier ID and hard revision numbers are

displayed.

6. Reinstall the carrier.
5-71
5.5.9 MFC10AR ID Registration (0447)
This procedure is used to register the manual film

carrier ID and hard revision (modify history) numbers.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0447 MFC10AR
Installation Information Setup] buttons.
2. Install the manual film carrier MFC10AR to be

registered.
• The carrier ID and hard revision numbers are

displayed.

6. Reinstall the carrier.
5-72
5.5.10 NC100AR I/O Check (0448)
This procedure displays the status of the motors,

solenoid and sensors.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0448 NC100AR I/O
Check] buttons.
2. If the carrier extension harness exists, connect it 5

between the auto film carrier NC100AR and the
scanner SP-500.
Carrier Extension Harness

R3-315
3. Click the operation buttons and check if each part

is operating normally.
5-73
5.5.11 NC100AR Machine Data Setup (0451)
This procedure sets up the data for the auto film

carrier NC100AR.

Machine Data Setup] buttons.
●Flash ROM Writing
1) Click the [HD Reading] button.
• The data is read out from the HD and

displayed on the screen.
2) Click the [FlashROM Writing] button.
• The data is written to the FlashROM.
5-74
5.5.12 NC100AR Feeding Operation Check (0455)
This procedure is used to check film feed operation

for the auto film carrier NC100AR.

Feeding Operation Check] buttons.
2. Select “Neg.”, “B/W” or “Reversal” for “Original 5

type setup”.
3. Select “Frame” or “Feed” for “Film Feed Type”.
5. Insert a selected film.
• The carrier feeds the film.
5-75
5.6 Order Control and Maintenance (09)
5.6.1 Workflow Adviser Environment Setup (0920)
Setup the workflow adviser environment.
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [09 Order

Control and Maintenance] → [0920 Workflow
Adviser Environment Setup] buttons.
2. Checkmark [✓] the required items to be displayed

on the “Workflow Adviser Environment Setup”
screen.
5.6.2 System Operation Setting Setup (0921)
This menu is used to set up the system operation and

output the information.

Control and Maintenance] → [0921 System
Operation Setting Setup] buttons.
2. Input the “Complete Order Retention Period”,

“Order Image File Retention Period” and
“Production Info Retention Period” for “Order Info
Retention Setup”.
3. Select the “Auto” or “Manual” for “Inspection

Setting”.
4. Set up print size by following the steps below.
NOTE: This print size setup is necessary when Kiosk

(LIOS) is connected to the DIC2.
1) Click the [Order Print Size Setup] button.
2) Add a new print size.
5-76
(1) Click the [Add] button.
(2) Input the “Order Print Size Name”,

“Length” and “Width”.
(3) Select the surface type.
• Operation returns to the “Order Print

Size Setup” screen 5
3) Delete a print size.
(1) Select the delete print size and click the

[Delete] button.
• Operation returns to the “Order Print

Size Setup” screen
5. Initialize the system information by performing the

following steps.
NOTE: This initialization should be performed when the

system environment has been changed.
(1) Click the [Initialization] button for

“Maintenance”.
(2) Click the [Initial] button.
(3) Perform the post-operational checks to

shut down the system and then restart the
system.
6. Input the “Period to Delete Order”.
7. To delete the stored accomplished order, perform

the following steps.
5-77
1) Click the [Delete] button in “Maintenance”.
5.6.3 2 Operation Setting Setup (0923)

Server/DIC2
This menu is used to set up the server operation and

output the information.
This function effects when using the OM (Order
Manager).

Control and Maintenance] → [0923 Server/DIC2
Operation Setting Setup] buttons.
2. Select the “Yes” or “No” for “OM Complete Order

Display Period”.
• If “Yes” is selected, enter the time for display.
5-78
5.7 Register/Delete (10)
5.7.1 Shop Logo Regist/Delete (1020)
This procedure registers or deletes the shop logo that

appears on the index prints.
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [10

Register/Delete] → [1020 Shop Logo Regist/
Delete] buttons.
●Registration
1) Insert a FD containing the shop logo to be

registered into the FD drive of the PC.
2) Click the [Add] button.
• The “Media Selection” dialog box appears.
3) Select “FD” and click the [OK] button.
• The shop logo is displayed in the dialog box. FD

z2041
• The shop logo is registered.
●Deleting
1) Select the shop logo to be deleted.
• The “Shop Logo Delete Confirmation” dialog

box appears
• The shop logo is deleted from the list.
5-79
5.7.2 Template Regist/Delete (1021)
See the installation manual of the optional Variety

Print Software.

Register/Delete] → [1021 Template Regist/Delete]
buttons.
5.7.3 Holiday File Regist/Delete (1022)
See the “Operating Instructions” of the optional

Variety Print Software (S3).

Register/Delete] → [1022 Holiday File Regist/
Delete] buttons.
5.7.4 Custom Button Regist/Save (1023)
This menu is used to register the custom button

setting into the main control unit, using a FD.

Register/Delete] → [1023 Custom Button Regist/
Save] buttons.
[Save] button: Customized setting registered in

the main control unit is saved into a
FD.
[Regist.] button: Customized setting data edited by
the PC is registered into the main
control unit from a FD.
[Initialize] button: Customized setting is returned to
the initial setting.
5-80
●Registration
1) Select “Function” or “Service” to be registered.
3) Insert a FD for the custom button setting

edited by the Custom Button Setting Tool into
the FD drive of the PC.
Custom Button Setting FD

Z2041
• The customized setting is registered into the

main control unit.
●Saving
1) Select “Function” or “Service” to be saved.
2) Click the [Save] button.
5-81

PC.
FD
Z2041
• Custom button setting data is saved from the

main control unit to the FD.
●Initializing
1) Select “Function” or “Service” to be initialized.
2) Click the [Initialize] button.
• Selected customized setting is returned to

the initial setting.
5-82
5.7.5 Launcher Menu Regist/Delete (1024)
Register or delete items to be displayed in launcher

button menu.

Control and Maintenance] → [1024 Launcher
Menu Regist/Delete] buttons.
●Registration
1) Click the [▼] button and select “Order

Manager”, “Reprint Tool”, “To CD Writing”, “CD
Writing Mode”, “DSC Data Backup CD” or
“Other-1 to 10” for “Icon”.
2) Enter each name in the “Application Name”

box using the full keyboard.
3) Click the [Brows] button and select “D” drive

and the path of the application.
●Deleting
1) Click the [▼] button to be deleted in “Icon” and

select the blank column.
5-83
5.8.1 Timer Setup (1621)
This procedure sets the timer ON date/time and

preheat setup times.

Maintenance] → [1520 Printer Setup and
Maintenance] → [16 System Operation Setup and
Check] → [1621 Timer Setup] → [Enter] buttons.
2. To change the timer date and time, enter a

checkmark [✓] in the day of the week boxes and
enter the time in the “Timer ON Date/Time
Setting” box.
3. Set the preheat timer by performing the following

steps, if necessary.
IMPORTANT:
The ON time for a night-time preheating operation
must not overlap with the ON time of the weekly
timer since night-time preheating takes priority
and shuts down all power when it is set OFF.
If, for instance, the calendar timer is set to 5:00AM
and night-time preheating is turned ON at
3:30AM, all the power will be shut down two hours
later at 5:30AM.
NOTE: Night-time preheating is usually conducted

when the room temperature drops below 10°C
(50°F) at night and the temperature is not
controlled for 8 or more hours.
1) Select “YES” for “Preheat Setting”.
• The 1st and 2nd preheat setting boxes

appear.
2) Move the cursor to “1st Preheat” and enter the

time.
3) Move the cursor to “2nd Preheat” and enter

the time.
NOTE: • For preheating once only, set the same time

for both the first and second times.
• Select “NO” when the preheat timer is not
used.
• The second preheating timer is ignored if the
first preheat time and second preheat time
overlap.
5-84
<Example> 1st. pre-heat time: 2:00AM

2nd. pre-heat time: 3:00AM
With the above settings, night-time
preheating will occur from 2:00AM to
4:00AM (2 hours).
5
5.8.2 Printer Backup & download (1622)
This menu is used to back up the data into the FD, or

load the data from the FD.

Check] → [1622 Printer Backup & download] →
[Enter] buttons.
●For data backup
2) Click the [OK] button for “Data backup”.
• Operation returns to the “Printer Backup &

download [1622]” screen.
●For data load
2) Click the [OK] button for “Data load”.
5-85
• Operation returns to the “Printer Backup &

download [1622]” screen.
5.8.3 Installation Information Reference (1626)
This procedure displays the printer installation

information.

Check] → [1626 Installation Information
Reference] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Check the installation information.
5.8.4 Installation Information Setup (1640)
This procedure sets the installation information.

After setting up, restart the system to activate the new
settings.

Check] → [1640 Installation Information Setup] →
[Enter] buttons.
2. Set the delivery date and startup date.
3. Select the “NOT USED” or “USE” for “Sorter”.
4. Select the “NOT USED” or “USE” for “Option

Magazine”.
<Blade replacement>
When the blades have been replaced, click the

[Replace] button for “Blade replacement date”.
5-86
6. Perform the post-operational checks to shut down

the system and then restart the system.
• The new settings are activated.
5-87
5.9.1 Paper Condition Setup (1700)
When new paper is to be loaded, follow this

procedure to set up the new paper condition.

Maintenance] → [17 Print Condition Setup and
Check] → [1700 Paper Condition Setup] → [Enter]
buttons.
2. Install the paper magazine to be set up and select

“Magazine (upper)” or “Magazine (lower)”.
NOTE: Click the [Initialize] button to initialize condition

setup data.
3. Click the [Print] button.
• After about three minutes, a condition setup Condition Setup Print

print is fed out.
4. Adjust the guide of the calibrator according to the

width of the condition setup print.
5. Insert the condition setup print fully into the Calibrator

calibrator.
6. Press the [START] key on the operation panel of

the LP-5000.
Condition Setup Print

R3-228
5-88
7. Click the [Measure] button.
Calibration Operation Panel

Indicator Light Ready Measuring Error
READY (Green) ON Blink OFF
ERROR (Red) OFF OFF ON
NOTE: If the error occurs, press the reset switch and

perform measurement again.
• The measurement is started and the density 5

measurement result is displayed.
• The density measurement result dialog box

disappears.
NOTE: If the “Density Measurement Result” is not

acceptable, the message shown at the right
appears. Repeat Steps 2 to 6 until the result
becomes OK.
5-89
5.9.2 Paper Magazine Registration (1721)
This procedure registers the paper magazine to be

used.
Change the dryer temperature if necessary.

Check] → [1721 Paper Magazine Registration] →
[Enter] buttons.
ID: Enter the magazine ID.

Width: Enter the paper width (mm).
Paper: Select the paper surface type.
Length: Enter the roll paper length (m).
Remain: Enter remaining paper length (m).
BP: Select “YES” or “NO” for back printing.
Type: Select the paper type correctly. The
paper type is indicated on the paper
package.
[Set] button: Click this button to register the entered
items.
↓ [Next page] [Prev page] ↑

ID: Enter the magazine ID.
P1R: Enter the P1R replenishment rate.
P2R: Enter the P2R replenishment rate.
PSR: Enter the PSR replenishment rate.
Correct Enter the correction value of the
value: dryer temperature.
[Set] button: Click this button to register the entered
items.
NOTE: Do not change the “P1R”, “P2R”, “PSR” and “Correct

value” values.
5-90
2. Release the latches and open the paper

magazine.
Paper Magazine
Latches (2)
R3-087
3. Remove the two screws and adjust the width of Paper Guides (2)
the paper guides. Tighten the two screws.
Screws (2)
R3-088
NOTE: • Use the appropriate guides for paper width.

• Guide B is available as an optional accessory.
Guide Paper Width

A Except B
B 114/210
L2367
5-91
4. Loosen the four screws securing the paper Paper Flanges

flanges to the paper shaft.
5. Align the holes in the paper flange bosses with the

Paper Width Mark
paper width marks visible from the hole and
tighten the four screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to overtighten the screws.
Screws (4)
R3-090
6. Find the appropriate paper from the table on the ID Chip

screen and install its ID chip to the magazine
using the screw.
Screw
R3-101
5-92
5.9.3 Paper Condition Method Setup (1742)
This procedure sets the paper condition setup

method.

Check] → [1742 Paper Condition Method Setup]
→ [Enter] buttons. 5
2. Select “YES” or “NO” for the ambient variable
correction.
3. Select “YES” or “NO” for the master magazine

registration.
4. If “YES” is selected in Step 2, set the ID, width,

paper and type for the master magazine.
NOTE: • Ambient variable correction: When there is a

sudden change in temperature during the day,
it influences the color processing of color
papers. To maintain constant printing quality in
that condition, select “YES”.
• Master magazine registration: Paper condition
setup must be performed for all papers if “NO”
is selected.
5.9.4 Paper Surfaces Display Setup (1743)
This procedure setups display of the “Paper” box of

Menu 0221 “Paper Magazine ID Setting”.

Check] → [1743 Paper Surfaces Display Setup] →
[Enter] buttons.
2. Select the paper type to be changed.
3. Select “ON” or “OFF”.
5-93
5.10 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (05)
5.10.1 Magazine Feed Length Adjustment (0520)
This menu should be executed for all paper

magazines when installing the machine, or when a
new magazine is registered.

Maintenance] → [05 Printer Adjustment/
Maintenance] → [0520 Magazine Feed Length
Adjustment] → [Enter] buttons.
NOTE: The magazine selection boxes are not displayed

for the single magazine type.
●Auto Adjustment
1) Set a new magazine on the upper magazine

deck.
2) Select “Upper” for “Magazine”.
3) Click the [Print] button.
• After about three minutes, Prints 1 and 2 are

output to the sorter.
4) Enter new magazine ID in the “Magazine ID”

box.
5) Measure the feed lengths of Prints 1 and 2 at

Print 1
the center and record them.
6) Enter the feed lengths recorded in the “Print 1”

and “Print 2” boxes.
• Feed length is adjusted automatically.
8) Install the magazine in the upper deck to the

lower deck.
Print 2
9) Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for the lower
magazine.
5-94
●Manual Adjustment
1) Enter the magazine ID to be adjusted in the

“Magazine ID” box.
2) Select “Upper deck” or “Lower deck”.
3) Enter the value (mm) in the “New value” box.

5
• The feed length is changed.
5.10.2 G Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (0522)
The G laser optimal temperature setting message

appears every three months. Set up the optimal
temperatures on this screen.

Maintenance] → [0522 G Laser (SHG) Optimal
Temperature Setup] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Click the [Enter] button.
5-95
• The result is displayed.
5.10.3 Paper Feed (0523)
This procedure feeds and processes unexposed

sheets of paper.

Maintenance] → [0523 Paper Feed] → [Enter]
buttons.
2. Enter the number of sheets in “Q’ty” box and the

feed length in “Length” box.
Number of sheets: 1 to 999

Feed length: 82.5 to 305.0
3. Select the “Upper” or “Lower” for “Magazine”.
• The sheets of paper are fed and processed.
5-96
5.10.4 Printer Temperature Display (0524)
This procedure displays the printer temperature and

printer status.

Maintenance] → [0524 Printer Temperature
Display] → [Enter] buttons. 5
NOTE: • The temperatures are updated every five
seconds.
• Always keep “ON” selected for “Working” of
“Abnormal temp. detection”.
5.10.5 Printer Input Check (0525)
This procedure displays the status of the sensors.

Maintenance] → [0525 Printer Input Check] →
[Enter] buttons.
↓ [Next page] [Prev. page] ↑
5-97
5.10.6 Image Position/Angle Fine Adjustment (0527)
This procedure adjusts the white border and image

position in a template used for each magazine ID.

Maintenance] → [0527 Image Position/Angle Fine
NOTE: Perform this adjustment after processing three

or more sheets of paper because the feed
length and position may not stabilize
immediately after setting roll paper.
2. Install the paper magazine to be adjusted on the

upper paper deck.
3. Select “Upper” for “Magazine”.
4. Enter the feed length to be adjusted in the “Feed

length” box.
• After about three minutes, the adjustment print Y

is output. Feeding
d
Direction
6. Select the magazine ID to be adjusted.
X
7. Measure the “X”, “Y”, “d” and “f” dimensions of the
adjustment print and record them.
f
8. Enter values (mm) to move the image position in <For example>

appropriate “Main (X)”, “Sub (Y)” and “Tilt (f-d)”
boxes.
a Enter “–0.5” in “Main (X)” box.
5.5 4.5
5-98
10. Install the magazine to be adjusted on the lower

magazine deck.
a Enter “0.5” in “Main (X)” box.
11. Select “Lower” for “Magazine”.
12. Repeat Steps 4 through 9.

4.5 5.5
5.5
5
a Enter “–0.5” in “Sub (Y)” box.
4.5
4.5
a Enter “0.5” in “Sub (Y)” box.
5.5
d = 5.5
a Enter “–1.0” in “Tilt (f-d)” box.
f = 4.5
d = 4.5
a Enter “1.0” in “Tilt (f-d)” box.
f = 5.5
5-99
5.10.7 Printer Function Select (0528)

Maintenance] → [0528 Printer Function Select] →
[Enter] buttons.
2. Select “Both” for “Magazine” normally.
NOTE: This “Magazine” selection is not displayed for

the single magazine type.
3. Select “YES” for “Registration”.
NOTE: Select “NO” for “Registration” to continue

temporarily when error “W-LP-2414” or “W-LP-
2450” occurred.
4. Select “No change” for “Cut interval”.
NOTE: When paper overlap feed has occurred, select

“Change” for “Cut interval”. If the large level is
selected (from Level 1 to Level 2 or 3), the cut
interval is increased and the processing speed
is decreased.
5-100
5.10.8 Printer I/O Check (0540)

solenoids and sensors.

Maintenance] → [0540 Printer I/O Check] →
[Enter] buttons. 5
2. Click the required operation button.
• The respective motor or solenoid operates if

normal.
5-101
5.10.9 Test Pattern Printing (0541)
This procedure creates test pattern prints.

Maintenance] → [0541 Test Pattern Printing] →
[Enter] buttons.
2. Move the cursor to “Test pattern selection”, and

select “Grid”, “Borderless contact”, “Bordered
contact”, “Gradation”, “Back print 1 (wedge)”,
“Back print 2 (line)”, “Back print 3 (character)” or
“Frame print”.
3. Move the cursor to “Length” and enter the feed

length (mm).
4. Move the cursor to “Q’ty” and enter the number of

prints.
• After about three minutes, the print is output.
●Color Drift Inspection
1) Make a grid test print.
2) Use a magnifying lens (X25) to check that the

vertical line for the color drift is 1/8 pixels or less in
width, and the horizontal line is 1/4 pixels or less
in width.
Reference: 1 pixel width = 0.08mm
5-102
Grid: For color drift and feed Borderless contact: For exposure and
length inspection processing unevenness inspection
Bordered contact: For exposure and processing Gradation:

5
unevenness, or white border inspection For gradation inspection
Back print 1 (wedge) Back print 2 (line) Back print 3 (character)
Frame print
5-103
5.10.10 Laser Exposure Check (0542)
This procedure performs an RGB test exposure and

displays the results.

Maintenance] → [0542 Laser Exposure Check] →
[Enter] buttons.
5.10.11 R Laser (R-LD) Data (0543)
This procedure displays the R laser(R-LD) data in the

EEPROM.

Maintenance] → [0543 R Laser(R-LD) Data] →
[Enter] buttons.
5.10.12 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (0544)
This procedure displays the G laser(G-SHG) data in

the EEPROM.

Maintenance] → [0544 G Laser(G-SHG) Data] →
[Enter] buttons.
5-104
5.10.13 B Laser (B-LD) Data (0545)
This procedure displays the B laser(B-LD) data in the

EEPROM.

Maintenance] → [0545 B Laser(B-LD) Data] →
[Enter] buttons. 5
5.10.14 Scan/Scan Home Position Parameter (0546)
This procedure displays the parameters for exposure

positions.

Maintenance] → [0546 Scan/Scan Home Position
Parameter] → [Enter] buttons.
5-105
5.10.15 Main Scan/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjust (0547)
This procedure performs the scanning adjustment

and laser beam synchronization rough adjustment.

Maintenance] → [0547 Main Scan/Laser Beam
Sync. Rough Adjust] → [Enter] buttons.

2. Install the paper magazine for the narrowest

paper width being used.
←→
C
• The print is output in about three minutes.

A→ ← → ←B
4. Measure the dimensions of A, B and C, then Sub-Scanning Line

record them.
NOTE: Tolerance of measurement: Within 0.5mm Rough Adjustment

Block
5. Move the cursor to “A: Left measured value” and

enter the measured A value.
6. Move the cursor to “B: Right measured value” and

enter the measured B value.
7. Click the [Set] button of “Width direction (main

scanning position)”.
9. Move the cursor to “C: Top measured value” and

enter the measured C value.
10. Click the [Set] button of “Feeding direction (sub-

scanning position)”.
12. Find the X coordinate which has the minimum

color drift on the print for the vertical lines using
an inverted magnifier (x20-40), and record the
coordinate value and the drifted color (CMY) order
from the left side.
5-106
13. Check and record the drifted color (CMY) order of

the sub-scanning line from the top using an
inverted magnifier (x20-40).
14. Move the cursor to “X(Width)” and enter the

measured X value.
15. Move the cursor to “Y(Feed)” and enter the

measured Y value.
16. Click the [Set] button of “Coordinate with least 5

amount of color drift”.
5.10.16 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (0548)
This procedure performs the fine adjustment of the

laser beam synchronization.

Maintenance] → [0548 Laser Beam Sync. Fine
Adjustment Print] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Move the cursor to “Order of drifted colors for

main scanning” and enter the drifted color order
from the left recorded in “Main Scanning Position
Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
(Menu 0547)”.
3. Move the cursor to “Order of drifted colors for sub-

scanning” and enter the drifted color order from
the top recorded in “Main Scanning Position
Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
(Menu 0547)”.
5-107
• The print is output in about three minutes.
NOTE: The adjustment print has twenty or twenty-five

vertical and horizontal lines.
5. Find numbers that have the minimum color drift on

the output print for the vertical and horizontal lines
using the magnifier (x20-40).
6. Move the cursor to the “Best main scanning

position” and enter the number of the vertical lines
found.
7. Move the cursor to the “Best sub-scanning

position” and enter the number of the horizontal
lines found.
5-108
5.10.17 Laser History Display (0549)
Display the exposure time and current value of R-LD,

G-SHG and B-LD.

Maintenance] → [0549 Laser History Display] →
[Enter] buttons. 5
2. Click the [Switch display] button to switch between

the graph and numeric displays.
5-109
5.10.18 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (0550)
This procedure copies the LUT (Look-up Table) from

one magazine to another.

Maintenance] → [0550 Paper Condition Setup
Table(LUT) Copy] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Specify the ID of the source magazine.
3. Specify the ID of the destination magazine.
• Copying is performed.
5.10.19 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (0551)
This procedure adjusts the printer mechanism.

Maintenance] → [0551 Printer Mechanical Fine
2. “Cutter: Feed motor stop timing”:

Sets up the feed motor stop timing when
supplying paper. Click the [Set] button.
3. “Setup of precut length”:

Sets up the leading end cut-off length of paper
for each magazine.
5-110
5.10.20 Filter Exchange Log (0552)
The laser optical unit air filter replacement history is

displayed.

Maintenance] → [0552 Filter Exchange Log] →
[Enter] buttons. 5
[Replace] button: Click this button when the filter has
been replaced.
[Initialize] button: Click this button to initialize the
replacement history.
5.10.21 Drawing Position Sensor Adjustment (0553)
This procedure adjusts paper leading end position for

supply process on the basis of the sensors.

Maintenance] → [0553 Drawing Position Sensor
NOTE: Perform this procedure for both upper and lower

magazine decks.
2. Select “Upper” or “Lower” for “Magazine”.
• After about three minutes, adjustment Prints 1

and 2 are output.
4. Measure the feed length of Prints 1 and 2 and

record them.
5. Enter the recorded values in the “Measured”

boxes for “Print 1” and “Print 2”.
6. Click the [Calculate] button.
5-111
• New adjustment value appears in the

“Calculated” box.
7. Select “All IDs” or “Selected ID only”.
8. Enter ID in the “ID” box if “Selected ID only” is

selected.
9. Enter new adjustment value in the “New” box.
5.10.22 Image Position Initialization (0554)
This procedure sets up the initial image position for all

magazines.

Maintenance] → [0554 Image Position
Initialization] → [Enter] buttons.

2. Install the narrowest paper magazine on the

upper deck and the widest paper magazine on the
lower deck.
5-112
• After about three minutes, adjustment Prints 1 A

C C
and 2 for the upper magazine and Print 3 for the
lower magazine are output.
NOTE: For the single magazine type, prints 1 and 2 are D

output.
4. Print 1: Measure the A to F dimensions and enter

them in the appropriate boxes. F E
D B
Print 2: Measure the C and E dimensions and Print 2
enter them in the appropriate boxes. 5
Print 3: Measure the B to F dimensions and enter
them in appropriate boxes. (Double
magazine only)
E
Print 1
5. Click the [Set] button. C
D B F
E
Print 3
(Double Magazine Only)
5.10.23 Sub-scan Feeding Speed Adjustment (0555)
This procedure adjusts the feeding speed of the sub-

scanning unit.

Maintenance] → [0555 Sub-scan Feeding Speed
• After about three minutes, the adjustment print

is output.
5-113
4. Measure the “A” dimension of the adjustment print

and record it.
5. Enter the recorded value in the “Measured” box.
6. Click the [Calculate] button.
• New adjustment value is displayed in the

“Calculated (%)” box.
7. Enter the magazine ID in the “ID” box.
8. Enter the calculated value in the “New” box.
5.10.24 Sub-Scan Soft Nip Adjustment (0557)
This procedure adjusts the soft nip timing, nip position

and motor current value of the sub-scanning unit.

Maintenance] → [0557 Sub-Scan Soft Nip
2. Enter the feed length in the “Feed length” box.
NOTE: The magazine selection boxes are not displayed

for the single magazine type.
• After about three minutes, adjustment Prints 1 to

9 are output.
5. Select optimum prints for unevenness level at the

leading and trailing ends from nine adjustment
prints
6. Enter the optimum print numbers in the “Tip No. 1

to 9” and “End No. 1 to 9” boxes.
7. Click the [Convert] button.
• Timing, new pulse adjustment and motor current

values are displayed.
5-114
5.10.25 Sensor Current Value Setting (0559)
This menu is used to change the current value setting

of the sensor. However do not change the value
normally.
5
Maintenance] → [0559 Sensor Current Value
Setting] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Select the sensor No. for “Sensor No.” box.
3. Input the “Current (mA)”.
• The last data will be overwritten.
5-115
5.10.26 Printer Operation Data Display (0560)
This procedure displays the printer operation data.

Maintenance] → [0560 Printer Operation Data
Display] → [Enter] buttons.
5-116
5.10.27 Data Saving (0561)
The parameters displayed can be written from the

memory on the printer’s circuit board to the HD in the
main control unit.
[Selection]

5
Maintenance] → [0561 Data Saving] → [Enter]
buttons.
2. Select the item to be saved.
5.10.28 Data Download (0562)
The parameters displayed can be written from the HD

in the main control unit to the memory on the printer’s
circuit board.

Maintenance] → [0562 Data Download] → [Enter]
buttons.
2. Select the item to be downloaded.
• The data is downloaded.
4. Shut down and restart the system.
5-117
5.11 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (06)
5.11.1 Pump Output Measurement/Setting (0620)
This procedure measures and corrects the

replenisher pump output.
Normally measure only PSR.
NOTE: The machine automatically measures the pump

output for P1R, P2RA and P2RB.
When executing this menu to confirm pump operation

for the P1R, P2RA or P2RB, return the discharged
replenisher into the replenisher tank.

Maintenance] → [06 Processor Adjustment/
Maintenance] → [0620 Pump Output
Measurement/Setting] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Prepare a measuring cylinder.
4. Click the [Measure] button for the pump to be

measured.
• The message below appears on the printer

operation panel.
#PSR MEASURE
#START [YES] ?
5. Press the [Enter] key on the printer operation

panel.
• The alarm beeps intermittently for ten seconds.
5-118
6. Before the pump starts discharging, disconnect

the replenisher nozzle, insert it into the measuring
cylinder and hold it at the same height as its
setting position.
• The replenisher pump starts discharging.
• The alarm beeps when discharging is

completed.
7. Insert the replenisher nozzle into the sub-tank. 5

8. Place the measuring cylinder on a level surface,
and then read and record the output.
PSR Replenisher Nozzle
Measuring Cylinder
R3-161
9. PSR: P2RA
P1W Replenisher
Dispose of the liquid in the measuring cylinder. Replenisher Nozzle
P1R, P2RA or P2RB: Nozzle
P2RB
Return the discharged replenisher into the Replenisher
replenisher tank through the cartridge box Nozzle
opening.
10. Select the “Measured value” box, and enter the

recorded output value.
11. Clean the measuring cylinder.

P1R Replenisher
13. Reinstall the processor top cover. Nozzle
Measuring Cylinder
R3-324
5-119
5.11.2 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (0621)
This procedure measures and corrects auto-cleaning

pump output.

Maintenance] → [0621 Auto Cleaning Output
Measurement/Setting] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Prepare the measuring cup for auto-cleaning

output measurement.
4. Remove the No.2 crossover rack.

No.2 Crossover Rack q
NOTE: Do not remove the other crossover racks to

prevent splashing of washing water. w
No.3 Crossover Rack

R3-461
5. Install the measuring cups instead of the No.2

crossover rack as shown.
6. Click the [Start] button for “No.2”.
• The message below appears on the printer

operation panel.
#No.2 MEASURE
#START [YES] ?
7. Press the [Enter] key on the printer operation

panel.
Measuring Cup
R3-332
• The pump discharges washing water after the
ten second countdown.
5-120
• The alarm beeps once when the discharging is

completed.
8. Remove the measuring cups.
9. Place the measuring cups on a horizontal surface, Measuring Cups

read the liquid amount and record it.
10. Dispose of the water from the measuring cup.
11. Enter the recorded value in the “Measured value” 5

box for the “No.2”.
12. Reinstall the No.2 crossover rack and remove the

No.3 crossover rack.
13. Install the measuring cup instead of the No.3

crossover rack.
14. Repeat Steps 6 through 11 for No.3. L21117
15. Reinstall the No.3 crossover rack.
16. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for “Dryer entrance Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack
squeeze rack”.
17. Remove the dryer entrance squeegee rack and

check that it is washed completely with washing
water.
18. Reinstall the dryer entrance squeegee rack and

close the dryer unit.
R3-118
5-121
5.11.3 Low Volume Processing Setup (0622)
This procedure sets up low volume processing.

Maintenance] → [0622 Low Volume Processing
Setup] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Select “YES” for “Low volume”.
3. Enter the minimum processing amount in the box.
Range: 0.0 to 15.0
4. Enter the minimum processing amount for the last

eight days in the box.
Range: 0.0 to 100.0
NOTE: Click the [Clear] button to clear all data.
5.11.4 Processor Temperature Calibration (0623)
This procedure calibrates the processor section

temperatures.

Maintenance] → [0623 Processor Temperature
Calibration] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Check that the display values have reached the

“Setting” temperatures.
5-122
4. Remove the P1 circulation filter and put it on the

tray.
5
Tray
P1 Circulation Filter
R3-120
5. Measure the temperature of the P1 processing

solution and record it.
6. Reinstall the filter by aligning the fastening tab

with the notch, and then turn it 90° clockwise.
7. If the “Setting” temperatures differ from the values

displayed, move the cursor to the “Measured
value” and enter the values recorded in Step 4.
Range: 30.0 to 60.0

P1 Sub-tank Thermometer
R3-163
9. Repeat Steps 4 through 8 to measure the P2
solution temperature.
10. Remove the rubber plug of the PS1 processing

tank.
PS1 Rubber Plug

R3-164
5-123
11. Measure the PS1/2 solution temperature and

record it.
12. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for the PS1/2 solution

temperature.
Thermometer
R3-165
13. Remove the PS3 circulation filter and put it on the PS3 Circulation Filter
tray.
R3-166
14. Measure the PS3 solution temperature and record Thermometer

it.
15. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for the PS3 solution

temperature.
16. Reinstall the rubber plug, circulation filter and

processor cover. (Large)
R3-167
5-124
5.11.5 Processor Input Check (0624)
This procedure displays the status of the sensors.

Maintenance] → [0624 Processor Input Check] →
[Enter] buttons.
5
5-125
5.11.6 Processor Operating Condition Setup (0625)
This procedure sets up the processor operating

condition.

Maintenance] → [0625 Processor Operating
Condition Setup] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Normally, the processor operating conditions are

set up as shown in the table below.
Rack auto cleaning ON

Dryer entrance rack auto
ON
clean
No. of prints for dryer
entrance rack auto clean 1 to 500
9999
Auto intermittent driving ON
Energy saving mode ON
Operation for preventing dew
ON
condensation
Evaporation correction ON
Humidity Normal
PS rack cleaning ON
Sorter operation ON
Small Size : 50
Sorter Max. No. of sheets
Large Size : 25
Paper feed interval No change
Pre-sorting small size prints OFF
NOTE: • Paper feed interval: Not used “Change”

function normally.
• Pre-sorting small-size prints: Select “ON”
when clustering ability for mixed large-and
small-sizes printing is not good due to curling
of sheets, etc.
5-126
5.11.7 Processing Temperature Setting (0640)
This procedure sets the processing temperatures.

Maintenance] → [0620 Processing Temperature
Setting] → [Enter] buttons.
5
2. Enter the numerical values of the “P1”, “P2” and
“PS” processing temperatures.
Range Initial Value

P1 40.0 to 45.0 42.0
P2 35.0 to 45.0 40.0
PS 35.0 to 45.0 40.0
5-127
5.11.8 Processor I/O Check (0642)

solenoids and sensors.

Maintenance] → [0642 Processor I/O Check] →
[Enter] buttons.
2. Click the required operation button.
• The respective motor or solenoid operates, if

normal.
5-128
5.11.9 Processor Operation Data Display (0643)
This procedure displays the processor operation

data.

Maintenance] → [0643 Processor Operation Data
Display] → [Enter] buttons. 5
5-129
5.12 Self-Diagnostic (23)
5.12.1 Paper Feed Check (2340)
This menu is used to identify the defective part by

measuring the time required for a print to pass
through each unit in the case of paper jamming or to
diagnose stability of paper feed.

Maintenace] → [1520 Printer Startup and
Maintenace] [23 Self-diagnosis] → [2340 Paper
Feed Check] → [Enter] buttons.
2. Click the [▼] button and select the date of error

log to be displayed.
NOTE: The selected error log is displayed in the lower

part of the screen.
“Today” : Errors which occurred in

during the current day are
listed.
“Last” : The latest errors for 50 prints
are listed.
“Year/Month/Day”: Errors in the selected date
are listed (Today’s date is
displayed either with or
without errors).
• The error log list in selected date is displayed.
3. Select the error of which paper feed log you

desive to display.
NOTE: If “last” is selected, these items cannot be

selected.
4. Click the [Start] button.
5-130
• The Paper feed history screen appears.
• The latest paper feed log lists up to 50 sheets of

paper.
5-131
●Paper Feed History Screen
1. Items in Paper Feed History Screen
Based on the error specified in the error history screen, the latest paper feeding history of a maximum of 50
prints is displayed in descending order.
[ERROR-ID] : The error ID specified in the error history screen is displayed. However, if “Last” is selected in the
error history screen, this item is left blank.
[DATE] : The date selected in the error history screen is displayed.
[TIME] : The time selected in the error history screen is displayed.
[AVG] : The item indicated in blue is the average value for each sensor. (However, the average value of
D633 is not displayed because the value may vary depending on the paper length.) The average
value of a maximum of 50 prints is displayed for each sensor.
Image Type : The item in the leftmost column in the screen indicates the image type. For special prints, the
following abbreviations are displayed.
[PRE] : Precut Paper
[CAB] : Calibration Paper
[END] : Paper End
[SLC] : Splice Paper
[WID [mm]] : Paper width is displayed.
[LEN [mm]] : Paper length is displayed.
[TIM [H:M:S]]: Paper feeding start time [Hour: Minute: Second] immediately after paper cutting is
displayed.
[MAG] : The magazine ID (1 to 63) is displayed.
[SPD] : Line speed is displayed. (L: Low speed, H: High speed)
Unit Number : Unit numbers 1 to 6 are displayed on the upper right-hand side of the screen.
5-132
Unit Number Name Sensor

(3) Sub-scanning unit D650
(4) Sub-scanning unit D653
(5) Sub-scanning exit unit D667
(6) Dryer exit unit D771
Required Time: Time required for passing from the previous sensor to the indicated sensor is displayed. Details
on each sensor are shown in the table below.
Sensor Name Measured Section

D650 Exposure section entrance paper sensor TIM → D650 5
D653 Exposure section paper sensor D650 → D653
D667 Sub-scanning exit section paper sensor D653 → D667
D771 Dryer exit section paper sensor D667 → D771
2. Time Displayed for Each Sensor:
The value of each sensor is displayed in black or red based on the average value. Black characters
indicate normal values and red characters indicate abnormal values.
Blank columns indicate that paper did not pass the sensor within a specified time or paper was not fed to the
sensor due to paper jamming, etc.
If an abnormal value is read, “-” is displayed.
5-133
5.13 Printer Registration (15)
5.13.1 Printer Registration (1540)
This menu is used to change the current printer name

and IP address.

Maintenance] → [1540 Printer Registration]
buttons.
2. To register the LP-5000, follow the steps below.
1) Input the “Printer name”.
2) Input the “IP Address”.
3) Click the [Register] button.
3. To delete the registered LP-5000, follow the steps

below.
1) Select the LP-5000 to be delete in the list.
5-134
5.14 Special Operations (99)
5.14.1 Paint (9940)
Follow this procedure to use “Paint”.
1. Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [99 Special

Operations] → [9940 Paint] buttons.
NOTE: For information on “Paint” operations, see the

Windows® XP manual.
2. Click “File” and “Exit” on the upper left-hand side

5
of the screen.
NOTE: Be sure not to click the emergency button.
5.14.2 Explorer (9941)
Follow this procedure to use “Explorer”.

Operations] → [9941 Explorer] buttons.
NOTE: For information on “Explorer” operations, see

the Windows XP SP2 manual.
2. Click “File” and “Exit” on the upper left-hand side

of the screen.
NOTE: Be sure not to click the emergency button.
5-135
5.14 Special Operations (99)
5.14.3 Command (9942)
Follow this procedure to perform MS-DOS command

operations.

Operations] → [9942 Command] buttons.
NOTE: For information on “Command” operations, see

the MS-DOS® manual.
2. Click the [X] button on the upper right-hand side of

the screen.
5-136
5.15 DST (Data Set Tool) Update
After executing the following menu, “DST FD Update”

should be performed.
No. Menu
0136 Media Input Environment Setup
0220 Print Size Setup
0223 Special Film Channel Setting
0224 Monotone Correction Setting
0225 Custom Setting Regist/Delete
0226 Back Printing Format
0227 Index Conditions 5
0240 Image Correction Setup
0241 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag. Setting
0323 AF Function Setup
0350 Scanner Parameter Check/Update
0352 Working Information Display
0400 NC100AR Fixed Feeding Setup
0425 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup
0441 Focus Offset Adjustment
0446 NC100AR ID Registration
0447 MFC10AR ID Registration
1020 Shop Logo Regist/Delete
1021 Template Regist/Delete
1023 Custom Button Regist/Delete
1. Insert the DST FD into the FD drive.
2. Click the [Launcher] icon located at the upper

right-hand side of the screen.
DST(Data Set Tool) FD

R3-320-03
• The “Application Launcher Window” dialog box

appears.
3. Click the [1] icon.
5-137
5.15 DST (Data Set Tool) Update
• The “FRONTIER Data Set Tool” dialog box

appears.
4. Checkmark [✓] the box for “FD Backup”.
5. Click the [System → FD] button.
• The “Start copying. OK?” dialog appears.
• Data saving starts.

• The “Save completed.” dialog appears.
8. Click the [End] button.
9. Remove the DST FD from the FD drive.
Data Set Tool FD

R3-321-04
5-138
6. FILM CARRIER SECTION
Parts Location......................................................................................... 6-3

6.1 NC100AR Upper Feed Section............................................................... 6-9
6.1.1 Upper Mask Removal/Reinstallation...................................................................... 6-9
6.1.2 Upper Feed Section Damper Spring Replacement............................................... 6-9
6.1.3 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 6-10
6.1.4 Opposite Roller Replacement .............................................................................. 6-10
6.1.5 Upper Dust Removal Brush Replacement .......................................................... 6-11
6.1.6 Upper Dust Removal Brush Unit Disassembly/Reassembly............................. 6-12
6.1.7 Pressure Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ............................................................ 6-13
6.1.8 CYA25 Circuit Board Replacement...................................................................... 6-16
6.1.9
6.1.10
Leading End Sensor LED (D401L)/LEE22 Circuit Board Replacement ............ 6-18
Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D403L)/LEE22 Circuit Board
6
Replacement ........................................................................................................ 6-19
6.1.11 LBF25 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 6-20
6.2 NC100AR Lower Feed Section ............................................................ 6-22
6.2.1 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 6-22
6.2.2 Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation................................................................... 6-22
6.2.3 Belt Tension Adjustment ...................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.4 Carrier Lock Unit Removal/Reinstallation........................................................... 6-24
6.2.5 Carrier Lock Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ...................................................... 6-24
6.2.6 Feed Belt/Feed Roller Replacement .................................................................... 6-26
6.2.7 Lower Dust Removal Brush Replacement .......................................................... 6-28
6.2.8 Upper Feed Section Lock Release Button Replacement................................... 6-30
6.2.9 Carrier Stopper Replacement............................................................................... 6-31
6.2.10 Handle Replacement ............................................................................................. 6-31
6.2.11 JNC25 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 6-32
6.2.12 PDC25 Circuit Board Replacement...................................................................... 6-34
6.2.13 Leading End Sensor (D401P)/DTE25 Circuit Board Replacement .................... 6-34
6.2.14 Upstream Perforation Sensor (D402P)/Check Tape Sensor (D404P)/
DTF25 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................... 6-35
6.2.15 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D403P)/DTE25 Circuit Board
Replacement ........................................................................................................ 6-36
6.2.16 Feed Motor (M401) Replacement ......................................................................... 6-37
6.2.17 Plug-in Connector Replacement .......................................................................... 6-38
6.2.18 Upper Feed Section Open/Close Sensor (D421) Replacement ......................... 6-39
6.2.19 Diffusion Box Sensor (D422) Replacement......................................................... 6-39
6.2.20 Pressure Solenoid (S401) Replacement.............................................................. 6-40
6.2.21 DBF25 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 6-42
6.2.22 Herness Routing.................................................................................................... 6-43
6.3 Winding Section.................................................................................... 6-44
6.3.1 Winding Roller Unit Removal/Reinstallation....................................................... 6-44
6.3.2 Winding Roller Replacement................................................................................ 6-45
6.3.3 Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation.................................................................. 6-45
6.3.4 Winding Upper Guide Replacement .................................................................... 6-46
6.3.5 Winding Section Cover Replacement.................................................................. 6-47
6.3.6 Open/Close Detecting Lever Replacement ......................................................... 6-47
6.3.7 Lock Release Lever Replacement........................................................................ 6-48
6.3.8 Winding Roller Idler Gear Replacement .............................................................. 6-48
6-1
6.3.9 Winding Lower Guide Replacement .................................................................... 6-49
6.4 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR (Optional) .......................................... 6-51
6.4.1 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 6-51
6.4.2 Shutter Replacement............................................................................................. 6-52
6.4.3 CYB25 Circuit Board Replacement...................................................................... 6-52
6.4.4 Plug-in Connector Replacement .......................................................................... 6-54
6.4.5 Carrier Lock Unit Removal/Reinstallation........................................................... 6-54
6.4.6 Diffusion Box Sensor (D422) Replacement......................................................... 6-55
6.4.8 Mask Position Adjustment Knob Assembly Removal/Reinstallation............... 6-57
6.4.9 Mask Position Adjustment Knob Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly .......... 6-58
6.4.10 Mask Position Adjustment Rack Replacement................................................... 6-59
6.4.11 SSA25 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 6-60
6.4.12 Side Rail Replacement .......................................................................................... 6-60
6.4.13 IX240 Holder Door Open/Close Device Disassembly/Reassembly................... 6-62
6.4.14 IX240 Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly ..................................................... 6-63
6.4.15 135F Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly....................................................... 6-64
6.4.16 135H Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly ...................................................... 6-66
6.4.17 Mount Holder Replacement .................................................................................. 6-67
6-2
Parts Location
● Auto Film Carrier NC100AR (External View)
Roller Clean Knob

Upper Feed Section
Dust Removal
Brush Lever
Winding Roller
Dust Removal
Brush
Upper Feed Section

Lock Release Button
Lower Feed Section Carrier Lock Button
VR3-001
6-3
Parts Location
● Auto film Carrier NC100AR (Upper Feed Section Bottom-view)
CYA25 Circuit Board LBF25 Circuit Board
Downstream Perforation Sensor Leading End Sensor LED

LED (D403L)/LEE22 Circuit Board (D401L)/LEE22 Circuit Board
VR3-002
LBF25 Circuit Board

D402L Upstream Perforation Sensor LED
D404L Check Tape Sensor LED
D405L Bar-code Sensor 1 LED
D407L Frame Sensor 1 LED
D411L Panorama Sensor 1 LED
6-4
Parts Location
● Auto Film Carrier NC100AR (Lower Feed Section Top-view)
Downstream Perforation Sensor

(D403P)/DTE25 Circuit Board DTF25 Circuit Board Leading End Sensor (D401P)
/DTE25 Circuit Board
PDC25
Circuit Board
Upper Feed Section Open/Close Pressure Solenoid (S401) DBF25 Circuit Board
Sensor (D421)/MSA01 Circuit Board
VR3-003
DBF25 Circuit Board DTF25 Circuit Board

D405P Bar-code Sensor 1 D402P Upstream Perforation Sensor
D406P Bar-code Sensor 2 D404P Check Tape Sensor
D407P Frame Sensor 1
D411P Panorama Sensor 1
D412P Panorama Sensor 2
6-5
Parts Location
● Auto Film Carrier NC100AR (Lower Feed Section Bottom-view)
Plug-in Connector JNC25 Circuit Board Diffusion Box Sensor (D422) Feed Motor (M401)
VR3-004
● Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR
Interior Cover
Upper Cover
Calibration Cover
Holder Guide
Fine Adjustment Knob

Carrier Lock Button
Film Holder
Lower Cover
PD3-040
6-6
Parts Location
<IX240 Film Holder>
Door Open/Close Knob
Hook
Support
Upper Holder
6
Film Feed/Rewind Knob
24
0
Lower Holder
PD3-041
<135 Mount Holder>
Mount Guide Support
MO
UN
T1
35
Lower Holder
PD3-042
6-7
Parts Location
<135H Film Holder>
Upper Holder
Support
Hook
13
5H
Lower Holder
PD3-043
<135F Film Holder>
Upper Holder
Support
Hook
1
3
5
F
Lower Holder
PD3-044
6-8
6.1 NC100AR Upper Feed Section
6.1.1 Upper Mask Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Upper Mask Mask Pin
1. Push the lock release button and then open the

upper feed section.
2. Press the upper mask to release it from the mask

pin then remove it from the upper feed section.
Reinstallation
6
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of
removal.
VR3-005
6.1.2 Upper Feed Section Damper Spring Replacement
Removal Spring Bracket Assembly

upper feed section.
2. Remove the screws and then the spring bracket

assembly.
Screw
VR3-035
3. Remove the E-ring then the shaft and spring.

Shaft
E-ring
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Spring

removal. VR3-036
6-9
6.1.3 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Upper Cover

upper feed section.
2. Remove the screws and then the upper cover.
Reinstallation

removal. Screws (4)
VR3-037
6.1.4 Opposite Roller Replacement
Removal Screws (3) (Loosen)

Screws (3) (Remove)
1. Remove the CYA25 circuit board
Spring Plates (3)
2. Loosen the three left side screws securing the

plates and remove the other screws then the
Springs (6)
plates and springs.
VR3-047
3. Remove the roller assemblies. Roller Assemblies Poly-sliders (12)

Opposite Rollers (6)
4. Remove the poly-sliders and opposite rollers from
the shafts.
VR3-048
6-10
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of

removal.
NOTE: • Be careful not to lose the poly-sliders.

• Make sure the poly-sliders are positioned in place
as shown in the figure below.
6
Poly-sliders
VR3-195
6.1.5 Upper Dust Removal Brush Replacement
Removal Screws (2)
1. Remove the upper cover (see Subsection 6.1.3).

Upper Dust Removal
Brush Unit
2. Remove the screws and then the upper dust
removal brush unit.
VR3-049
3. Loosen the screw and remove the upper dust

removal brush from the unit. Screw (Loosen)
Upper Dust Removal Brash

VR3-050
6-11
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Install the upper dust removal brush to the unit so

that its bristles side faces to the rear side as
shown in the figure.
• Adjust the height of the brash from the bracket to
6.6 mm and tighten the screws. Bracket
Brush
VR3-590
6.1.6 Upper Dust Removal Brush Unit Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly M2 Screw
1. Remove the upper dust removal brush unit

2. Remove the coil spring from the unit.
3. Remove the M2 screw and then the lever.

Lever
Spring
VR3-051
4. Remove the arm and shaft. Arm
Shaft
VR3-052
6-12
5. Remove the E-rings and then the brush bracket. E-rings (2)
Brush Bracket
6
VR3-053
6. Remove the collars and springs.

Collars (2)
Springs (2)
Reassembly
Reassembly is essentially in the reverse order of

removal.
VR3-054
6.1.7 Pressure Unit Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Screws (2)
1. Remove:
• Upper mask (see Subsection 6.1.1).

• CYA25 circuit board (see Subsection 6.1.8).
2. Remove the screw and then the pressure unit

from the upper feed section.
Pressure Unit
VR3-055
6-13
3. Remove the E-ring, shaft and bracket.

Bracket
Shaft
E-ring
VR3-196
4. Remove the screw and then the spring fixing Screw

bracket. Spring Fixing Bracket
VR3-056
5. Remove the springs. Springs (2)
6. Shift the mask guide as shown in the figure and

remove it.
Mask Guide
VR3-057
6-14
7. Remove the E-ring, spring, bushing and pressure E-ring

plate.
Spring Bushing
Locating Hole
Locating Pin
6
Pressure Plate
VR3-058
Reassembly Pressure Unit

disassembly.
NOTE: 1. Install the pressure plate by aligning its locating

pin with the hole.
2. Place the pressure unit under the upper feed
section frame as shown and tighten the screw.
3. Install the upper mask.
VR3-197
4. Loosen the screws tightened above NOTE Step2.

Screws (2) (Loosen)
5. Close the upper feed section.
6. Push the pressure plate shaft until upper mask
touches the lower mask.
Shaft
VR3-591
6-15
7. In this condition, adjust the pressure plate position

lower Mask
so that the lower mask opening can be seen
through the upper mask opening. Tighten the
screws.
Upper Mask
VR3-592
6.1.8 CYA25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Screws (2)
1. Remove the upper cover (see Subsection 6.1.3). Flexible Flat Cable
Fixing Bracket
2. Remove the screws and then the flexible flat cable
fixing bracket.
VR3-038
3. Disconnect the flexible flat cables from the CYA1, CYA1 Connector
CYA2 and CYA3 connectors by releasing the Flexible Flat Cables CYA2 Connector
connector locks.
4. Disconnect the CYA5 connector from the circuit

board.
CYA5 Connector Flexible Flat Cables

CYA3 Connector
VR3-039
6-16
Flexible Flat Cable
6
Connector Lock
VR3-192
5. Remove the screws and then the CYA25 circuit Screws (4)
board.
CYA25 Circuit Board
VR3-040
Installation Grounding Leaf Springs

removal.
NOTE: • Place the circuit board horizontally on the upper

feed section to prevent its grounding leaf springs
from damage.
• Connect the flexible flat cable to the connector so
that its blue mark is parallel to the connector as
shown (see Subsection 6.2.22).
• After instration, preform the following adjustment.
Menu 0329 “FD Data Management”
VR3-193
(see Subsection 5.4.5)
6-17
6.1.9 Leading End Sensor LED (D401L)/LEE22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal LEE1 Connector

2. Disconnect the LEE1 connector from the sensor

LED.
3. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED.
Screw
Leading End Sensor LED (D401L)
VR3-041
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Tighten the screw while pressing the circuit board

against the three shoulders as shown.
Shoulders (3)
VR3-042
6-18
6.1.10 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D403L)/

LEE22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal LEE1 Connector

2. Disconnect the LEE1 connector from the sensor

LED.
3. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED. 6
Screw Downstream Perforation

Sensor LED (D403L)
VR3-043
Installation Shoulders (3)

removal.

against the shoulders as shown.
VR3-044
6-19
6.1.11 LBF25 Circuit Board Replacement
LBF25 Circuit Board
D402L Upstream Perforation Sensor LED

D404L Check Tape Sensor LED
Removal Screw (Remove)

2. Loosen the screw, remove the other screw and

then the opposite roller spring plate.
NOTE: Be careful not to lose the spring.
Screw (Loosen) Spring (2) Opposite Roller

Spring Plate
VR3-194
6-20
3. Disconnect the flexible flat cable from the LBF1 Flexible Flat Cable
connector by releasing the connector lock.
4. Disconnect the LBF2 connector from the circuit

board.
5. Remove the screws and then the LBF25 circuit

board.
6
Connector Lock
VR3-192
LBF1 Connector lock

LBF2 Connector
Screws (2)
Flexible Flat Cable

LBF25 Circuit Board
VR3-045
Installation Locating Hole

removal.
NOTE: • Align the locating hole in the circuit board with the
pin on the frame as shown.
• Connect the flexible flat cable to the connector so
that its blue mark is parallel to the connector as
shown (see Subsection 6.2.22)
Locating Pin
VR3-046
6-21
6.2 NC100AR Lower Feed Section
6.2.1 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Bottom Cover
1. Place the carrier upside down.
Screws (3)
2. Remove the diffusion box.
3. Remove the screws and then the bottom cover by

shifting it to the rear side.
VR3-008
Reinstallation Locking Tabs (4)

removal.
NOTE: Make sure the locking tabs are hooked.
VR3593
6.2.2 Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (2)
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Subsection 6.2.1).
2. Remove the screws securing the motor cover.
VR3-009
6-22
3. Remove the motor cover while releasing the Motor Cover

locking tabs.
Reinstallation 6
removal. Locking Tabs (2)
VR3-010
6.2.3 Belt Tension Adjustment
1. Loosen the screw securing the belt tensioner arm. Screw
2. Move the belt one turn by hand while applying

tention, and retighten the screw.
Belt
VR3-029
6-23
6.2.4 Carrier Lock Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screw
1. Remove the PDC25 circuit board Ring
2. Remove the screw and then the ring.
VR3-078
3. Remove the screw, then the carrier lock unit and Lock Slider
lock slider while aligning the notch in the unit with
the gear shaft. Carrier Lock Unit
Reinstallation
Screws (2)
removal. Notch
VR3-079
6.2.5 Carrier Lock Unit Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Shaft
E-ring
1. Remove the carrier lock unit (see Subsection 6.2.4).
2. Remove the E-ring and then the shaft.
VR3-095
6-24
3. Remove the screw and then the stopper bracket.
Stopper Bracket
Screw
VR3-096
4. Remove the carrier lock base and spring. Carrier Lock Base
5. Remove the bearings. Spring
Bearings (2)
VR3-097
6. Remove the screws and then the carrier lock Screws (2)
stopper.
Carrier Lock Stopper
VR3-098
6-25
7. Remove the screw and then the carrier lock Screw

button.
Carrier Lock Button

8. Remove the E-ring, washer and spring.
Reassembly

Spring Washer E-ring
disassembly.
VR3-099
6.2.6 Feed Belt/Feed Roller Replacement
Removal Screw
1. Remove:
• Carrier lock unit (see Subsection 6.2.4).

• Winding roller unit (see Subsection 6.3.1). Belt Cover
• JNC25 circuit board (see Subsection 6.2.11).
• Motor bracket (see Subsection 6.2.16).
• Diffusion box bracket (see Subsection 6.2.19).
2. Remove the screw and then the belt cover.
VR3-085
3. Remove the screws and then the roller covers.
Screws (2) Roller Covers (2)

VR3-086
6-26
4. Remove the screws, then the feed roller

Feed Belt
assemblies and feed belt.
Feed Roller Screws (6)

6
Assemblies (3)
VR3-087
5. Remove the bearing holders and bearings from

the roller shafts.
Bearings (3)
Bearing Holders (3)

VR3-088
6. Remove the screws and then the belt idler roller Screws (3)
brackets.
Belt Idler Roller Brackets (2)
7. Remove the belt idler rollers. Belt Idler Rollers (6)
VR3-089
6-27
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Route the harness so that it is not pinched

• Press the bearing holder against the shoulders as
shown and tighten the screw.
Shoulders
VR3-594
• Press the roller covers against the locating

Shoulders
shoulders as shown and tighten the screws.
• Adjust the belt tension (see Subsection 6.2.3).
Roller Covers Shoulders

VR3-090
6.2.7 Lower Dust Removal Brush Replacement
Removal Solenoid Harness
1. Remove:

• Motor bracket (see Subsection 6.2.16).
2. Remove the solenoid harness from the harness

duct.
3. Remove the screw and then the harness duct

cover.
Screw
Harness Duct
VR3-080
6-28
4. Remove the harness from the harness cover. Screw

Harness
5. Remove the screw and then the harness duct.
6
Harness Duct
VR3-595
6. Remove the screw and then the lower dust

removal brush assembly.
Lower Dust Removal Brush Assembly Screw

VR3-092
7. Remove the screw and then the brush from the Screw
bracket. Lower Dust
Removal Brush
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Make sure the bristles of the brush are not caught in
the slit.
VR3-093
6-29
6.2.8 Upper Feed Section Lock Release Button Replacement
Removal Lock Release Button Bracket
1. Remove:
• Diffusion box bracket (see Subsection 6.2.19).

• Harness duct (see Subsection 6.2.7).
2. Remove the screw and then the lock release

button bracket.
Screw
VR3-209
3. Remove the lock release button assembly while

Spring Look Release
pressing the button.
Button Button Assembly
4. Remove the shaft and spring.

Shaft
VR3-210
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installing the lock release button bracket, make

sure the Shaft is held down by the bracket.
Shaft
VR3-211
6-30
6.2.9 Carrier Stopper Replacement
Removal Spring Screw Stopper Cover
1. Remove the screw and then the stopper cover.
2. Remove the spring and carrier stopper.
Carrier Stopper
VR3-212
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Align the D-cuts and install the stopper cover.
D-cut
VR3-596
6.2.10 Handle Replacement
Removal Screw
1. Remove:
• Upper cover (see Subsection 6.1.3).

• Carrier stopper (see Subsection 6.2.9).
2. Remove the screw and then the bracket.
3. Slide the handle on arrow mark side and remove

it.
Bracket
VR3-213
6-31
4. Remove the spring.

Spring
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Handle
removal.
NOTE: The handle should return automatically by the

spring force. If necessary, loosen the screws and
adjust it by moving the brackets.
VR3-214
6.2.11 JNC25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Flexible Flat Cable
2. Disconnect the flexible flat cable from the JNC1

3. Disconnect the flexible flat cable from the JNC2

Connector Lock
VR3-192
4. Remove the screws and open the circuit board by JNC25 Circuit Board
lifting its flexible flat cable side.
JNC1 Connector
Screws (2)
Flexible Flat Cables JNC2 Connector

VR3-059
6-32
5. Remove the screw and then the harness stopper. Screw
6
Harness Stopper
VR3-597
6. Disconnect the connectors from the JNC25 circuit JNC6

JNC3 JNC8
board.
JNC9
JNC5 JNC11 JNC4 JNC10 JNC7

VR3-048
Installation Cord Ties

removal.
NOTE: Align the knots of the cord ties on the harness with
the square holes in the brackets as shown.
VR3-203
6-33
6.2.12 PDC25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal PDC3
PDC2
1. Remove the motor cover (see Subsection 6.2.2).
PDC1
2. Open the harness clamp.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the PDC25 circuit

board.
Harness Clamp
VR3-061
4. Remove the screws and then the PDC25 circuit PDC25 Circuit Board Screws (2)
board.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Route the harness so that it is not pinched

(see Subsection 6.2.22). VR3-062
6.2.13 Leading End Sensor (D401P)/DTE25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Leading End

Screw Sensor (D401P)
2. Disconnect the DTE1 connector.
3. Remove the screw and then the leading end

sensor.
DTE1 Connector
VR3-063
6-34
Installation

removal.

Shoulders (3)
VR3-204
6
6.2.14 Upstream Perforation Sensor (D402P)/Check Tape Sensor

(D404P)/DTF25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal DTF25 Circuit Board
2. Disconnect the DTF1 connector.
3. Remove the screw and then the DTF25 circuit

board.
DTF1 Connector Screw

VR3-064

removal.
NOTE: • Tighten the screw while pressing the circuit board

• Be careful not to exchange the DTF1 and DBF2
connectors.
VR3-205
6-35
6.2.15 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D403P)/DTE25 Circuit

Board Replacement
Removal Downstream Perforation Sensor (D403P)
1. Open the JNC25 circuit board

2. Disconnect the DTE1 connector.
3. Remove the screw and then the downstream

perforation sensor.
Screw DTE1 Connector

VR3-065

removal.

VR3-206
6-36
6.2.16 Feed Motor (M401) Replacement
Removal Screw
1. Remove the PDC25 circuit board

2. Loosen the screw to remove belt tension and then

retighten it.
VR3-598
3. Remove the screws and then the motor bracket. Motor Bracket
Screws (2)
VR3-067
4. Remove the tension spring.
5. Remove the screw and then the tension arm.
Tension Arm
Screw
Tension Spring
VR3-068
6-37
6. Remove the screws and then the motor from the

Feed Motor (M401)
motor bracket.
Screws (2)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Adjust the belt tension (see Subsection 6.2.3).

• Route the harness correctly
VR3-069
6.2.17 Plug-in Connector Replacement
Removal Carrier Installation Guide
1. Open the JNC25 circuit board, disconnect the

JNC3 and JNC4 connectors Screws (2)
2. Remove the screws and then the carrier

installation guide.
VR3-070
3. Remove the screws and then the plug-in

connector from the carrier.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Flatten the plug-in connector harness and install the

carrier installation guide (see Subsection 6.2.22). Screws (2) Plug-in Connector
VR3-071
6-38
6.2.18 Upper Feed Section Open/Close Sensor (D421) Replacement
Removal Screw MSA1 Connector
1. Open the JNC25 circuit board

2. Disconnect the MSA1 connector.
3. Remove the screw and then the upper feed

section open/close sensor.
6
Upper Feed Section Open/
Close Sensor (D421)
VR3-072
Installation Switch Arm

removal.
NOTE: Install the sensor so that its switch arm rests on the
pin as shown.
Pin
VR3-207
6.2.19 Diffusion Box Sensor (D422) Replacement
Removal Diffusion Box Bracket
1. Open the JNC25 circuit board and disconnect the

JNC11 connector (see Subsection 6.2.11).
Screws (2)
2. Remove the screws and then the diffusion box

bracket.
VR3-073
6-39
3. Remove the screws and then the diffusion box

Diffusion Box Sensor (D422)
sensor.
Screws (2)
VR3-074
Installation Harnesses

removal.
NOTE: • Install the diffusion box bracket so that the

harnesses are run under it as shown.
• Install the sensor so that its switch arm is beneath
the tab of the bracket as shown.
• Route the harness correctly
Switch Arm Bracket Tab

VR3-208
6.2.20 Pressure Solenoid (S401) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the harness duct (see Subsection 6.2.7).
2. Remove the screw securing the solenoid.
Screw
VR3-081
6-40
3. Open the upper feed section and remove the

pressure solenoid.
Pressure Solenoid (S401)

VR3-082
6
Installation Pressure Solenoid (S401)

removal.
NOTE: • Route the harness correctly

• Install the pressure solenoid by aligning its holes
with the locating pins.
Locating Pins (2)

VR3-599
6-41
6.2.21 DBF25 Circuit Board Replacement
DBF25 Circuit Board
D405PA Bar-code Sensor 1

D405PB Bar-code Sensor 2
D406PA Bar-code Sensor 3
D406PB Bar-code Sensor 4
D411PA Panorama Sensor 1
D411PB Panorama Sensor 2
D412PA Panorama Sensor 3
D412PB Panorama Sensor 4
Removal DBF1 Connector DBF25 Circuit Board
1. Remove:
• DTF25 circuit board (see Subsection 6.2.14).

• Harness duct (see Subsection 6.2.7).
2. Disconnect the DBF1 and DBF2 connectors from

the circuit board.
3. Remove the screws and then the DBF25 circuit

board.
Installation
DBF2 Connector Screws (2)
VR3-084
removal.
NOTE: Route the harness correctly

6-42
6.2.22 Herness Routing
JNC25
Circuit Board
PDC25 Circuit Board
Feed Motor
6-43
6.3 Winding Section
6.3.1 Winding Roller Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Winding Section Cover Upper Feed Section

upper feed section.
2. Open the winding section cover.
VR3-011
3. Push the lock release levers to the rear side and Winding Roller Unit
remove the winding roller unit.
Lock Release Levers (2)

VR3-012
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Install the winding roller unit with the apex of the
triangle locating guide pointing down as shown.
Apex of Locating Guide

VR3-198
6-44
6.3 Winding Section
6.3.2 Winding Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the winding roller unit

2. Remove the E-ring, bearings and bearing holder Bushings (2)

from the roller.
Installation
Bearing Holder
6
removal. E-ring
VR3-014
6.3.3 Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the winding roller unit

2. Remove the E-ring securing the drive gear.
E-ring
VR3-199
3. Remove the screw and then the winding unit. Screws (2)
Winding Unit
VR3-019
6-45
6.3 Winding Section
4. Remove the drive gear and bearings.
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Bearings (2) Drive Gear

removal.
VR3-200
6.3.4 Winding Upper Guide Replacement
Removal Winding Upper Guide

Screws (2)
1. Open the upper feed section.
2. Open the winding section cover.
3. Remove the screws and then the winding upper

guide.
Installation

removal.
VR3-022
6-46
6.3 Winding Section
6.3.5 Winding Section Cover Replacement
Removal Winding Section Cover
1. Remove:
• Winding roller unit (see Subsection 6.3.1).

• Winding upper guide (see Subsection 6.3.4).
2. Remove the screws and then the winding section

cover.
6
Installation

Screws (2)
removal.
VR3-023
6.3.6 Open/Close Detecting Lever Replacement
Removal
Winding Stopper Unit
1. Remove the winding unit (see Subsection 6.3.3).
2. Remove the screws and then the winding stopper

unit.
Screws (2)
VR3-024
3. Remove the E-ring, shaft, spring and open/close E-ring

detecting lever. Open/Close Detecting Lever
Shaft
Spring
VR3-025
6-47
6.3 Winding Section
Installation
Spring
removal.
NOTE: Position the hooks of the spring as shown in the

figure.
VR3-201
6.3.7 Lock Release Lever Replacement
Removal
Lock Release
1. Remove the winding unit (see Subsection 6.3.3). Lever (Right Side)
Springs (2)
2. Remove the springs.
3. Remove the E-rings and then the lock release

levers.
E-rings (2)
Installation

Lock Release Lever (Left Side)
removal.
VR3-026
6.3.8 Winding Roller Idler Gear Replacement
Removal E-ring
1. Remove the winding unit (see Subsection 6.3.3).
2. Remove the E-ring and then the idler gear.
Installation

removal. Idler Gear
VR3-027
6-48
6.3 Winding Section
6.3.9 Winding Lower Guide Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the open/close detecting lever

2. Remove the springs.
3. Remove the screw and then the spring fixing

bracket.
6
Screw
Springs (2)
Spring Fixing Bracket
VR3-031
4. Remove the screw and locking tab then the lower Locking Tab
guide frame assembly.
Screw
Lower Guide Frame Assembly

VR3-032
5. Remove the winding lower guide from the frame.
Winding Lower Guide

VR3-033
6-49
6.3 Winding Section
Installation Bracket Boss

removal.
NOTE: Install the winding lower guide to the frame while

aligning its brackets with the bosses on the frame as
shown.
VR3-202
6-50
6.4 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR (Optional)
6.4.1 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (4)
1. Remove the screws and then the bottom cover.
6
Bottom Cover
VR3-542
2. Remove the screws then the upper cover. Upper Cover
Screws (2)
VR3-613
Reinstallation Tabs (2)

removal.
NOTE: Reinstall the upper cover with the two tabs inserted
as shown.
VR3-615
6-51
6.4.2 Shutter Replacement
Removal
Screws (2)
1. Remove the upper cover (see Subsection 6.4.1).
2. Remove the screws then the shutter.
Installation

removal. Shutter
VR3-614
6.4.3 CYB25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Screws (4)
Bottom Cover
VR3-542
2. Remove the screws and then the carrier Screws (2)

installation guide.
Carrier Installation Guide

VR3-543
6-52
3. Disconnect the flexible flat cable from the CYB3 Flexible CYB2
connector. Flat Cable Connector
CYB1
Connector
4. Disconnect the connectors from the CYB25 circuit CYB4
Connector
board.
5. Remove the screw then the harness clamp.
6
CYB3
Connector
Screw CYB5
Connector
Harness Clamp
VR3-544
6. Remove the screws and then the CYB25 circuit Screws (4)
board.
CYB25 Circuit Board
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Insert the flexible flat cable into the connector so

that its blue contact area is parallel to the
connector and then disappears.
• After instration, perform the following adjustment.
Menu 0326 “FD Data Management”
6-53
Removal CYB2 Connector
CYB1 Connector
2. Remove the carrier installation guide

3. Disconnect the CYB1 and CYB2 connectors from

the CYB25 circuit board.
4. Remove the screws and then the plug-in

connector.
Installation
Screws (2)
Plug-in Connector
removal.
VR3-547
6.4.5 Carrier Lock Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screw
2. Remove the screw and then the spacer ring.
Spacer Ring
VR3-549
6-54
3. Remove the screws then the lock unit and lock Screws (2)
slider.
Carrier Lock Unit
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of 6

removal. Lock Slider
VR3-550
6.4.6 Diffusion Box Sensor (D422) Replacement
Removal Screws (2)
2. Remove the screws then the carrier installation

guide.

VR3-543
3. Disconnect the CYB4 connector. Herness Clamp
4. Remove the screw then the harness clamp.

Screw
CYB4 Connector
VR3-600
6-55
5. Remove the harness stopper. Harness Stopper
VR3-601
6. Remove the screws and then the diffusion box Diffusion Box Sensor (D422)
sensor.
Installation

removal. Screws (2)
VR3-548
Disassembly Slide Bracket
2. Remove the screws then the slide bracket and

spring.
Spring
Screws (2)
VR3-551
6-56
3. Remove the E-ring and then the shaft. Carrier Lock Bracket
4. Remove the carrier lock bracket and spring.

Spring
E-ring
5. Remove the bearings.
Reassembly Shaft

disassembly. Bearings (2)
VR3-552
6
6.4.8 Mask Position Adjustment Knob Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (3)
2. Remove the screw and then the knob.
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Mask Position Adjustment

removal. Knob Assembly
VR3-553
6-57
6.4.9 Mask Position Adjustment Knob Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly
1. Remove the mask position adjustment knob

assembly (see Subsection 6.4.8).
2. Remove the E-ring then the spacer (Big), spacer Bearing

(Small) and bearing.
Spacer (Small)
Spacer (Big) E-ring

VR3-554
3. Remove the E-ring then the knob shaft assembly, Knob Shaft Assembly
poly-slider, bearing and gear.
Poly-slider
Bearing
Gear
E-ring
VR3-555
4. Remove the spring and poly-slider.
5. Remove the E-ring from the shaft.
Poly-slider
E-ring
Spring
VR3-556
6-58
6. Remove the E-ring then the shaft and idler gear.

E-rings (2) Shafts (2)
7. Remove the E-ring then the shaft and drive gear.
Reassembly Drive Gear Idler Gear

disassembly.
VR3-557
6
6.4.10 Mask Position Adjustment Rack Replacement
Removal Polysliders (2) Spring
1. Remove the mask position adjustment knob rings (2)

3. .Remove the E-rings and polysliders then the rack

assembly.
Rack Assembly
VR3-616
4. Remove the E-ring and shaft then the mask E-ring

position adjustment rack.
Mask Position
Adjustment Rack
Installation

removal.
Shaft
VR3-617
6-59
6.4.11 SSA25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal SSA1 Connector

Screws (3)
2. Remove the mask position adjustment knob

3. Release the lock of the SSA1 connector and

disconnect the flexible flat cable.
4. Remove the screws and then the SSA25 circuit

board.
Installation
SSA25 Circuit Board
VR3-558
removal.
6.4.12 Side Rail Replacement
Removal Screws (2)
1. Remove:
• Shutter (see Subsection 6.4.2).

• Diffusion box sensor (see Subsection 6.4.6).
• Mask position adjustment rack (see Subsection
6.4.10).
2. Remove the screws then the interior cover.
Interior Cover
VR3-618
6-60
3. Remove the screws then the carrier installation Screws (2)

guide.
6
VR3-543
4. Remove the screws then the diffusion box

Screws (3)
bracket.
Diffusion Box Bracket

VR3-619
5. Remove the screws then the left side rail. Left Side Rail
Screws (3)
VR3-620
6-61
6. Remove the screws then the right side rail. Right Side Rail
Installation

Screws (4)
removal.
VR3-621
6.4.13 IX240 Holder Door Open/Close Device Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Screws (2)
1. Remove the screws and then the door open/close

assembly. Door Open/Close
Assembly
VR3-559
2. Remove the screw then the door open/close knob, Screw

spring and door open/close bit.
Door Open/Close Knob
Spring
Door Open/Close Bit

VR3-560
6-62
3. Remove the E-ring then the spool bit and spring.
Spring
Reassembly
Reassembly is essentially in the reverse order of Spool Bit

disassembly. E-ring
VR3-561 6
6.4.14 IX240 Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly
Upper Holder
1. Open the upper holder.
2. Remove the screws then the upper holder.
Screws (2)
VR3-622
3. Remove the screws then the upper cover and

Screws (5)
pressure plate.
Pressure Plate
Upper Cover
VR3-623
6-63
4. Remove the screws then the brackets. Screws (4)
5. Remove the upper holder hooks then the springs. Brackets (2)
Reassembly
Springs (2)
Upper Holder Hooks (2)
disassembly.
VR3-624
6.4.15 135F Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Upper Holder
Screws (2)
VR3-625
3. Remove the shafts then the pressure plate 1. Shafts (2)
Pressure Plate 1
VR3-626
6-64
4. Remove the screws then the brackets. Brackets (2) Screws (2)
5. Remove the pressure plate hooks then the

springs.
Pressure Plate Hooks (2) 6

Springs (2)
VR3-627
6. Remove the screws then the upper cover and Screws (5)
pressure plate 2.
Upper Cover
Pressure Plate 2
VR3-628

Brackets (2)
8. Remove the upper holder hooks then the springs.
Springs (2)
Reassembly
Reassembly is essentially in the reverse order of Upper Holder Hooks (2)

disassembly.
VR3-629
6-65
6.4.16 135H Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Upper Holder
Screws (2)
VR3-630
3. Remove the shafts then the pressure plate 1. Shaft (2)
Pressure plate 1
VR3-631
4. Remove the screws then the brackets. Screws (2) Brackets (2)
5. Remove the pressure plate hooks then the Springs (2)

springs.
Pressure Plate Hooks (2)
VR3-632
6-66
6. Remove the screws then the upper cover and Screws (6)
pressure plate 2. Upper Cover
Pressure Plate 2
6
VR3-633

Brackets (2)
8. Remove the upper holder hooks then the springs. Springs (2)
Reassembly

Upper Holder Hooks (2)
disassembly.
VR3-634
6.4.17 Mount Holder Replacement
Removal Screw
1. Remove the screw then the mount holder.

Mount Holder
2. Remove the screw then the spring. Spring
Screw
Installation

disassembly.
VR3-635
6-67
7. SCANNER (SP-500)
Parts Location......................................................................................... 7-2

7.1 Body Covers............................................................................................ 7-4
7.1.1 Top/Right Side/Left Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 7-4
7.1.2 Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation...................................................................... 7-5
7.1.3 PSW25/LEA25/LEB25 Circuit Board Replacement............................................... 7-6
7.2 Light Source Section.............................................................................. 7-7
7.2.1 LED Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation.......................................... 7-7
7.2.2 LED25 Circuit Board Assembly Replacement ...................................................... 7-8
7.3 Carrier Base Section .............................................................................. 7-9
7.3.1 Airflow Cover Removal/Reinstallation................................................................... 7-9
7.3.2 Carrier Lock Sensor (D102) Replacement............................................................. 7-9
7.3.4 Plug-in Connector Replacement .......................................................................... 7-13 7
7.3.5 Carrier Guide Replacement .................................................................................. 7-14
7.3.6 Lower Carrier Guide Replacement....................................................................... 7-15
7.4 Camera Unit........................................................................................... 7-16
7.4.1 Camera Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................................... 7-16
7.4.2 AF (Auto Focus) Motor Assembly (M201) Replacement.................................... 7-18
7.4.3 Lens Home Position Sensor (D201) Replacement ............................................. 7-19
7.4.4 Shutter Assembly Replacement........................................................................... 7-20
7.5 Electrical Equipment ............................................................................ 7-21
7.5.1 Circuit Board Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................ 7-21
7.5.2 ADC25 Circuit Board Replacement...................................................................... 7-22
7.5.3 CTL25 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 7-23
7.5.4 PZR22 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 7-24
7.5.5 DLE25 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 7-26
7.5.6 Power Supply Unit Replacement ......................................................................... 7-27
7.5.7 Scanner Cooling Fan (F101) Replacement.......................................................... 7-29
7.5.8 Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment........................................................................ 7-31
7.5.9 Wire Harness Routing ........................................................................................... 7-32
7-1
Parts Location
Power ON Indicator
Power Switch
CTL25 Circuit Board
ADC25 Circuit Board
Auto Film Carrier

NC100AR
Status Indicator LED Light Source
Carrier Lock Release Button PD3-004
If the carrier cannot be removed from the Emergency Ejection Hole

scanner, perform the procedure below.
1. Insert a thin rod such as a thin hex

wrench into the emergency ejection hole.
2. Pull out the carrier.
Carrier
Thin Rod PD3-070
7-2
Parts Location
Camera Unit
PZR25Circuit Board
USB Connector
DLE25 Circuit
Board
Power Inlet
Exhaust Fan (F101) Plug-in Connector
PD3-005
7-3
7.1 Body Covers
7.1.1 Top/Right Side/Left Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Air Filter Holder

Locking Tab
1. Remove the air filter holder toward upside while
pressing the locking tab section.
VR3-100
2. Remove the screws and then the top cover by Screws (2)
shifting it toward the rear.
Top Cover
VR3-103
3. Remove the screws and then the right side cover. Left Side Cover Screws (2) Right Side Cover
4. Remove the screws and then the left side cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Screws (2)
VR3-104
7-4
7.1 Body Covers
7.1.2 Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the air filter holder (see Subsection 7.1.1).
2. Remove the screws and then the front cover.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the harness connectors.
7
Screws (3) Front Cover
VR3-101
3. Open the harness clamps. Clamps (2)
VR3-215
4. Disconnect the LEB1, PSW1 and LEA1 LEA1 Connector

connectors from the circuit boards.
LEB1 Connector
Reinstallation

removal. PSW1 Connector
VR3-102
7-5
7.1 Body Covers
7.1.3 PSW25/LEA25/LEB25 Circuit Board Replacement
PSW25 Power Switch

LEA25 Power ON Indicator
LEB25 Status Indicator
Removal LEA25 Circuit Board Screw

Screw
1. Remove the front cover (see Subsection 7.1.2).
2. Remove the screws and then the PSW25 circuit

board by releasing the switch locking tabs.
3. Remove the screw and then the LEA25 circuit

board.
4. Remove the screw and then the LEB25 circuit

board.
Installation
Screws (2)
LEB25 Circuit Board
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of PSW25 Circuit board
removal. VR3-105
7-6
7.2 Light Source Section
7.2.1 LED Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Bottom Cover
1. Disconnect the DLE2 connector from the DLE25

circuit board (see Subsection 7.5.5).
2. Place the scanner with its right side (circuit board

side) down.
7
Screws (2)
VR3-133
4. Open the harness clamp. Clamp

LED1 Connector
5. Remove the screws and then the LED light source

assembly.
6. Hold the cord tie and disconnect the LED1

connector.
Reinstallation
Cord Tie

removal.
LED Light Source Assembly Screws (4)

NOTE: • Route the wire harnesses correctly
• After reinstallation, perform the following
adjustments.
(1) Menu 0349 “LED Light Amount Adjustment”
(2) Menu 0348 “Spectral Calibration” (see
Subsection 5.4.11).
7-7
7.2 Light Source Section
7.2.2 LED25 Circuit Board Assembly Replacement
Removal
Screws (3)
1. Remove the LED light source assembly
2. Remove the screws securing the transparent

cover to the circuit board.
VR3-585
3. Place the LED light source assembly upside side Circuit Board Base
down and remove the circuit board base, dust
cover, reflector and transparent cover in this order.
NOTE: If the transparent cover is removed first, the

circuit board may be damaged by the reflector. Dust Cover
Reflector
Installation

removal.
Transparent Cover
NOTE: After installation, perform the following adjustments.
(1) Menu 0349 “LED Light Amount Adjustment” VR3-136
(2) Menu 0348 “Spectral Calibration” (see
Subsection 5.4.11).
7-8
7.3 Carrier Base Section
7.3.1 Airflow Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screw
1. Remove the power supply unit

3. Remove the screw and then the airflow cover

while releasing the locking tabs.
Reinstallation
7
removal. Locking Tabs Airflow Cover
Clamp
VR3-120
7.3.2 Carrier Lock Sensor (D102) Replacement
Removal Sensor Bracket
1. Remove the circuit board section front cover

2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.
3. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket.
D102 Connector Screw

VR3-123
7-9
4. Remove the sensor from the bracket by releasing Carrier Lock Sensor (D102)
its locking tabs.
Installation

removal. Locking Tabs
VR3-124
Disassembly
1. Open the circuit board bracket

2. Remove the carrier lock sensor bracket

3. Remove the screws and then the carrier entrance

guide.
Entrance Guide
Screws (5)
VR3-226
4. Open the harness clamps. Harness Clamps (2)
VR3-227
7-10
5. Remove the screws and then the front frame. Front Frame
Screws (3) 7
VR3-125
6. Open the harness clamps on the front frame.
Harness Clamps (2)

VR3-228
7. Remove the screws and then the carrier lock Unit. Screws (3)
Carrier Lock Unit

VR3-127
7-11
8. Remove the screw, E-rings and then the carrier E-ring (2)
lock bracket.
Carrier Lock
Bracket
Screw
VR3-128
9. Remove the E-ring, slider shaft and lock slider Lock Slider Slider Shaft
from the unit.
E-ring
VR3-129
10. Release the hook of the spring. Screw
11. Place the shaft assembly as shown in the figure . Spring
12. Remove the screw and then the link arm.
Link Arm
VR3-130
7-12
Reassembly

disassembly.
NOTE: Install the spring as shown in the figure.
Spring
VR3-229
7
Removal Harness Clamps (3)
1. Disconnect the CTL8 connector from the CTL25

2. Remove the cooling fan (F101)

VR3-230
4. Disconnect the CYA1 connector. Plug-in Connector Assembly
5. Remove the screw and then the plug-in connector

CYA1 Connector
assembly.
Screw
VR3-131
7-13
6. Remove the screws and then the bracket from the

plug-in connector.
Installation

Screws (2)
removal.
Plug-in Connector Bracket
VR3-132
7.3.5 Carrier Guide Replacement
Removal Carrier Locating Bracket
Right-hand Carrier Guide:

1. Remove the circuit board section front cover
2. Remove the screws and then the right-hand

carrier guide.
Screws (2)
Right-hand Carrier Guide

VR3-151
Left-hand Carrier Guide: Carrier Locating

1. Remove the left side cover (see Subsection 7.1.1). Bracket
2. Remove the screws and then the left-hand carrier

guide.
Installation

removal. Screws (2)
NOTE: Insert the hook on the carrier guide into the carrier
locating bracket and tighten the right and left carrier
guide with the screws. Left-hand Carrier Guide
VR3-152
7-14
7.3.6 Lower Carrier Guide Replacement
Removal Lower Carrier Guide

Hex. Socket Head Bolts (2)
2. Remove the hex. socket head bolts securing the

lower carrier guide.
3. Pull the lower carrier guide toward the front to

release the hooks and remove it.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of 7

removal.
NOTE: Hook the lower carrier guide to the scanner base VR3-234
and then tighten the hex. socket head bolts.
7-15
7.4 Camera Unit
7.4.1 Camera Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Metal Clamp Screw

Harness Clamps (9)
1. Remove the upper frame (see Subsection 7.5.4).
3. Remove the screw and then the metal clamp.
VR3-142
4. Remove the screws and then the connector cover Connector Cover
Screws (2)
while opening the harness clamp.
Clamp
VR3-143
7-16
7.4 Camera Unit
5. Disconnect the LAN cable and harness CCD1 Connector

connectors from the camera unit. D201 Connector
LAN Cable
(CCD3)
CCD4
PS3 Connector
PZ202
7
Connector M201 PZ201 Connector
Connector Connector
VR3-144
6. Loosen the three screws and remove the camera Camera Unit
unit. Screws (3) (Loosen)
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: After reinstallation, perform the following

adjustments.
(1) Piezoelectric voltage adjustment
(2) Menu 0345 “Optical Axis Adjustment” VR3-145
(3) Menu 0345 “Optical Magnification Setting”
(4) Menu 0349 “LED Light Amount Adjustment”
(5) Menu 0351 “CCD Adjustment (Gray Pixel
Detection)” (see Subsection 5.4.14).
(6) Menu 0420 “Mask Position Adjustment”
7-17
7.4 Camera Unit
7.4.2 AF (Auto Focus) Motor Assembly (M201) Replacement
NOTE: Attempting to turn the AF motor by hand may result

in damage.
Removal
1. Remove the camera unit (see Subsection 7.4.1).
2. Remove the screws and then the lens cover from

the unit.
Lens Cover
Screws (4)
VR3-146
4. Remove the screws and then the AF motor

assembly.
Installation

removal.

adjustments.
(1) Menu 0345 “Optical Axis Adjustment”
Screws(2) AF Motor Assembly
(2) Menu 0345 “Optical Magnification Setting” (M201)
VR3-147
7-18
7.4 Camera Unit
7.4.3 Lens Home Position Sensor (D201) Replacement

in damage.
Removal Detecting Plate
1. Remove the AF motor (see Subsection 7.4.2).
2. Turn the lens home position detecting plate until it

is clear of the sensor as shown.
VR3-231
3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. D201 Connector
4. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor

from the bracket.
Installation
Locking Tabs
removal. Lens Home Position Sensor (D201)
VR3-149

adjustments.
7-19
7.4 Camera Unit
7.4.4 Shutter Assembly Replacement

in damage.
Removal Detecting Plate
1. Remove the AF motor (see Subsection 7.4.2).
2. Turn the lens home position detecting plate until it

is clear of the sensor as shown.
VR3-231
3. Remove the screws and then the shutter from the Screws (2)
lens.
Shutter
VR3-232
Installation Shutter Actuating Plate

removal.
NOTE: • Install the shutter as shown so its actuating pin

does not interfere with the shutter actuating plate
as shown.
adjustments.
Shutter Actuating Pin
VR3-233
7-20
7.5 Electrical Equipment
7.5.1 Circuit Board Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (2)
1. Remove the right side cover (see Subsection 7.1.1).
2. Remove the screws and then the circuit board

section front cover by shifting it toward the rear.
7
Circuit Board Section Front Cover
VR3-106
3. Remove the screws and then the circuit board Screws (2)
section rear cover by shifting it toward the front.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Note the lower hooks of the circuit board covers. Circuit Board Section Rear Cover
VR3-107
7-21
7.5.2 ADC25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal ADC3 Connector ADC2 Connector
1. Remove the circuit board section covers

2. Disconnect the connectors from the circuit board.
3. Remove the screws securing the circuit board.
LAN Cable Connector (ADC4) Screws (4)

VR3-108
4. Remove the ADC25 circuit board by

ADC25 Circuit Board
disconnecting it from the CTL25 circuit board
connector.
Installation

removal. Connector
VR3-109
7-22
7.5.3 CTL25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal CTL12 Connector Screws (9)
1. Remove the circuit board section covers (see

Subsection 7.5.1).
3. Disconnect all connectors from the circuit board.
4. Remove the screws securing the circuit board.
7
Clamp CTL1 to CTL9 Connectors
VR3-110
5. Remove the CTL25 circuit board by disconnecting ADC25 Circuit Board CTL11 Connector
it from the CTL11 connector on the ADC25 circuit
board.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Perform the following adjustment.

• Connect the CTL1, CTL5 and CTL11 connectors
securely.
• Tighten the screws of the USB connector.
adjustments. CTL25 Circuit Board
• Menu 0344 “Film Scanner ID Registration” VR3-111
7-23
7.5.4 PZR22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Upper Frame

Screws (9)
1. Remove:
• Right and left side covers (see Subsection 7.1.1).

• Circuit board section covers (see Subsection
7.5.1).
2. Remove the screws and then the upper frame.
VR3-112
3. Disconnect all connectors from the ADC25 circuit Clamps (3) Metal Clamp Screw
board (see Subsection 7.5.2).
4. Remove the screw securing the metal clamp for

the ADC3 harness.
VR3-216
6. Remove the screw securing the USB connector to PZR1 Connector

the circuit board.
7. Disconnect the PZR1 connector.
Screw
VR3-217
7-24
9. Disconnect the PZ201 and PZ202 connectors.
PZ201 Connector
PZ202 Connector
7
VR3-218
10. Disconnect all connectors from the CTL25 circuit

board (see Subsection 7.5.3).
11. Remove the screws securing the CTL25 circuit

board bracket.
Screws (7)
VR3-113
12. Open the circuit board bracket while pulling it Circuit Board Bracket
toward the front and lifting it slightly up. Locking Tabs
Safety Cover
13. Remove the screw and then remove the safety
cover while releasing its locking tabs.
Screw
VR3-114
7-25
14. Disconnect the connector from the circuit board. PZR3 Connector
PZR22 Circuit Board
15. Remove the screws and then the PZR22 circuit
board.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Perform the following adjustments.

• Be careful not to pinch the harness.
• After installation, perform the following adjustment.
(1) Piezoelectric voltage adjustment
PZR2 Connector Screws (4)
VR3-115
7.5.5 DLE25 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Screws (4)

DLE4 Connector DLE25 Circuit Board
1. Open the circuit board bracket
4. Remove the screws and then the DLE25 circuit

board.
Installation
DLE1 Connector
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Clamps (2) DLE2 Connector
removal. DLE3 Connector
VR3-116
7-26
7.5.6 Power Supply Unit Replacement
Removal
2. Disconnect the ADC 2 connector from the ADC25

3. Open the harness clamps and disconnect the

PS10 connector.
PS10 Connector Clamps (3) 7

VR3-219
4. Disconnect the CTL3, CTL7 and CTL9 connectors

from the CTL25 circuit board
5. Disconnect the PZR1 connector from the PZR22

6. Disconnect the DLE1 connector from the DLE25

7. Disconnect the CYA1 connector from the power

supply unit.
CYA1 Connector
VR3-117
8. Disconnect the PS3 connector from the camera

unit.
PS3 Connector
VR3-118
7-27

PSW1 connector from the PSW25 circuit board.
Clamps (5) PSW1 Connector

VR3-220
Clamps (4)
VR3-221
11. Loosen the screw securing the grounding wire to Grounding Wire
the power supply unit.
Screw (Loosen)
VR3-222
7-28
12. Remove the screws and then the power supply Power Supply Unit
unit while releasing its hooks.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the harness. Hooks (2) Screws (4)
VR3-119
7
7.5.7 Scanner Cooling Fan (F101) Replacement
Removal F101 Connector
2. Disconnect the F101 connector.
VR3-121
3. Remove the screws and then the cooling fan

assembly.
Cooling Fan
(F101) Assembly Screws (2)
VR3-586
7-29
4. Remove the screws securing the fan bracket to Screws (4)

the fan.
5. Open the clamp and remove the connector from Clamp

the bracket.
Washers (4)
Nuts (4)
Connector
VR3-587
6. Remove the fan guard and fan from the bracket.
Fan Guard
Bracket
Cooling Fan (F101)

VR3-224
Installation Arrow

removal.
NOTE: • Set the harness into the groove in the fan.

• Point the arrow on the fan to the outside as shown.
VR3-589
7-30
7.5.8 Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment
Perform this adjustment after replacing the camera

unit and/or PZR22 circuit board.
1. Remove the top cover (see Subsection 7.1.1).
2. Turn ON the built-in circuit breaker and press the

START switch to start up the system.

Adjustment/Maintenance] → [0341 I/O Check]
buttons.
4. Connect the DC voltmeter between the “TP4 0341

7
Xout” and the “TP3 out” test pins on the PZR22
circuit board.
5. Click the [ON] button for “Piezoelectric Actuator 1

PZ201”.
• Piezoelectric Actuator 1 will remain ON for 30

TP3 TP4
PZR22 Circuit
seconds. VR1 (Xout)
Board
6. Turn the VR1 (X-ADJ) on the PZR22 circuit board

so that the voltage is as indicated (1) on the label
attached on to the camera unit as shown.
7. Connect the DC voltmeter between the “TP5

Yout” and the “TP3 out” test pins on the PZR22
circuit board.
8. Click the [ON] button for “Piezoelectric Actuator 2

PZ202”.
Label
• Piezoelectric Actuator 2 will remain ON for 30 R3-428
seconds.
9. Turn the VR2 (Y-ADJ) on the PZR22 circuit board VR2 (Yout)
so that the voltage is as indicated (2) on the label
attached on to the camera unit as shown. TP3
10. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker.
11. Reinstall the top cover.

TP5
Label
VR3-589
7-31
7.5.9 Wire Harness Routing
Camera Unit
ADC25 Circuit Board
Circuit Board Bracket

DLE25 Circuit Board
PZR25 Circuit Board
CTL25 Circuit Board

R3-013
7-32
8. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION
Parts Location......................................................................................... 8-2

8.1 Paper Magazine....................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.1 Paper Supply Assembly Replacement .................................................................. 8-3
8.1.2 Magazine Roller Release Arm Replacement ......................................................... 8-4
8.1.3 Drive Pulley Replacement....................................................................................... 8-4
8.2 Upper Paper Magazine Table................................................................. 8-5
8.2.1 Upper Magazine Setting Lever Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 8-5
8.2.2 Upper Magazine Setting Lever Removal/Reinstallation....................................... 8-5
8.2.3 Upper Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 8-6
8.2.4 Magazine Moving Cam Roller Replacement ......................................................... 8-6
8.2.5 Upper Slide Table/Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ............................................. 8-7
8.2.6 Upper Magazine Table Slide Lock Assembly Replacement ................................ 8-7
8.3 Lower Paper Magazine Table (Optional)............................................... 8-8
8.3.1 Lower Magazine Setting Lever Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 8-8
8.3.2 Lower Magazine Setting Lever Removal/Reinstallation ...................................... 8-8 8
8.3.3 Lower Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation............................................ 8-9
8.3.4 Magazine Table Lift Cam Roller Replacement .................................................... 8-11
8.3.5 Soft Down Damper Replacement ......................................................................... 8-12
8.4 Magazine Drive Unit/Interlock Switch ................................................. 8-13
8.4.1 Left Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation.............................................................. 8-13
8.4.2 Left Side Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation .................................................. 8-13
8.4.3 Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation........................................................... 8-14
8.4.4 Upper Magazine Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation .......................................... 8-14
8.4.5 Lower Magazine Drive Unit (Optional) Removal/Reinstallation ........................ 8-15
8.4.6 Upper/Lower Magazine Paper Supply Motor (M610/M620) Replacement......... 8-16
8.4.7 Drive Belt Replacement ........................................................................................ 8-17
8.4.8 Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor (D680A/D680B) Replacement................... 8-18
8-1
Parts Location
Upper Magazine Drive Unit

Paper Magazine
Upper Magazine Paper

Supply Motor (M610)
Upper Magazine Table
Lower Magazine Paper Supply Motor (M620)
Lower Magazine Drive Unit
Lower Magazine Table
RD3-019
8-2
8.1 Paper Magazine
8.1.1 Paper Supply Assembly Replacement
Removal Paper Magazine
1. Release the latches and open the paper

magazine.
Latches 8
VR3-156
2. Remove the screws and then the paper supply Paper Supply Assembly
assembly.
Screws (7)
VR3-157
3. Remove the screws and then the latches.
Installation

Screws (4) Latches (2)
removal.
VR3-158
8-3
8.1 Paper Magazine
8.1.2 Magazine Roller Release Arm Replacement
Removal E-ring
1. Remove the paper supply assembly

2. Remove the E-ring, spring and release arm.
Installation

removal. Spring Magazine Roller Release Arm
VR3-159
8.1.3 Drive Pulley Replacement
Removal Drive Shaft Pin Drive Pulley
1. Remove the E-ring then the pulley and drive shaft

pin.
NOTE: Be careful not to lose the drive shaft pin.
Installation

E-ring
removal.
VR3-160
8-4
8.2 Upper Paper Magazine Table
8.2.1 Upper Magazine Setting Lever Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Open the magazine door.
2. Turn the setting lever to the left.
3. Remove the screws and then the setting lever

cover.
Reinstallation
Setting Lever Cover
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Screws (3)
removal. VR3-161
8.2.2 Upper Magazine Setting Lever Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Setting Lever
1. Remove the upper magazine setting lever cover

2. Remove the E-ring and then the setting lever.
Reinstallation

removal. E-ring
VR3-162
8-5
8.2.3 Upper Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Notch
Upper Magazine Table
2. Withdraw the upper magazine table.
3. Scribe alignment mark along the notch in the right

side bracket.
4. Align the holes by sliding the magazine table and

remove the screws.
Screws (6)
R3-016
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: • Align the notch in the right side bracket with the
scribed alignment mark.
• Tighten the screws securing the left-hand bracket
while pressing the bracket against the cutter unit.
• If the magazine table sliders do not run smoothly
after reinstallation, loosen the screws securing the
processor side bracket and retighten them after
sliding the table in and out several times.
VR3-163
8.2.4 Magazine Moving Cam Roller Replacement
Removal Bearings (2) E-rings (2)
2. Remove the E-rings, bearings and magazine

moving cam roller.
Installation

removal.
Magazine Moving Cam Roller

VR3-164
8-6
8.2.5 Upper Slide Table/Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Slide Table

Screws (4)
2. Remove the screws, slide table, brackets and

magazine guides.
Reinstallation

removal. Magazine Guides (2)
Brackets (2)
VR3-165
8
8.2.6 Upper Magazine Table Slide Lock Assembly Replacement
Removal Screws (4)
2. Remove the screws and then the slide lock

assembly.
Slide Lock Assembly

VR3-166
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Install the slide lock assembly so that clearance

between the table and the slide lock assembly is
1cm.
1cm
VR3-334
8-7
8.3 Lower Paper Magazine Table (Optional)
8.3.1 Lower Magazine Setting Lever Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
2. Turn the setting lever to the left.
3. Remove the screws and then the setting lever

cover.
Reinstallation Screws (3)

removal. Setting Lever Cover
VR3-167
8.3.2 Lower Magazine Setting Lever Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Stopper Setting Lever
1. Remove the lower magazine setting lever cover

2. Remove the screws and then the stopper.
3. Remove the E-ring and then the setting lever.
Reinstallation
E-ring
removal. Screws (2)
VR3-168
NOTE: Reinstall the setting lever so it is parallel to the

magazine table when it is turned fully to the right.
8-8
8.3.3 Lower Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (15)
1. Remove the left side lower cover(see Subsection

8.4.2).
2. Scribe alignment mark along the notch in the right

side bracket.
3. Withdraw the lower magazine table.
4. Align the holes by sliding the magazine table and

remove the screws.
Lower Magazine Table Unit

R3-225
Reinstallation
8
removal.
NOTE: Align the notch in the right side bracket with the
scribed alignment mark.
• Align the holes in the left-hand bracket with the
locating half-punches on the frame and tighten the
screws while pressing the unit against the rear.
• If the magazine table sliders do not run smoothly
after reinstallation, loosen the screws securing the
processor side bracket and retighten them after
sliding the table in and out several times.
• When the lower magazine table unit should be
replaced, perform the following adjustment.
1) Measure the shim thickness in the four places

and attach the same thickness shims in the
same places on a new magazine table to be
installed.
Shims (4 places)
VR3-170
8-9
2) Mount the magazine and push in the magazine

table.
3) Make sure the distance from the magazine
shoulder to the bottom of the frame is 5.9cm as
shown.
5.9cm
R3-310
• 4) If necessary, adjust the distance by increasing

Shim (Same thickness)
or decreasing the thickness of shims.
Attach the same thickness of the shims to the
front two places.
Attach the same thickness of the shims to the
rear two places.
Shim Thicknesses:1.0mm, 1.5mm, 2.0mm,
2.5mm and 3.0mm
5) Lift the magazine table and make sure there is
no play between the magazine and the bottom
of the frame.
Shim (Same thickness)

R3-311
8-10
8.3.4 Magazine Table Lift Cam Roller Replacement
Removal Magazine Lift Table
1. Remove the lower magazine setting lever cover

2. Remove the screws then the lift guides and

magazine lift table.
Screws (8)
Lift Guides (4) 8
VR3-171
3. Remove the E-ring, then the shaft, bearings and E-ring

Shaft Bearings (2)
roller.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installing the lift guides, check the magazine

table for smooth movement by moving it up and
down several times. If necessary, adjust by following
the steps below.
1) Loosen the screws securing the lift guides.
2) Move the magazine table up and down several
times.
Lift Roller
3) Retighten the screws.
VR3-172
8-11
8.3.5 Soft Down Damper Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the lower magazine table unit

2. Remove the screws and then the damper bracket.
Screws (2)
Damper Bracket
VR3-173
3. Remove the screws and then the damper from the

bracket.
Installation
Screws (2)

removal.
NOTE: Follow the steps below to install the damper.

1) Temporarily install the damper to the bracket Damper
using the screws.
2) Install the bracket with the screws.
VR3-174
3) Tighten the damper screws securely.
8-12
8.4 Magazine Drive Unit/Interlock Switch
8.4.1 Left Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Magazine Door
1. Shut down the system by performing the post-

operational checks and turn OFF the built-in
circuit breaker and main power supply.
R3-229
8
3. Pull the lock release lever and remove the left side
cover. Lock Release Lever
Reinstallation

removal.
Left Side Cover
R3-230
8.4.2 Left Side Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (4)
2. Remove the screws and then the left side lower

cover.
Reinstallation

Left Side Lower Cover
removal.
R3-222
8-13
8.4.3 Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Tab Screws (2) (Loose)

3. Remove the screws and then the connector cover.
Reinstallation

removal. Screw Connector Cover
R3-014
NOTE: Insert the tab of the connector cover into the back
printing unit and tighten the cover screws as shown.
8.4.4 Upper Magazine Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Clamps (2)

M610 Connector
1. Remove the connector cover (see Subsection 8.4.3). Upper Magazine Drive
Unit
3. Disconnect the M610 connector.
4. Remove the screw securing the magazine drive

unit to the cutter unit.
Screw
5. Loosen the screws and remove the upper

magazine drive unit.
Screws (4) (Loose)

Reinstallation R3-015

removal.
8-14
8.4.5 Lower Magazine Drive Unit (Optional) Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screw Connector Cover
1. Remove the left side lower cover (see Subsection

8.4.2).
2. Remove the screw and then the connector cover.
3. Disconnect the M620 Connector.
8
M620 Connector
R3-223
4. Loosen the screws and remove the lower Lower Magazine Drive Unit
magazine drive unit.
Reinstallation

removal.
Screws (4) (Loose)
R3-224
8-15
8.4.6 Upper/Lower Magazine Paper Supply Motor (M610/M620) Replacement
Removal Screws (2)
1. Remove the upper/lower magazine drive unit

(see Subsection 8.4.4/8.4.5).
2. Remove the screws and then the motor cover.
Motor Cover
VR3-175
3. Remove the spring to loosen the magazine drive

belt tension.
Spring
Belt Tensioner
VR3-176
4. Open the harness clamp and disconnect the Clamp Connector

connector.
VR3-177
8-16
5. Remove the screws and then the motor. Paper Supply Motor
Screws (4)
(M610/M620)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installation, turn the belt by hand and make

sure it runs smoothly. VR3-178
8
8.4.7 Drive Belt Replacement
Removal Drive Belt Spring
1. Remove the upper/lower magazine drive unit

(see Subsection 8.4.4/8.4.5).
2. Remove the spring and then the drive belt.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installation, turn the belt by hand and make VR3-179
sure it runs smoothly.
8-17
8.4.8 Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor (D680A/D680B) Replacement
Removal Sensor Cover

3. Remove the screws and then the sensor cover.
Screws (4)
VR3-180
4. Disconnect the connectors from the sensors. Sensor Connectors

Screws (2)
5. Remove the screws and then the sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
VR3-181
6. Remove the spring, E-ring and then the sensor. Spring

Sensors (2)
Installation

removal. E-rings
VR3-182
8-18
9. PAPER FEED SECTION
Parts Location......................................................................................... 9-2

9.1 Cutter/Feed Unit...................................................................................... 9-6
9.1.1 Cutter Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation .............................................................. 9-6
9.1.2 Upper Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .................................................... 9-7
9.1.3 Lower Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .................................................... 9-7
9.1.4 Upper/Lower Magazine Paper End Sensor (D616/D626) Replacement .............. 9-8
9.1.5 Upper Magazine ID Sensor 1 to 4 (D610 to D613)/
Lower Magazine ID Sensor 1 to 4 (D620 to D623) Replacement ....................... 9-8
9.1.7 Drive Gear Replacement ....................................................................................... 9-10
9.1.8 Upper Cutter Unit Replacement ........................................................................... 9-10
9.1.9 Lower Cutter Unit (Optional) Replacement ......................................................... 9-11
9.1.10 Upper Magazine Splice Sensor (D619P)/LED (D619L) Replacement ................ 9-12
9.1.11 Lower Magazine Splice Sensor (D629P)/LED (D629L) Replacement................ 9-13
9.1.12 Magazine Exit Paper Sensor (D632P)/LED (D632L) Replacement .................... 9-13
9.1.14 Emulsion Side Open/Close Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ..................... 9-15
9.1.15 Back Surface Side Exit Guide Plate Replacement ............................................. 9-16
9.1.16 Common Guide Plate Replacement..................................................................... 9-17 9
9.1.18 Upper Magazine Exit Open/Close Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ........... 9-18
9.1.19 Upper Magazine Exit Nip Roller Replacement .................................................... 9-18
9.2 Back Printer/Registration Unit............................................................. 9-20
9.2.1 Back Printer/Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation..................................... 9-20
9.2.2 Nip Release Solenoid1 (S631) Replacement....................................................... 9-21
9.2.3 Nip Release Solenoid 2 (S632) Replacement...................................................... 9-22
9.2.4 Nip Release Solenoid 3 (S640) Replacement...................................................... 9-23
9.2.5 Back Printer Section Nip Roller Replacement .................................................... 9-24
9.2.6 Nip Roller 1 Replacement ..................................................................................... 9-25
9.2.9 Registration Tilt Motor (M641) Replacement ...................................................... 9-27
9.2.12 Tilt Home Position Sensor (D641) Replacement ................................................ 9-31
9.2.13 Tilt Unit Removal/Reinstallation........................................................................... 9-31
9.2.14 Registration Section Feed Roller 1 Replacement............................................... 9-33
9.2.17 Platen Replacement .............................................................................................. 9-37
9.2.18 Back Printer Drive Gear Replacement................................................................. 9-38
9.2.19 Back Printer Head Replacement .......................................................................... 9-38
9.2.20 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation........................................................... 9-40
9.2.21 Back Printer Unit Drive Gear Replacement......................................................... 9-41
9.2.22 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment........................................................... 9-42
9.2.23 Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement ................................................. 9-43
9-1
Parts Location
● Cutter/Feed Unit
Rear
Front
PD3-010
9-2
Parts Location
Sectional View
Rear
Upper Magazine Splice Sensor LED (D619L)
Upper Cutter Unit
Magazine Exit Paper 9

Sensor (D632P)
Lower Cutter Unit
Lower Magazine Splice Sensor (D629P) Front

PD3-011
Upper Magazine ID Sensor 1 to 4 (D610 to D613)
Upper Magazine Paper End Sensor (D616)
Front
Rear
Upper Cutter Unit
Lower Magazine ID Sensor 1 to 4 (D620 to D623) Feed Motor 1 (M630)
Lower Magazine Paper End Sensor (D626)

PD3-012
9-3
Parts Location
● Back Printing/Registration Unit
Registration Tilt Motor (M641)
Feed Motor 3 (M632) Back Printer Unit

Back Printer Head (S630)
PD3-013
Tilt Unit
Tilt Home Position Sensor (D641)
Platen
Feed Motor 2 (M631)

PD3-014
9-4
Parts Location
Sectional View
Nip Release Solenoid 2 (S632) Nip Release Solenoid 3 (S640)
Tilt Unit
Feed Motor 3 (M632)
Nip Release Solenoid 1 (S631)
PD3-015
9-5
9.1 Cutter/Feed Unit
9.1.1 Cutter Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal JKA5 Connector JOP7 Connector
1. Remove the back printing/registration unit

JOP4 Connector JKA34 Connector

R3-017
3. Remove the screws from the magazine Screws (3)

compartment side.
R3-018
4. Remove the screws and then the cutter/feed unit.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the wire harnesses.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: If the unit has been replaced, perform the following

adjustments.
Cutter/Feed Unit
1) Menu 0553 “Drawing Position Sensor
Adjustment” (see Subsection 5.10.21). Screws (4)
2) Menu 0554 “Image Position Initialization” R3-019
3) Menu 0520 “Magazine Feed Length Adjustment”
9-6
9.1.2 Upper Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Clamp
1. Remove the cutter/feed unit (see Subsection 9.1.1).
Reinstallation

Screws (2)
removal. Upper Sensor Bracket
VR3-185
9
9.1.3 Lower Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Clamp
Reinstallation

Screws (2)
removal. Lower Sensor Bracket
VR3-186
9-7
9.1.4 Upper/Lower Magazine Paper End Sensor (D616/D626) Replacement
Removal Paper End Sensor (D616/D626)
1. Remove the upper or lower sensor bracket (see

Subsection 9.1.2 or 3).

from the bracket.
Installation

removal.
Locking Tabs
D616/D626 Connector
VR3-187
9.1.5 Upper Magazine ID Sensor 1 to 4 (D610 to D613)/Lower

Magazine ID Sensor 1 to 4 (D620 to D623) Replacement
Removal

from the bracket.
Installation
D610/D620 D612/D622
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of D611/D621 D613/D623
removal. VR3-188
9-8
9.1.6 Feed Motor 1 (M630) Replacement
Removal Screws (3)
3. Remove the screws and then the motor bracket.
M630 Connector Motor Bracket

VR3-189
4. Remove the screws and then feed motor 1 from

9
Feed Motor 1 (M630)
the bracket.
Installation

removal. Screws (2)
VR3-190
9-9
9.1.7 Drive Gear Replacement
Removal E-ring Idler Gear
1. Remove the feed motor 1 (M630) bracket

3. Release the locking tabs and then the drive gears.
Installation

removal. Locking Tabs Drive Gears (3)
VR3-191
9.1.8 Upper Cutter Unit Replacement
CAUTION
Take care not to be injured by the cutter blade when
handling the cutter unit.
Removal JM600 Connector
3. Disconnect the JD619 and JM600 connectors.
Clamps (3)
JD619 Connector
VR3-235
9-10
4. Remove the screws and then the upper cutter Screws (5)
unit.
CAUTION
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After replacing the cutter unit, perform the following

adjustments.
Adjustment” (see Subsection 5.10.21). Upper Cutter Unit
2) Menu 0554 “Image Position Initialization” (see VR3-236
Subsection 5.10.22).
9.1.9 Lower Cutter Unit (Optional) Replacement 9
CAUTION
Removal JM601 Connector
3. Disconnect the JOP7 and JM601 connectors.
JOP7 Connector Clamps (4)

VR3-237
9-11
4. Remove the screws and then the lower cutter unit. Screws (5)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After replacing the cutter unit, perform the following

adjustments.
Adjustment” (see Subsection 5.10.21).
2) Menu 0554 “Image Position Initialization” (see
Subsection 5.10.22).
Lower Cutter Unit
VR3-238
9.1.10 Upper Magazine Splice Sensor (D619P)/LED (D619L) Replacement
Removal Screw D619L Connector
1. Remove the upper cutter unit (see Subsection

9.1.8).
2. Disconnect the D619L connector from the sensor

LED.
3. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED and

cover.
Upper Magazine Splice

Sensor LED (D619L) Cover
VR3-239
4. Open the harness clamp. Screw D619P Connector
5. Remove the screw and then the sensor.
6. Disconnect the D619P connector from the sensor.
Installation

removal. Clamp
Upper Magazine Splice Sensor (D619P)

VR3-240
9-12
9.1.11 Lower Magazine Splice Sensor (D629P)/LED (D629L) Replacement
Removal Screw D619L Connector
1. Remove the lower cutter unit (see Subsection 9.1.9).
2. Disconnect the D629L connector from the sensor

LED.
3. Remove the screw, then the sensor LED and

cover.
Upper Magazine Splice

Sensor LED (D619L) Cover
VR3-239
4. Open the harness clamp. Screw D619P Connector

9
6. Disconnect the D629P connector from the sensor.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Clamp

removal.
Upper Magazine Splice Sensor (D619P)
VR3-240
9.1.12 Magazine Exit Paper Sensor (D632P)/LED (D632L) Replacement
Removal Screw
Clamp
Sensor Bracket
VR3-241
9-13
4. Disconnect the D632P connector from the sensor. D632P Connector

Screw
5. Remove the screw and then the sensor from the

bracket.
Magazine Exit Paper Sensor (D632P)

VR3-242
6. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED Sensor LED Bracket
bracket.
Screw
VR3-243
7. Disconnect the D632L connector from the sensor Screw

D632L Connector
LED.
8. Remove the screw, then the sensor LED and

Cover
cover from the bracket.
Installation

Magazine Exit Paper Sensor LED (D632L)
removal.
VR3-244
9-14
9.1.13 Nip Roller Replacement
Removal
2. Remove the springs and then the nip roller.
Springs (2)
Nip Roller
VR3-245
3. Remove the E-rings and then the bearings from

the nip roller. Nip Roller 9
E-rings (2)
Installation

Bearings (2)
removal.
VR3-246
9.1.14 Emulsion Side Open/Close Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Disconnect the D632P connector from the

sensor. (see Subsection 9.1.12).
2. Open the harness clamps and remove the sensor

harness.
Harness Clamps (3)

VR3-247
9-15
3. Remove the screws and then the guide plate. Emulsion Side Open/Close
Guide Plate
Installation

Screws (2)
removal.
VR3-248
9.1.15 Back Surface Side Exit Guide Plate Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the D632L sensor LED bracket

2. Remove the coil springs.
Springs (2)
VR3-254
3. Remove the screws and then the guide plate. Screws (4)
Installation

removal.
Back Surface Side Exit
Guide Plate
VR3-250
9-16
9.1.16 Common Guide Plate Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the drive gears (see Subsection 9.1.7).
2. Remove the emulsion side open/close guide

plate (see Subsection 9.1.14).
3. Remove the screws and then the guide plate.
Installation

removal. Common Guide Plate Screws (2)
VR3-251
9.1.17 Feed Roller Replacement

9
Removal
1. Remove:
• Drive gears (see Subsection 9.1.7).

• Back surface side exit guide plate
2. Remove the E-rings and bearings.
Bearings (6) E-rings (6)

VR3-252
3. Remove the feed rollers.
Installation

removal.
Feed Rollers (3)

VR3-253
9-17
9.1.18 Upper Magazine Exit Open/Close Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the upper cutter unit (see Subsection

9.1.8).
Springs (2)
VR3-254
3. Remove the screws and then the guide plate. Screws (2)
Reinstallation

Upper Magazine Exit
removal. Open/Close Guide Plate
VR3-255
9.1.19 Upper Magazine Exit Nip Roller Replacement
Removal Nip Roller Bracket

Shaft
1. Remove the upper magazine exit open/close
Springs (2)
guide plate (see Subsection 9.1.18).
2. Remove the coil springs. E-ring
3. Remove the E-ring, shaft and then the nip roller

bracket.
VR3-256
9-18
4. Remove the E-rings, then the bearings and nip Nip Roller
roller.
Bearings (2)
Installation

E-rings (2)
removal.
VR3-257
9-19
9.2 Back Printer/Registration Unit
9.2.1 Back Printer/Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
NOTE: Perform this operation with the cutter/feed unit is

installed on the LP-5000.
2. Remove the connector cover (see Subsection 8.4.3).
3. Open the harness clamp. JRE7 JRE8
4. Disconnect the JRE2, JRE7, JRE8 and JRE36

connectors.
Clamp JRE2 JRE36

R3-021
5. Remove the screws securing the unit.
Screws (4)
R3-022
9-20
6. Pull out the unit approximately 5cm. Reinforcing Brackets (2)
7. Grasp the reinforcing brackets and remove the Back Printer/Registration

Unit
unit.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: If the unit has been replaced, perform the following

adjustments.
1) Back printer head adjustment (see Subsection
9.2.22).
2) Menu 0554 “Image Position Initialization (see
Subsection 5.10.22). R3-023
3) Menu 0520 “Magazine Feed Length Adjustment”
9
9.2.2 Nip Release Solenoid 1 (S631) Replacement
Removal Clamps (4) S631 Connector
3. Open the harness clamp and disconnect the S631

connector.
Screw Connector Cover

VR3-258
9-21
4. Open the harness clamp. Screws (2)

Clamp
5. Remove the screws and then the solenoid.
Installation

removal.
VR3-259
Removal Clamp
1. Remove the nip release solenoid 3


connector.
S632 Connector
VR3-260
9-22
VR3-261
4. Remove the screws and then the solenoid. Nip Release Solenoid 2 (S632)
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Screws (2)

removal. VR3-262
Removal S640 Connector

Clamp

connector.
VR3-263
9-23
3. Open the harness clamps. Screws (2) Nip Release Solenoid 3 (S640)
Installation

removal. Clamps (2)
VR3-264
9.2.5 Back Printer Section Nip Roller Replacement
Removal E-rings (2) Nip Roller
2. Remove the springs and then the nip roller

assembly.
3. Remove the E-rings and then the bearings from

the nip roller.
Installation
Springs (2) Bearings (2)
VR3-265
removal.
9-24
9.2.6 Nip Roller 1 Replacement
Removal Coil Springs (2)
4. Remove the nip roller assembly and bearings.
Nip Roller Assembly

E-ring
Shaft/Bearings (2)
VR3-266
9
5. Remove the E-rings, bearings and then the nip Nip Roller
roller.
E-rings (2)
Bearings (2)
Installation

removal.
VR3-267
9-25
Removal Coil Springs (2) Nip Roller Assembly

E-ring Shaft/Bearings (2)

VR3-268
roller.
E-rings (2)
Bearings (2)
Installation

removal.
VR3-267
9-26
Removal Coil Springs (2)

Nip Roller Assembly
E-ring Shaft/Bearings (2)

VR3-269
9
roller.
E-rings (2)
Bearings (2)
Installation

removal.
VR3-267
9.2.9 Registration Tilt Motor (M641) Replacement
Removal Screw

2. Remove the screw then the motor cover.
Motor Cover
VR3-602
9-27

M641 Connector
VR3-270
4. Remove the screws and then the motor. Screws (2)
Installation

removal. Registration Tilt Motor (M641)
VR3-271
Removal
Shaft

2. Remove the Screw, shaft and then the knob.
Knob
Screw
VR3-272
9-28
3. Open the harness clamp and disconnect the

M631 connector from the motor.
Clamp M631 Connector

VR3-273
4. Remove the screws and then the motor bracket. Motor Bracket Screws (3)
VR3-274
5. Remove the screws and then the motor from the Feed Motor 2 (M631)
bracket.
Screws (2)
Installation

removal.
VR3-275
9-29
Removal M632 connector


M632 connector from the motor.
Clamp
VR3-276
3. Remove the screws and then the motor bracket. Motor Bracket
Screws (3)
VR3-277
4. Remove the screws and then the motor from the

bracket. Screws (2)
Installation

removal. Feed Motoer 3 (M632)
VR3-278
9-30
9.2.12 Tilt Home Position Sensor (D641) Replacement
Removal D641 Connector

Clamp

D641 connector from the sensor.
Sensor Bracket Screw

VR3-279
4. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor Locking Tabs 9
from the bracket.
Installation

removal. Tilt Home Position Sensor (D641)
VR3-280
9.2.13 Tilt Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screw Front Tilt Guide

2. Remove the E-ring and then idler gear.
3. Remove the screw and then the front tilt guide.
E-ring Idler Gear

VR3-297
9-31
4. Remove the screw and then the rear tilt guide. Rear Tilt Guide Screw
5. Remove the E-ring and then the tilt cam.
E-ring
Tilt Cam
VR3-298
6. Remove the E-ring and then the tilt roller. Tilt Guide
Screw
7. Remove the screw and then the tilt guide.
E-ring
Tilt Roller
VR3-299
8. Remove the E-ring from the fulcrum shaft.

Spring
E-ring
9. Remove the coil spring.
VR3-300
9-32
10. Remove the tilt unit. Tilt Unit
Installation

removal.
VR3-301
9.2.14 Registration Section Feed Roller 1 Replacement
Removal
Locking Tab
Bearing 9
1. Remove the feed motor 3 (M632) bracket E-ring
2. Release the locking tab and remove the gear.
3. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing.
Gear
VR3-303

E-ring
Bearing Idler Gear

E-ring
VR3-304
9-33
6. Remove feed roller 1.
Installation

Feed Roller 1
removal.
VR3-305
Removal E-rings (2) Bearings (2)
1. Remove the tilt unit (see Subsection 9.2.13).
2. Remove the E-ring, bearing and then feed roller 2.
Installation

removal. Feed Roller 2
VR3-302
9-34
Removal

Springs (2)
VR3-335
3. Open the harness clamp and disconnect the S640 S640 Connector
connector.
Clamp 9
VR3-263
4. Remove the screws and then the open/close Screws (2)

guide plate.
Open/Close Guide plate

VR3-336
9-35
5. Remove the screws and then the back surface Back Surface Side
side exit guide plate. Screws (4) Exit Guide Plate
VR3-337
6. Release the locking tab and remove the gear. Bearing
E-ring
Locking Tab Gear
VR3-306
8. Remove the E-ring and bearing from feed roller 3.
Bearing E-ring
VR3-307
9-36
9. Remove feed roller 3.
Installation

removal. Feed Roller 3
VR3-308
9.2.17 Platen Replacement
9
Removal Screws (2)
2. Remove the screws and then the platen bracket.
Platen Bracket
VR3-281
3. Remove the screws and then the platen housing Platen

Screws (2)
from the bracket.
Spring
4. Remove the E-ring and then the platen and

spring.
E-ring
Installation

removal. Platen Housing
NOTE: After installation, adjust back printer head clearance VR3-282

9-37
9.2.18 Back Printer Drive Gear Replacement
Removal Gear Shaft Assembly Bearing

2. Release the locking tab and then remove the

gear.
4. Remove the gear shaft assembly.
Locking Tab
Gear
E-ring
VR3-295
5. Remove the E-ring and then the gear and drive

pin.
Drive Pin
Gear
E-ring
Installation

removal.
VR3-296
9.2.19 Back Printer Head Replacement
Removal Screw
1. Remove the upper magazine.
2. Loosen the screw, move the back printer unit

toward the right side and retighten the screw.
3. Release the lock and remove the ink ribbon

cassette.
Connector Cover
VR3-283
9-38
5. Remove the screws and then the back printer Back Printer Head
head bracket.
Screws (3)
VR3-285
6. Disconnect the S630 connector from the back S630 Connector

printer head.
9
VR3-284
7. Remove the screws and then the back printer Screws

head from the bracket. Back Printer Head
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installation, adjust back printer head clearance

9-39
9.2.20 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove:
• Back surface side exit guide plate

• Tilt unit (see Subsection 9.2.13).
2. Remove the screw and move the back printer to

the right side.
3. Release the lock and remove the ink ribbon

cassette.
Clamps (2)
VR3-287
5. Remove the screw and then the washer and Washer Screw
spring.
Spring
VR3-290
6. Remove the back printer unit.
Reinstallation

removal. Back Printer Unit
VR3-291
9-40
9.2.21 Back Printer Unit Drive Gear Replacement
Removal E-ring
Bearing
2. Remove the E-ring, bearing, screws and then the

gear bracket.
Gear Bracket Screws (2)
VR3-292
3. Remove the E-ring and then the gear from the

bracket.
E-ring 9
Gear
VR3-293
4. Remove the E-ring and then the gear. E-ring Gear
Installation

removal.
VR3-294
9-41
9.2.22 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment
2. Loosen the screws securing the platen bracket.
Screws (2)
R3-313
3. Open the guide plate and insert the feeler gauge Feeler Gauge
between the platen and the printer head.
Feeler Gauge P/N: 332D889498
R3-357
4. While pushing the platen pad against the feeler Platen Pad
gauge, tighten the screws.
5. Remove the feeler gauge.
6. Reinstall the left side cover.
Screws (2)
R3-314
9-42
9.2.23 Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement
Removal E-rings (2)
1. Remove feed motor 2 (M631)

2. Release the locking tabs and remove the gears.
3. Remove the E-rings and then the bearings.
Bearings (2)
Locking Tabs (2)
Gears (2)
VR3-288
9
Feed Rollers (2)
5. Remove the Feed rollers.
Installation

removal.
E-rings (2)
Bearings (2)
VR3-289
9-43
10. EXPOSURE SECTION
Parts Location....................................................................................... 10-2

10.1 LDD Circuit Board/AOM Driver Section.............................................. 10-4
10.1.1 Printer Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation.......................................................... 10-4
10.1.2 Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................... 10-5
10.1.3 LDD Circuit Board Exhaust Fan (FAN) Replacement......................................... 10-6
10.1.4 Control Section Exhaust Fan 4 (F604) Replacement ......................................... 10-6
10.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement ..................................................................................... 10-7
10.1.6 LDD27 Circuit Board Replacement ...................................................................... 10-8
10.1.7 Operation Panel/Keyboard Circuit Board (KEY27) Replacement ..................... 10-9
10.1.8 Calibrator Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................................... 10-10
10.1.9 Calibrator Width Guide Replacement ................................................................ 10-11
10.2 Laser Optical Unit ............................................................................... 10-13
10.2.1 Laser Optical Unit Air Filter Replacement......................................................... 10-13
10.2.2 Anti-dust Fan (F670) Replacement .................................................................... 10-13
10.2.3 Laser Optical Unit Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................... 10-14
10.2.4 Shutter Solenoid (S673) Replacement............................................................... 10-17
10.2.5 Shutter Open/Close Sensor (D674) Replacement ............................................ 10-17
10.2.6 Exposure Point Temperature Sensor (THA20) Replacement .......................... 10-18
10.3 Sub-scanning Unit .............................................................................. 10-19
10.3.1 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................... 10-19 10
10.3.2 Frame Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................... 10-20
10.3.3 Large Rubber Belt Replacement ........................................................................ 10-20
10.3.4 Sub-scanning Feed Motor (M650) Replacement............................................... 10-22
10.3.5 Timing Belt Replacement.................................................................................... 10-23
10.3.6 Soft Nip Motor (M651) Replacement .................................................................. 10-24
10.3.7 Small Rubber Belt Replacement ........................................................................ 10-24
10.3.8 Soft Nip Home Position Sensor (D651) Replacement ...................................... 10-26
10.3.9 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor (D650P)/
Exposure Section Paper Sensor (D653P) Replacement ................................ 10-28
10.3.10 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor LED (D650L)/
Exposure Section Paper Sensor LED (D653L) Replacement ........................ 10-28
10.3.11 Soft Nip Pre-turning Belt Replacement ............................................................. 10-30
10-1
Parts Location
<Sub-scanning Unit>
PD3-020
Front
Rear
Sub-scanning Feed Motor (M650)
Large Rubber Belt

PD3-021
10-2
Parts Location
Sectional View
Exposure Section Paper Sensor (D653)

Rear
Large Rubber Belt
Sub-scanning Feed
Motor (M650) Front
Exposure Section Entrance

Paper Sensor (D650)
Timing Belt
Soft Nip Motor (M651)

10
PD3-022
10-3
10.1 LDD Circuit Board/AOM Driver Section
10.1.1 Printer Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (5)

2. Remove the screws securing the printer top cover.
Printer Top Cover

R3-278
3. Lift the front of the cover slightly, disconnect the Printer Top Cover
connectors and remove the cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Connect the connectors securely (especially *

marked connector).
Connectors (3)
R3-279
10-4
10.1.2 Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal FAN Connector
1. Remove the printer top cover Clamp
2. Open the clamp.
3. Remove the screws, lift the rear fan bracket

directly above and disconnect the FAN connector.
4. Remove the rear fan bracket.
Screws (3) Rear Fan Bracket

R3-241
5. Remove the screws and then the left side fan Left Side Fan Bracket Screws (2)
bracket.
Clamps (3)
7. Open the harness clamps and remove the

10
bracket.
Reinstallation

removal. F604 Connector
R3-242
10-5
10.1.3 LDD Circuit Board Exhaust Fan (FAN) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the rear fan bracket

2. Disconnect the FAN connector.
4. Remove the screws and then the fan.
Installation

VR3-395
removal.
NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow mark points to the
outside.
10.1.4 Control Section Exhaust Fan 4 (F604) Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Spacers (2)
1. Remove the left side fan bracket

Contorl Section
2. Open the harness clamp. Exhaust Fan 4
(F604)
4. Remove the screws then the fan, spacers and

louvers.
Installation
Clamp
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of F604 Connector
removal.
Louvers (3)
NOTE: • Install the fan so that its arrow mark points to the VR3-396
outside.
• Reinstall the louvers so they face as shown in the
figure.
10-6
10.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement
Removal Coaxial Cables (2)
1. Remove the printer top cover

2. Disconnect the coaxial cables from the AOM

driver.
3. Open the clamps.
Clamps (2)
R3-316
4. Remove the screws securing the grounding wire

Screws (4)
and the AOM driver.
Grounding Wire
10
R3-317
5. Disconnect the AOM1 connector and then remove

the AOM driver.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Secure the grounding wire to the AOM driver with

one of the screws. AOM1 Connector AOM driver
R3-465
10-7
10.1.6 LDD27 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Circuit Board Cover


cover.
Screws (4)
R3-280
3. Wear the grounding wristband on the left wrist.
Grounding Wristband
R3-028
4. Disconnect the LDD10 connector from the LDD27 Short Connector

circuit board and connect the short connector to it. Clamp
LDD10 Connector Short Connector

R3-027
10-8
5. Open the harness clamps. LDD9 Connector

LDD33 Connector LDD11 Connector
6. Disconnect all connectors from the LDD27 circuit LDD3 Connector LDD12 Connector
LDD14
board. Clamps (5)
Connector
7. Remove the screws and then the LDD27 circuit

board.
Screws (9) LDD8 Connector

LDD7 Connector
LDD27 Connector LDD6 Connector
Installation LDD5 Connector
LDD13 Connector
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of LDD1 Connector
removal. LDD2 Connector
R3-319
10
10.1.7 Operation Panel/Keyboard Circuit Board (KEY27) Replacement
Removal Operation Panel Cover

2. Remove the screws and then the operation panel

cover.
Screws (4)
Printer Top Cover (Backside)
VR3-397
10-9
3. Disconnect the KEY1 connector. Groove
4. Remove the screws and then the operation panel/

keyboard circuit board assembly.
KEY1 Connector
Installation

removal.
Screws (4) Operation Panel/Keyboard
NOTE: Path the harness in the groove as shown. Circuit board Assembly
R3-322
10.1.8 Calibrator Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (3)
1. Remove the operation panel cover

2. Remove the screws and then the calibrator cover.
Calibrator Cover
R3-326
10-10
3. Remove the screws and washer securing the Grounding Wire

grounding wire.
Screws (2)
4. Remove the harness clamps.
Washer
Harness Clamps (2)

R3-327
5. Remove the screws and then the calibrator. Calibrator Screws (4)
10
Reinstallation

removal.
R3-328
10.1.9 Calibrator Width Guide Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

Plain Washers (2)
1. Remove the calibrator (see Subsection 10.1.8)
2. Remove the screws, plain washers, gear cover,

felt spacer and gear in this order.
Felt Spacer Gear Gear Cover

R3-329
10-11
3. Remove the screws then the racks and width Screws (2)
guides.
Racks (2)
Width Guides (2)

R3-330
Installation
Pinion
removal.
NOTE: • Move the racks to the outside fully and install the
pinion.
• After installation, make sure the width guides
move smoothly. Over-tightening of the screws may
cause not smooth
Racks (2)
R3-331
10-12
10.2 Laser Optical Unit
10.2.1 Laser Optical Unit Air Filter Replacement
Removal Laser Optical Unit Air Filter

2. Remove the screw and then the air filter.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installation, perform the following adjustment.

• Menu 0552 “Filter Exchange Log” (see Subsection
5.10.20). Screw (Loosen)
R3-193
10.2.2 Anti-dust Fan (F670) Replacement

10

(see Subsection 10.1.1). Screws (2)
3. Remove the fan connector from the bracket.
Installation Anti-dust Fan (F670)

R3-333
removal.
10-13
10.2.3 Laser Optical Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Remove the screw and then disconnect the harness
Removal Harness Clamp
1. Remove:
• Rear fan bracket (see Subsection 10.1.2).

• Printer rear cover (see Subsection 17.1.1).
2. Disconnect the G coaxial cable from the AOM

driver.
3. Remove the screw and then disconnect the

harness clamp.
Screw G Coaxial Cable

R3-025
4. Remove the screw securing the cable clamp. R Coaxial Cable

Screw
5. Disconnect the R and B coaxial cables from the
GMC27 circuit board.
B Coaxial Cable
R3-024
6. Wear the grounding wristband to the left wrist.
Grounding Wristband
R3-028
10-14
7. Open the harness clamps. LDD14 Connector

LDD12 Connector
Clamps (9)
8. Disconnect the connectors from the LDD27 circuit LDD11 Connector
board. LDD10 Connector
LDD9 Connector
LDD8 Connector
LDD7 Connector
LDD6 Connector
LDD5 Connector
R3-026
9. Remove the short connector from the clamp and

connect it to the LDD10 connector.
Short Connector
Clamp 10
LDD10 Connector Short Connector

R3-027
10. Disconnect the ROS connector from the unit. ROS Connector
R3-029
10-15
11. Loosen the screws securing the unit.

Screws (4) (Loosen)
R3-030
12. Remove the laser optical unit.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: • Store the jumper connector to the clamp on the

laser optical unit.
• Do not bend the coaxial cables between the color
tube and the connector.
• When the unit has been replaced, perform the
following adjustments. Laser Optical Unit
1) Menu 0522 “G Laser (SHG) Optimal R3-031
Temperature Setup” (see Subsection 5.10.2).
2) Menu 0547 “Main Scan/Laser Beam Sync.
Rough Adjust” (see Subsection 5.10.15).
3) Menu 0548 “Laser Beam Sync. Fine
Adjustment Print” (see Subsection 5.10.16).
4) Menu 0554 “Image Position Initialization”
10-16
10.2.4 Shutter Solenoid (S673) Replacement
Removal Screws (5) Shutter Section Lower Bracket
1. Remove the laser optical unit

2. Remove the screws and then the shutter section

lower bracket.
L2-462
3. Disconnect the solenoid connector then remove Screws (4)

Guide
the screws, guide and solenoid.
10
Installation

removal. Solenoid (S673)
L2-463
10.2.5 Shutter Open/Close Sensor (D674) Replacement
Removal Screws (5) Shutter Section Lower Bracket

2. Remove the screws and then the shutter section

lower bracket.
L2-462
10-17
3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Connector
4. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor.
Sensor (D674)
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Locking Tabs

removal.
L2-464
10.2.6 Exposure Point Temperature Sensor (THA20) Replacement
Removal Cover

2. Remove the screws and then the cover.
Screws (2)
L2-465
3. Disconnect the connector then remove the screw Connector

and the sensor.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Screw

removal. Sensor (THA20)
L2-466
10-18
10.3 Sub-scanning Unit
10.3.1 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove:
• Back printing/registration unit

• Laser optical unit (see Subsection 10.2.3).
2. Disconnect the connectors and then strap the

harness into clamp.
JFU32 Connector
Clamp
JFU4 Connector
R3-464
3. Loosen the screws securing the grounding wires Washers (2)

to the unit frame.
Screws (8)
4. Remove the screws securing the rubber mounts

of the unit.
10
Screws (3)
(Loosen)
Grounding Wires (3)

R3-033
5. Remove the sub-scanning unit. Sub-scanning Unit
R3-034
10-19
Reinstallation Unit Mounting Screws (8)

removal. Locating Jigs (2)
NOTE: • Insert the two locating jigs into the holes in the
frame. Position the frame so that the locating jigs
fall into the locating holes smoothly and tighten the
sub-scanning unit mounting screws. Make sure the
jigs can be removed easily.
• When the sub-scanning unit as been replaced,
perform the following adjustment.
Menu 0554 “Image Position Initialization” (see
Subsection 5.10.22)
R3-035
10.3.2 Frame Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (4)
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit Frame

2. Remove the screws and then the frame.
Reinstallation

removal.
VR3-309
10.3.3 Large Rubber Belt Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit

2. Loosen the screws securing the motor bracket.
Screws (3) (Loosen)
VR3-310
10-20
3. Move the motor bracket to loosen the belt tension Motor Bracket
and temporarily tighten the screw.
Screw
VR3-311
4. Remove the large rubber belt.
Installation 10
removal.
NOTE: Perform the belt alignment adjustment by following

the steps below. Large Rubber Belt
VR3-312
<Belt Alignment Adjustment>
1. Install the belt on the center of the pulleys.
2. Loosen the screw to apply tension to the belt and

tighten the screws in order q to e as shown in
the figure.
Screws (3)
VR3-319
10-21
3. Rotate the pulley twenty turns in the feed

direction.
4. Loosen the screws and retighten them in the order

q to e as shown in the figure.
Screws (3)
Pulley
VR3-320
10.3.4 Sub-scanning Feed Motor (M650) Replacement
Removal M650 Connector
1. Remove the large rubber belt

2. Remove the screw and then the cover.
Cover Screw
VR3-313
4. Remove the screws and then the motor.
Installation

removal.
Screws (2)
Sub-scanning Feed Motor (M650)
VR3-314
10-22
10.3.5 Timing Belt Replacement
Removal Screws (3)
1. Remove the frame (see Subsection 10.3.2).
Cover
VR3-315
3. Loosen the screws and move the tensioner to Timing Belt

loosen the belt tension.
4. Remove the timing belt. 10
Installation

removal. Screws (3)
Tensioner
VR3-316
10-23
10.3.6 Soft Nip Motor (M651) Replacement
Removal
M651 Connector
1. Remove the timing belt (see Subsection 10.3.5).
Screw Cover
VR3-317
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Screws (2)

Soft Nip Motor (M651)
removal.
VR3-318
10.3.7 Small Rubber Belt Replacement
1. Remove the timing belt (see Subsection 10.3.5).
Screw Cover
VR3-317
10-24
4. Remove the screws and then the tensioner

bracket.
Screws (4) Tensioner Bracket

VR3-321
5. Loosen the screws securing the motor bracket. Small Rubber Belt
6. Move the motor bracket to loosen the belt tension

and tighten a screw lightly.
7. Remove the belt.
10
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Perform the belt alignment adjustment by following

the steps below.
Screws (3) Tensioner
VR3-322
<Belt Alignment Adjustment>
1. Install the belt on the center of the pulleys. Small Rubber Belt
2. Loosen the screw to apply tension to the belt and

tighten the screws in order q to e as shown in
the figure.
Screws (3)
VR3-323
10-25
3. Rotate the knob twenty turns in the feed direction. Knob
4. Loosen the screws and retighten them in the order

q to e as shown in the figure.
Screws (3)
VR3-324
10.3.8 Soft Nip Home Position Sensor (D651) Replacement
Removal Screws (2) Knob
1. Remove the timing belt (see Subsection 10.3.5)
2. Remove the screws and then the knob.
VR3-325
10-26
3. Remove the E-ring then the cam pulley and Cam Pulley
bearings.
E-ring Bearings (2)

VR3-326
4. Disconnect the D651 connector from the sensor. Soft Nip Home Position Sensor (D651)
D651 Connector
10
Screw
VR3-327
Installation Groove Rib

removal.
NOTE: Align the groove in the knob with the rib of the pulley
as shown.
VR3-603
10-27
10.3.9 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor (D650P)/Exposure

Section Paper Sensor (D653P) Replacement
Removal Screws (2)

D650P Connector D653P Connector
Installation

removal.

• Menu 0554 “Image Position Initialization” (see Exposure Section Entrance Exposure Section Paper
Pepar Sensor (D650P) Sensor (D653P)
Subsection 5.10.22)
VR3-328
10.3.10 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor LED (D650L)/

Exposure Section Paper Sensor LED (D653L) Replacement
Removal M651
Connector
Screw
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit JD650
(see Subsection 10.3.1). Cover 1 Connector
Cover 2
2. Remove the screw and then cover 1. Clamps (3)
3. Remove the screw and then cover 2.
6. Remove the screws and then the lower bracket.

Lower Bracket Screws (4) M650 Connector
VR3-329
10-28
7. Open the harness clamp. Exposure Section Entrance

Paper Sensor LED (D650L)
D650L Connector
8. Disconnect the connector from the sensor LED.
9. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED. Exposure Section Paper
Sensor LED (D653L)
Screws (2)
Installation

removal.

• Menu 0554 “Image Position Initialization” (see Clamp
Subsection 5.10.22) D653L Connector
VR3-330
10
10-29
10.3.11 Soft Nip Pre-turning Belt Replacement
Removal Upper Bracket

Screw (4)
3. Disconnect the JD651 connector.
4. Remove the screws then the upper bracket and

springs.
JD651 Connector Clamp

VR3-332
5. Remove the belts using a pair of tweezers etc. Belts (2)
Installation

removal.
VR3-333
10-30
11. SUB-SCANNING EXIT/PRINTER EXIT SECTION
Parts Location....................................................................................... 11-2

11.1 Sub-scanning Exit Unit ........................................................................ 11-6
11.1.1 Sub-scanning Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation................................................. 11-6
11.1.2 Sub-scanning Exit Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 11-7
11.1.3 Nip Release Solenoid 4/5/6 (S660/S661/S662) Replacement ............................. 11-8
11.1.4 Nip Roller 1/2/3 Replacement ............................................................................... 11-8
11.1.6 Feed Motor 4 (M660) Replacement .................................................................... 11-10
11.1.7 Feed Roller Drive Gear Replacement ................................................................ 11-10
11.1.8 Feed Roller Replacement.................................................................................... 11-11
11.1.9 Sub-scanning Exit Guide Open/Close Sensor (D669) Replacement .............. 11-12
11.1.10 Sub-scanning Exit Section Paper Sensor (D667) Replacement...................... 11-13
11.1.11 Guide Rocking Unit Disassembly/Reassembly ................................................ 11-13
11.2 Printer Exit Unit................................................................................... 11-15
11.2.1 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation........................................................... 11-15
11.2.2 Nip Roller Replacement ...................................................................................... 11-15
11.2.3 Feed Roller/Drive Gear Replacement ................................................................ 11-16
11
11-1
Parts Location
● Sub-scanning Exit Unit
Sub-scanning Exit Section Guide Assembly
Sub-scanning Exit Section Paper Sensor (D667)
Guide Lock Release Button
Sub-scanning Exit Guide Open/Close Sensor (D669)
Guide Lock Release Button
PD3-023
11-2
Parts Location
Nip Release Solenoid 5 (S661) Nip Release Solenoid 4 (S660)
Feed Motor 4 (M660)
PD3-024
11
<Sectional View>

Feed Motor 4 (M660)
PD3-025
11-3
Parts Location
● Printer Exit Unit
Rear
Nip Roller
Front
PD3-026
11-4
Parts Location
Front
Feed Roller
Rear
Drive Gear 11
PD3-027
<Sectional View>
Nip Roller
Front
Rear Feed Roller

Drive Gear
PD3-028
11-5
11.1 Sub-scanning Exit Unit
11.1.1 Sub-scanning Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the connector cover (see Subsection 8.4.3).
JFD6 Connector
JFD33 Connector
R3-036
3. Remove the screws and then the sub-scanning

exit unit.
Reinstallation

removal. Sub-scanning Exit Unit Screws (2)
R3-037
11-6
11.1.2 Sub-scanning Exit Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Sub-scanning Exit

Guide Assembly
1. Remove the sub-scanning exit unit (see Subsection
11.1.1)
2. Press the lock release button and open the Sub-

scanning Exit guide assembly.
Lock Release Button

VR3-399
3. Open the harness clamps. S660 Connector Clamps (6)
11
S662 Connector S661 Connector

VR3-400
5. Remove the screws and then the guide assembly. Sub-scanning Exit Guide Assembly
Reinstallation

removal. Screws (2)
VR3-401
11-7
11.1.3 Nip Release Solenoid 4/5/6 (S660/S661/S662) Replacement
Removal Nip Release Solenoid 5 (S661)

11.1.1)
3. Disconnect the connector.
Installation

removal.
Screws (2) Clamps (3) Connector
NOTE: Press the solenoid towards the arrow direction as Nip Release Solenoid 6 (S662)
shown and tighten the screws. VR3-402
11.1.4 Nip Roller 1/2/3 Replacement
Removal Nip Roller Assembly E-ring
1. Remove the sub-scanning exit unit (see Subsection Bearings (2)

11.1.1)
2. Remove the E-ring and then the fulcrum shaft.
3. Remove the nip roller assembly, coil spring and Spring

bearings.
Fulcrum Shaft
VR3-403
11-8
4. Remove the E-rings, then the bearings and nip

roller.
E-rings (2)
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Nip Roller

removal. Bearings (2)
VR3-404
Removal Springs (2)

11.1.1)
2. Remove the springs and then the nip roller

assembly.
11
Nip Roller Assembly

VR3-405
3. Remove the E-rings then the bearings and the nip

roller.
Bearings (2)
Installation
Nip Roller
removal. E-rings (2)
VR3-406
11-9

11.1.1)
Screws (5)
Clamps (9)
Motor Bracket
VR3-407
5. Remove the screws and then the motor from the Feed Motor 4 (M660)
bracket.
Installation

removal. Screws (3)
VR3-408
11.1.7 Feed Roller Drive Gear Replacement
Removal
Pin
1. Remove the motor bracket (see Subsection 11.1.6).
2. Release the locking tabs and remove the feed

roller drive gears.
3. Remove the E-rings and then the feed roller drive

gears and pin.
Locking
Tab
Feed Roller
Drive Gears (2)
E-rings (2)
Feed Roller Drive Gears (2)
VR3-409
11-10
4. Remove the E-rings and then the idler gears.
Installation

removal. Idler Gears (3) E-rings (3)
VR3-410
Removal
1. Remove:
• Feed roller drive gears (see Subsection 11.1.7).

11
2. Remove the screws then the lower guide plate.
Screws (5) Lower Guide Plate

VR3-411
E-rings (5)
Bearings (4)
VR3-412
11-11
4. Remove the E-rings and then the bearings. E-rings (4)

Bearings (4)
5. Remove the feed rollers.
Installation

removal.
Feed Rollers (4)
VR3-413
11.1.9 Sub-scanning Exit Guide Open/Close Sensor (D669) Replacement
Removal
Screw
11.1.1)
Sensor Bracket
VR3-414
3. Disconnect the D669 connector. Sub-scanning Exit Guide Open/Close Sensor (D669)

from the bracket. D669 Connector
Installation

VR3-415
11-12
11.1.10 Sub-scanning Exit Section Paper Sensor (D667) Replacement
Removal Sub-scanning Exit Section Paper Sensor (D667)

Locking Tabs
11.1.1)
3. Disconnect the D667 connector from the sensor.
Installation

removal. D667 Connector
VR3-416
11.1.11 Guide Rocking Unit Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Sub-scanning Exit

Guide Assembly 11
1. Remove the sensor bracket (see Subsection 11.1.9).
2. Press the lock release button and open the sub-

scanning exit section guide assembly.
Lock Release Button

VR3-399
3. Remove the screws and then the guide locking

Screws (2)
unit.
Guide Locking Unit

VR3-417
11-13
4. Remove the E-ring then remove the shaft, sensor Spring

plate and spring.
Sensor Plate
Shaft
E-ring
VR3-418
5. Remove the E-ring then the shaft, spring and lock Lock Release Button
release button. Shaft
Reassembly

disassembly. E-ring Spring
VR3-419
11-14
11.2 Printer Exit Unit
11.2.1 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal

Screws (Loosen)
11.1.1).
2. Loosen the screw and remove the other screws

then the printer exit unit.
Reinstallation

removal.
NOTE: Make sure the half-punch is aligned with the hole in Screws (2) Printer Exit Unit
the unit. R3-038
Removal 11
Springs (2)
1. Remove the printer exit unit (see Subsection 11.2.1).
VR3-338
3. Remove the E-rings then the bearings and the nip E-rings (2) Nip Roller
roller.
Bearings (2)
Installation

removal.
VR3-339
11-15
11.2 Printer Exit Unit
11.2.3 Feed Roller/Drive Gear Replacement
Removal
E-ring
1. Remove the printer exit unit (see Subsection 11.2.1).
2. Remove the E-ring and then the drive gear from

the roller shaft.
Drive Gear
VR3-340
3. Remove the E-rings then the bearings and the E-rings (2)
feed roller. Bearings (2)
Installation

Feed Roller
removal.
VR3-342
11-16
12. PROCESSOR SECTION
Parts Location....................................................................................... 12-2

12.1 Crossover Racks/Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack ............................ 12-6
12.1.1 No. 1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly .............................................. 12-6
12.1.2 No. 2/No. 3 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly..................................... 12-6
12.1.3 Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack Disassembly/Reassembly .............................. 12-7
12.2 P1/P2 Processing Racks ...................................................................... 12-9
12.2.1 Upper Guide Removal/Reinstallation .................................................................. 12-9
12.2.2 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly ............................................................ 12-10
12.2.3 Roller Replacement ............................................................................................. 12-12
12.2.4 Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................... 12-14
12.3 PS1 Processing Rack ......................................................................... 12-16
12.3.1 Upper Guide Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................ 12-16
12.5.3 Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation ................................................................... 12-28 12
12.6 PS Tank Partition Board..................................................................... 12-32
12.6.1 PS Tank Partition Board Removal/Reinstallation (Blade Replacement) ........ 12-32
12.7 Processor Drive System .................................................................... 12-39
12.7.1 Right Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation ......................................................... 12-39
12.7.2 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 12-39
12.7.3 Auto Chain Tensioner Removal/Reinstallation................................................. 12-40
12.7.4 Processor Drive Motor (M700) Replacement .................................................... 12-42
12.7.5 Processor Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement .................................................. 12-43
12.7.6 Processor Drive Chain Replacement................................................................. 12-45
12.7.7 Printer Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement ........................................................ 12-46
12.7.8 Processor Cover (Large) Open/Close Sensor (D762A) Replacement ............ 12-47
12.7.9 Processor Cover (Small) Open/Close Sensor (D762B) Replacement............. 12-48
12-1
Parts Location
● Processing Rack Section
No.2 Crossover Rack

No.1 Crossover Rack
No.3 Crossover Rack
P1 Processing Rack
P2 Processing Rack
PS1 Processing Rack
PS2 Processing Rack
PS3 Processing Rack
PD3-046-2
12-2
Parts Location
● Processing Tank/Drive Section
Printer Exit Unit Drive Gear
Processor Drive Chain
Dryer Section Drive Gear
Processor Drive Motor (M700)
Auto Chain Tensioner
P1
P2 12
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS Tank Partition Board
PD3-046
12-3
Parts Location
● Roller Arrangement
φ 20 Black Soft Roller

A : No Mark (Long) (Titanium Shaft)
B : Black Mark φ 20 White Soft Roller
C : Red Mark φ 20 Black Hard Roller
D : Green Mark
φ 20 Brown Hard Roller
E : No Mark (Short)
φ 20 White Soft Roller
F : Blue Mark
φ 20 Black Hard Roller
R3-389
12-4
Parts Location
● Bearing Arrangement
Rear View
Front View
12
Front View
Rear View
VR3-612
12-5
12.1 Crossover Racks/Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack
12.1.1 No. 1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly C-rings (2)

Gears (2)
1. Remove the No.1 crossover rack. Coil Spring
Bearings (2)
2. Remove the C-rings then the gears, bearings and

coil spring from the rear of the rollers.
C-rings (2)
3. Remove the C-rings then the bearings and coil
spring from the front of the rollers.
4. Remove the rollers.
Rollers (2)
Reassembly Coil Spring

Bearings (2)
VR3-343
disassembly.
12.1.2 No. 2/No. 3 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Gears (4)

C-rings (4) Coil Springs (2)
1. Remove the No. 2/No.3 crossover rack. Screws (2)
Guide
2. Remove the C-rings then the gears, bearings and
coil springs from the rear of the rollers.
3. Remove the C-rings then the bearings and coil Bearings

springs from the front of the rollers. (4)
5. Remove the screws then the guide by shifting it to

the arrow direction.
Rollers (4)
C-rings (4)
Bearings (4) Coil Springs (2)
Reassembly
VR3-344

disassembly.
NOTE: The roller shafts of the No. 3 crossover rack are

made of titanium and have a 3mm diameter hole in
their end. Take care not to confuse these with other
rollers.
12-6
12.1.3 Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Locking Tabs
1. Remove the dryer entrance squeegee rack.
2. Release the locking tabs and remove the rack

cover by pressing it down.
Rack Cover
VR3-345
3. Remove the E-rings then the gears, bearings and E-rings (9)
coil springs from the rear of the rollers.
Gears (9)
Bearings (Blue) (4)
Coil Springs (3) 12

Bearings (Brown) (2)
VR3-346
4. Remove the E-rings then the bearings and coil

springs from the front of the rollers.
Bearings (6)
Coil Springs (3)
E-rings (6)
VR3-347
12-7
Rollers (2)
VR3-348
6. Remove the roller shafts.
Roller Shafts (4)

VR3-349
7. Remove the rollers from the rack.
Reassembly

disassembly. Rollers (4)
VR3-350
12-8
12.2 P1/P2 Processing Racks
12.2.1 Upper Guide Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Gear
1. Remove the screw then the gear, poly-slider and Screw

bearing.
Poly-slider
Bearing
VR3-351
2. Remove the screws and then the upper guide.

Upper Guide
Screws (6)
12
VR3-352
Reinstallation Gear
Flat Surface
removal. Screw
NOTE: Install the screw into the gear from the flat surface
on the gear.
VR3-604
12-9
12.2.2 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly Drive Pin

Sprocket
1. Remove the upper guide (see Subsection 12.2.1).
Shaft
Bearings (2)
2. Remove the screw then the D-washer, poly- Poly-sliders (2)
sliders, bearings, gear, shaft, sprocket and drive
pin.
D-washer
Gear
Screw
VR3-353
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the middle Locking Tabs
guide.
Middle Guide
VR3-354
4. Remove the screws and then the crossover rack Screws (2)
drive gear assembly.
Crossover Rack Drive Gear Assembly

VR3-355
12-10
5. Remove the E-rings and then the gear from the

shaft.
Shaft
Gear
E-rings (2)
VR3-356
6. Remove the screws and then the idler gear

Screws (2)
assembly.
Idler Gear Assembly 12

VR3-357
7. Remove the E-rings and then the idler gear from

Shaft
the shaft.
E-rings (2)
Reassembly

disassembly.
Idler Gear
NOTE: • When installing the idler gear assembly, align the
flat surface in the upper guide hole with the flat of
the gear shaft and tighten the screw.
• When installing the sprocket, align the D-flat in the VR3-358
washer with the one on the shaft and tighten the
screw.
12-11
12.2.3 Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the screw then the D-washer, poly-slider

and gear from the front of the roller shaft.
Poly-slider
Screw
D-washer
Gear
VR3-359
2. Release the locking tab and remove the drive gear

from the rear (drive side).
Locking Tab
Gear
Coil Spring
VR3-360
4. Release the locking tab and remove the gears

and coil spring from the front of the roller shafts.
5. Remove the bearing from the center roller.
Coil Spring
Locking Tab
Bearing Gears (3)

VR3-361
12-12
6. Remove the coil springs and C-rings then the

bearings from the rear (drive side).
Coil Springs (2)
Bearings (4)
C-rings (3)
VR3-362
7. Release the locking tabs and remove the gears,

coil springs and bearings from the front.
Locking Tab
Bearings (4)
Coil Springs (2)
Gears (4)
VR3-363
12
8. Remove the entrance-side knurled roller.
Knurled Roller
VR3-364
12-13
9. Remove the screws and then the turn guide. Screws (4) Black Soft Rollers (2)
10. Remove the PPE roller and black soft rollers.
PPE Roller
Turn Guide
VR3-365
11. Release the locking tabs and remove the inlet and
outlet side guide plates.
12. Remove the remaining rollers.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Check the locking tabs of the guide plates are

locked securely by moving each guide plate back Locking Tabs
and forth. Entrance Side Guide Plate Exit Side Guide Plate
• Install the rollers and coil springs in the proper VR3-366
position as shown in the figure (see page 12-4).
• Note the installation direction of the bearings
(see page 12-5).
12.2.4 Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Gear

bearing.
Poly-slider
Bearing
VR3-351
12-14
2. Shift the drive shaft to remove it.
Drive Shaft
VR3-367
Reinstallation Gear
Flat Surface
removal. Screw
on the gear.
12
VR3-604
12-15
12.3 PS1 Processing Rack
Removal
Gear

bearing.
Poly-slider
Bearing
VR3-351
2. Remove the screws and then the upper guide.

Upper Guide
Screws (6)
VR3-352
Reinstallation Gear
Flat Surface
removal. Screw
on the gear.
VR3-604
12-16
Disassembly Drive Pin

Sprocket
Shaft
Bearings (2)
2. Remove the screw then the D-washer, poly- Poly-sliders (2)
pin.
D-washer
Gear
Screw
VR3-353
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the middle Locking Tabs
guide.
Middle Guide
12
VR3-354
4. Remove the screws and then the crossover rack Screws (2)
drive gear assembly.
Crossover Rack Drive Gear Assembly

VR3-355
12-17

shaft.
Shaft
Gear
E-rings (2)
VR3-356

Screws (2)
assembly.
Idler Gear Assembly

VR3-357
7. Remove the E-rings and then the idler gear from

Shaft
the shaft.
E-rings (2)
Reassembly

disassembly.
Idler Gear
screw.
12-18
Removal
Gear

bearing.
Poly-slider
Bearing
VR3-351
2. Shift the drive shaft to remove it.
12
Drive Shaft
VR3-388
Reinstallation Gear
Flat Surface
removal. Screw
on the gear.
VR3-604
12-19
Removal
1. Remove the drive shaft (see Subsection 12.3.3).
2. Release the locking tabs and remove the gears

from the rear side.
Gears (8) Locking Tabs

VR3-368
Bearings (4)
VR3-369
4. Remove the coil springs. Bearings (4)
5. Remove the C-rings and then the bearings. C-rings (4)
Springs (4)
VR3-370
12-20
6. Release the locking tabs and remove the entrance

side guide plate.
Locking Tabs
Entrance Side Guide Plate

VR3-371
7. Remove the entrance side rollers and bearings.
Rollers (6) Bearings (6)

VR3-372 12
8. Remove the exit side rollers and bearings.
Installation

removal.
Rollers (2)
NOTE: • Install the rollers and coil springs in the proper

position as shown in the figure (see page 12-4). Bearings (2)
• Note the installation direction of the bearings VR3-373
(see page 12-5).
12-21
Removal
Gear

bearing.
Poly-slider
Bearing
VR3-374
2. Remove the screws and then the upper guide. Screws (6)
Upper Guide
VR3-375
Reinstallation Gear
Flat Surface
removal. Screw
on the gear.
VR3-604
12-22
Disassembly
Shaft
1. Remove the upper guide (see Subsection 12.4.1). Poly-sliders (2)
Screw
2. Remove the screw then the D-washer, poly-
sliders, bearings, gear, shaft, sprocket and drive Sprocket
pin. Pin
Reassembly
Reassembly is essentially in the reverse order of Gear Bearings (2)

removal. D-washer
VR3-376
NOTE: When installing the sprocket, align the D-flat in the
screw.
Removal
Gear

bearing. 12
Poly-slider
Bearing
VR3-374
2. Shift down the drive shaft to remove it. Drive Shaft
VR3-377
12-23
Reinstallation Gear
Flat Surface
removal. Screw
on the gear.
VR3-604
Removal
1. Remove the drive shaft (see Subsection 12.4.3).
2. Release the locking tabs and remove the gears.

Gears (4)
4. Remove the bearings. Bearings (2)
Springs (2)
Locking Tabs
VR3-378
5. Remove the coil springs from the front side.
6. Remove the C-rings and bearings.

Springs (2)
Bearings (2)
C-rings (2)
VR3-379
12-24
7. Remove the screws and then the lower guide. Screws (4)
Lower Guide
VR3-380
8. Remove the rollers and bearings.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Install the rollers and coil springs in the proper Bearings (4) Rollers (4)
12
position as shown in the figure (see page 12-4).
• Note the installation direction of the bearings VR3-381
(see page 12-5).
12-25
Removal Gear

bearing.
Poly-slider
Bearing
VR3-382
2. Remove the screws and then the upper guide. Screws (4)
Upper Guide
VR3-383
Reinstallation Gear
Flat Surface
removal. Screw
on the gear.
VR3-604
12-26
Disassembly Sprocket
Poly-sliders (2)
2. Remove the screw then the D-washer, poly-

Pin Shaft
pin.
Bearings (2)
Gear
D-washer
Screw
VR3-384
3. Remove the screws and then the dryer entrance Screws (2)
squeegee rack drive gear assembly.
12
Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack
Drive Gear Assembly
VR3-385
4. Remove the E-rings then the gear from the shaft.
Shaft
Gear
E-rings (2)
VR3-356
12-27

Screws (2)
assembly.
Idler Gear Assembly

VR3-386

Shaft
shaft.
E-rings (2)
Reassembly

removal.
Idler Gear
screw.
Removal Gear

bearing.
Poly-slider
Bearing
VR3-382
12-28
2. Shift down the drive shaft to remove it.
Drive Shaft
VR3-387
Reinstallation Gear
Flat Surface
removal. Screw
on the gear.
12
VR3-604
Removal
Gears (8)
Locking Tabs
1. Release the locking tabs and remove the gears
from the rear side.
Bearings (4)
Springs (4)
VR3-389
12-29
4. Remove the coil springs from the front side. Bearings (4)
5. Remove the C-rings and then the bearings. C-rings (4)
Springs (4)
VR3-390
6. Remove the screws and then the lower guide. Screws (2)
Lower Guide
VR3-391
Bearings (2)
Rollers (2)
VR3-392
12-30
8. Release the locking tabs and remove the guide

plate.
Locking Tabs Guide Plate

VR3-393
Installation

removal.
Rollers (6)
NOTE: • Install the rollers and coil springs in the proper
position as shown in the figure (see page 12-4). Bearings (6)
• Note the installation direction of the bearings
VR3-394
12
(see page 12-5).
12-31
12.6 PS Tank Partition Board
12.6.1 PS Tank Partition Board Removal/Reinstallation (Blade Replacement)
PS Solution Draining
1. Remove the PS1 to PS3 processing racks.

PS Drain Cock Cover
2. Remove the PS drain cock cover.
R3-181
3. Connect the hose to the PS1 drain cock.
4. Open the drain cock to drain the solution in the

Drain Cock
PS1 processing tank into the waste solution tank.
R3-182
5. If the solution being drained off stops flowing, Drain Cock

replace the waste solution tank with a lower
container (such as tray) that can bring the hose to
a level lower than the cock.
6. Continue draining off the solution.
7. Repeat Steps 3 to 6 to drain the PS2 and PS3

solutions.
8. Reinstall the PS drain cock cover after making

sure the cocks are closed.
R3-183
12-32
Partition Board Removal
1. Remove the screws and then the partition board. Screws (2) PS2/PS3 Partition Board
PS1/PS2 Partition Board

VR3-420
Entrance and Exit Side Blade/Gasket
Removal
1. Remove the screws and then the entrance side Screws (4)
blade.
12
Entrance Side Blade
VR3-421
2. Remove the screws and then the exit side blade

holder.
Exit Side Blade Holder

Screws (8)
VR3-422
12-33
3. Remove the screws and then the exit side blade Gasket
from the holder.
Screws (4)
4. Remove the gasket.
Exit Side Blade
VR3-423
5. Remove the screws then the gasket fixing plates Gasket Fixing Plates (2) Screws (2)
and gasket.
Gasket
VR3-424
Entrance and Exit Side Blade/Gasket
Installation
1. Wipe any dirt and water off the parts. Valve

Gasket
2. Install the gasket on the exit side blade holder. Locating Pin
NOTE: Make sure the gasket is installed correctly in the

groove of the exit side blade holder.
3. Install the exit side blade on the exit side blade

holder and then tighten the screws.
Screws (4)
Locating Hole
VR3-425
12-34
NOTE: • Align the holes in the blade with the locating

pins on the blade holder.
• Insert both ends of the blade into the grooves
in the blade holder.
Groove Blade
VR3-636
4. Install the exit side blade holder on the partition

board and then tighten the screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to fall the valves when installing

the blade holder.
5. Install the entrance side blade to the partition

board and tighten the screws.
NOTE: Insert both ends of the blade into the grooves in

the blade holder.
Groove Blade
VR3-637 12
6. Install a new gasket along the groove in the
partition board.
NOTE: • Face the flat surface of the gasket toward the

inside.
• Be careful not to twist the gasket.
• Make sure the sealing surface of the gasket
seated evenly in the groove.
Gasket
RD556
12-35
7. Install the gasket fixing plates with the screws. Gasket Fixing Plates (2) Screws (2)
Gasket
VR3-424
Partition Board Reinstallation
1. Reinstall the partition board with two screws each. Screws (2) PS2/PS3 Partition Board
NOTE: • Before installing the partition boards, wipe any

water and dirt off the sealing surfaces in the
processing tanks.
• Install the partition board to the proper position
as indicated on the label attached to the top of
each board.
• Tighten the two screws each alternately in
three or four steps.
• After reinstallation, perform Menu 1640
“Installation Information Setup”
PS1/PS2 Partition Board

VR3-420
PS Solution Filling
1. Install the PS1 to PS3 processing racks.
FSC100 (1 tablet)
2. Put 1 tablet of FSC100 into a plastic film case of
water or warm water and shake the case
approximately 10 seconds to dissolve the tablet.
3. Repeat Step 2 to make three FSC 100 Solutions.
Plastic Film Case
L2-1064
12-36
4. Remove the rubber plugs from the PS1 and PS2

sub-tank.
Rubber Plugs
R3-164
5. Remove the PS3 circulation filter.

PS3 Circulation Filter
Deionized Water
6. Pour 5 liters of deionized water and FSC100
solution slowly into the PS3 processing tank,
three times (15 liters).
NOTE: Take care not to let solution overflow from the

PS3 or PS2 tank.
FSC 100 Solution + Deionized 12

Water (5 liters ✕ 3)
FSC100 Solution
R3-339
7. After 5 minutes or more, install the level gauge Level Gauge

into the PS3 circulation filter hole and make sure
the level is up to the PS line on the gauge.
R3-342
12-37
8. If necessary, add deionized water up to the PS

line.
9. Reinstall the PS1 and PS2 rubber plugs.
10. Reinstall the PS3 circulation filter.
Level Gauge
R3-272
12-38
12.7 Processor Drive System
12.7.1 Right Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Right Side Cover

2. Loosen the five screws and remove the other

screws then the right side cover.
Reinstallation Screws (5)

Screws (5) (Loosen)
removal.
VR3-426
12.7.2 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Processor Rear Cover Screws (7)
1. Remove the right side cover (see Subsection

12
12.7.1).
2. Loosen the two screws, remove the seven screws

and then the processor rear cover.
Reinstallation

removal. Screws (2)(Loosen)
VR3-470
12-39
12.7.3 Auto Chain Tensioner Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the processing tank exhaust fan

2. Remove the screws and then the processor tank

exhaust duct.
Screws (4)
Processing Tank Exhaust Duct
VR3-471
3. Open the harness clamp. Screws (2)
Clamp
Connector Cover
VR3-472
5. Disconnect the connectors and remove them from H760 Connector D760A Connector
the bracket.
JPR19 Connector
VR3-473
12-40
6. Remove the screw then the tank bracket and

move the waste solution tank aside.
Screw
Waste Solution Tank
Tank Bracket
R3-346
7. Remove the screws and then the auto chain

tensioner.
12
Screws (3) Auto Chain Tensioner
VR3-474
Reinstallation
1. Lock the auto chain tensioner as shown in the

figure.
Lock Pin
Auto Chain Tensioner (Locked)

VR3-475
12-41
2. Align the sprocket of the tensioner with the drive

Locked
chain and then install the auto chain tensioner
with the screws.
3. Using a screwdriver, release the lock of the auto

chain tensioner by pushing up the lock arm.
NOTE: Make sure that the sproket and chain are

engaged properly.

removal.
Unlocked
R3-345
12.7.4 Processor Drive Motor (M700) Replacement
Removal CN603 Connector

12.7.2).
2. Remove the printer rear cover (see Subsection

17.1.1).
3. Open the harness clamp then disconnect the

CN603 and CN604 connectors.
Clamp
CN604 Connector
R3-347
4. Remove the screws and then the motor bracket Screws (4)
assembly.
Motor Bracket Assembly

VR3-427
12-42
5. Remove the screws then the spacer and bracket. Bracket
Spacer
Screws (3)
VR3-428
6. Remove the screws then the plate and gear.
7. Loosen the hex. socket head setscrew then

Hex. Socket Head Setscrew
remove the gear shaft and key from the motor.
Gear Shaft
Gear
Key
Installation
Processor Drive Motor (M700)
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Plate
removal. Screws (2)
VR3-429
12
12.7.5 Processor Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement
Removal Auto Chain Tensioner
1. Remove the processor drive motor (M700)

2. Loosen tension of the chain tensioner.
R3-348
12-43
3. Open the harness clamps. Screw (Loosen)
4. Loosen the two screws then remove the other

screw and the gear bracket assembly.
Gear Bracket Assembly

Clamps (4) Screws (2)
VR3-430
5. Remove the spring from the bracket.

Spring
VR3-431
6. Remove the E-rings. E-rings (6) Tension Arm Assembly
7. Remove the shaft, gear and tension arm

assembly.
Gear Shaft
VR3-432
12-44
8. Remove the E-ring. E-ring
9. Remove the shaft, gear and drive pin. Bearings (4)
Pin
10. Remove the bearings from the tension arm.
Shaft
Gear
VR3-433
11. Remove the E-rings.
12. Remove the shaft and gear assembly from the

bracket.
Shaft
E-rings (2)
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Gear Assembly

removal.
VR3-434
12
12.7.6 Processor Drive Chain Replacement
1. Remove the processor drive motor (M700) Master Link

bracket assembly (see Subsection 12.7.4). New Chain
2. Remove the chain clip and master link from the

Chain Clip
drive chain.
3. Connect a new chain to the end of the old chain

by using the master link and clip.
4. Pull the old chain through as a guide to route the

new chain.
Old Chain
5. Remove the clip, master link and old chain.
R3-349
6. Connect the ends of the new chain with the
master link and clip.
NOTE: Face the closed end of the master link clip in the
rotating direction.

removal.
12-45
12.7.7 Printer Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement
Removal

12.7.2).

17.1.1).
3. Remove the control section exhaust fan (F601)

4. Remove the screws and then the gear cover.

Gear Cover Screws (2)
R3-350
5. Remove the screws and then the processor side

gear/sprocket assembly.
Processor Side Gear/Sprocket Assembly Screws (2)

VR3-438
6. Remove the E-rings and then the gears. E-rings (2)

E-ring
7. Remove the E-ring and then the sprocket.
Sprocket
Gears (2)
VR3-440
12-46
8. Remove the screws and then the printer side gear

assembly.
Printer Side Gear Assembly Screws (3)

VR3-439
9. Remove the E-rings and then the gears. E-rings (2)
Gears (2)
Installation

removal.
VR3-441
12
12.7.8 Processor Cover (Large) Open/Close Sensor (D762A) Replacement
Removal Sensor Bracket

12.7.2).
Screws (2) Clamp

VR3-535
12-47
4. Disconnect the D762A connector. D762A Connector

Screw
5. Remove the screw and then the bracket.
Bracket
VR3-536

Bracket
7. Remove the E-rings then the bracket and sensor.
Installation Spring
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of E-rings (2) Processor Cover Open/
Close Sensor (D762B)
removal.
VR3-537
12.7.9 Processor Cover (Small) Open/Close Sensor (D762B) Replacement
Removal Sensor Bracket D762B Connector

12.7.2).
2. Disconnect the D762B connector.
Screws (2)
VR3-538
12-48
4. Remove the screw and then the bracket. Screw

Bracket
VR3-539

Bracket
6. Remove the E-rings then the bracket and sensor.
Installation Spring
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of E-rings (2) Processor Cover Open/
Close Sensor (D762B)
removal.
VR3-537 12
12-49
13. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM
Parts Location....................................................................................... 13-2

13.1 Sub-tank Section .................................................................................. 13-3
13.1.1 Processor Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................................................. 13-3
13.1.2 Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................... 13-3
13.1.3 P1 to PS3 Solution Temperature Sensor (TS700 to TS703) Replacement ....... 13-4
13.1.4 P1 to PS3 Solution Level Sensor (FS700 to FS704) Replacement.................... 13-5
13.2 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section .................... 13-6
13.2.1 Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................... 13-6
13.2.2 P2 Heater Cooling Fan (F701) Replacement ....................................................... 13-6
13.2.3 Heater Safety Thermostat (D700 to D703) Replacement.................................... 13-7
13.2.4 Processing Solution Heater (H700 to H703) Replacement ................................ 13-8
13.2.5 P1/P2/PS3 Circulation Pump (PU700/PU701/PU704) Replacement .................. 13-9
13.2.6 PS1/PS2 Circulation Pump (PU702/PU703) Replacement ............................... 13-10
13.2.7 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F704) Replacement ........................................ 13-11
13.2.8 Hose Connection ................................................................................................. 13-12
13.3 Waste Solution System ...................................................................... 13-13
13.3.1 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS728) Replacement........................................ 13-13
13.3.2 Waste Solution Tank Replacement.................................................................... 13-13
13
13-1
Parts Location
Processing Solution Level Sensors (FS700 to FS704)

Processing Solution Temperature Sensors (TS700 to TS704)
Processor Tank Exhaust Fan (F704)
P1 Circulation
Filter PS2 Circulation Filter
P2 Circulation Filter
Processing Solution
Heater (H700 to H703) Waste Solution Tank
P1
Heater Cooling
Fan (F701) P2
PS1/
PS3
PS2
Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS728)

Processing Solution
P1
Circulation Pumps
(PU700 to PU704)
P2
PS3
Drain Cock
Drain Cocks
PS1
Waste Solution Hose
PS2
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
R3-244
13-2
13.1 Sub-tank Section
13.1.1 Processor Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal

12.7.1).
2. Remove the SU700AR sorter (see Subsection

16.2.1).
3. Remove the processor cover (large).
Processor Cover (Large)

R3-108
4. Release the locking tab and remove the Processor Front Cover
processing solution cooling fan air filter holder. Screws (5)
5. Loosen the two screws then remove the other five Locking Tab
screws and processor front cover.
Reinstallation
13
Processing Solution Screws (2) (Loosen)
Cooling Fan Air Filter
removal. Holder
R3-284
13.1.2 Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Upper Connector Cover

13.1.1).
2. Loosen the screw and remove the upper

connector cover.
Reinstallation
Screw
R3-351
removal.
13-3
13.1.3 P1 to PS3 Solution Temperature Sensor (TS700 to TS703) Replacement
Removal TS700 Connector

TS701 Connector
1. Remove the upper connector cover

sensor connector.
TS702 Connector TS703 Connector

R3-353-1
3. Remove the screw and then the temperature P1 Solution Temperature Sensor (TS700)
sensor.
Installation

removal. Screw
VR3-463
13-4
13.1.4 P1 to PS3 Solution Level Sensor (FS700 to FS704) Replacement
Removal FS700 Connector FS702 Connector
1. Remove the upper connector cover

2. Open the clamps and disconnect the sensor

connector.
FS701 Connector FS703 Connector

R3-353-2
3. Remove the screw and then the level sensor. P1 Solution Level Sensor (FS700)
Installation
13
removal.
Screw
VR3-464
13-5
13.2 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section
13.2.1 Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Lower Connector Cover
1. Remove the processor front cover

2. Loosen the screw and remove the lower

connector cover.
Reinstallation

removal.
Screw
R3-352
13.2.2 P2 Heater Cooling Fan (F701) Replacement
1. Remove the lower connector cover (see Subsection

13.2.1).
R3-354-1
3. Remove the screws then the fan cover and fan.

Fan Cover Screws (2)
P2 Heater Cooling Fan (F701)

VR3-465
13-6
Installation

removal. Arrow
NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow points to the inside.
R3-355
13.2.3 Heater Safety Thermostat (D700 to D703) Replacement
Removal D700 Connector D702 Connector

D701 Connector D703 Connector
1. Remove:
• Upper connector cover (see Subsection 13.1.2).

• P2: P2 heater cooling fan (see Subsection 13.2.2).
Screws (2)
2. Open the clamps and disconnect the safety
thermostat connector.
3. Remove the screws and then the safety

thermostat. Clamps (8)
13
Safety Thermostat
R3-356
Installation

removal.
13-7
13.2.4 Processing Solution Heater (H700 to H703) Replacement
Removal Screws (2)(Loosen)

Clamps (4)

13.2.1).
2. P2: 1) Disconnect the F701 connector.

2) Open the harness clamps
3) Loosen the screws and remove the fan
bracket.
F701 Connector Fan Bracket

R3-361
3. Release the locking tab and remove the connector Locking Tab
Connector Cover
cover.
4. Disconnect the heater connector.
H700 Connector H702 Connector

H701 Connector H703 Connector
VR3-496
13-8
5. Remove the screws and then the safety Inlet Hose

thermostat. Hose Clamps (2) Pinchcocks (2)
6. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the

pinchcocks.
Screws (2)
7. Remove the screws and then the heater.
8. Loosen the hose clamps and disconnect the Screws (2)

hoses from the heater.
Installation

Heater
removal.
Outlet Hose
Safety Thermostat
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see Subsection
R3-362
13.2.8).
13.2.5 P1/P2/PS3 Circulation Pump (PU700/PU701/PU704) Replacement
Removal PU700 PU701 PU704

13.2.1).
2. Disconnect the pump connector. 13

Clamps (4)
VR3-497
13-9
4. Remove the screws and then the pump. Screws (2)
P1 Circulation Pump (PU700)

VR3-466
5. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the Pump

pinchcocks.
6. Loosen the hose clamps and disconnect the inlet

and outlet hoses from the pump.
7. Remove the pump.
Installation

removal.
Hose Clamps (2) Pinchcocks (2)
Hoses (2)
13.2.8).
R3-365
13.2.6 PS1/PS2 Circulation Pump (PU702/PU703) Replacement
Removal PU702 Connector PU703 Connector

13.2.1).
2. Disconnect the pump connector.
R3-354-2
13-10
3. Open the harness clamp. Screws (2) Pump
4. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the Pinchcocks (3)
pinchcocks. Hoses (2)
5. Loosen the hose clamps and disconnect the inlet

and outlet hoses from the pump.
6. Remove the screws and then the pump.
Installation

Hose Clamps (2) Harness Clamp
removal.
R3-366

13.2.8).
13.2.7 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F704) Replacement
Removal Harness Clamp

Screws (2) F704 Connector
12.7.2).
2. Open the harness clamp and disconnect the F704

connector. 13
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F704)
removal. R3-367
NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow points to the outside.
13-11
13.2.8 Hose Connection
1. Connect the hoses securely so that they extend Docking Portion

as far as the base of the connection opening.
2. Inspect the hose clamps and replace them if the

docking portion is damaged.
Hose Clamp
0681
3. Check that the hose clamps are not twisted when

they are installed. Hold each end of the clamp
with a pair of pliers and squeeze the ends
together securely.
4. After operating the machine for 30 minutes, check

that there is no solution leaking from the hose
connections.
Hose Clamp
0680
13-12
13.3 Waste Solution System
13.3.1 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS728) Replacement
Removal Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS728)

FS728 Connector
12.7.2).
2. Disconnect the FS728 connector.
4. Remove the waste solution tank cap.
5. Remove the screw and then the sensor from the

cap. Harness Clamps (2) Solution Tank Cap Screws (2)
R3-368
Installation

removal.
13.3.2 Waste Solution Tank Replacement
Removal Screws (2)
1. Remove the processor rear cover (see Subsection 13

12.7.2).

17.1.1).
3. Correct waste solution into the waste tank.
4. Remove the screws and then the waste solution

tank bracket.
Waste Solution Tank Bracket

VR3-467
13-13
13.3 Waste Solution System
5. Loosen the hose clamps then disconnect the P1, Hoses (3)
P2 and PS1 waste hoses from the tank.
6. Remove the tank cap from the tank.
Clamps (3)
Tank Cap
VR3-468
7. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the drain cock Drain Hose
from the hose. Drain Cock
Cord Tie
R3-370
8. Remove the waste solution tank. Hose Clamps (2)
9. Loosen the hose clamp and then disconnect the

overflow hose from the tank.
10. Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the drain

hose from the tank.
Installation

removal. Overflow Hose
Waste Solution Tank
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see Subsection R3-369
13.2.8).
13-14
14. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM
Parts Location....................................................................................... 14-2

14.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section ............................................................ 14-3
14.1.1 Replenisher Cartridge Door Open/Close Sensor (D724) Replacement ............ 14-3
14.1.2 Replenisher Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D722/D723)
Replacement ........................................................................................................ 14-4
14.1.3 Replenisher Cartridge Open Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................................ 14-5
14.1.4 Replenisher Cartridge Open Cam/Gear Replacement ....................................... 14-6
14.1.5 Cartridge Opening Motor (M720) Replacement .................................................. 14-6
14.1.6 Replenisher Door Lock Manual Releasing.......................................................... 14-8
14.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System .................................... 14-9
14.2.1 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Filter Replacement.............................................. 14-9
14.2.2 P1R/P2RA/P2RB/PSR Replenisher Pump (PU721/ PU722/ PU723/ PU724)
Replacement ........................................................................................................ 14-9
14.2.3 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement ............................................................. 14-11
14.2.4 Replenisher Pump Bellows Replacement ......................................................... 14-12
14.2.5 PSR Filter Replacement ...................................................................................... 14-13
14.2.6 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS723/FS727) Replacement........................ 14-13
14.2.7 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement............................. 14-15
14.2.8 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Tank Replacement ............................................ 14-17
14.2.9 PSR Tank Replacement ...................................................................................... 14-20
14.3 Auto Washing and P1R Stirring System........................................... 14-21
14.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU720) Replacement...................................................... 14-21
14.3.2 Rack Auto Washing Valve/P1W Water Replenishment Valve
(S720 to S723) Replacement ............................................................................ 14-22
14.3.3 Cartridge Washing Valve/P1R Stirring Valve (S728 to S731)
Replacement ...................................................................................................... 14-23
14
14-1
Parts Location

P1R Replenishment
Nozzle
P1W Replenishment PSR Replenishment Nozzle
Nozzle
P2RB
Replenishment Dryer Entrance
Nozzle Squeegee Rack
Auto Washing Nozzle
P2RA Replenishment
Nozzle
PSR Replenisher
Rack Auto Washing Tank
Valves ’S720 to S722/
P1W Water
Replenishment
Valve (S723)
PSR Upper
Level Sensor
(FS723)
P1R/P2RA/P2RB PSR Lower

e Replenisher Tanks
w Level Sensor
q (FS727)
PSR Drain
Cock
Replenisher P2RB
Filter
Water Supply
PSR Port
P1R
P2RA
P2RB
Auto Washing
Pump (PU720)
P2RA
u
Replenisher P1R
Filters y PSR
Drain Cocks Replenisher Cartridge
t P2RB
r P2RA Replenisher Cartridge Box
P1R P1R/P2RA/P2RB Cartridge
Replenisher Pumps Washing Valves (S728/S729/S730)/
(PU721 to PU724) P1 Stirring Valve (S731)
R3-243
No. Sensor No. Name No. Sensor No. Name

FS720 P1R Upper Level Sensor r D725 P1R Pump Rotation Sensor
q
FS724 P1R Lower Level Sensor t D726 P2RA Pump Rotation Sensor
FS721 P2RA Upper Level Sensor y D727 P2RB Pump Rotation Sensor
w
FS725 P2RA Lower Level Sensor u D728 PSR Pump Rotation Sensor
FS722 P2RB Upper Level Sensor
e
FS726 P2RB Lower Level Sensor
14-2
14.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section
14.1.1 Replenisher Cartridge Door Open/Close Sensor (D724) Replacement
Removal Screw Screw (Loosen)

12.7.1).
2. Loosen the screw then remove the other screw

and switch bracket.
Switch Bracket
VR3-476
Screw
Connector Cover
VR3-477 14
4. Disconnect the D724 connector from the switch.
5. Remove the spring, E-ring and sensor.
Installation

removal.
VR3-478
14-3
14.1.2 Replenisher Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D722/D723) Replacement
Removal Screw

12.7.1).
2. Remove the screw and then the sensor cover.
Sensor Cover
VR3-479
3. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket. Sensor Bracket
Screw
VR3-480
4. Disconnect the D722/D723 connector. Replenisher Cartridge

D722 Connector Box Upper Sensor
5. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensors.
Installation

Replenisher Cartridge
removal. D723 Connector Box Lower Sensor
VR3-481
14-4
14.1.3 Replenisher Cartridge Open Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Washers (2) E-rings (2)

12.7.1).
2. Remove the E-rings and then the washers.
3. Remove the replenisher cartridge open unit.
Replenisher Cartridge Unit

VR3-482
Reinstallation Cam Roller

removal.
NOTE: Align the cam roller with the up/down slide groove
when installing the unit.
Groove
14
VR3-485
14-5
14.1.4 Replenisher Cartridge Open Cam/Gear Replacement
Removal
Cam Gear Assembly
1. Remove the replenisher cartridge open unit (see
Subsection 14.1.3).
2. Remove the E-ring and then the cam gear

assembly.
Installation

removal. E-ring
VR3-484
14.1.5 Cartridge Opening Motor (M720) Replacement
Removal Clamps (3)
1. Remove:
• Lower connector cover (see Subsection 13.2.1).

• Replenisher cartridge box upper/lower sensor
bracket (see Subsection 14.1.2).
• Replenisher cartridge open unit (see Subsection
14.1.3).

M720 connector.
3. Drain the remaining solutions from the tanks.

M720 Connector
VR3-487
14-6
4. Disconnect the overflow hose from the bosses on Opening Nozzle Section
Screws (2)
the floor.
5. Loosen the two screws, and remove the other two

screws and the opening nozzle section.
Screws (2)(Loosen)
Overflow Hose
R3-245
6. Remove the screws and then the opening unit Opening Unit Bracket Screws (4)
bracket.
VR3-486
14
Screws (4) Motor Bracket

VR3-488
14-7
8. Remove the screws and then the motor from the Screws (2)
bracket.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After reinstallation, pour the replenisher through

Cartridge Opening
each cartridge opening nozzle section being careful
Motor (M720)
not to allow contamination.
VR3-489
14.1.6 Replenisher Door Lock Manual Releasing
1. Insert the screwdriver through the hole in the right Screwdriver

side cover and release the lock by pushing the
lock arm.
R3-344
14-8
14.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System
14.2.1 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Filter Replacement
Removal Hose Clamps (2)

Hoses (2)

13.1.1).

pinchcocks.
3. Loosen the hose clamps and disconnect the

hoses from the filter.
Installation
Pinchcocks (2) Replenisher Filter
R3-371
removal.
NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely (see Subsection

13.2.8).
• Perform Menu 0620 “Pump Output Measurement/
Setting” (see Subsection 5.11.1).
14.2.2 P1R/P2RA/P2RB/PSR Replenisher Pump (PU721/ PU722/

PU723/ PU724) Replacement
Removal PU723 Connector

PU724 Connector
1. Remove: 14
• Upper connector cover (see Subsection 13.1.2).
• Lower connector cover (see Subsection 13.2.1).
• Right side cover (see Subsection 12.7.1).

pump connectors.
PU721 Connector Clamps (3)

PU722 Connector
VR3-490
14-9
Clamps (8)
VR3-491
4. Open the clamps and then disconnect the pump D727 Connector D728 Connector
rotation sensor connectors.
D726 Connector Clamps (4)

D725 Connector
VR3-605
5. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the Hoses (2) Pinchcocks (2)
pinchcocks.
6. Cut the cord tie securing the outlet hose.
7. Loosen the inlet hose clamp and disconnect the

hose from the pump.
Hose Clamp Cord Tie

R3-372
14-10
8. Remove the screw and then the replenisher Replenisher Pump

pump.
Installation

removal.

13.2.8).
• Perform Menu 0620 “Pump Output Measurement/
Setting” (see Subsection 5.11.1). Screw
VR3-492
14.2.3 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement
Removal Joint Nuts (2)

13.1.1).

12.7.1).

pinchcocks.
4. Loosen the joint nuts. 14

Hoses (2) Pinchcocks (2)
R3-373
5. Remove the valves from the pump.
Installation

removal.
Valves (2)
NOTE: After installation, perform Menu 0620 “Pump Output
Measurement/Setting” (see Subsection 5.11.1).
RD232
14-11
14.2.4 Replenisher Pump Bellows Replacement
Removal Joint Nuts (2)

13.1.1).

12.7.1).

pinchcocks.
4. Loosen the joint nuts.
Hoses (2) Pinchcocks (2)

R3-373
5. Remove the screw and then the replenisher Replenisher Pump

pump.
Screw
VR3-492
6. Turn the bellows 90 degrees counterclockwise to Bellows

remove it.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: After installation, perform Menu 0620 “Pump Output

L2712
14-12
14.2.5 PSR Filter Replacement
Removal Hoses (2)
1. Remove the processor front cover (see Subsection Pinchcocks (2)

13.1.1).

pinchcocks.

Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Hose Clamps (2)

PSR Filter
removal. R3-375

13.2.8).
• After installation, perform the following
adjustments.
1) Menu 0620 “Pump Output Measurement/
Setting” (see Subsection 5.11.1).
2) Menu 0621 “Auto Cleaning Output
14.2.6 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS723/FS727) Replacement
Removal FS723 Connector FS727 Connector 14

12.7.2).
2. Open the clamp and disconnect the FS723/FS727

connector.
Clamp
VR3-494
14-13
Clamps (2)
VR3-495
4. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the Hose

Pinchcocks (2) Hoses (2)
pinchcocks. Clamps (2)
5. Remove the screw and then the level sensor.

Screws (2)

hoses from the level sensor.
PSR Upper
Level Sensor
(FS723)
Installation

removal.

13.2.8). PSR Lower Level Sensor (FS727)
R3-376
14-14
14.2.7 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement
P1R Upper FS720

P2RA Upper FS721
P2RB Upper FS722
P1R Lower FS724
P2RA Lower FS725
P2RB Lower FS726
Removal FS720 Connector
1. Remove the right side cover (see Subsection FS721 Connector

12.7.1). FS722 Connector
2. Drain remaining solutions from the tanks.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector.
FS724 Connector
FS725 Connector
FS726 Connector
R3-377
4. Disconnect the overflow hose from the bosses on Opening Nozzle Section
Screws (2)
the floor.
5. Loosen the two screws, and remove the other two

screws and the opening nozzle section.
14
Screws (2)(Loosen)
Overflow Hose
R3-245
14-15
6. Remove the screws securing the drain cocks. Screws (3)
Drain Cocks (3)

R3-246
7. Remove the screw and pull out the replenisher Replenisher Tank
tank.
Screw
R3-247
8. Open the harness clamps. P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor

(FS720/FS724)
9. Remove the screws and then the level sensor. Screws (2) P2RB Upper/Lower
Level Sensor (FS722/FS726)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Pour the replenisher solutions into the replenisher

tanks through the opening nozzle section taking P2RA Upper/Lower Level Sensor Clamp
care not to contaminate the P1R solution. (FS721/FS725)
R3-485-1
14-16
14.2.8 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Tank Replacement
Removal

13.1.1).
2. Drain remaining solutions from the tanks.
3. Pinch the tank side hoses to the P1R, P2RA and

P2RB replenisher filters with the pinchcocks.

Hoses (3) Hose Clamps (3)

Pinchcocks (3)
R3-466
5. Disconnect the overflow hose. Opening Nozzle Section

Screws (2)
6. Loosen the two screws, then take out the other

two screws and remove the opening nozzle
section.
Screws (2)(Loosen)
14
Overflow Hose
R3-245
7. Remove the screws securing the drain cocks. Screws (3)
Drain Cocks (3)

R3-246
14-17
8. Open the harness clamps. S728 Connector
9. Disconnect the S728 connector.
Harness Clamps (3)

R3-379
10. Pinch the cartridge washing valve inlet hose with

the pinchcock.
11. Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the

cartridge washing valve inlet hose.
Hose Hose Clamp

Pinchcock
R3-467
12. Remove the screw and then the replenisher tank. Replenisher Tank
Screw
R3-483
14-18
13. Open the clamp. Upper/Lower Level Sensors (3) Screws (6) Clamp
14. Remove the screws and then the upper/lower

level sensor from the tanks.
15. Remove the screws then the cartridge washing

valve assembly.
Cartridge Washing Screws (2)

Valve Assembly
R3-485

upper side hoses.
Hose Clamps (4) Hoses (4)

R3-484
17. Loosen the hose clamps and disconnect the lower

14
Hose Clamps (6)
side hoses.
Installation

removal.
NOTE: • Take care not to bend the replenisher hoses under

the tanks when installing.
• Connect the hoses securely (see Subsection
13.2.8).
• After installation, perform Installation Menu “92 Hoses (6)
MIX REPL.” and “93 PUMP AIR EXT.” from the
R3-486
operation panel on the LP-5000.
14-19
14.2.9 PSR Tank Replacement
Removal Bracket
1. Remove the PSR upper/lower level sensor

(FS723/FS727) (see Subsection 14.2.6).
2. Drain remaining solutions from the PSR tank.
3. Remove the screws and then the bracket.
Screws (2)
VR3-606
4. Loosen the hose clamps and disconnect the Hose Clamps (6)
Hoses (6)
hoses from the tank.
5. Remove the PSR tank.
Installation

removal.

13.2.8).
• After installation, perform Installation Menu “91
PSR AIR EXT.” from the operation panel on the
LP5000. PSR Tank
VR3-540
14-20
14.3 Auto Washing and P1R Stirring System
14.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU720) Replacement
Removal PU720

13.2.1).
2. Disconnect the PU720 connector.
Clamps (2)
VR3-498
4. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the Hoses (3) Auto Washing
pinchcocks. Pump (PU720)
Pinchcocks (3)
hoses from the pump.
6. Loosen the screw, remove the other screw and

then the auto washing pump.
Installation

removal. 14
13.2.8).
• After installation, perform the following
adjustments.
Screw (Loosen) Hose Clamps (2)
1) Installation Menu “91 PSR AIR EXT.” from the
operation panel on the LP5000. Screw
2) Menu 0621 “Auto Cleaning Output R3-382
14-21
14.3.2 Rack Auto Washing Valve/P1W Water Replenishment Valve

(S720 to S723) Replacement
Removal Clamp

13.2.1).
S723 Connector
VR3-541
4. Loosen the screws and then the valve bracket. Valve Bracket
Screws (2)(Loosen)
R3-383
5. Pinch the valve hoses with the pinchcocks.

hoses from the valves.
Hoses (5) Hose Clamps (5)

Pinchcocks (5)
R3-384
14-22
7. Open the harness clamp. Rack Auto Washing Valve/P1W

Water Replenishment Valve (S720 to S723)
8. Remove the screws and then the valves from the
bracket.
Installation

removal.

13.2.8). Screws (2) Clamp
VR3-499
14.3.3 Cartridge Washing Valve/P1R Stirring Valve

(S728 to S731) Replacement
Removal S731 Connector

12.7.1).
14
Harness Clamps (2)

R3-385
14-23
4. Open the harness clamps. Valve Bracket Harness Clamp
5. Remove the screws and then the valve bracket.
Screws (2)
R3-386
6. Pinch the valve hoses with the pinchcocks. Hoses (5)

hoses from the valves.
Pinchcocks (5) Hose Clamps (5)

R3-387
8. Remove the screws and then the valves from the Cartridge Washing Valve/P1R
bracket. Stirring Valve (S728 to S731)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see Subsection Screws (2)

13.2.8). VR3-500
14-24
15. DRYER SECTION
Parts Location....................................................................................... 15-2

15.1 Dryer Rack............................................................................................. 15-3
15.1.1 Dryer Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................... 15-3
15.1.2 Dryer Section Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............................................ 15-3
15.1.3 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................................... 15-4
15.1.4 Dryer Mesh Belt/Roller Replacement................................................................... 15-6
15.1.5 Dryer Rack/Dryer Exit Unit Drive Belt and Gear Replacement.......................... 15-7
15.1.6 Dryer Section Cover Open/Close Sensor (D763) Replacement ........................ 15-8
15.2 Dryer Fan/Heater Section................................................................... 15-10
15.2.1 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS760) Replacement............................................ 15-10
15.2.2 Dryer Fan (F760) Replacement........................................................................... 15-10
15.2.3 Dryer Heater Assembly Replacement................................................................ 15-12
15
15-1
Parts Location
Dryer Fan (F760)
Dryer Rack Mesh Belt
Dryer Rack
Dryer Heater (H760) Processor Cover (Small) (Dryer Duct)
PD3-047
15-2
15.1 Dryer Rack
15.1.1 Dryer Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (5)
1. Remove the right side cover (see Subsection 12.7.1)
2. Disconnect the sorter cable if the optional

SU700AR sorter is installed.
3. Remove the screws and then the dryer section

front cover.
Reinstallation

removal. Dryer Section Front Cover
VR3-445
15.1.2 Dryer Section Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal

12.7.1).
2. Remove the processor cover (small) (dryer duct).
15
Processor Cover (Small)(Dryer Duct)

VR3-507
15-3
15.1 Dryer Rack
3. Remove the screws and then the dryer section Dryer Section Rear Cover
rear cover.
Reinstallation

removal. Screws (5)
VR3-446
15.1.3 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the dryer rack cover.
Dryer Rack Cover

R3-388
2. Pull the lock release levers and open the dryer Lock Release Levers
rack.
Dryer Rack
R3-104
15-4
15.1 Dryer Rack
3. Remove the screws and then the rack bracket.
Rack Bracket Screw

R3-391
4. Remove the screws securing the stopper belts. Screws (4)
Stopper Belts (2)

R3-390
5. Remove the dryer rack by lifting it.
15
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Dryer Rack

removal.
R3-463
15-5
15.1 Dryer Rack
15.1.4 Dryer Mesh Belt/Roller Replacement
Removal Belt Cover

Washers (2)
1. Remove the dryer rack (see Subsection 15.1.3).
2. Remove the screws, washers and then the belt

cover.
Screws (6)
VR3-501
3. Remove the E-rings then the bearings and E-rings (4)

entrance rollers.
Entrance Rollers (2)
Bearings (4)
VR3-502
4. Remove the E-ring and then the drive gear. E-ring Drive Gear
5. Remove the coil springs. Exit Rollers (2)
6. Remove the E-rings then the bearings and exit

rollers.
E-rings (4)
Bearings (4) Springs (4)

VR3-503
15-6
15.1 Dryer Rack
7. Remove the E-rings then the bearings and shafts. E-rings (6) Dryer Mesh Belt
Bearings (6)
8. Remove the dryer mesh belt.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Shafts (3)

removal.
VR3-504
15.1.5 Dryer Rack/Dryer Exit Unit Drive Belt and Gear Replacement
Removal Upper Gear Bracket Screws (2)
1. Remove the dryer rack (see Subsection 15.1.3).
3. Remove the screws and then the upper gear

bracket.
4. Remove the screws and then the lower gear

bracket.
5. Remove the drive belt.
Drive Belt Screws (2) Spring

Lower Gear Bracket
15
R3-394
6. Remove the E-ring then the bearings and gear Upper Bracket
from the upper bracket.
Bearings (2)
Gear
E-ring
VR3-505
15-7
15.1 Dryer Rack
7. Remove the E-ring and then the bearings and

Lower Bracket
gear from the lower bracket.
Bearings (2)
Installation
E-ring

removal. Gear
VR3-506
15.1.6 Dryer Section Cover Open/Close Sensor (D763) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:
• Dryer section front cover (see Subsection 15.1.1).

• Dryer section rear cover (see Subsection 15.1.2).
• Dryer rack(see Subsection 15.1.3).
• SU700AR sorter (optional) (see Subsection
16.2.1).
2. Remove the processor cover (small)(dryer duct).
Processor Cover (Small)(Dryer Duct)

VR3-507
3. Disconnect the connectors. TS760 JD766 JPR22
JSOT_M Connector JSOT_S Connector

VR3-508
15-8
15.1 Dryer Rack
4. Remove the hex. socket head bolts. Dryer Section Screw
5. Move the dryer section slightly toward the

processor side.
NOTE: If the dryer section is moved excessively, the
harnesses and washing hose may be damaged.
D763 Connector
6. Remove the screw securing the sensor bracket.
7. Disconnect the D763 connector from the sensor.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Dryer Section Cover Open/Close Sensor (D763)
R3-395
removal.
15
15-9
15.2 Dryer Fan/Heater Section
15.2.1 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS760) Replacement
Removal Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS760) Clamps (2)
1. Remove the dryer section front cover

Screw
2. Disconnect the TS760 connector.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of TS760 Connector

removal. VR3-509
15.2.2 Dryer Fan (F760) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the dryer section rear cover

Dryer Rack Cover

R3-388
15-10
3. Open the harness clamps. F760 Connector D764 Connector
Clamps (3)
VR3-510
5. Remove the screws and then the harness cover.
Screws (2) Harness Cover

VR3-511
6. Remove the screws and then the safety Screws (3) Safety Thermostat Cover
thermostat cover.
15
VR3-512
15-11
7. Loosen the two screws then remove the other Screws (2)(Loosen)
screws and dryer fan assembly.
Installation

Dryer Fan Assembly Screws (2)
removal. VR3-513
15.2.3 Dryer Heater Assembly Replacement
Removal Screws (2)
1. Remove the dryer fan assembly (see Subsection

15.2.2).
Clamp
Connector Cover
VR3-472
15-12
4. Disconnect the connectors. D760A Connector
H760 Connector
VR3-515
5. Remove the screws and then the dryer heater

assembly.
Installation

Screws (3) Dryer Heater Assembly
removal.
VR3-516
15
15-13
16. PRINT EXIT SECTION/SORTER
Parts Location....................................................................................... 16-2

16.1 Dryer Exit Unit....................................................................................... 16-5
16.1.1 Dryer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................................................... 16-5
16.1.3 Upper Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ................................................ 16-7
16.1.4 Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor (D771P) Replacement.................................... 16-8
16.1.5 Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor LED (D771L) Replacement............................ 16-8
16.1.6 Feed Roller Drive Gear Replacement .................................................................. 16-9
16.1.7 Feed Roller Replacement.................................................................................... 16-10
16.1.8 Dryer Exit Section Cover Open/Close Sensor (D766) Replacement............... 16-11
16.2 SU700AR Sorter (Optional) ................................................................ 16-13
16.2.1 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................................... 16-13
16.2.2 Sorter Full Sensor (D811) Replacement ............................................................ 16-13
16.2.3 SWA23 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................... 16-14
16.2.4 Sorter Drive Motor (M810) Replacement ........................................................... 16-15
16.2.5 Sorter Tray Stop Position Sensor (D810) Replacement................................... 16-16
16
16-1
Parts Location
● Dryer Exit Unit
Upper Guide Assembly
Rear
Front
PD3-018
Nip Roller 3
Nip Roller 2
Front
Nip Roller 4
Nip Roller 1
Rear
PD3-029
16-2
Parts Location
Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor (D771P)
Rear
Front
Nip Roller
Feed Roller
Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor LED (D771L)
PD3-030
16
16-3
Parts Location
● SU700AR Sorter
Sorter Drive Motor (M810) Sorter Tray Stop Position Sensor (D810)
Drive Chain
SWA23 Circuit Board
Sorter Full Sensor (D811)
PD3-048
16-4
16.1 Dryer Exit Unit
16.1.1 Dryer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screws (4)

3. Remove the screws and then the dryer section top

cover.
Dryer Section Top Cover

VR3-447
4. Remove the tray.

Screws (4) Dryer Exit Section Cover
5. Remove the screws then the bracket.
6. Remove the screws then the dryer exit section

cover.
Screws (3)
Tray
Bracket
VR3-607
7. Open the harness clamp. Clamp

16
8. Disconnect the JD771 connector.
JD771 Connector
VR3-448
16-5
9. Remove the screws and then the dryer exit unit.

Screws (4)
Reinstallation

removal.
Dryer Exit Unit
VR3-449
Removal D771P Connector

Clamp
1. Remove the dryer exit unit (see Subsection 16.1.1).
2. Open the clamp.
3. Disconnect the D771P connector.
4. Remove the screws then the sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket Screws (2)

VR3-450-1
5. Remove the coil springs. Nip Roller 3

Nip Roller 4 Springs (2) E-rings (2)
6. Remove the E-rings then the bearings and rollers.
Installation

removal.
Bearings (2) Nip Roller 2 Nip Roller 1

VR3-450
16-6
16.1.3 Upper Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Removal Screw Screw (Loosen)
2. Remove the front coil spring.
3. Loosen the screw and remove the other screw.
Spring
VR3-451
4. Open the harness clamps and disconnect the D771P Connector Clamps (4) Screw
D771P connector.
5. Remove the rear coil spring.
6. Loosen the screw and remove the other screw.
Screw (Loosen)
Spring
VR3-452
7. Remove the upper guide assembly.

Upper Guide Assembly
16
Reinstallation

removal.
VR3-453
16-7
16.1.4 Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor (D771P) Replacement
Removal D771P Connector Clamp
1. Remove the dryer section top cover


D771P connector.
Installation

removal. Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor (D771P) Screw
VR3-454
16.1.5 Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor LED (D771L) Replacement
Removal Guide Plate Screws (2)
1. Remove the upper guide assembly (see Subsection

16.1.3).
2. Remove the screws and then the guide plate.
VR3-608
16-8
3. Disconnect the D771L connector. Screw
4. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED

assembly.
D771L Connector Sensor LED Assembly

VR3-456
5. Release the locking tabs then remove the cover Sensor LED Cover
and sensor LED.
Installation

removal. Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor LED (D771L)
VR3-457
16.1.6 Feed Roller Drive Gear Replacement
Removal
16
2. Remove the E-ring then the one-way clutch gear.
One -way Clutch Gear E-ring

VR3-458
16-9
3. Remove the E-rings and then the idler gears. Drive Gears (5)
4. Remove the E-rings and then the drive gears. E-rings (5)
Installation
E-rings (4)
removal. Idler Gears (4)
VR3-459
Removal
Screws (2 each)
1. Remove the upper guide assembly (see Subsection Guide Plates (3)
16.1.3).
2. Remove the feed roller drive gears (see Subsection

16.1.6).
3. Remove the screws and then the guide plates.
VR3-460
4. Remove the screws then the guide plates. Guide Plate (3)
Screws (4)
Screws (2)
Screw
VR3-609
16-10
5. Remove the spring from the front side. E-rings (7) Springs (2)
Bearings (6)
6. Remove the E-rings and bearings from the front
side.
7. Remove the spring from the rear side.
8. Remove the E-rings and bearings from the rear

side.
E-rings (6) Bearings (6)

VR3-461
9. Remove the feed rollers. Rollers (6)
Installation

removal.
VR3-462
16.1.8 Dryer Exit Section Cover Open/Close Sensor (D766) Replacement
Removal

16
Dryer Rack Cover

R3-388
16-11
3. Remove the screws and then the dryer section top Screws (4)
cover.
Dryer Section Top Cover

VR3-447
4. Open the clamp. Screw

D766 Connector
5. Disconnect the D766 connector.
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of Clamp Dryer Exit Section Cover
removal. Open/Close Sensor (D766)
VR3-579
16-12
16.2 SU700AR Sorter (Optional)
16.2.1 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Disconnect the sorter cable from the dryer section

and insert it into the cable set hole as shown.
2. Remove the sorter by holding the grips as shown.
Sorter Cable
Reinstallation Cable Set Hole

removal.
R3-098
16.2.2 Sorter Full Sensor (D811) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the sorter (see Subsection 16.2.1).

cover.
Circuit Board Cover Screws (3)

VR3-517
16
16-13
3. Disconnect the D811 connector from the sensor. Locking Tabs
D811 connector
Installation

removal. Sorter Full Sensor (D811)
VR3-518
16.2.3 SWA23 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
2. Remove the screws and then the circuit board.
Circuit Board Cover Screws (3)

VR3-517
16-14
3. Disconnect the connectors from the circuit board. Connectors (4)
Installation

removal. SWA23 Circuit Board Screws (2)
VR3-519
16.2.4 Sorter Drive Motor (M810) Replacement
Removal Sorter Stopper Cover
2. Remove the screws and then the sorter stopper

cover.
Screws (3)
VR3-520
3. Remove the screws and then the sorter left side

cover.
16
Sorter Left Side Cover Screws (7)

VR3-521
16-15
4. Open the harness clamp. Sorter Drive Motor (M810)
Installation

removal.
Screws (3) Clamp M810 Connector
VR3-522
16.2.5 Sorter Tray Stop Position Sensor (D810) Replacement
Removal Highest Rung Tray
1. Remove the sorter (see Subsection 16.2.1). Screws (2)
2. Remove the screws then the highest rung tray.
VR3-610
3. Disconnect the D810 connector. Sensor Bracket Screw
4. Remove the screw then the sensor bracket.
D810 Connector
VR3-611
16-16
5. Loosen the locking tabs and then remove the Sorter Tray Stop Position Sensor (D810)
sensor.
Installation

VR3-612
16
16-17
17. ELECTRICAL SECTION
Parts Location....................................................................................... 17-2

17.1 Power Input Section ............................................................................. 17-4
17.1.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................................................ 17-4
17.1.2 Built-in Circuit Breaker Replacement .................................................................. 17-5
17.1.3 Noise Filter (NF1)/Capacitor (C1) Replacement.................................................. 17-6
17.2 Power Supply/Electrical Equipment Section ..................................... 17-7
17.2.1 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2 (F630/F631) Replacement................................. 17-7
17.2.2 Power Supply/Electrical Equipment Section Inner Cover Removal/
Reinstallation ......................................................................................................... 17-8
17.2.3 AC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation............................................ 17-8
17.2.4 PAC27 Circuit Board Replacement.................................................................... 17-10
17.2.5 SSR1 to SSR3 Replacement ............................................................................... 17-10
17.2.6 Relay (K1 to K3) Replacement............................................................................ 17-11
17.2.7 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP5) Replacement .................................................... 17-11
17.2.8 Feed Section Cooling Fan 2 (F607) Replacement ............................................ 17-12
17.3 DC Power Supply Section.................................................................. 17-14
17.3.1 Motor Driver (K3201 Circuit Board) Replacement ............................................ 17-14
17.3.2 DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation.......................................... 17-14
17.3.3 DC Power Supply Unit Replacement ................................................................. 17-15
17.3.4 PWR27 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................... 17-15
17.4 Control Section ................................................................................... 17-16
17.4.1 CTL27 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................... 17-16
17.4.2 OPA27 Circuit Board Replacement.................................................................... 17-17
17.4.3 GMC27 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................... 17-17
17.4.4 Control Section Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F600/F601) Replacement ........................... 17-18
17.4.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan 3 (F602) Replacement ....................................... 17-19
17.4.6 START Switch (D684) Replacement................................................................... 17-19
17.4.7 Left Side Cover Open/Close Sensor A/B (D681A/D681B) Replacement......... 17-20
17.4.8 Program Downloading to GMC27 Circuit Board............................................... 17-21
17
17-1
Parts Location
Control Section Exhaust Fan 3 (F602)
Control Section
Exhaust Fan 1 (F600)
GMC27
Circuit Board
Control Section
CTL27
Circuit Board
PWR27 Circuit Board
Motor Driver OPA27

(K3201 Circuit Board) Circuit Board
Power Supply
Cooling Fan 2 (F631)
DC Power Supply Unit Built-in Circuit

Breaker (NFB1)
Power Supply
Cooling Fan 1 (F600)
AC Power Supply Bracket Noise Filter (NF1)

Power Input Terminal Block (TB1)
PD3-049-3
17-2
Parts Location
● AC Power Supply Bracket
Circuit Protector (CP1)
Circuit Protector (CP5) Circuit Protector (CP4)
Terminal Block
SSR3
Relay (K1)
Relay (K2)
Relay (K3)
SSR1
SSR2
PAC27 Circuit Board
PD3-049-2
17
17-3
17.1 Power Input Section
17.1.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
IMPORTANT
If the optional slide rails are used, move the LP-
5000 gently to prevent processing solution
contamination.
Removal Screws (4) Clamp LAN Cable

operational checks then turn OFF the built-in
3. Disconnect the LAN cable.

screws and the printer rear cover.
Reinstallation Printer Rear Cover

Screws (2) (Loosen)
VR3-436
removal.
17-4
17.1.2 Built-in Circuit Breaker Replacement
When servicing the power input section parts, make

sure the built-in circuit breaker and the main power
supply on the power distribution board are both set to
the OFF position. If the main power is left ON,
electricity will flow as far as the power supply section,
and this can cause electric shocks and/or short
circuiting.
Removal Power Input Bracket
1. Remove the printer rear cover(see Subsection

17.1.1).
2. Remove the nut securing the power supply cord

guide.
3. Remove the screws securing the power input

bracket and move the bracket rearward as shown.
Screws (5) Nut

R3-481
4. Disconnect the connectors from the circuit board. Locking Tabs (4)
Connectors (4)
5. Release the locking tabs and remove the built-in

circuit breaker.
Installation
17
removal. Built-in Circuit Breaker
R3-482
17-5
17.1.3 Noise Filter (NF1)/Capacitor (C1) Replacement
Removal

17.1.1).
2. Remove the screw and then the capacitor.
Capacitor
Screw
R3-398
3. Remove the screws and then the noise filter. Plain Washers (8)
Wires (4)
Nuts (4) Lock Washers (4)
4. Remove the terminal nuts and washers, then
disconnect the wires from the noise filter.
Installation

removal. Screws (2) Noise Filter
R3-397
17-6
17.2 Power Supply/Electrical Equipment Section
17.2.1 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2 (F630/F631) Replacement
Removal F630 Connector Clamps (2)

17.1.1).
3. Disconnect the fan connectors.
F631 Connector
VR3-525
4. Loosen the screw then remove the other screws

Screw (Loosen) Fan Bracket
and fan bracket.
Screws (2)
VR3-526

Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 (F630)
6. Disconnect the fan connector. Screws (2)
17
7. Remove the screws and then the fan from the
bracket.
Installation

F630 Connector
removal.
Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 (F631) Clamp

VR3-527
17-7
17.2.2 Power Supply/Electrical Equipment Section Inner Cover

Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Reinstallation

removal. Power Supply/Electrical
Screws (4) Equipment Section Inner Cover
R3-363
17.2.3 AC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the fan bracket (see Subsection 17.2.1).
2. Remove the power supply/electrical equipment

section inner cover (see Subsection 17.2.2).
3. Loosen the screws.
4. Disconnect the all connectors on the PAC27

circuit board.
Screws (2) (Loosen) Connectors (10)

R3-476
17-8
5. Open the clamps. Connectors (2)
Clamps (3)
R3-477
7. Remove the screws then pull out the bracket

slightly.
Screws (2) Bracket

R3-478
8. Remove the terminal cover from terminal block. Terminal Cover
9. Loosen the screws and disconnect the wires from

the terminal block.
10. Remove the bracket.
17
Reinstallation

Screws (2)
removal. Wires (4)
R3-479
17-9
17.2.4 PAC27 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal PAC27 Circuit Board
1. Pull out the AC power supply bracket

2. Release the locks of the spacers and remove the

circuit board.
Installation

removal. Spacers (8)
R3-480
17.2.5 SSR1 to SSR3 Replacement
Removal Screws (2) SSR2

SSR1

(see Subsection 17.2.3). Screws (4)
Terminal
2. Remove the screws and disconnect the wires Plates (4)
from the SSR.
3. Remove the screws and then the SSR.
Installation
SSR3
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Wires (4)

removal. R3-404
17-10
17.2.6 Relay (K1 to K3) Replacement
Removal Relay (K2) Relay (K1)

Relay (K3)
1. Pull out the AC power supply bracket Relay
2. Disconnect the connectors from the relay.
3. Remove the screw and then the relay from the

bracket.
Installation Screw

removal. Connectors (6)
R3-405
17.2.7 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP5) Replacement
Removal CP1 (8A) CP2 (8A)

2. Disconnect the connectors from the circuit

protector.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the circuit

protector from the bracket. CP3 (8A)
CP4 (8A)
Installation CP5 (8A)

removal.
Locking Tabs Connectors (2)

17
Circuit Protector
R3-406
17-11
17.2.8 Feed Section Cooling Fan 2 (F607) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the upper magazine setting lever cover

2. Remove the power supply/electrical equipment

section inner cover (see Subsection 17.2.2).
3. Open the clamps.
F607 Connector
Clamps (3)
R3-468
5. Remove the screw securing the front of the fan Rear Side Screw
cover.
Locking Tabs (2)
6. Withdraw the upper magazine table and remove
the screw securing the rear of the fan cover.
7. Release the locking tabs and remove the fan

cover.
Front Side Screw

Fan Cover
R3-469
17-12
8. Remove the fan from the fan cover.

Feed Section Cooling Fan 2 (F607)
Installation

removal.
NOTE: Route the fan harness in the groove in the fan cover
Groove
as shown. Fan Cover
R3-470
17
17-13
17.3 DC Power Supply Section
17.3.1 Motor Driver (K3201 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal Connectors (4)

17.1.1).
2. Disconnect the connectors from the motor driver. Screws (2)

(Loosen)

screw and the motor driver.
Installation
Screw
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Motor Driver

removal.
R3-408
17.3.2 DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal

17.1.1).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the PWR27

circuit board.
4. Remove the screws and then the bracket.
Screws (5)
Connectors (9)
DC Power Supply Bracket
Reinstallation
R3-409

removal.
17-14
17.3 DC Power Supply Section
17.3.3 DC Power Supply Unit Replacement
Removal DC Power Supply Unit
1. Remove the DC power supply bracket

Connector
(AC Input)
2. Disconnect all connectors from the unit.
3. Remove the screws and then the DC power

supply unit from the bracket.
Connectors (DC Output)

Installation
Screws (4)
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of R3-410
removal.
NOTE: After replacement, check DC voltage by referring the

“DC Voltage Check List” (see Subsection 18.6.1)
17.3.4 PWR27 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal PWR27 Circuit Board
1. Remove the power supply/electrical section inner

cover (see Subsection 17.2.2).

bracket.
Installation
Connectors Screws (7)
R3-411 17
removal.
17-15
17.4 Control Section
17.4.1 CTL27 Circuit Board Replacement
CTL33 CTL35 CTL37 CTL39 CTL41

CTL32 CTL34 CTL36 CTL38 CTL40 CTL1
CTL31 CTL2
CTL3
CTL30
CTL4
CTL29
CTL5
CTL28
CTL6
CTL26
CTL7
CTL25
CTL8
CTL24 CTL9
CTL27
CTL23 Circuit Board
Screws (9)
CTL22
CTL11 CTL10
CTL21 CTL20 CTL18 CTL16 CTL14 CTL12
CTL19 CTL17 CTL15 CTL13
Screw (Loosen) Screw (Loosen)
VR3-528
Removal

17.1.1).

screws and the circuit board.
Installation Switch S9

removal.
NOTE: • Before turning ON the power, turn the switch “S9”

on the CTL27 circuit board to the appropriate local
power supply voltage side.
• If the optional lower magazine system is not
installed, disconnect the CAN termination
connector (CTL39) from the old circuit board and
connect it to the new one.
R3-277
17-16
17.4.2 OPA27 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal OPA3 OPA4 OPA5 OPA6 OPA7

17.1.1).
Installation

removal.
OPA2 OPA1 OPA27 Screws (4) OPA8
NOTE: Disconnect the CAN termination connector (OPA6) Circuit Board
from the old circuit board and connect it to the new
VR3-529
one.
17.4.3 GMC27 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal Connectors (11)
1. Back up the printer parameter into the FD

(see Subsection 5.8.2). Clamps (3)

17.1.1).
5. Disconnect all connector from the GMC27 circuit

board. F602 Connector
Circuit Board Cover Screws (12) 17
R3-414
cover.
17-17
7. Remove the screws and then the circuit board. Screws (11)
GMC27 Circuit Board

R3-415
Installation Backup Battery Switch S1

removal.
NOTE: • After installation, turn ON the backup battery

switch “S1” on the GMC27 circuit board.
• Make sure the switch is ON because it has a soft
cover.
• After installation, download the program to the
GMC27 circuit board (see Subsection 17.4.8).
R3-276
17.4.4 Control Section Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F600/F601) Replacement
Removal Control Section Clamp

F600 Connector
1. Remove the printer rear cover (see Subsection Screws (2 each)
17.1.1).
3. Disconnect the fan connector.
Installation

removal.
Control Section F601 Connector
NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow points to the outside. Exhaust Fan 2 (F601)
VR3-530
17-18
17.4.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan 3 (F602) Replacement
Removal Control Section Exhaust Fan 3 (F602) Screws (2)

17.1.1).
3. Disconnect the fan connector.
Installation F602 Connector
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Clamps (3)

removal. VR3-531
17.4.6 START Switch (D684) Replacement
Removal Clamps (7)

17.1.1).
3. Disconnect the GMC20 connector from the

GMC27 circuit board.
GMC20 Connector
5. Remove the screws and then the start switch.
Start Switch (D684) Screws (2)
17
R3-416
Installation

removal.
17-19
17.4.7 Left Side Cover Open/Close Sensor A/B (D681A/D681B) Replacement
Removal D681A Connector

17.1.1).
4. Disconnect the connectors from the sensors.
Screws (2)
D681B Connector
Sensor Bracket
R3-417
5. Remove the coil spring. Bracket

E-rings (2)
6. Remove the E-rings.
7. Remove the bracket and then the sensors.
Spring
Installation Left Side Cover

Open/Close Sensor B (D681B)
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of Left Side Cover
removal. Open/Close Sensor A (D681A)
VR3-534
17-20
17.4.8 Program Downloading to GMC27 Circuit Board
This procedure should be performed after the GMC27

circuit board has been replaced.
1. Turn ON the main power supply and the built-in

circuit breaker. Press the power switch to start the
LP-5000.
NOTE: Do not start up the PC (DIC2).
2. On the operation panel, enter same IP address as

described below.
STANDBY $*
Ver.2.0-0X-003
1) Press the [MENU] key five times and then the

[Enter] key.
0 [MENU]
1 STARTUP CHK
2) Press the [▲] key.
0 [MENU]
9 INSTALLATION
3) Press the [s] key.
9 [INSTALLATION]
1 PSR AIR EXT.
4) Press the [▼] key four times.
17
9 [INSTALLATION]
5 IP ADDR. SET
5) Press the [Enter] key.
95 <IP ADDR. SET>
129168006244
6) Enter the same IP address as before by using

the [t], [s], [▲] and [▼] keys.
17-21
9 [INSTALLATION]
6 NET MASK SET
3. Enter the same net mask as before.
96 <NET MASK SET>
255255255224
2) Enter the same net mask as before using the

[t], [s], [▲] and [▼] keys.
9 [INSTALLATION]
6 NET MASK SET
4) Press the [t] key and then the [MENU] key to

return STANDBY screen.
STANDBY $*
Ver.2.0-0X-003
4. Start the PC (DIC2).
• The message “I-LP-2120” appears and

download to the GMC27 circuit board starts.
• When downloading to the GMC27 circuit board
is completed, the LP-5000 program starts up.
5. Proceed to Menu 1640 “Installation Information

Setup” and enter the serial number.
1) Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [15

Printer Maintenance] → [16 System Operation
Setup and Check] → [1640 Installation
Information Setup] → [Enter] buttons.
2) Enter the serial number in the “Serial No.” box.
6. Perform the post-operational checks for DIC2

only.
17-22
NOTE: Do not perform the post-operational checks for

the LP-5000.
7. Turn OFF the LP-5000.
1) Press the [MENU] key five times and then the

[Enter] key.
0 [MENU]
1 STARTUP CHK
2) Press the [▼] key four times.
0 [MENU]
5 SELECT FUNC
3) Press the [s] key.
5 [SELECT FUNC.]
1 POWER OFF ?
51 <POWER OFF>
START ?
# M0003
# POWER OFF[YES] ?
• Power to the LP-5000 is turned OFF.
8. Turn ON the LP-5000 and then the PC (DIC2).

17
9. Perform data download.
1) Click the [Setup and Maintenance] → [15

Printer Maintenance] → [05 Printer Adjustment
and Maintenance] → [0562 Data Download] →
[Enter] buttons.
2) Select “All”.
10. Restart the LP-5000 and then the PC (DIC2).
17-23
18. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
18.1 I/O Parts Diagrams................................................................................ 18-2

18.1.1 Scanner Section (SP-500) ..................................................................................... 18-2
18.1.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AR.................................................................................. 18-4
18.1.3 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR ............................................................................. 18-6
18.1.4 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Printer Section....................................................... 18-7
18.1.5 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Processor Section............................................... 18-10
18.2 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams ...................... 18-13
18.2.1 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Printer Section..................................................... 18-13
18.3 Block Diagrams................................................................................... 18-15
18.3.1 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Signal Block Diagram ......................................... 18-15
18.3.2 Printor/Processor (LP-5000) Power Supply System Block Diagram .............. 18-16
18.4 Scanner (SP-500) DC Power Supply Unit and Circuit Boards ........ 18-17
18.4.1 Circuit Boards Voltage List ................................................................................ 18-17
18.4.2 DC Power Supply Unit Fuses and LEDs............................................................ 18-18
18.4.3 Circuit Board Layout Diagrams.......................................................................... 18-19
18.5 Scanner (SP-500) Wiring Diagrams................................................... 18-23
18.5.1 Scanner Section (SP-500) Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 18-23
18.5.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AR Wiring Diagram .................................................... 18-24
18.5.3 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR Wiring Diagram ............................................... 18-25
18.6 Printer/Processor DC Power Supply Unit and Circuit Boards ....... 18-26
18.6.1 Circuit Boards Voltage Check List..................................................................... 18-26
18.6.2 DC Power Supply System LED Indication List ................................................. 18-27
18.6.3 Circuit Board Layout Diagrams.......................................................................... 18-28
18.7 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Wiring Diagram................................... 18-35
18.7.1 AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram ..................................................................... 18-35
18.7.2 LP-5000 Power Supply System Wiring Diagram............................................... 18-36
18.7.3 PAC27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram................................................................ 18-38
18.7.4 PWR27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram............................................................... 18-39
18.7.5 CTL27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ................................................................ 18-40
18.7.6 OPA27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ............................................................... 18-47
18.7.7 GMC27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram............................................................... 18-48
18.7.8 LDD27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram................................................................ 18-49
18.7.9 Laser Optical Section Wiring Diagram .............................................................. 18-50
18
18-1
18.1 I/O Parts Diagrams
18.1.1 Scanner Section (SP-500)
PSW25
M201 M
D201
LEA25
LEB25
LED25
F101
D102
LH311 LH312
D212
Heater
M Motor
Photo-interrupter
Temperature Sensor
Switch
Fan
LED
VR3-575
18-2
Symbol Name Remarks

D102 Carrier Lock Sensor Photo-interrupter
D201 Lens Home Position Sensor Photo-interrupter
D212 LED Light Source Temperature Sensor
F101 Scanner Cooling Fan DC24V
LEA25 Power ON Indicator
LEB25 SP-500 Status Indicator
LED25 LED Light Source
LH311 LED Heater 1
LH312 LED Heater 2
M201 AF Motor Pulse Motor
PSW25 Start Switch
PZ201 Piezoelectric Actuator 1 (Pixel Shifting)
PZ202 Piezoelectric Actuator 2 (Pixel Shifting)
18
18-3
18.1.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AR
D406
D409 D410
D412 D404
D401
D403 D402
M M401
D421 S401
D411
D422 D408 D407
D407
D405 D408
D409
D410
D411
D412 D401
D403 D402 D404
D405
D406
Microswitch
M Motor
Solenoid
Photo-transistor
VR3-576
18-4
Symbol Name Remarks

D401 Leading End Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
D402 Upstream Perforation Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
D403 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
D404 Check Tape Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
D405 Bar-code Sensor 1 LED/PSD
D406 Bar-code Sensor 2 LED/PSD
D407 Frame Sensor 1 LED/PSD
D411 Panorama Sensor 1 LED/PSD
D412 Panorama Sensor 2 LED/PSD
D421 Upper Feed Section Open/Close Sensor Microswitch
D422 Diffusion Box Sensor Microswitch
M401 Feed Motor Pulse Motor
S401 Pressure Solenoid
18
18-5
18.1.3 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR
D480
D481
D484
D482
D483
Microswitch
Photo-interrupter
VR3-577
Symbol Name Remarks

D480 Folder ID Sensor 1 Photo-interrupter
D484 Diffusion Box Sensor Microswitch
18-6
18.1.4 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Printer Section
D674 F614A
S673 F670
F603 TS650
F602 M F600
SW1
M651
M D651 S660 S661
M641 S640 D650L/P D653L/P F601
D641 S662
D667
S632
D669
S631
M M M
M660
M632 M650
M M
M631
M610
D680A/B
D681A/B S630 D610
D611
D612
D613
D616
M
M600
M D601
M630
D632L/P
D619L/P
M
M601
D603 F607
D629L/P D620
D621
D622
F630
M D623
D626
M620 Microswitch
F631
M Motor
Photo-interrupter
Photo-transistor
Switch
Solenoid 18
Temperature Sensor
Fan
VR3-578
18-7
■ Paper Supply Section
Symbol Name Remarks

D680A Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor 1 Microswitch
D680B Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor 2 Microswitch
M610 Upper Magazine Paper Supply Motor Pulse Motor
M620 Lower Magazine Paper Supply Motor Pulse Motor
■ Paper Feeding Section
Symbol Name Remarks

D601 Upper Cutter Home Position Sensor Photo-interrupter
D603 Lower Cutter Home Position Sensor Photo-interrupter
D610 Upper Magazine ID Sensor 1 Microswitch
D616 Upper Magazine Paper End Sensor Photo-interrupter
D619 Upper Magazine Splice Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
D620 Lower Magazine ID Sensor 1 Microswitch
D626 Lower Magazine Paper End Sensor Photo-interrupter
D629 Lower Magazine Splice Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
D632 Magazine Exit Paper Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
D641 Tilt Home Position Sensor Photo-interrupter
M600 Upper Cutter Drive Motor DC Motor
M601 Lower Cutter Drive Motor DC Motor
M630 Feed Motor 1 Pulse Motor
M641 Registration Tilt Motor Pulse Motor
S630 Back printer head
S631 Nip Release Solenoid 1
18-8
■ Exposure Section
Symbol Name Remarks

D650 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
D651 Soft Nip Home Position Sensor Photo-interrupter
D653 Exposure Section Paper Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
D674 Shutter Open/Close Sensor Photo-interrupter
F614A LDD Circuit Board Cooling Fan
F603 Feed Section Cooling Fan 1
F670 Anti-dust Fan
M650 Sub-scanning Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M651 Soft Nip Motor Pulse Motor
S673 Shutter Solenoid
TS650 Exposure Point Temperature Sensor IC
■ Sub-scanning Exit/Printer Exit Section
Symbol Name Remarks

D667 Sub-scanning Exit Section Paper Sensor Photo-interrupter
D669 Sub-scanning Exit Guide Open/Close Sensor Photo-interrupter
■ Electrical/Control Section
Symbol Name Remarks

D680A Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor A Microswitch
D680B Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor B Microswitch
D681A Left Side Cover Open/Close Sensor A Microswitch
D681B Left Side Cover Open/Close Sensor B Microswitch
F600 Control Section Exhaust Fan 1
F607 Feed Section Cooling Fan 2
F630 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1
F631 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2
SW1 Power Switch Switch
18
18-9
18.1.5 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Processor Section
D771
M
M810 D810 D766
F760
D760
BZ810
TS760
D812
D811
H760
D762A D762B
D763
FS700 TS700 TS701 FS701 FS702 TS702 FS703 FS704 TS703
F704
FS728
D724
D722
D723
H700 H701 H702 H703
D700 D701 D702 D703
M
F701
M720
Heater
P P P
M Motor
PU700 PU701 PU704
M Photo-interrupter
M700
Photo-transistor
S720 S722 S721 S723 Microswitch
S731 Solenoid
S730
S729
Temperature Sensor
S728
FS722
FS721
Fan
FS720
P FS725
FS726
FS723
PU720
FS724 P Pump
P P P P Safety Thermostat
FS727
PU702 PU703 PU721 PU723
P P Solution Level Sensor

PU722 PU724
Buzzer
Switch
VR3-582
18-10
■ Processor Section
Symbol Name Remarks

M700 Processor Drive Motor DC Motor
D762A Processor Cover (Large) Open/Close Sensor Microswitch
D762B Processor Cover (Small) Open/Close Sensor Microswitch
■ Processing Solution Circulation System
Symbol Name Remarks

D700 P1 Heater Safety Thermostat
D701 P2 Heater Safety Thermostat
D702 PS1/2 Heater Safety Thermostat
D703 PS3 Heater Safety Thermostat
F701 P2 Heater Cooling Fan
F704 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan
FS700 P1 Solution Level Sensor
FS701 P2 Solution Level Sensor
FS702 PS1 Solution Level Sensor
FS728 Waste Solution Level Sensor
H700 P1 Processing Solution Heater
H701 P2 Processing Solution Heater
H702 PS1/2 Processing Solution Heater
H703 PS3 Processing Solution Heater
PU700 P1 Circulation Pump
PU701 P2 Circulation Pump
PU702 PS1 Circulation Pump
TS700 P1 Solution Temperature Sensor
TS701 P2 Solution Temperature Sensor
TS702 PS1 Solution Temperature Sensor
TS703 PS3 Solution Temperature Sensor
18
18-11
■ Processing Solution Replenishment System
Symbol Name Remarks

D722 Replenisher Cartridge Box Upper Sensor Photo-interrupter
D723 Replenisher Cartridge Box Lower Sensor Photo-interrupter
D724 Replenisher Cartridge Door Open/Close Sensor Microswitch
FS720 P1R Upper Level Sensor
FS721 P2RA Upper Level Sensor
FS722 P2RB Upper Level Sensor
FS723 PSR Upper Level Sensor
FS724 P1R Lower Level Sensor
FS725 P2RA Lower Level Sensor
FS726 P2RB Lower Level Sensor
FS727 PSR Lower Level Sensor
M720 Cartridge Opening Motor DC Motor
PU720 Auto-Washing Pump
PU721 P1R Replenisher Pump
PU722 P2RA Replenisher Pump
PU723 P2RB Replenisher Pump
PU724 PSR Replenisher Pump
S720 No.2 Rack Auto-Washing Nozzle
S721 No.3 Rack Auto-Washing Nozzle
S722 Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack Auto-Washing Nozzle
S723 P1W Water Replenishment Valve
S728 P1R Cartridge Washing Valve
S729 P2RA Cartridge Washing Valve
S730 P2RB Cartridge Washing Valve
S731 P1R Stirring Valve
■ Dryer Section
Symbol Name Remarks

D760 Dryer Heater Safety Thermostat To monitor any abnormality in heater temperature
D763 Dryer Section Cover Open/Close Sensor Microswitch
D766 Dryer Exit Section Cover Open/Close Sensor Microswitch
D771 Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor LED/Photo-transistor
F760 Dryer Fan
H760 Dryer Heater
TS760 Dryer Temperature Sensor To monitor any abnormality in heater temperature
■ SU700AR
Symbol Name Remarks

D810 Sorter Full Sensor Photo-interrupter
D811 Sorter Tray Stop Position Sensor Photo-interrupter
D812 Sorter Drive Switch Switch
M810 Sorter Drive Motor DC Motor
18-12
18.2 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams
18.2.1 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Printer Section
LDD Circuit Board Cooling Fan (F614A)

Motor Driver AOM Driver Control Section Exhaust Fan 3 (F602)
(K3201 Circuit Board)
DC Power Supply Unit LDD27 Circuit Board
PWR27 Circuit Board
Control Section
Exhaust GMC27
Fan 1 (F600) Circuit
Board
CTL27
Control Section Circuit
Exhaust Fan Board
2 (F601)
OPA27
Circuit
Board
Power Supply Front View

Noise
Filter
(NF1)
Power Supply Cooling
Fan 1 (F630)
Power Supply Cooling

Fan 2 (F631)
Circuit Protectors Built-in Circuit

(CP1 to CP5) Breaker (NFB1)
AC Power Supply Bracket
SSR1 to SSR3
Power Input Terminal Block
PAC27 Circuit Printer Rear View

Board
Relays (K1 to K3)

18
AC Power Supply Bracket
VR3-583
18-13
18.2 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams
■ Circuit Board/Electrical Equipment Function
Circuit Board/Electrical Equipment Function

AOM Driver AOM driver for G Laser
CTL27 Circuit Board Printer mechanical control/drive FAN operation detecting
Processor mechanical control/drive
Mechanical control/drive for SU700AR sorter
Processing solution heater control
Dryer heater control
DC Power Supply/PWR27 Circuit Board DC power supply for system
DC power supply distribution
DC load interlock function
Power supply function
GMC27 Circuit Board Main CPU for system control
Program saving (starting program is loaded at power switch ON)
Communication to external system, data transfer (100base-Ethernet)
Mechanical system control (by CAN communication)
Exposure control (by serial communication)
Operation panel control (by serial communication)
Image data input/output
LDD27 Circuit Board Sub-CPU for exposure section control
Exposure point temperature detection
Laser exposure optical unit mechanical control
Densitometer control
OPA27 Circuit Board Mechanical control/drive for double magazine
PAC27 Circuit Board Processor AC load drive
AC load interlock function
18-14
18.3 Block Diagrams
18.3.1 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Signal Block Diagram
Network
RS232C
Operation Panel
GMC27 I/O Calibrator

100base Calibrator
Ether I/F Control Section
LDD27
(Exposure CPU
UART +5V control) H8S
+12V, +24V, +5V THA
RS232C Exposure Point
Temperature Sensor
+5V I/O
+12V
+24V
+24V
+12V Power Supply Exposure Optical Unit
-12V
-12V
PPC8245
Image Data R and B
Exposure
AOM Driver SOS Sensor
Optical Unit Image Data G
Control I/F
SOS Signal (RS422)
+5V
+12V
-12V
+5V
CAN Control CAN CTL27

Timer I/F (Printer/Processor
Mechanical Control) Printer Mechanical
Start
System
Switch I/O
OR
Exposure Section
Paper Sensor
Interlock
Switch
Exposure Section
Paper Sensor (D653)
DC Power Supply
Section
DC
Power PWR27
Supply +5V
Unit +24V
+5V
±12V DC Power Supply
+24V I/O SU700AR Sorter
I/O
Processor Mechanical
I/O System
AC200V I/O CAN +5V
I/O
PAC27 I/O
I/O
AC200V
Electrical
Equipment
Section AC200V
18
+24V
CAN OPA27 Double Magazine Kit
I/O
+5V
+24V
PD-056
18-15
18.3 Block Diagrams
18.3.2 Printor/Processor (LP-5000) Power Supply System Block Diagram
Power
DC Power Supply Section
Input/Electrical
Equipment
Section DC Power Supply Unit
AC200V AC200V
PAC27
PWR27 Interlock Switch
P+24V
D+5V
A+24V
D+5V D+5V D+5V
A±12V
A±12V P+24V P+24V
Start GMC CTL27 OPA27 LDD27

Switch 27
D+5V
Operation Exposure
Calibrator Optical Unit AOM Driver
Panel
PD3-057
18-16
18.4 Scanner (SP-500) DC Power Supply Unit and Circuit Boards
18.4.1 Circuit Boards Voltage List
Circuit Board Check Points on Circuit Board

Local Power in
Circuit Board Power Name LED +Terminal GND Terminal Voltage Range
Circuit Board
CTL25 D+5V D80 TP39 TP60 5.0±0.2V
A+12V D88 TP41 TP44 12.0±0.5V
P+24V D89 TP66 TP45 24.0±1.2V
D+3.3V D91 — TP60 3.3±0.15V
SEN+5V D90 TP67 TP60 5.0±0.2V
MOTSEN+5V D95 TP69 TP58 5.0±0.2V
ADC25 A+5V D2 TP11 TP12 5.0±0.2V
D+5V D3 TP5 TP8 5.0±0.2V
D+3.3V — TP6 TP8 3.3±0.15V
PZR22 P+12V LED1 TP1 TP2 12.0±0.5V
PZ201 LED2 TP4 TP3 +60V to 150V
PZ202 LED3 TP5 TP3 +60V to 150V
DLE25 D+5V D22 TP1 TP2 5.0±0.2V
A+12V D23 TP3 TP6 12.0±0.5V
P+24V D25 TP9 TP15 24.0±1.2V
A+12V1 D24 TP5 TP8 12.0±0.5V
A+5V — TP4 TP7 5.0±0.2V
P+24V1 D26 TP10 TP16 24.0±1.2V
P+24V2 D27 TP17 TP18 24.0±1.2V
CYA25 D+5V D30 — — 5.0±0.2V
A+12V — TP19 TP25 12.0±0.5V
A-12V — TP26 TP25 -12.0±0.5V
D+3.3V — TP15 TP21 3.3±0.15V
A+3.3V — TP19 TP21 3.3±0.15V
A-4V — TP27 TP21 -4.0±0.2V
JNC25 D+5V D8 TP1 TP2 5.0±0.2V
A+12V D9 TP3 TP4 12.0±0.5V
A-12V D10 TP5 TP4 -12.0±0.5V
P+24V D11 TP6 TP7 24.0±1.2V
PDC25 D+5V D1 TP1 TP2 5.0±0.2V
P+24V D2 TP3 TP4 24.0±1.2V
18
18-17
18.4.2 DC Power Supply Unit Fuses and LEDs
● Fuse and LED List

Voltage Name Fuses LED No. Connectors Circuit Boards
D+5V F022 (5A) CR360 CTL5 CTL25
F023 (5A) CR360 CTL5 CTL25
F024 (3.2A) CR231 CYA1 Carrier
A+12V F025 (1.6A) CR231 CYA1 Carrier
A-12V F026 (1.0A) CR231 CYA1 Carrier
P+24V F021 (4.0A) CR230 DLE1 DLE
F027 (3.2A) CR231 CYA1 Carrier
Rated Current Quantity

1.0A: 1
1.6A: 1
3.25A: 2
4.0A: 1
5.0A: 2
18-18
18.4.3 Circuit Board Layout Diagrams
● CTL25 Circuit Board
18
Fuse No. Rated Current LED No. (Color) Load

F001 1A D90 (Red) D+5V for Sensor/Indicator LED
F003 2A D89 (Orange) D+24V for Fan
F004 5A D91 (Red) 3.3V for Internal Generation Power Supply Circuit
F005 1A D95 (Red) D+5V for AF Motor
18-19
● DLE25 Circuit Board
Fuse No. Rated Current LED No. (Color) Load

F011 0.3A D24 (Yellow) Light Source Temperature Sensor Circuit
F012 2A D26 (Orange) Light Source LED Heater Circuit
F013 1.6A D27 (Orange) Light Source LED25 Circuit Board
18-20
● ADC25 Circuit Board
● CCD25 Circuit Board
18
18-21
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
1
18.5.1
UL1571LF AWG26 GRY PSW
1 2
UL1571LF AWG26 BLK DGND 1 2
PS9
PSW1
PSW25
D+5V1 RED D+5V1 D+5V1 RED D+5V1
D+5V1 ORG D+5V1 D+5V1 ORG D+5V1
DGND BLK DGND DGND BLK DGND
DGND BRN DGND DGND BRN DGND
2
A+12V RED A+12V A+12V RED A+12V

A+12V ORG A+12V A+12V ORG A+12V
AGND BLK AGND AGND BLK AGND AGND BLK BLK AGND
AGND BRN AGND AGND BRN AGND A+20V ORG ORG A+20V
PS1
CYA1
CYA1
A-12V BLU A-12V A-12V BLU A-12V AGND BLK BLK AGND
A-12V WHIT A-12V A-12V WHIT A-12V A-12V BLU BLU A-12V
P+24V ORG P+24V P+24V ORG P+24V AGND BLK BLK AGND
<
Supply Unit)
P+24V ORG P+24V P+24V ORG P+24V A+5V RED RED A+5V
PS3
to PS (Power
PS3
PS3
PGND PGND BLK PGND AGND BLK BLK AGND
CCD2
CCD2
PGND BLK
A-5V BLU A-5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
PGND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
PGND PGND BRN PGND BLU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
BRN
1 23 1113 2 221014 3 21 24 4 1216

AGND BLK BLK AGND
A+12V
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10
RED RED A+12V
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10
CY1
BLK DSR
BLK DSR
3
GRY Rx0-
Plug-in Connector
GRY Rx0+
BRN Rx0-
BRN Rx0+
GRY Tx0- ADC LK- ADCLK-
GRY Tx0+ ADC LK+
BRN ADCLK+
Tx0- ID CLK+ IDCK+
15 9 2019 8 7 1817 6 5
BRN Tx0+ ID CLK- IDCK-
/ VD- / VD-
ADC4
CCD3
/ VD+ / VD+
/HD+ /HD+
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
/HD- /HD-
BRN Tx0+
CCD25 Circuit Board

BRN Tx0-
GRY Tx0+
GRY Tx0-
BRN Rx0+ RED
D+5V1
BRN Rx0- BLK
CTL8
DGND
4
GRY Rx0+ RED

A+5V
PS8
GRY Rx0-
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ADC2
ADC2
CCD out put DATA_IN AGND BLK

BLK DSR1
1 2
1 2
A-GND
S10B-PADSS-1(JST)
DSR2
1 3 2 4 5 7 6 8 9 10
BLK
ADC3
CCD1
ADC25 Circuit Board
18.5 Scanner (SP-500) Wiring Diagrams
Scanner Section (SP-500) Wiring Diagram
DGND BLK DGND

D+5V RED D+5V
to CCD4
A+12V RED A+12V
DGND BLK DGND
PS5
<
CTL7
D+5V RED D+5V
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
AGND BLK AGND
5
Supply Unit)
to PS (Power
SCK_CCD GRY SCK_CCD GRY
DGND BRN DGND BRN
SDTW_CCD GRY SDTW_CCD GRY
DGND BRN DGND BRN
CCD4
CCD4
CCD4
CCD4
CTL12
SDTR_CCD
CTL12
GRY SDTR_CCD GRY

1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
P+24V P+24V
1 2 3 4 5 6
ORG DGND BRN DGND BRN

to CCD25
1 2
1 2
PGND BLK PGND
PS6
<
CTL3
Supply Unit)
to PS (Power
+5V
D-
6
D+
1 2 3 4
CTL10
DGND
<
CTL9
CARRY_PowON RED CARRY_PowON

1 23 4 5 6
1 2
PS7
DGND BLK DGND
Supply Unit)
USB2.0
to PS (Power
ORG P+24V
YEL F101alm
F101
F101
4 1 2
1 2 3
BLK PGND
F101
D+5V
D202
DGND
CTL25 Circuit Board
D+5V
Scanner Cooling Fan

D203
PS (Power Supply Unit)
7
DGND
CTL14
D204
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F102a YEL F102a YEL DGND

1 2
1 2
PGND BLK BLK

4 5 6
PGND
PS10
PS10
PS10
+12V RED P+12V

1 2
GND BLK PGND

PS2
CTL2
7 8
1
2
PZR1
PZR1
9 10
PZ201+(D+5V) GRY
PZ201-(PZ_Xon) GRY PZ201 BRN
8
PZ202+(D+5V) GRY N.C

PZ202-(PZ_Yon) GRY GND BLK
M201A BRN M201A
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
PZR_ON+(D+5V) GRY N.C

PZ201
M201/A ORG M201/A GRY

PZR_ON-(PW_ON)
M201B BRN M201B
M201
M201
ERR_201 (PZ_Xerr) GRY

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
M201
Unit
M201/B ORG M201/B

1112 1314
PZR2
PZR2
PZR3
BRN
CTL4
CTL4
PZR3
DGND BLK PZ202

AF Motor
ERR_202 (PZ_Yerr) GRY N.C

PZR22
BLK
5 6 7
BLK
1 2 3
DGND GND
Piezoelectric
ERR_PZR (PZ_Powerr) GRY

PZ202
BLK
Circuit Board
DGND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
6
DGND BLK
1 2
PZG
RED D+5V
1 2
1 2
BRN L/P101
LEA1
LEA1
LEA25
to CTL1
DLE2_err
RED
9
+12V1
RED D+5V
A+12V AGND
GRY L/P102R
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
D212
L101on D212
1 2 3
LEB1
LEB1
GRY
LEB25
GRY L/P103 LED_tmp

Indicator Indicator
AGND BLK
LED_DA_R GRY LH202_B GRY
3 4 7 5 6
BLK ORG
Power ON Carrier Status
AGND +24V1
GRY GRY
1 2 3
5 6 7
LED_DA_G LH202_E
LH311
CTL6
CTL6
BLK
DLE2
DLE2
AGND
LED_DA_B GRY
AGND BLK LH203_B GRY
Control Unit
Temperature
RED LED_DA_IR GRY +24V1 ORG

D+5V
1 2 3
AGND BLK LH203_E GRY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112
LH312
BRN D102
GND
1 2 3
8 9 1011
D102
BLK DGND
8 9 10
CTL1
DGND BLK
DGND BLK B1 GRY B1
10
IR1 IR1
DLE4
LED_on_R GRY BRN

RED RED D+5V LED_on_G GRY G1 BLU G1
GRY GRY D201 LED_on_B GRY R1 RED R1
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
D201
D201
DGND GRY G2 G2
Carrier Lock Sensor D201
BLK BLK
111213
LED_on_IR GRY
HIT_ON GRY B2 BRN B2
/LED_Open GRY R2 BLU R2
/TMP_err GRY IR2 RED IR2
CTL5
CTL5
GRY B3 GRY B3
DLE3
DLE3
/DLE2_Open
LED1
LED1
BLK DGND DGND BLK G3 BRN G3

BLK R3 R3
PZG
1 2
BLU
141516
DGND
Lens Home Position Sensor
F1_Open GRY G4 RED G4

to PZR
F2_Open GRY IR3 GRY IR3

F3_Open GRY B4 BRN B4
DLE25 Circuit Board
GRY +24V +24V

1112131415161718 1920 2122232425 26
ORG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415
PWM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213141516
LED25 Circuit Board
11
D+5V RED D+5V

A+12V RED A+12V
P+24V ORG P+24V
DGND BLK DGND
PS4
DLE1
DLE1
AGND BLK AGND

BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
PGND PGND
12
18-23
18.5.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AR Wiring Diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Upper Feed
CYA25 Circuit JNC25 Circuit Lower Feed Section (A-6)
Section 1 AGND AGND 30
D422 GRY 1 (NO)
Board 2 AGND AGND 29
Board 1 D422
JNC11
JNC11
D422
3 AGND AGND 28 2 DGND BLK 2 (COM)
AGND 27
A 4
5
AGND
AGND AGND 26 3 3 (NC) Diffusion Box Sensor
6 A-12V1 A-12V1 25
7 A-12V1 A-12V1 24
8 A-12V1 A-12V1 23
JNC9
JNC9
9 A-12V1 A-12V1 22 1 D+5V RED 1
DTE 25 Circuit Board
DTE1
DTE1
10 A+12V1 A+12V1 21 2 D401P GRY 3
11 A+12V1 A+12V1 20
12 A+12V1 A+12V1 19 2
A+12V1 18 D401P Leading End Sensor
JNC1
13 A+12V1 4
CYA1
14 A+12V1 A+12V1 17
15 D+5V1 D+5V1 16
16 D+5V1 D+5V1 15
17 D+5V1 D+5V1 14
JNC8
JNC8
18 D+5V1 D+5V1 13 1 D+5V RED 1
D+5V1 12 DTE 25 Circuit Board
DTE1
DTE1
19 D+5V1
20 D+5V1 D+5V1 11 2 D403P GRY 3
B 21 D+5V1 D+5V1
D+5V1
10
9
2 D403P Downstream Perforation
22 D+5V1
23 DGND DGND 8 4 Sensor
24 DGND DGND 7
25 DGND DGND 6
26 DGND DGND 5
27
28
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
4
3 1 D+5V RED 1 DTF 25 Circuit Board PDC25 Circuit
JNC7
JNC7
DTF1
DTF1
29 DGND DGND 2 2 D+5V RED 2 D402P Upstream Perforation Board
30 DGND DGND 1 3 D402P GRY 3 Feed Motor
4 D404P BRN 4 Sensor 1 M401-A BRM
PDC3
PDC3
1 DGND DGND 40 D404P Check Tape Sensor 2 M401-/A ORG
2 P_+24V_ER P_+24V_ER 39 3 M401-B RED M401
3 D422 D422 38 4 M401-/B YEL
4 AGND AGND 37
5 D412PB D412PB 36
C 6
7
D412PA D412PA 35
34 RED
D411PB D411PB 1 D+5V 1
8 D411PA D411PA 33 2 DGND BLK 2
9 D410P D410P 32 3 P+24V ORG 3
10 D409P D409P 31 4 PGND ORG 4
PD C1
PD C1
11 D408P D408P 30 P+24V
JNC10
JNC10
5 BLK 5
12 D407P D407P 29 6 P+24V_ER BLK 6
13 D406PB D406PB 28 7 SOL1+ BRN 7 Pressure Solenoid
14 D406PA D406PA 27 8 SOL1- GRY 8
PDC2
PDC2
15 D405PB D405PB 26 M401PD YEL 1 S401+ BRM
9 9
16 D405PA D405PA 25 10 M401STEP BRN 10 S401
17 D404P 24 M401ENABLE GRY 2 S401- ORG
D404P 11 11
18 D403P D403P 23 12 M401DIR YEL 12
JNC2
CYA2
19 D402P D402P 22
20 D401P D401P 21
21 AGND AGND 20
22 19
D 23
DGND
M401DIR
DGND
M401DIR 18 DBF25Circuit Board
24 M401ENABLE M401ENABLE 17 1 D405PA BRN 1 1
25 M401STEP M401STEP 16 2 D405PB GRY 2 2
26 M401PD M401PD 15 3 D406PA BRN 3 3 D405PA Bar-code Sensor 1
27 S401- S401- 14 4 D406PB GRY 4 4 D406PA Bar-code Sensor 2
28 S401+ S401+ 13 5 D407P BRN 5 5
DBF1
DBF1
29 D421 D421 12 6 D408P GRY 6 6 D407P Frame Sensor 1
30 DSR DSR 11 7 D409P BRN 7 7 D408P Frame Sensor 2
JNC6
JNC6
31 DSR DSR 10 8 D410P GRY 8 8
32 Rx0- Rx0- 9 9 D411PA BRN 9 9 D409P Frame Sensor 3
33 Rx0- Rx0- 8 10 D411PB GRY 10 10
34 Rx0+ Rx0+ 7 11 D412PA BRN 11 11 D410P Frame Sensor 4
35
36
Rx0+ Rx0+ 6
5
12 D412PB GRY 12 12 D411PA Panorama Sensor 1
Tx0- Tx0- 13 A+12V RED 13
37 Tx0- Tx0- 4 14 AGND BLK 14 D412PA Panorama Sensor 2
38 Tx0+ Tx0+ 3 15 AGND BLK 15 1
E 39 Tx0+ Tx0+ 2 16 A-12V BLU 16
DBF2
DBF2
40 DGND 1 2
DGND 3
4
1 D402L_E D402L_E 1
2 D402L_R D402L_R 2 LBF25 Circuit Board
D404L_E D404L_E 1 D421 BRN 1 MSA01 Circuit Board
MSA1
MSA1
3 3
JNC5
4 D404L_R D404L_R 4 JNC5

5 D405L_E D405L_E 5 2 DGND BLK 2 D421 Upper Feed Section
6 D405L_R D405L_R D402L Upstream Perforation
7 D406L_E
6 Open/Close Sensor
8 D406L_R
D406L_E
D406L_R
7 Sensor
8 D404L Check Tape Sensor
9 D407L_E D407L_E 9
D405L Bar-code Sensor 1 1 Tx0+ BRN Tx0+ 5
CY A3
10 D407L_R D407L_R 10
2 Tx0+ YEL Tx0+ 17
LBF1
11 D408L_E D408L_E 11
12 D408L_R D408L_R 12
D406L Bar-code Sensor 2 3 Tx0- GRY Tx0- 6
Tx0- 18
F 13 D409L_E D409L_E D407L Frame Sensor 1 4 Tx0- WHIT
JNC3
JNC3
13 Rx0+ BRN Rx0+ 7

14 D409L_R D409L_R 14 5
15 D410L_E D410L_E 15
D408L Frame Sensor 2 6 Rx0+ YEL Rx0+ 19
7 Rx0- GRY Rx0- 8
16 D410L_R D410L_R 16 D409L Frame Sensor 3 8 Rx0- WHIT Rx0- 20
17 D411L_E D411L_E 17
18 D411L_R D411L_R 18
D410L Frame Sensor 4 9 DSR GRY DSR 9
10 DSR WHIT DSR 15
19 D412L_E D412L_E 19 D411L Panorama Sensor 1 24-pin
20 D412L_R D412L_R 20
21 D401L_E D401L_E 21
D412L Panorama Sensor 2
22 D401L_R D401L_R 22 Plug-in Connector
CY1
1 D+5V RED D+5V 1
LBF2 2 D+5V RED D+5V 23
3 DGND BLK DGND 11
Debug LBF2 4 DGND BLK DGND 13
5 A+12V RED A+12V 2
CYA8 1 2 6 A+12V RED A+12V 22
Reset Switch 7 AGND BLK AGND 10
JNC4
JNC4
G LEE22 Circuit Board D401L_E BRN 8 AGND BLK AGND 14

LEE1
LEE1
1 9 A-12V BLU A-12V 3

2 D401L_R YEL 10 A-12V BLU A-12V 21
Leading End Sensor 11 P+24V ORG P+24V 4
D401L 12 P+24V ORG P+24V 24
13 PGND BLK PGND 12
Debug 14 PGND BLK PGND 16
15
16
LEE1
LEE1
CYA5
CYA5
Serial I/F CYA7 1 D403L_E BRN 1 LEE22Circuit Board

2 D403L_R YEL 2
D403L Downstream Perforation
Sensor
H CYA6
1 D131(<) ORG 1
MSC22
2 D132(<<) BRN 2
CYA4
3 D133(>>) ORG 3
4 D134(>) BRN 4 MSC22 Circuit Board
5 DGND ORG 5
6
18-24
18.5.3 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR Wiring Diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
26-pin Flexible Cable

A CYB25 SSA25
26 1
Circuit Board 25 2 Circuit Board
24 3
23 4
22 5
21 6
20 7
19 D+5V D+5V 8
18 D480 D480 9
17 D481 D481 10
16 D482 D482 11
15 D483 D483 12
14 D484 D484 13
13 DGND DGND 14
B 12 FG FG 15
CYB3 11 FG FG 16 SSA1
10 17
9 18
8 19
7 20
6 21
5 22
4 23
3 24
2 25
1 26
1 D+5V RED D+5V 1
11 DGND BLK DGND 3
C 23 D+5V RED D+5V 2
13 DGND BLK DGND 4
12 PGND BLK PGND 13
CYB1
CYB1
22 A+12V A+12V 6
CY1
10 AGND AGND 7
14 AGND AGND 8
3 A-12V A-12V 9
21 A-12V A-12V 10
Plug-in Connector
4 P+24V P+24V 11
2 A+12V P+24V 12
16 PGND A+12V 5
PGND 14
D 7
19
Rx1+
Rx1+
GRY
BRN
Tx1+
Tx1+
1
2
8 Rx1- GRY Tx1- 3
20 Rx1- BRN Tx1- 4
N.C 5
N.C 6
CYB2
CYB2
9 DSR GRY DSR 7
15 DSR RN DSR 8
N.C 9
N.C 10
5 Tx1+ GRY Rx1+ 11
17 Tx1+ BRN Rx1+ 12
6 Tx1- RY Rx1- 13
18 Tx1- BRN Rx1- 14
N.C 15
E N.C 16
Microswitch
1(NC) N.C N.C 1

2(NO) D486 BRN D486 2
CYB4
CYB4
D422 3(COM) DGND BLK DGND 3
D+5V 1
Spare
CYB6
D48X 2
DGND 3
G
Debug
N.C 5
N.C 4
CYB5
RxD0 3
TxD0 2
DGND 1
18-25
18.6 Printer/Processor DC Power Supply Unit and Circuit Boards
18.6.1 Circuit Boards Voltage Check List
Check Points on PWR27 Circuit

DC Power Supply Voltage Measuring Circuit Board Voltage Check Points
Board
PWR27 Local Power
Module- PS Power PWR27 Fuse LED on Power Fuse (Rated GND Voltage GND Voltage
Slot-No. Power Interlock Circuit Board (within Circuit LED + Terminal + Terminal
type Channel (Rated Current) PWR27 Name Current) Terminal Range Terminal Range
Channel Board)
3B HFF +24V2 +24V20 F151 <2A> PD151 (PWR27) — — — — 0 — —
1 BFF D+5V D+5V1 F111 <5A> PD111 GMC27 D+5V ➝ — D1 (ON) TP1 TP8 (DGND) +5±0.25V PWR5-1 PWR5-3 +5.15±0.25V
5V_OUT F1<1A> — GMC7-2pin GMC7-1pin +5±0.25V
D+3.3V — D2 (ON) TP94 TP8 (DGND) +3.3±0.1V
2A EFF A+12V A+12V1 F121 <4A> PD121 A+12V ➝ — D3 (ON) TP2 TP5 (AGND) +12±0.6V PWR7-14 PWR7-16 +12.15±0.6V
2B EFF A-12V A-12V1 F131 <5A> PD131 A-12V ➝ — D4 (ON) TP3 TP5 (AGND) -12±0.6V PWR7-19 PWR7-18 -12.15±0.6V
1 BFF D+5V D+5V2 F112 <5A> PD112 CTL27 D+5V ➝ — D1 (ON) TP1 TP5 (DG) +5±0.25V PWR6-1 PWR6-4 +5.15±0.25V
D+5Va F201 <2A> D3 (ON) TP10 TP12 (DG) +5±0.25V
D+5Vb F202 <2A> D4 (ON) TP15 TP16 (DG) +5±0.25V
3B HFF +24V2 +24V21 F152 <4A> PD152 P+24V21 ➝ — D5 (ON) TP34 TP39 (PG) +24±1.2V PWR8-1 PWR8-3 +24.2±1.2V
+24V22 F153 <4A> PD153 P+24V22 ➝ — D5 (ON) TP36 TP39 (PG) +24±1.2V PWR8-2 PWR8-4 +24.2±1.2V
4 DFF +24V0_3 +24V01 F161 <4A> PD161 P+24V01 ➝ — D5 (ON) TP23 TP22 (PG) +24±1.2V PWR8-5 PWR8-7 +24.2±1.2V
+24V31 K F163 <4A> PD163 P+24V31 ➝ — D5 (ON) TP38 TP39 (PG) +24±1.2V PWR9-1 PWR9-3 +24.2±1.2V
5 DFF +24V1_4 +24V11 K F171 <4A> PD171 P+24V11 ➝ — D5 (ON) TP21 TP22 (PG) +24±1.2V PWR8-9 PWR8-11 +24.2±1.2V
+24V41 K F173 <4A> PD173 P+24V41 ➝ — D5 (ON) TP45 TP39 (PG) +24±1.2V PWR9-5 PWR9-8 +24.2±1.2V
1 BFF D+5V D+5V3 F113 <5A> PD113 LDD27 P+5VP ➝ — D21 (ON) TP15 TP54 (AGND2) +5±0.25V PWR7-10 PWR7-11 +5.15±0.25
3A HFF A+24V A+24V1 F141 <4A> PD141 A+24VI ➝ — — TP18 TP55 (AGND3) +24±1.2V PWR7-1 PWR7-2 +24.2±1.2V
A+24VP1 F401 <2A> D95 (ON) TP50 TP55 (AGND3) +24±1.2V
A+24VP2 F402 <2A> D24 (ON) TP51 TP55 (AGND3) +24±1.2V
2A EFF A+12V A+12V1 F121 <4A> PD121 A+12VI ➝ — — TP20 TP56 (AGND) +12±0.6V PWR7-3 PWR7-5 +12.15±0.6V
A+12VP F403 <1A> D26 (ON) TP52 TP56 (AGND) +12±0.6V
A+12V2 K F122 <4A> PD122 IL+12VI ➝ — D34 (ON) TP25 TP56 (AGND) +12±0.6V PWR7-4 PWR7-6 +12.15±0.6V
2B EFF A-12V A-12V F131 <5A> PD131 A-12VI ➝ — — TP24 TP56 (AGND) -12±0.6V PWR7-8 PWR7-7 -12.15±0.6V
A-12VP F404 <1A> D30 (ON) TP53 TP56 (AGND) -12±0.6V
3B HFF +24V2 +24V20 F151 <2A> PD151 PAC27 +24V20 ➝ — — TP1 TP2 (+24VGND) +24±1.2V PWR4-1 PWR4-4
1 BFF D+5V D+5V4 F114 <2A> PD114 OPA27 D+5V ➝ — D1 (ON) TP1 TP3 (DG) +5±0.25V PWR6-3 PWR6-6 +5.15±0.25
D+5Vc F251 <1A> D3 (ON) TP6 TP8 (DG) +5±0.25V
5 DFF +24V1_4 +24V11 K F171 <4A> PD171 P+24V11 ➝ — D5 (ON) TP13 TP14 (PG) +24±1.2V PWR8-21 PWR8-23 +24.2±1.2V
18-26
18.6.2 DC Power Supply System LED Indication List
Alpha 2 PWR27 Circuit Board

Fuse Interlock
Power ON/OFF Connector
SLOT Electric LED ID For
Voltage No. Relay SW Control Name
Current
1 D+5V F111 5A PD111 D+5V1 PWR5 GMC27 Circuit Board
F112 5A PD112 D+5V2 PWR6 CTL27 Circuit Board
F113 5A PD113 D+5V3 PWR7 LDD27 Circuit Board
F114 2A PD114 D+5V4 PWR6 OPA27 Circuit Board
2 A+12V F121 4A PD121 A+12V1 PWR7 LDD27 Circuit Board,
GMC27 Circuit Board
F122 4A RL1 D680, D681 PD122 A+12V2 PWR7 LDD27 Circuit Board
A-12V F131 5A PD131 A-12V1 PWR7 LDD27 Circuit Board,
GMC27 Circuit Board
3 A+24V F141 4A PD141 A+24V1 PWR7 LDD27 Circuit Board
+24V2 F151 2A K PD151 +24V20 PWR4 PWR27 Circuit Board,
PAC27 Circuit Board
F152 4A K PD152 +24V21 PWR8 CTL27 Circuit Board
4 +24V0_3 F161 4A PD161 +24V01 PWR8 CTL27 Circuit Board
F162 5A PD162 +24V02 PWR8 CTL27 Circuit Board
F163 4A RL2 D762A, D762B PD163 +24V31 PWR9 CTL27 Circuit Board
D763, D766
F164 4A PD164 +24V32 PWR9 CTL27 Circuit Board
5 +24V1_4 F171 4A RL3 D680, D681 K PD171 +24V11 PWR8 CTL27 Circuit Board,
OPA27 Circuit Board
F173 4A RL4 D724 K PD173 +24V41 PWR9 CTL27 Circuit Board
— — K PD175 +24V42 PWR9 CTL27 Circuit Board
18
18-27
18.6.3 Circuit Board Layout Diagrams
■ PWR27 Circuit Board
18-28
■ LDD27 Circuit Board
18
18-29
■ CTL27 Circuit Board
18-30
■ GMC27 Circuit Board
18
18-31
■ OPA27 Circuit Board
18-32
■ PAC27 Circuit Board
18
18-33
18.7 Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Wiring Diagram
18.7.1 AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Electrical Section
A
K1
Li Lo
BLK BLK 1
CP1 1 2
PW1
to DC power supply
WHT WHT 2
3 4
Power Input Section
BLK
WHT 3 K1_6p (C+)
5 6
PAC8
PAC8
BLK 1
B 2
K5_6p (C+)
NF1 TB2 4
TB1 NFB1
RED
1 3 1 1
L L RED RED
L Li Lo
1 1 C1 BLU 2 2
K3
N N N Ni No 2 4 Li Lo
BLU BLU
YEL / GRN BLK BLK 1
RED
CP2 1 2 (L21) 200V IN
BLU
PAC13
PAC13
2
3 3
WHT WHT 3
3 4 (N21) 200V IN
C 4 4
BLK
5 6
ORG
WHT
BLK
K2
BLK
1 2
WHT
D 3 4
2
4
PAC27
PAC6
PAC6
BLK 1
5 6
ORG 3 Circuit Board
BLK 1
E
PAC12
PAC12
200V IN
WHT 2
SSR1
Lo Li
BLK
1 2 CP3
BLK
3 4
BLK to PAC3_1p/2p
1 1 1
ORG
WHT
PAC9
PAC9
4 4 4
AWG18 WHT
F BLK
2 2 2
WHT
5 5 5
SSR2
BLK TB2
3 3 3 Lo Li
BLK BLK
WHT 1 2 CP4
6 6 6 5 5
BLK
3 4
6 6
to PAC3_3p/4p
RED
ORG
BLU
G WHT
ORG 1
to SSR1-SSR3
7 7
BLK 2
ORG 3
SSR3 8 8
BLK 4
PAC3
PAC3
ORG 5
Lo Li
BLK BLK BLK 6
1 2 CP5 7
BLK 8
3 4
to PAC3_5p/6p
ORG
WHT
H
18-35
18.7.2 LP-5000 Power Supply System Wiring Diagram (1/2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
To Operation Panel KEY27 Circuit Board (2/2)

To DTA1 on DTA27 Circuit Board in Laser Optical Unit
A
GMC27 Circuit Board
Power Supply Unit NF1 CTL1 CTL27 Circuit Board
D+5V L1
CTL32 36 (D601, D610-613, D616,
F301 (3.2A) NF49 GMC7 D+5V
α2 PWR27 Circuit Board GMC18 F201 (2A) NF1 D619L/P, D632L/P, D641,
3.2A
D+5Va D650L/P, D651, D653L/P,
NF50 GMC9 D667/D669)
CH1 F111 (5A) F202 (A2) NF2
D+5V1
D+5V NF49 D+5Vb
DD con D+3.3V U1
F112 (5A) (D725-728, D771L/P,
B D+5V2 U3 Regu D+3.3V
CTL25, CTL27,
Regu D+1.8V U3 D722-723, FS706)
F114 (2A) NF4 CTL31
D+5V3 Regu RF+3.3V
NF61 CTL24
GEP_IO NF3 (D810-812)
F113 (5A) NF9 A+5V
D+5V4 GPR_IO CTL40
U5 U7 U5
NF57
Regu GEP+1.5V Ref D OP RF+3V
NF6 U5
CH2 F121 (4A) GEP_core
A+12V1 NF4 OP RF+2.5V Driver
D+12V U7 Circuit
P+5V
C F122 (4A)
K201 Regu GPR+1.5V U8 Board
A+12V2 NF11 CTL9 CTL20
NF2 L3 Ref D RF+2.5V2 Processor Drive Motor (M700)
GPR_core
A+12V P+24V01
U1 CTL21
Regu A+5V L4 (F600-607)
F131 (5A) NF3
CH3 A-12V1 P+24V02
A+12V A-12V CTL19
U2 (F760)
GMC17 Regu A-5V L2 U12
P+24V11 Regu P+8V1
D CTL3, CTL6, CTL7 (M600, M610, M631,
F141 (4A) L5 M632)
CH4 A+24V1
A+24V 4A P+24V12
CTL2, CTL6, CTL8 (S630-632, S640,
D+5V3 to LDD1 on LDD27 Circuit Board (2/2)
L6 U11 S660)
A+12V1 to LDD1 on LDD27 Circuit Board (2/2) P+24V21 Regu P+12V
A+12V2 to LDD1 on LDD27 Circuit Board (2/2) CTL4, CTL5, CTL7 (M630, M641, M650,
L7 M651)
A-12V1 to LDD1 on LDD27 Circuit Board (2/2)
P+24V22
A+24V1 to LDD1 on LDD27 Circuit Board (2/2) CTL6 (S661-662)
+24V20
L8
E P+24V31 (M660)
F151 (2A) U15
CH5 +24V20
+24V2 Regu P+8V3
L9 (F630-632, F701, F704)
F152 (4A) P+24V32 CTL11, CTL17,
+24V21
CTL18, CTL21
(M810)
F153 (4A) L12 U14
+24V22
P+24V41 Regu P+8V2 (S728-731)
CTL13, CTL15
F161 (4A)
CH6 +24V01 L10
(M720)
+24V0_3 P+24V42
F F162 (4A) CTL12, CTL13, CTL16
+24V02 (S720-723)
L11
K202 P+24V43
F171 (4A) +24V11
CH7 NF58 (PU721-724)
+24V1_4 CTL10
F172 (4A) CTL14
+24V12 (PU720)
Electrical Equipment Section
(PU700-704)
PAC27 Circuit Board OPA1 OPA27 Circuit Board
L1 OPA7, OPA8
G PAC1 PAC3 D+5V (D603, D620-623, D626,
Dryer SSR F251 (2A) NF1 D629L/P)
F163 (4A) K203 (SSR1 to SSR3)
+24V31 D+5Va
D+5V F252 (2A) NF2
OPA9
F164 (4A) (Spare)
+24V32 U1
PAC5
K204 Dryer Heater Safety Regu D+3.3V D+5Vb
F173 (4A) Thermostat (D760)
+24V41 U3
PAC4
Solution Heater Regu RF+3.3V
+24V42 Safety Thermostat
F174 (4A) NF3
+24V43 (D700 to D703) P+5V
H +24V20 Dryer Heater OPA2
Relay (K3)/ L2 U6
PAC2 PAC13 Solution Heater P+24V11 Regu P+8V1
Relay (K2) OPA3, OPA4
(M601, M620)
18-36
LP-5000 Power Supply System Wiring Diagram (2/2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A
LDD27 Circuit Board
D+5V3 from PWR27 LDD1 L1 LDD2 AOM Driver
Circuit Board (1/2) D+5VP
NF1
A+24V1 from PWR27
L2
Circuit Board (1/2) A+24VI LDD13
FAN (F675/F690)
F401 (2A)
A+24VP1
F402 (2A) LDD31
B A+24VP2 Laser Optical Unit
FAN (F670/F671/F672)
NF2
A+12V1 from PWR27 LDD14
Circuit Board (1/2) L3 SOL (S673)
A+24VI
F403 (1A) LDD12
A+24VP
JND20 Circuit Board
NF6 Polygonal Scanner Motor (M676)
JND1 JND2
U14
NF7 DTA27 Circuit Board
Regu A+5VI THA20 Circuit Board
C A+5VP T HA 1
D+5V
From GMC9 on GMC27
A+12V Circuit Board (1/2)
U6 R+5VI NF4 DTA1
A-12V
Regu
U8 A+5V
B+8VI NF5
Regu
U13 (D674)
Ref D OP REF+5V
NF19 LDR27 Circuit Board
L4 U16 U12 LDD5 LDR2
D-5DV NF4
Regu D+5VI
NF20 L+5
D+5VP LDD6
D NF5
D+5VP
NF21 LDD7
D+5V_DI R_TrC
FB1001
CPU_5V LDR1 NF3
LDD33 V+5
U17
NF2
Regu D+3.3V1
NF3 V-5
A-12V1 from PWR27 LDD8
Circuit Board (1/2) R_MPX_TrC
L5 NF18
A-12VI
E LDB1 LDB27 Circuit Board
NF15 D+5VP
F404 (1A)
A-12VP LDB2
B_TrC U6
NF16
B_MPX_TrC NF4 OP V-5
U16
A+5VI V-8
Regu
U7 LDD9 NF3
R-5VI
Regu V+8
U10 NF12
B-8VI BL+9V NF2 U5
Regu Regu
F L6 L+9 V+5
A+12V2 from PWR27 NF11
IL+12VI NF7
Circuit Board (1/2) U5 RL+5VI
Regu NF14
U11
BL+9VI
Regu JMH27 Circuit Board
U9 NF8 LDD10 JMH1
GL+5VI D+5VPV
Regu
JMH2 JMH4
NF9 G-SHG
A+12V
G NF10 A-12V
Operation Panel
FB1005 LDD32 Calibrator KEY27 Circuit Board

From GMC7 on GMC27 KEY1
Calibrator Motor
FB1002 D+5V
+5VA_C Circuit Board (1/2)
Head Circuit Board D+5V1
FB1004
A+12VI_D
H
18-37
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
18-38
(RED) D+5Vb
1
(BLK) DG
18.7.3
(RED) D+5Vb
(BLK) DG
(GRY) H760
Relay for DC Power Supply (ORG) (GRY) 761H
(BLK) (GRY) H762
PAC8
PAC8
(GRY) H700
1 2 3 4
(GRY) H761
PAC1
PAC1
(GRY) H702
(GRY) H703
(GRY) RE_ON
CTL40
CTL40
(GRY) D700
2
(GRY) D701
(GRY) D702
(GRY) D703
(GRY) D760A
CTL27 Circuit Board
Dummy Connector (GRY) DG
1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PAC9
DG
DG
DG
DG
DG
DG
1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
3
(WHT)
PAC10
PAC10
1 2
(ORG) +24V20
(BLK) PG
(ORG) D760+
PAC2
PAC2
PWR4
PWR4
(GRY) D760-
4
PWR27
(GRY) D762B-
1 4 2 5 3 6
1 4 2 5 3 6
(BLK) D762x_RTN
Circuit Board
PAC27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
D5V_IN D+5V1
(RED)
DGND_IN DG
(BLK)
D+5V1
D5V_IN (RED)
DG
DGND_IN (BLK)
D+5V1
PWR5
PWR5
D5V_IN (RED)
DG
2 6 1 3 5 7
DGND_IN (BLK)
PWR27
D+5V1
5
Circuit Board
DG
1 3 2 4 5 7 6 8
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG) Dryer Heater SSR Drive Signal
(BLK)
GMC18
GMC18
PAC3
PAC3
(ORG)
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6
POWER ON
(RED)
DGND
PAC11
PAC11
4 8
1 2
(BLK)
(ORG) P1 Heater Safety Thermostat

D700
D700
D700
1 2
1 5
1 2
(BLK)
(ORG) P2 Heater Safety Thermostat

D701
D701
D701
1 2
2 6
1 2
(BLK)
7
200V for External Relay (RED)

1 2
PAC5
PAC5
PAC12
PAC12
(BLK)
(ORG) PS1/2 Heater Safety Thermostat

D702
D702
D702
1 2
3 7
1 2
(BLK)
(ORG) PS3 Heater Safety Thermostat

D703
D703
D703
1 2
4 8
1 2
(BLK)
8
PAC27 Circuit Board
(BLK)
200V for Solution Heater
PAC13
PAC13
1 2 3
(WHT)
9
(ORG) Dryer Heater Safety Thermostat

PAC4
PAC4
1 2
1 3
1 3
(BLK)
D760A
UL 1007 18AWG
D760A
D760A
Dryer Heater (ORG)

1 3
2 4
2 4
(BLK)
PAC6
PAC6
Solution Heater (ORG)

2 4
(BLK)
10
(BLK)
N. C P1 Processing Solution Heater
1 5
H700
H700
H700
(WHT)
1 2 3
1 2 3
(BLK)
N. C P2 Processing Solution Heater
2 6
(WHT)
H701
H701
H701
1 2 3
1 2 3
11
PAC7
PAC7
(BLK)
N. C PS1/2 Processing Solution Heater
3 7
H702
H702
H702
(WHT)
1 2 3
1 2 3
(BLK)
N. C PS3 Processing Solution Heater
4 8
12
H703
H703
(WHT)
H703
1 2 3
1 2 3
F
D
E
B
A
H
C
G
PWR_FUSE_ER (GRY) PWR_FUSE_ER
1
NC FAN_ER
18.7.4
D680 (GRY) D680

D681 (GRY) D681
D724 (GRY) D724
+5V D+5V3
(RED) D762 (GRY) D762A
+5V_G DG
PWR1
PWR1
CTL41
CTL41
(BLK) D763 (GRY) D762B
+5V D+5V3
(RED) D766 (GRY) D766
+5V_G DG
7 1 8 2
(BLK) DG_CTL (GRY) DG
10 11 21 22
DG_CTL (GRY) DG
NC
+24V_ON (GRY) +24V_ON
NC
+24V_ON_rtn (BLK) +24V_ON_rtn
9 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CTL27 Circuit Board
A+12V A+12V1
LDD1
LDD1
(RED)
2
A+12V_G AG_12
(BLK)
IL+12V A+12V2
(RED)
IL+12V_G AG_12
(BLK)
A-12V_G AG_12
(BLK)
A-12V A-12V1
(BLU)
A+24V A+24V1
(ORG) COM
PWR7
PWR7
LDD27 Circuit Board

A+24V_G AG_24
10 4 12 6 5 11 9 3
3 5 4 6 7 8 1 2
(BLK) NO Left Side Cover Open/Close Sensor B
D681B
D681B
N. C
A+12V2
AG_12
A+24V1
(YEL)
AG_24 D681A/D681B-
15 17 12 13
D681A/D681B+ (YEL) COM
3 1
3
(YEL) NO Left Side Cover Open/Close Sensor A

D681A
D681A
N. C
PWR2
PWR2
A+12V_IN A+12V1 D680A/D680B-
4
(RED) (YEL) COM
AGND_IN AG_12 D680A/D680B+
(BLK) (YEL) (YEL) NO Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor 2
AGND_IN AG_12
D680B
D680B
GMC17
GMC17
(BLK) N. C
A-12V_IN A-12V1
2 1 4 3
(BLU)
14 16 18 19
GMC27
Circuit Board
COM
NO Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor 1
D680A
D680A
4
N. C
PWR27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
D762A- COM
(YEL)
D762A+ Processor Cover (Large) Open/Close Sensor
7 2
(YEL) NO
D762A
D762A
N. C
+24V01 (ORG) +24V01

PG (BLK) PG
5
+24V02 (ORG) +24V02
8 2 9 3
5 7 6 8
PG (BLK) PG
D762B-
(YEL) COM
D762B+
3 8
+24V01 (YEL) NO Processor Cover (Small) Open/Close Sensor

D762A
D762A
PG N. C
+24V02
PG
17 19 18 20
+24V11 (ORG) +24V11
D724-
CTL9
CTL9
PWR3
PWR3
PG (BLK) PG (YEL) (YEL) COM

D724+
4 1
4 1
6 1
+24V12 (ORG) +24V12 (YEL) (YEL) NO Replenisher Cartridge Door Open/Close Sensor
D724
D724
N. C
7 1 10 4
PG PG
9 11 10 12
(BLK)
6
+24V12
PWR8
PWR8
PG
22 24
D763-
CTL27 Circuit Board

(YEL) (YEL) COM
D763+
JIL
JIL
9 4
5 2
5 2
+24V21 (ORG) +24V21 (YEL) (YEL) NO Dryer Section Cover Open/Close Sensor
D763
D763
N. C
PG (BLK) PG
+24V22 (ORG) +24V22
11 5 12 6
1 3 2 4
PG (BLK) PG
PWR27 Circuit Board
+24V21 D766- (YEL) (YEL) Dryer Exit Section

(YEL) COM
D766+
JD766
JD766
Cover Open/Close
10 5
6 3
6 3
2 1
2 1
PG (YEL) (YEL) (YEL) NO

D766
D766
N. C Sensor
+24V22
13 15 14 16
PG
7
+24V11 (ORG) +24V11

PG (BLK) PG
21 23
OPA2
OPA2
NC
+24V20
+24V11 (ORG)
PG
OPA27
PG (BLK)
D760+
1 2 3 4 5 6
NC (ORG)
D760-
PAC2
PAC2
Circuit Board
PWR4
PWR4
(GRY)
D762B-
PAC27
(GRY)
D762x_RTN
1 4 2 5 3 6
1 4 2 5 3 6
(BLK)
Circuit Board
8
D+5V1 D5V_IN
(RED)
DG DGND_IN
(BLK)
D+5V1 D5V_IN
(RED) DGND_IN
DG
(BLK) D5V_IN
D+5V1
9
PWR5
PWR5
(RED) DGND_IN
DG
2 6 1 3 5 7
(BLK)
1 3 2 4 5 7 6 8
GMC18
GMC18
POWER ON
(RED)
GMC27 Circuit Board
DGND
PAC11
PAC11
1 2
4 8
(BLK)
+24V31
+24V31 (ORG)
PG
PAC27
PG (BLK)
+24V32
(ORG)
10
+24V32
Circuit Board
PG
6 1 7 2
1 3 2 4
PG (BLK)
+24V31
PG
+24V32
PG
CTL10
CTL10
11 13 12 14
+24V41
+24V41 (ORG)
PG D+5V2 D+5V2
PG (BLK) (RED)
+24V42 DG DG
PWR9
PWR9
+24V42 (ORG) (BLK)

PG D+5V2 D+5V2
CTL27 Circuit Board
PG (BLK) (RED)
+24V43 DG DG
CTL1
CTL1
+24V43 (ORG) (BLK)

PG D+5V2
11
D+5V2
CTL27
(RED)
10 5 8 3 9 4
PG (BLK)
5 8 6 9 7 10
DG DG
1 3 4 5 2 6
(BLK)
+24V41 D+5V2
Circuit Board
PG DG
1 4 2 5 7 10 8 11
+24V42
PG
+24V43
PWR6
PWR6
PG
15 18 16 19 17 20
D+5V4 D+5V4
(RED)
DG DG
(BLK)
12
D+5V4 D+5V4
OPA1
OPA1
DG DG
1 2 3 4
OPA27
3 6 9 12
Circuit Board
18-39
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
18-40
1
18.7.5
M610_OUT1 (RED)
M610_OUT2 (YEL) Upper Magazine Paper Supply Motor
CTL3
CTL3
M610
M610
Board
M610_OUT4 (BLU)
1 2 3 4
1 3 2 4
M610_OUT3 (ORG)
Section
CTL27 Circuit
Magazine Drive
2
(RED) (RED) M631_OUT1A

Feed Motor 2 (YEL) (YEL) M631_OUT1B 24AWG 24AWG 24AWG
M631
M631
(BLU) (BLU) M631_OUT2B M600_OUT1 (ORG) (ORG) (ORG) Upper Cutter Drive Motor
3
M600
M600
1 2
1 2
JM600
1 5
1 4
1 4
1 2
1 2
1 3 2 4
1 3 2 4
1 3 2 4
1 4 3 6
(ORG) (ORG) M631_OUT2A M600_OUT2 (BLK) (BLK) (BLK)
M600 M601
JM600 JM601
NC
4 8
NC
JKA5
JKA5
CTL5
CTL5
(RED) (RED) M632_OUT1A M630_OUT1A (RED) (RED)
JRE7
JRE7
Feed Motor 3 (YEL) (YEL) M632_OUT1B M630_OUT1B (YEL) (YEL) Feed Motor 1
M630
M630
M632
M632
(BLU) (BLU) M632_OUT2B M630_OUT2B (BLU) (BLU)
5 7 6 8
5 7 6 8
5 7 6 8
CTL7
CTL7
(ORG) (ORG)
2 3 6 7
2 3 5 6
2 3 5 6
1 4 3 6
1 4 3 6
M632_OUT2A M630_OUT2A (ORG) (ORG)
4

Registration Tilt Motor (YEL) (YEL) M641_OUT1B
M641
M641
(BLU) (BLU) M641_OUT2B
1 4 3 6
(ORG) (ORG) M641_OUT2A
9 11 10 12
9 11 10 12
9 11 10 12
CTL27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/7)
NC
NC D+5Va (RED) (RED) (RED)
13 14
Upper Magazine Splice Sensor (LED)
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
D619L (BLK) (BLK) (BLK)
D629L
D619L
D619L
1 2 3
5
D+5Va (RED) (RED) (RED)

D619L Upper Magazine Splice Sensor
(BLU) (BLU) (BLU)
JD619
D629P
D619P
D619P
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 4 5
1 2 3
DG (BLK) (BLK) (BLK)

JD619 JD629
D+5Va (RED) (RED) (RED)

6
(BLU) Upper Cutter Home Position Sensor

D601 (BLU) (BLU)
D603
D601
D601
6 7 8
6 7 8
6 7 8
6 7 8
6 7 8
1 3 2
(RED) (RED) D+5Va DG (BLK) (BLK) (BLK)

Tilt Home Position Sensor
(BLU) (BLU) D641
D641
D641
JRE36
JRE36
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(BLK) (BLK) DG
CTL34
CTL34
D+5Va
D_reserve04 D+5Va (RED) (RED)
CTL36 Magazine Exit Paper Sensor (LED)
CTL36
D632L
9 10
9 10
9 10
DG (BLK) (BLK)
D632L
D632L
1 2 3
DG
DG D+5Va
Cutter Feed Section
DG D_reserve02
DG DG
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13
7
D+5Va (RED) (RED)

Magazine Exit Paper Sensor
D632P (BLU) (BLU)
D632P
D632P
1 2 3
DG (BLK) (BLK)
11 12 13
11 12 13
14 15 16
D+5Va
D_reserve03
17 18 19
DG
(WHT) (WHT) S630_D0

(WHT) (WHT) S630_D2 DG
NC DG
JKA34
JKA34
8
NC DG
20 21 22
(WHT) (WHT) S630_D6

(WHT) (WHT) P+24V12
Back Printer Head (WHT) (WHT) S630_D4
S630
S630
JRE8
JRE8
(WHT) (WHT) P+24V12

NC
(WHT) (WHT) S630_D7
CTL8
CTL8
Back Printing/Registration Section
(WHT) (WHT) P+24V12

(WHT) (WHT) S630_D3 D610 (RED) (RED) Upper Magazine ID Sensor 1
D610
D610
1 2
1 2
(WHT) (WHT) S630_D5 DG (GRY) (GRY)

14 15
14 15
(WHT) (WHT) S630_D1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
NC
9
NC
NC D611 (RED) (RED) Upper Magazine ID Sensor 2
D611
D611
3 4
1 2
NC DG (GRY) (GRY)
15 16 17 18
16 17
16 17
D612 (RED) (RED) Upper Magazine ID Sensor 3

D612
D612
5 6
DG
1 2
(GRY) (GRY)
18 19
18 19
CTL35
CTL35
Nip Release (RED) (RED) S631_OUT1

Solenoid 1
S631
S631
S631
10
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK) (BLK) S631_OUT2

D613 (RED) (RED) Upper Magazine ID Sensor 4
D613
D613
7 8
1 2
DG (GRY) (GRY)
20 21
20 21
D_reserve01
Nip Release (RED) (RED) S632_OUT1 DG
9 10
Solenoid 2
S632
S632
S632
JRE2
JRE2
1 2
1 2
3 4
S632_OUT2
3 4
3 4
(BLK) (BLK)
D+5Va (RED) (RED)
CTL2
CTL2
Upper Magazine Paper End Sensor

(BLU) (BLU)
D616
D616
D616
(BLK) (BLK)
1 2 3
DG
11 12 13
22 23 24
22 23 24
Nip Release (RED) (RED) S640_OUT1 DG

Solenoid 3
S640
S640
S640
11
1 2
1 2
5 6
S640_OUT2 DG
5 6
5 6
(BLK) (BLK)
DG
14 15 16
NC
7 8
NC
12
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
1
M650_OUTA (BLK) (BLK)

M650_OUTB (RED) (RED)
Sub-scanning Feed Motor
M650_OUTC (ORG) (ORG)
M650
M650
M650
M650_OUTD (YEL) (YEL)
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
M650_OUTE (BLU) (BLU)
6
6
6
NC
CTL4
CTL4
JFU4
JFU4
M651_OUT1A (RED) (RED)
M651_OUT1B (YEL) (YEL) Soft Nip Motor
M651
M651
M651
M651_OUT2B (BLU) (BLU)
2
1 3 4 6
1 3 4 6
(ORG) (ORG)
7 9 8 10
7 9 8 10
M651_OUT2A
7 9 8 10
D+5Va (RED) (RED) (RED) Exposure Section
1 2
1 2
Entrance Paper Sensor
CTL27 Circuit Board

1 2
1 2
1 2
D650L
D650L
1 2 3
JD650
JD650
3
D+5Va (RED) (RED) (RED) Exposure Section

Paper Sensor
3 4
3 4
3 4
3 4
3 4

D653L
D653L
1 2 3
D+5Va (RED) (RED)

Exposure Section Entrance
D650P (BLU) (BLU)
D650P
D650P
Paper Sensor
5 6 7
5 6 7
1 2 3
5 6 7
DG (BLK) (BLK)
JFU32
JFU32
4
Sub-scanning Section
CTL32
CTL32
Feed Motor 4 (BLU) (BLU) M660_OUT1B D+5Va (RED) (RED) (BLU)

Soft Nip Home
M660
M660
(YEL) (YEL) M660_OUT2B D651 (BLU) (BLU) (BLK)
D651
D651
JD651
JD651
Position Sensor
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 3 2 4
M660_OUT2A (RED)
1 4 3 6
DG
8 9 10
1 3 2 4
1 3 2 4
(ORG) (ORG) (BLK) (BLK)
8 9 10
8 9 10
D+5Va
Nip Release Exposure Section Paper Sensor
5
(RED) (RED) M660_OUT1 D653P

D653P
D653P
Solenoid 4
S660
S660
S660
5 6
5 6
1 2
1 2
5 6
1 2 3
(BLK) (BLK) M660_OUT2 DG

11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
11 12 13 14
JFD6
JFD6
DG
CTL6
CTL6
DG
DG
Nip Release M661_OUT1 DG Body Y Terminal
(RED) (RED)
Solenoid 5
S661
S661
S661
7 8
7 8
1 2
1 2
7 8
(BLK) (BLK) M661_OUT2 DG
DG
15 16 17 18 19 20
DG
Nip Release (RED) (RED) M662_OUT1

6
Solenoid 6
S662
S662
S662
1 2
1 2
9 10
(BLK) (BLK)
9 10
9 10
M662_OUT2
NC
NC
11 12
P+24V32 (ORG)
F607_FAN_ER (GRY)
F607
F607
F607
F607
PG
1 3 2
1 3 2
31 32 33
(BLK)
7
Sub-scanning Exit Section
Sub-scanning Exit (RED) (RED) D+5Va

Section Paper D667
(BLU) (BLU)
D667
D667
Sensor
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
(BLK) (BLK) DG
P+24V32 (ORG)
JFD33
JFD33
F630_FAN_ER
F630
F630
F630
F630
(GRY)
1 2 3
4 2 1
PG
1 3 4
Sub-scanning Exit (RED) (RED) D+5Va (BLK)

Guide Open/Close (BLU) (BLU) D669
D669
D669
Sensor
1 2 3
4 5 6
4 5 6
4 5 6
(BLK) (BLK) DG
CTL33
CTL33
D+5Va
8
DL_reserve01
D+5Va
DL_reserve05 P+24V32 (ORG)
DG F631_FAN_ER (GRY)
F631
F631
F631
F631
PG
1 3 4
4 5 6
4 2 1
DG (BLK)
DG
DG
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
P+24V32 (ORG)
F600_FAN_ER Control Section Exhaust Fan 1
9
(GRY)
F600
F600
F600
F600
PG
4 2 1
1 3 4
10 11 12
(BLK)
P+24V32 (ORG)
CTL21
CTL21
Control Section Exhaust Fan 2

F601_FAN_ER
F601
F601
F601
F601
(GRY)
4 2 1
1 3 4
PG
13 14 15
(BLK)
10
P+24V32 (ORG)
F604_FAN_ER (GRY)
F604
F604
F604
F604
PG
22 23 24
(BLK)
11
P+24V32 (ORG)
F602_FAN_ER Control Section Exhaust Fan 3
(GRY)
F602
F602
F602
F602
4 2 1
PG
1 3 4
16 17 18
(BLK)
P+24V32
F602_FAN_ER
PG
P+24V32
F605_FAN_ER
PG
P+24V32
12
F606_FAN_ER
PG
P+24V32
F630_FAN_ER
PG
PG
7 8 9 25 26 27 28 29 30 19 20 21 34
18-41
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
18-42
F701_+24V32 (RED)
P2 Heater Cooling Fan 1
FAN_ER6
F701
F701
F701
F701
(BLU)
1 3 4
1 2 3
4 2 1
PG (WHIT)
CTL11
CTL11
Fr01_+24V32
FAN_ER01
PG
No.2 Rack
4 5 6 7
Auto-washing Nozzle (ORG) P+24V42 PG
S720
1 5
1 5
1 5
(BLK) S720r
2
UL 1007 22AWG
No.3 Rack
Auto-washing Nozzle (ORG) P+24V42
S721
2 6
2 6
2 6
(BLK) S721r
JPR16
JPR16
CTL16
CTL16
Dryer Entrance UL 1007 22AWG
Squeegee Rack (ORG) P+24V42
Auto-washing
S722
3 7
3 7
3 7
(BLK) S722r
Nozzle
M720_OUT1 (ORG) Cartridge Opening Motor
M720
M720
M720
2 1
M720_OUT2
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
Dryer Entrance UL 1007 22AWG
Squeegee Rack P+24V42
(ORG)
Auto-washing
S723
3
4 8
4 8
4 8
(BLK) S723r
Nozzle
CTL13
CTL13
UL1007 22AWG
P+24V42F (ORG) Auto-washing Pump
PU720
PU720
PU720r (WHT)
PU720
3 4 5
4 2 1 3
4 2 1 3
PG (BLK)
4
P+24V43 (ORG)
P1 Circulation Pump
PU700_ON (WHT)
PU700
PU700
PU700
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
PG (BLK)
UL 1007 22AWG
P+24V43 (ORG)
P2 Circulation Pump
PU701_ON (WHT)
PU701
PU701
PU701
4 5 6
1 2 3
1 2 3
PG (BLK)
5
UL 1007 22AWG
P+24V43 (ORG)
PS1 Circulation Pump
(WHT)
PU702
PU702
PU702
PU702_ON
CTL14
CTL14
7 8 9
1 2 3
1 2 3
PG (BLK)
UL 1007 22AWG
P+24V43 (ORG)
6
PU703_ON PS2 Circulation Pump

(WHT)
PU703
PU703
PU703
1 2 3
1 2 3
PG (BLK)
10 11 12
CTL27 Circuit Board
UL 1007 22AWG
P+24V43 (ORG)
PS3 Circulation Pump
PU704_ON (WHT)
PU704
PU704
PU704
1 2 3
1 2 3
13 14 15
PG (BLK)
PG
16
7
P+24V42 (ORG) P1R Replenisher Pump

PU721
PU721
(D725)
PU721
1 2
1 2
1 2
PU721r (BLK)
8
UL 1007 22AWG
P+24V42 (ORG) P2RA Replenisher Pump
PU722
PU722
(D726)
PU722
1 2
1 2
3 4
PU722r (BLK)
CTL12
CTL12
UL 1007 22AWG
P+24V42 (ORG) P2RB Replenisher Pump
PU723
PU723
(D727)
PU723
1 2
1 2
5 6
PU723r (BLK)
9
UL 1007 22AWG
P+24V42 (ORG) PSR Replenisher Pump
PU724
PU724
(D728)
PU724
7 8
1 2
1 2
PU724r (BLK)
10
D+5Vb (RED)
P1R Pump Rotation Sensor
D725
DG (BLK)
D725
D725
(PU721)
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 3 2
D725 (BLU)
UL 1007 26AWG
D+5Vb (RED)
DG P2RA Pump Rotation Sensor
D726
(BLK)
D726
D726
(PU722)
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 6 5
D726 (BLU)
11
CTL25
CTL25
UL 1007 26AWG
D+5Vb (RED)
P2RB Pump Rotation Sensor
D727
DG (BLK)
D727
D727
(PU723)
7 9 8
1 2 3
1 2 3
D727 (BLU)
UL 1007 26AWG
12
D+5Vb (RED)
PSR Pump Rotation Sensor
D728
DG (BLK)
D728
D728
(PU724)
1 2 3
1 2 3
10 12 11
D728 (BLU)
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
1
FS700 (RED) P1 Solution Level Sensor
FS700
FS700
P1 Solution Temperature Sensor
1 2
1 2
1 2
TS700 DG (GRY)
TS700
DG
TS700
TS700
N. C
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
FG2
FS701 (RED) P2 Solution Level Sensor
FS701
FS701
1 2
1 2
3 4
DG (GRY)
P2 Solution Temperature Sensor TS701
2
TS701
DG
TS701
TS701
N. C
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
FG2
FS702 (RED) PS1 Solution Level Sensor
FS702
FS702
DG
5 6
1 2
1 2
(GRY)
PS1 Solution Temperature Sensor TS701
TS702
DG
TS702
TS702
N. C
1 2 3
1 2 3
7 8 9
FG2
FS703 (RED)
CTL26
CTL26
PS2 Solution Level Sensor
FS703
FS703
7 8
1 2
1 2
DG (GRY)
3
PS3 Solution Temperature Sensor TS701
TS703
DG
CTL29
CTL29
TS703
TS703
N. C
1 2 3
1 2 3
FG2 FS704 (RED)
10 11 12
PS3 Solution Level Sensor
FS704
FS704
1 2
1 2
DG (GRY)
NC 9 10
(RED) TS701 NC
11 12
Dryer Temperature Sensor

(WHT) DG
JPR26
JPR26
TS760
TS760
TS760
4
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
FG2
13 14 15
FG2
16
D+5Vb (RED) (RED)
Replenisher Cartridge
D722 (BLU) (BLU) Box Upper Sensor
D722
D722
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
DG (BLK) (BLK)
13 14 15
JPR29
JPR29
D+5Vb (RED) (RED) Replenisher Cartridge

D723 (BLU) (BLU) Box Lower Sensor
D723
D723
5
4 5 6
4 5 6
1 2 3
DG (BLK) (BLK)
16 17 18
7 8
7 8
1
1
1
1
1
(RED) (RED) F760_ON
Dryer Fan Rotation Sensor

FAN_ER_8
D764
CTL22
CTL22
(F760)
D764
D764
2 3
2 3
PGr
2 3 4
2 3 4
2 3 4
PG
4
4
5
5
6
JPR22
JPR22
(RED) (RED) (RED) D+5Vb FS720 (RED) P1R Upper Level Sensor
Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor
6 7
1 2
1 2
6 7
1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK) (BLK) (BLK) D771L DG (GRY)

FS720
FS720
D771L
D771L
N. C
1 2 3
1 2 3
7
JD771
JD771
(RED) (RED) (RED) D+5Vb

Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor
(BLU) (BLU) (BLU) D771P FS721 (RED) P2RA Upper Level Sensor
D771P
D771P
3 4
1 2
1 2 3
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 4 5
DG (GRY)
8 9 10
8 9 10
(BLK) (BLK) (BLK) DG

FS721
FS721
CTL31
CTL31
N. C
1 2 3
D+5Vb
DL_reserve02
D+5Vb
D_reserve06
DG FS722 (RED) P2RB Upper Level Sensor
5 6
1 2
PRO_YOBI_HPI DG (GRY)
FS722
FS722
N. C
8
1 2 3
DG
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FS723 (RED)
N. C PSR Upper Level Sensor
7 8
DG (GRY)
FS723
FS723
1 2 3
1 2 3
9
FS724 (RED) P1R Lower Level Sensor

CTL28
CTL28
1 2
DG (GRY)
9 10
FS724
FS724
N. C
1 2 3
P+24V02f
Dryer Fan (ORG) (ORG)
F760
F760
F760
JPR19
JPR19
PG
CTL19
CTL19
(D764)
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
(BLK) (BLK)
FS725 (RED) P2RA Lower Level Sensor

1 2
(GRY)
11 12
DG
FS725
FS725
N. C
1 2 3
10
FS726 (RED) P2RB Lower Level Sensor

1 2
13 14
DG (GRY)
FS726
FS726
N. C
1 2 3
FS727 (RED)
N. C PSR Lower Level Sensor
15 16
DG (GRY)
FS727
FS727
1 2 3
1 2 3
11
DG
DG
DG
DG
17 18 19 20
12
CTL27 Circuit Board
18-43
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
18-44
CANH (GRY) CANH CANH PWR_FUSE_ER (GRY) PWR_FUSE_ER 1
CANL (GRY) CANL CANL FAN_ER NC
OPA5
OPA5
1 2 3
DG (GRY) DG DG D680 (GRY) D680
Termination Termination D681 (GRY) D681
CTL39
CTL39
CTL39
CTL39
CTL27
Termination Termination D724 (GRY) D724
CAN_tn-ON CAN_tn-ON D762A (GRY) D762
Circuit Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PWR1
PWR1
CTL41
CTL41
DG DG D762B (GRY) D763
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D766 (GRY) D766
With Lower Magazine

DG (GRY) DG_CTL
DG (GRY) DG_CTL
Without Lower Magazine

+24V_ON (ORG) +24V_ON
2
+24V_ON_rtn (BLK) +24V_ON_rtn
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3
(RED) D+5Vb
(BLK) DG
(RED) D+5Vb D+5V2 (RED) D+5V2

(BLK) DG DG (BLK) DG
(GRY) H760 D+5V2 (RED) D+5V2
CTL1
CTL1
(GRY) H761 DG (BLK) DG
(GRY) H762 D+5V2 (RED) D+5V2
1 3 4 6 2 5
(GRY) H700 DG (BLK) DG
(GRY) H701 D+5V2
(GRY) H702 DG
1 4 2 5 7 10 8 11
PAC1
PAC1
(GRY) H703
4
(GRY) RE_ON
CTL40
CTL40
PWR6
PWR6
(GRY) D700
(GRY) D701
(GRY) D702
(GRY) D703
(GRY) D760A
(GRY) DG UL 1007 22AWG
1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DG D+5V4 (RED) D+5V4
PAC27 Circuit Board

DG DG (BLK) DG
OPA1
OPA1
OPA27
DG D+5V4 D+5V4
1 2 3 4
DG DG DG
3 6 9 12
Circuit Board
DG
DG
1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5
+24V01 (ORG) +24V01

PG (BLK) PG
6
+24V02 (ORG) +24V02

8 2 9 3
5 7 6 8
PG (BLK) PG
+24V01
PG
+24V02
PG
17 19 18 20
+24V11 (ORG) +24V11

(BLK)
CTL9
CTL9
PG PG
+24V12 (ORG) +24V12
7 1 10 4
PG (BLK) PG
9 11 10 12
7
+24V12
PG
22 24
PWR8
PWR8
+24V21 (ORG) +24V21

PG (BLK) PG
+24V22 (ORG) +24V22
11 5 12 6
(BLK)
1 3 2 4
PG PG
+24V21
PWR27 Circuit Board
PG
8
+24V22
PG
13 15 14 16
+24V11 (ORG) +24V11

21 23
PG (BLK) PG
NC
OPA2
OPA2
+24V11
CTL27 Circuit Board
PG
OPA27
1 2 3 4 5 6
NC
Circuit Board
9
10
+24V31
+24V31 (ORG)
PG
PG (BLK)
+24V32
+24V32 (ORG)
PG
6 1 7 2
1 3 2 4
PG (BLK)
+24V31
PG
+24V32
CTL10
CTL10
PG
11 13 12 14
11
+24V41
+24V41 (ORG)
PG
PG (BLK)
PWR9
PWR9
+24V42
+24V42 (ORG)
PG
PG (BLK)
+24V43
+24V43 (ORG)
PG
10 5 8 3 9 4
PG (BLK)
5 8 6 9 7 10
+24V41
PG
+24V42
PG
+24V43
12
PG
15 18 16 19 17 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A from Processor Drive Motor
M700
Waste Solution Level Sensor

M700
P2RA Cartridge Washing Valve
P2RB Cartridge Washing Valve

P1R Cartridge Washing Valve
P1R Stirring Valve
CN603 CN604
B CN603 CN604
Processing Tank Exhaust Fan

K3201 Circuit Board
S731 S728 S729 S730
1 2 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
CN601 CN602 FS728 JPR15
CN601 CN602 FS728 JPR15
1 2 3 4 5 2 3 5 8 1 4 6 7 1 2 2 6 3 7 4 8 1 5
UL1007 26AWG
NC
C F704
1 3 4
F704
F704
F704
4 2 1
(ORG)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(WHT)
(BLK)
D 1 4 2 5 3 6 1 3 5 2 4 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3
FS728
DG
P+24V31f
PG
NC
NC
D+5Vbf
DG
M700_PON_OFF
M700_CW_CCW
M700_CLK
DG
DG
DG
P+24V41
S728r
P+24V41
S729r
P+24V41
S730r
P+24V41
S731r
PG
PG
P+24V41
FAN_ER_7
P+24V32
D653P_out
E CTL27 Circuit Board

CANH
CANL
DG
DG
DG
DG
CTL37 CTL38
CTL37 CTL38
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
F
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(BLK)
1 2 5 3 6 4
GMC10
GMC10
CAN_H
CAN_L
DGND
DGND
P_SYNC
DGND
GMC27 Circuit Board
18-45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Sorter Tray Stop Position Sensor

Sorter Drive Motor
Sorter Full Sensor

M810
M810 D810 D811

B M810 D810 D811
1 2 3 1 2 3
RP17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
(ORG)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
1 2 3 2 1 1 3 2 4 5 6
SWA2 SWA3 SWA4
SWA2 SWA3 SWA4
SWA23 Circuit Board

BZ810 Full Buzzer Detection Circuit
(ORG)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
M810+
D+5Va
DGND
M810-
D810
D811
D812
D815
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
NC
NC
JSOT_M JSOT_S
JSOT_M JSOT_S SWA1
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 SWA1
D 3 4 5 6 8 7 9 10 1 2
(ORG)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
E JSWA1
JSWA1
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
SOT_M SOT_S
SOT_M SOT_S
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
F
5 6 7 8 9 3 4 10 11 12 1 2
RP17
(ORG)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
1 3 2 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CTL17 CTL24
CTL17 CTL24
PG
D+5Vbf
DG
D810
D811
D812
D+5Vbf
PRO_YOBI_HP2
DG
P+24V32
M810_OUT1
M810_OUT2
CTL27 Circuit Board
18-46
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
1
(RED)
18.7.6
D+5V2 D+5V2
Lower Magazine Splice Sensor (RED) (RED) (RED) D+5Vc DG (BLK) DG
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
(LED) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) D629L D+5V2 (RED) D+5V2
D629L
D619L
D629L
CTL1
CTL1
1 2 3
DG (BLK) DG
CTL27
D+5V2 (RED) D+5V2
1 3 4 6 2 5
DG (BLK) DG
Circuit Board
NC D+5V2
(RED) (RED) (RED) D+5Vc NC DG
1 4 2 5 7 10 8 11
Lower Magazine Splice Sensor
PWR6
PWR6
(BLU) (BLU) (BLU) D629P
JD629
D619P
D629P
D629P
1 2 3
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 4 5
JD619 JD629
UL 1007 22AWG
D+5V4 (RED) D+5V4
2
DG (BLK) DG
NC
OPA1
OPA1
Lower Cutter Home (RED) (RED) (RED) D+5Vc D+5V4 D+5V4
NC
3 6 9 1
1 2 3 4
(BLU) (BLU) (BLU)
D603
D601
D603
Position Sensor D603 DG DG
1 3 2
6 7 8
6 7 8
6 7 8
6 7 8
6 7 8
OPA7
OPA7
D+5Vc
DL_reserve01
D+5Vc
DL_reserve01
DG
D+5Vc
DL_reserve01
DG +24V01 (ORG) +24V11
3
D+5Vc PG (BLK) PG
DL_reserve01 +24V02 (ORG) +24V12
(BLK)
8 2 9 3
5 7 6 8
DG PG PG
DG
DG +24V11
DG PG
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
+24V12
PG
17 19 18 20
PWR27 Circuit Board
+24V11 (ORG) +24V21
JOP7
JOP7
CTL9
CTL9
PG (BLK) PG
+24V12 (ORG) +24V22
4
7 1 10 4
PG (BLK) PG
9 11 10 12
PWR8
PWR8
+24V22
OPA27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
CTL27 Circuit Board PG

22 24
Lower Magazine ID Sensor 1 (RED) (RED) D620

D620
D620
1 2
1 2
(GRY) (GRY) DG +24V21 (ORG) +24V01
9 10
9 10
PG (BLK) PG
+24V22 (ORG) +24V02
11 5 12 6
(BLK)
1 3 2 4
PG PG
D621
D621
1 2
3 4
(GRY) (GRY) DG +24V01
11 12
11 12
OPA Circuit Board PG
5
+24V02
13 15 14 16
PG
+24V11 (ORG) +24V21
(RED) (RED) D622 PG (BLK) PG
21 23
Lower Magazine ID Sensor 3
D622
D622
1 2
5 6
(GRY) (GRY) DG NC
13 14
13 14
OPA2
OPA2
+24V11
PG
OPA8
OPA8
1 2 3 4 5 6
NC
D623
D623
1 2
7 8
(GRY) (GRY) DG
15 16
15 16
6
D_reserve01
DG
17 18
17 18
9 10
(RED) (RED) D+5Vc

Lower Magazine Paper End Sensor
(BLU) (BLU) D626
D626
D626
1 2 3
(BLK) (BLK) DG
19 20 21
11 12 13
19 20 21
DG
22
22
DG
DG
14 15 16
7
M620_OUT1 (RED)
M620_OUT2 (BLU) Lower Magazine Paper Supply Motor
M620
M620
OPA3
OPA3
M620_OUT4 (YEL)
1 2 3 4
1 3 2 4
M620_OUT3 (ORG)
D+5Vd
Drive Section
Lower Magazine
D+5Vd
Pack_I_0
DG
Pack_I_1
8
DG
Pack_I_2
DG
Pack_I_3
DG
Pack_I_4
DG
Pack_I_5
DG
Pack_I_6
DG
Pack_I_7
OPA9
OPA9
DG M601_OUT1 (ORG) (ORG) (ORG) Lower Cutter Drive Motor

9
JOP4
JOP4
OPA4
OPA4
M601
M601
JM601
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
Pack_0_0 M601_OUT1 (BLK) (BLK) (BLK)

M600 M601
JM600 JM601
DG
Pack_0_1
DG
Pack_0_2
DG
Pack_0_3
DG
Pack_0_4
DG
Pack_0_5
DG CANH (RED) CANH
Pack_0_6 CANL (BLU) CANL
OPA5
OPA5
10
1 2 3
DG DG (BLK) DG
Pack_0_7 Termination
CTL39
CTL39
CTL27
DG Termination
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
CAN_tn-ON
Circuit Board
DG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11
CANH
CANL
DG
Termination
OPA6
OPA6
Termination
CAN_tn-ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DG
12
18-47
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
18-48
1
18.7.7
5V_OUT (RED)
DGND (BLK)
ROS
ROS
2
SOS_H (GRY)
GMC9
GMC9
SOS_L (GRY)
13 15 14 18
5 4 3 2 1
FG
D+5V1 D5V_IN
(RED)
DG DGND_IN
(BLK)
D+5V1 D5V_IN
(RED)
DG DGND_IN
(BLK)
D+5V1 D5V_IN
PWR5
PWR5
(RED)
DG DGND_IN
2 6 1 3 5 7
(BLK)
D+5V1
DG
1 3 2 4 5 7 6 8
3
PWR27 Circuit Board

GMC18
GMC18
+5V D+5V3
(RED)
+5V_G DG
(BLK)
+5V D+5V3
(RED)
+5V_G DG
7 1 8 2
(BLK)
10 11 21 22
NC
NC
9 20
POWER ON
(RED)
DGND A+12V
4
A+12V1
PAC11
PAC11
LDD1
LDD1
1 2
4 8
(BLK) (RED)
A+12V_G AG_12
PAC27
(BLK)
IL+12V A+12V2
(RED)
IL+12V_G AG_12
Circuit Board
GMC27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
(BLK)
A-12V_G AG_12
(BLK)
A-12V A-12V1
LDD27 Circuit Board
(BLU)
A+24V A+24V1
(GRY)
A+24V_G AG_24
10 4 12 6 5 11 9 3
PWR7
PWR7
3 5 4 6 7 8 1 2
(BLK)
A+12V2
AG_12
A+24V1
AG_24
5
PWR27 Circuit Board
15 17 12 13
LAN Cable
PC
GMC2
GMC2
A+12V_IN A+12V1
GMC27 Circuit Board
(RED)
(DIC2)
AGND_IN AG_12
(BLK)
AGND_IN AG_12
(BLK)
GMC17
GMC17
A-12V_IN A-12V1
2 1 4 3
(BLU)
14 16 18 19
6
FGND
Rxd_0 Tx_LDD
(RED)
Txd_0 Rx_LDD
GMC6
GMC6
(GRY)
DGND DGND
LDD3
LDD3
5 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
(BLK)
LDD27
DGND
4
Circuit Board
R
GMC11
GMC11
1 2
1 2
LDR4
LDR4
LDR27
7
Circuit Board
G
GMC12
GMC12
BNC
1 2
1 2
AOM
Driver
8
DGND
SW com (GND) (BLK) (BLK)
START_SW
START SW out (GRY) (GRY)
B
SOFT_RST_SW
GMC13
GMC13
1 2
1 2
RESET SW out (WHT) (WHT)

LDB4
LDB4
LED_ERROR
LDB27
ERROR LED cathode (GRY) (GRY)

LDD33
LDD33
D+5VP
LED Anode com (5V) (RED) (RED)
LED_READY
6 5 4 3 2 1
Circuit Board
READY LED cathode (WHT) (WHT)

7 8 9 10 11 12
7 8 9 10 11 12
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
KEY1
KEY1
OPP
OPP
6
6
9
GND GND
Operation Panel TxD (GRY) (GRY) Rx_DIS
RxD (BLK) (BLK) Tx_DIS
GMC7
GMC7
5V (RED) (RED) 5V_OUT

P_SYNC D653P_out
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
GND (BLK) (BLK) GND

7 8 9 10 11
DGND DG
1 2
DG
CTL37
CTL37
DG
1 2 3 4
GMC10
GMC10
10
CAN_H CANH
CAN_L CANL
CTL38
CTL38
DGND DG
1 2 3
CTL27 Circuit Board
DGND
5 3 6 4
11
SW
(RED)
DGND
SW
GMC20
GMC20
1 2
1 2
(BLK)
12
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
Cal_M1
1
Cal_M2 +5V D+5V3
18.7.8
(RED)
A+24VP2 +5V_G DG
(BLK)
A+24VP2 +5V D+5V3
LDD31
LDD31
(RED)
Cal_M3 +5V_G DG
(BLK)
7 1 8 2
10 11 21 22
Cal_M4
1 2 3 4 5 6
Densitometer Motor
Densitometer Motor
NC
NC
9 20
A+12V A+12V1
LDD1
LDD1
(RED)
A+12V_G AG_12
(BLK)
IL+12V A+12V2
(RED)
IL+12V_G AG_12
(BLK)
A-12V_G AG_12
2
(BLK)
R_LED A-12V A-12V1
(BLU)
A+12VI_C A+24V A+24V1
(ORG)
B_LED A+24V_G PWR7 AG_24
PWR7
3 5 4 6 7 8 1 2
10 4 12 6 5 11 9 3
(BLK)
G_LED
AGND A+12V2
/AD_CS AG_12
AGND A+24V1
/AD_OUT AG_24
15 17 12 13
PWR27 Circuit Board
/HEAD_CLK
DGND
D+5VP_CLA
THERMISTOR
3
+5VA_C
Densitometer Head
Densitometer Head
DGND A+12V_IN A+12V1
LDD32
LDD32
(RED)
/ROM_CS AGND_IN AG_12
(BLK)
/ROM_DI AGND_IN AG_12
GMC17
GMC17
(BLK)
/ROM_DO A-12V_IN A-12V1
GMC27
2 1 4 3
(BLU)
14 16 18 19
/DP_DI
/DP_CS Circuit Board
DGND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
NC
D+5VP_CAL
SIG1
4
DGND
21 22 23 24
A+24V_AOMO A+24VA
(ORG)
Densitometer Head
Densitometer Head
LDD27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
GND_AOMO A24G
(BLK)
A+12V__AOMO A+12VA
(RED)
A12G
LDD2
GND__AOMO
LDD2
AOM1
AOM1
(G)
(BLK)
A-12V__AOMO A-12VA
(BLU)
READY__AOM BAOM_ST
1 4 2 5 3 6
(GRY)
1 2 3 4 5 6
AOM Driver
5
DGND
SW com (GND) (BLK) (BLK)
START_SW
START SW out (GRY) (GRY)
SOFT_RST_SW
RESET SW out (WHT) (WHT)
LED_ERROR FGND
ERROR LED cathode (GRY) (GRY)
LDD33
LDD33
D+5VP Rxd_0 Tx_LDD

LED Anode com (5V) (RED) (RED) (GRY)
LED_READY Txd_0 Rx_LDD
GMC6
GMC6
6 5 4 3 2 1
READY LED cathode (WHT) (WHT) (GRY)
7 8 9 10 11 12
7 8 9 10 11 12
NC DGND DGND
LDD3
LDD3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
(BLK)
GMC27
OPP
OPP
KEY1
KEY1
DGND
6
6
4
Circuit Board
GND GND
6
TxD (GRY) (GRY) Rx_DIS
Operation Panel
RxD (BLK) (BLK) Tx_DIS
GMC7
GMC7
5V (RED) (RED) 5V_OUT
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
GND (BLK) (BLK) GND
7 8 9 10 11
DGND
Txd_1
Rxd_1
LDD4
LDD4
DGND
Not Used
DGND
1 2 3 4 5
7
CPU_TXD
DGND
LDD34
LDD34
CPU_RXD
1 2 3
Not Used
A+24VP1
(ORG)
AGND3
(BLK)
FAN
FAN
F690_ST
(GRY)
A+24VP1
4 1 2 3
LDD13
LDD13
AGND3
Cooling Fan
F675_ST
1 2 3 4 5 6
LDD Circuit Board
8
LDD27 Circuit Board

9
TCK
DGND
TDO
D+5VP
TMS
10
NC
LDD22
LDD22
NC
Not Used
NC
TDI
DGND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
LDD23
LDD23
Not Used
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
18-49
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
18-50
1
G_CS (GRN) G_CS
1
/G_CS (GRY)
18.7.9
2
G_DI (GRN) G_DI
/G_DI (GRY)
3
G_DO (GRN) G_DO (ORG) F670_I
JMH1
_DO
/G (GRY) (BLK) AGND3
F610
FAN1
1 2 3
4 5 6
G_SK (GRN) G_SK (GRY)
4
F670_ST_I
LDD6
LDD6
/G_SK (GRY)
5
D+5VP_GROM (RED) D+5VP
9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2
DGND (BLK)
NC F671_I
NC /G _CS AGND3
NC /G _DI F671_ST_I
ROS
2
NC /G _DO
11 12 13 14
JMH5
/G _SK
LDD14
LDD14
DGND
1 2 3 4 5
F672_I
AGND3
FGND
10 11 12
F672_ST_I
A-12VP_JMH
(GRN) A-12V
AGND
(GRN) AGND
A+12VP_JMH
10 9 8 7
3
(GRN) A+12V
1 2 3
AGND
PD- (BLK) S673_R
G_PD
6 5
4 5
2 1
2 1
PD+ (ORG) S673
S673
3
SOL
LDD10
LDD10
JMH2
JMH27 Circuit Board
GL_K
(GRN) LD-
GL_A
6 7
(GRN) LD+
41 3
G_TH-
2
TH-
G_TH+
8 9
TH+
(RED) D+5V (RED) (RED) 5V_OUT

P+
GP- (RED) (BLK) DGND (BLK) (BLK) DGND
P-
JMH3
LDD11
LDD11
2 1
4
1 2
GP+ (BLK) (GRY) SOS (GRY) (GRY) SOS_H
DTA1
GMC9
GMC9
SOS1
SOS1
DTA27
(BLK) (BLK) (BLK) SOS_L
13 15 14 18
13 15 14 18
/SOS
GMC27
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
FG
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
FG
Circuit Board
Laser Optical Section Wiring Diagram
D+5VP_BROM
(RED) D+5VP
DGND
5
(BLK) DGND (BLK) (BLK) AGND3

B_SK
1 2
1 2 7 8
8 5
8 5
(BLU) B_SK (ORG) (ORG) +24VP1

/B_SK
PLG
JND1
(BLU) /B_SK (WHT)

B_DO
JND2
(BLU) B_DO (ORG)

JND20
M676_CLK
/B_DO
LDB2
LDB2
LDD7
LDD7
4 3
6 7
6 7
PLG
(BLU) /B_DO (BLK) FGND

B_DI
(BLU) B_DI (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) M676_ON
Polygon
/B_DI
6 5
3 5 7 8
1 5 4 3 2
1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5
(BLU) /B_DI (GRY) (GRY) (GRY)

9 10
9 10
M676_ST_I
JND20 Circuit Board
B_CS
(BLU) B_CS
4
/B_CS
4
4
(BLU) /B_CS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6
11 12
11 12
6 9
B_TrB (BLU) B_TrB

ROS
ROS
B_TrC (BLU) B_TrC

BL+9V (RED) BL+9V (RED) (RED) D+5VP_D674
to LDD12
AGND (BLK) AG (GRY) (GRY) D674_ST_I
D674
Shutter
1 2 3
1 3 2
1 3 2
Sensor
B_TrE (BLU) B_TrE (BLK) (BLK)

10 11 12
DGND
B_HFM (BLU) B_HFM
1 2 5 3 4 8 6
5 3 6 8 1 2 4
AGND (BLK) AG
LDD12
LDD12
B_TH+ B_TH+
16 17
16 17
to LDD27 Circuit Board
LDB27 Circuit Board
B_TH- AG
7
BLDON BLDON
10 12 149
FGND
LDB1
LDB1
LDD9
LDD9
FGND
B_PD B_PD
AGND AG
19 20 21
19 20 21
B+8V (RED) B+8V

AGND (BLK) AG
B-8V (BLU) B-8V
LDD27 Circuit Board

1 2
B_MPX_T (BLU) B_MPX_T

LDB4
LDB4
AGND (BLK) AG
B_MPX_TrE (BLU) B_MPX_TrE
B_MPX_TrB (BLU) B_MPX_TrB
22 23 24 25 26
22 23 24 25 26
B_MPX_TrC (BLU) B_MPX_TrC

7 9 10 11 12 13 15 14 16 18 17 19 20 21 22
7 20 18 16 11 13 15 19 17
8
UL1007 24AWG
(RED) (RED) A+5VP_THA
(BLK) (BLK) AGND
(YEL) (YEL) A+12VP_THA
4 6 5 3
THA
(BLU) (BLU)
29 27 28 30
29 27 28 30
15 13 14 16
A-12VP_THA
THA27
AGND
2 1
D+5VP_RROM (RED) D+5VP

31 32
31 32
18 17
THA
DGND (BLK) DGND
R_SK (RED) R_SK
/R_SK (GRY) /R_SK
R_DO (RED) R_DO
/R_DO (GRY) /R_DO
9
LDD5
LDD5
R_DI (RED) R_DI

/R_DI (GRY) /R_DI
R_CS (RED) R_CS
/R_CS (GRY) /R_CS
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
NC
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LDR1
LDR1
1 2
NC
GMC13
GMC13
FGND
FGND
10
R_TrC (RED) R_TrC

R_TrB (RED) R_TrB
R_TrE (RED) R_TrE
AGND (BLK) AG
7 9 5 10
AGND
RL+5V (RED) RL+5V
LDR4
LDR4
11 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 8
1 2
1 2
R_HFM (RED) R_HFM

GMC11
GMC11
GMC27 Circuit Board
R_TH+ R_TH+
AGND AG
R_MPX_T (RED) R_MPX_T
3 4 1 2
AGND (BLK) AG
8 10 20 22
LDR27 Circuit Board
11
LDD8
LDD8
RLDON (RED) RLDON

SMA
BNC
1 2
1 2
RMODE (RED) RMODE

GOUTPUT
R_MPX_TrE (RED) R_MPX_TrE

G-ch AOM
AOM Driver
R_MPX_TrC (RED) R_MPX_TrC

R_MPX_TrB (RED) R_MPX_TrB
LDR2
LDR2
R-5V (BLU) R-5V

AGND (BLK) AG
12
R+5V (RED) R+5V

R_PD (RED) R_PD
AGND (BLK) AG
8 4 2 1 3 5 6 7 9 10
9 12 21 23 24 19 17 15 16 18
19. APPENDIX
19.1 Adjustment Jigs ................................................................................... 19-2

19.1.1 SP-500..................................................................................................................... 19-2
19.1.2 LP-5000................................................................................................................... 19-3
19.2 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement .............................. 19-4

19.2.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AR.................................................................................. 19-4
19.2.2 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR ............................................................................. 19-4
19.2.3 SP-500..................................................................................................................... 19-4
19.2.4 Paper Supply and Feed Sections......................................................................... 19-5
19.2.5 Exposure Section .................................................................................................. 19-5
19.2.6 Processing Solution Replenishment System ..................................................... 19-6
19.2.7 Electrical Equipment/Control Section ................................................................. 19-6
19.3 Index ...................................................................................................... 19-7
19
19-1
19.1 Adjustment Jigs
19.1.1 SP-500
No. Name and Shape Part Number Purpose Refer to
1 Carrier Extension Cable 136Y100016 Connect it between the carrier and the 5.5.10
scanner to enable input, output and
operation checks to be carried out.
EZ1810
2 Focusing Chart Jig 400Y100008 Optical axis adjustment (Menu 0345) 5.4.10
R3-169
3 Spectral Calibration Chart (for Reversal) 610C895788 Spectral calibration (Menu 0348) 5.4.11
EZ1815
4 Spectral Calibration Chart (for Negative) 899C21478A0 Spectral calibration (Menu 0348) 5.4.11
EZ1815
19-2
19.1 Adjustment Jigs
19.1.2 LP-5000
No. Name and Shape Part Number Purpose Refer to
1 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjusting Jig 332C889498 Back printer head clearance adjustment 9.2.22
EZ1814
2 Exposure Section Frame Locating Jigs 310C1023994 Locating the exposure section frame 10.3.1
CD1026
3 Measuring Cup 359C1062656 For auto washing pump output 5.11.2
measurement.
LZ1118
19
19-3
19.2 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement
19.2.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AR

Sub-
No. Replacement Parts Adjustment Item Menu Refer to
section
1 Feed Belt/Feed Roller 6.2.6 (1) Belt Tension Adjustment — 6.2.3

2 Feed Motor 6.2.16 (1) Belt Tension Adjustment — 6.2.3
3 CYA25 Circuit Board 6.1.8 (1) FD Data Management 0326 5.4.5
19.2.2 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR

Sub-
section
1 MFC Holder — (1) Mask Position Adjustment 0420 5.5.2

2 CYB25 Circuit Board 6.4.1 (1) FD Data Management 0326 5.4.5
19.2.3 SP-500
Sub-
section
1 LED Light Source Assembly 7.2.1 (1) LED Light Amount Adjustment 0349 5.4.12
(2) Spectral Calibration 0348 5.4.11
2 Camera Unit 7.4.1 (1) Optical Axis Adjustment 0345 5.4.10
(2) Optical Mag. Setup 0345 5.4.10
(3) LED Light Amount Adjustment 0349 5.4.12
(4) Gray Pixel Detection 0351 5.4.14
3 AF Motor Assembly 7.4.2 (1) Optical Axis Adjustment 0345 5.4.10
4 Lens Home Position Sensor (D201) 7.4.3 (1) Optical Axis Adjustment 0345 5.4.10
5 Shutter Assembly 7.4.4 (1) Optical Axis Adjustment 0345 5.4.10
6 CTL25 Circuit Board 7.5.3 (1) Film Scanner ID Registration 0344 5.4.9
7 PZR22 Circuit Board 7.5.4 (1) Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment — 7.5.8
19-4
19.2.4 Paper Supply and Feed Sections

Sub-
section
1 Paper Magazine — (1) Paper Magazine Feeding Fine 0520 5.10.1

Adjustment
2 Cutter Unit 9.1.8 (1) Feeding Position Sensor Fine 0553 5.10.21
9.1.9 Adjustment
(2) Image Position Initialization 0554 5.10.22
3 Cutter/Feed Unit 9.1.1 (1) Feeding Position Sensor Fine 0553 5.10.21
Adjustment
(4) Magazine Feed Length Adjustment 0520 5.10.1
4 Back Printing/Registration Unit 9.2.1 (1) Back Printer Head Clearance — 9.2.22
Adjustment
(3) Paper Magazine Feeding Fine 0520 5.10.1
Adjustment
5 Back Printer Head 9.2.19 (1) Back Printer Head Clearance — 9.2.22
Adjustment
6 Platen 9.2.17 (1) Back Printer Head Clearance — 9.2.22
Adjustment
19.2.5 Exposure Section

Sub-
section
1 Laser Optical Unit 10.2.3 (1) G Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature 0522 5.10.2
Setup
(2) Main Scan/Laser Beam Sync. Rough 0547 5.10.15
Adjustment
(3) Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjust 0548 5.10.16
2 Laser Optical Unit Air Filter 10.2.1 (1) Filter Exchange Log 0552 5.10.20
3 Sub-scanning Unit 10.3.1 (1) Image Position Initialization 0554 5.10.22
4 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor 10.3.9 (1) Image Position Initialization 0554 5.10.22
(D650)/Exposure Position Paper Sensor
(D653)
19
19-5
19.2.6 Processing Solution Replenishment System

Sub-
section
1 PSR Filter 14.2.5 (1) Pump Output Measurement/Setting 0620 5.11.1

(2) Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/
Setting 0621 5.11.2
2 PSR Pump Valve 14.2.3 (1) Pump Output Measurement/Setting 0620 5.11.1
3 PSR Pump Bellows 14.2.4 (1) Pump Output Measurement/Setting 0620 5.11.1
4 Auto Washing Pump (PU720) 14.3.1 (1) INSTALLATION “91 PSR AIR EXT.” — 1.2
(2) Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/ 0621 5.11.2
Setting
5 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Filter 14.2.1 (1) Pump Output Measurement/Setting 0620 5.11.1
6 P1R/P2RA/P2RB/PSR Pump 14.2.2 (1) Pump Output Measurement/Setting 0620 5.11.1
(PU721/PU722/PU723/PU724)
7 PSR Tank 14.2.9 (1) INSTALLATION “91 PSR AIR EXT.” — 1.2
8 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Tank 14.2.8 (1) INSTALLATION “92 MIX REPL.” — 1.2
(2) INSTALLATION “93 PUMP AIR EXT.”
19.2.7 Electrical Equipment/Control Section

Sub-
section
1 GMC27 Circuit Board 17.4.3 (1) Program Download — 17.4.8

2 DC Power Supply Unit 17.3.3 (1) DC Voltage Inspection — 18.6.1
19-6
19.3 Index
0 [MENU] Item.........................................................1-8 [C]
1 [STARTUP CHK.] Item..........................................1-9 Calibrator Removal/Reinstallation....................... 10-10
135F Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly.........6-64 Calibrator Width Guide Replacement................. 10-11
135H Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly ........6-66 Camera Unit.......................................................... 7-16
2 [END CHK.] Item ................................................1-11 Camera Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................... 7-16
3 [LANGUAGE] Item .............................................1-12 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (04) .................. 5-63
4 [CHECK] Item.....................................................1-13 Carrier Base Section............................................... 7-9
5 [SELECT FUNC.] Item ........................................1-14 Carrier Guide Replacement.................................. 7-14
6 [PRINT COND.] Item ..........................................1-15 Carrier Inclination Display (0342) ......................... 5-50
7 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item .......................................1-16 Carrier Lock Sensor (D102) Replacement ............. 7-9
8 [SYSTEM] Item ...................................................1-17 Carrier Lock Unit Disassembly/
9 [INSTALLATION] Item ........................................1-19 Reassembly .................................. 6-24, 6-56, 7-10
Carrier Lock Unit Removal/Reinstallation ....6-24, 6-54
[A] Carrier Stopper Replacement............................... 6-31
AC Power Supply Bracket Removal/ Cartridge Opening Motor (M720) Replacement... 14-6
Reinstallation ....................................................17-8 Cartridge Washing Valve/P1R Stirring Valve
AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram ......................18-35 (S728 to S731) Replacement ......................... 14-23
ADC25 Circuit Board Replacement ......................7-22 CCD Adjustment (0351) ....................................... 5-60
Adjustment Jigs ....................................................19-2 CCD Data Display (0343) ..................................... 5-51
AF (Auto Focus) Motor Assembly (M201) Checking Network Connection/Environment...... 3-116
Replacement ....................................................7-18 Checking the Processing Status of the
AF Function Setup (0323) .....................................5-46 Job/Order ....................................................... 3-116
Airflow Cover Removal/Reinstallation......................7-9 Checking the Status of Installed Software.......... 3-116
Anti-dust Fan (F670) Replacement .....................10-13 Checking the Status of the DIC2....................... 3-116
Antivirus Software Installation ...............................4-30 Circuit Board Layout Diagrams ...............18-19, 18-28
AOM Driver Replacement .....................................10-7 Circuit Board Section Cover Removal/
APPENDIX .............................................................19-1 Reinstallation .................................................... 7-21
Auto Chain Tensioner Removal/Reinstallation ....12-40 Circuit Boards Voltage Check List...................... 18-26
Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting Circuit Boards Voltage List ................................. 18-17
(0621) .............................................................5-120 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP5) Replacement ..... 17-11
Auto Film Carrier NC100AR ........................ 18-4, 19-4 Circulation Pump Inspection ................................ 2-10
Auto Film Carrier NC100AR Wiring Diagram ......18-24 Classic View and Screen Saver Setting ............... 4-15
Auto Washing and P1R Stirring System ..............14-21 Clear Error Log (0141).......................................... 5-19
Auto Washing Pump (PU720) Replacement .......14-21 Command (9942)................................................ 5-136
Common Guide Plate Replacement ..................... 9-17
[B] Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............. 8-14
B Laser (B-LD) Data (0545) ................................5-105 Control Section ................................................... 17-16
Back Printer Drive Gear Replacement ..................9-38 Control Section Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F600/F601)
Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment ............9-42 Replacement .................................................. 17-18
Back Printer Head Replacement ..........................9-38 Control Section Exhaust Fan 3 (F602)
Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement ....9-43 Replacement .................................................. 17-19
Back Printer Section Nip Roller Replacement.......9-24 Control Section Exhaust Fan 4 (F604)
Back Printer Unit Drive Gear Replacement...........9-41 Replacement .................................................... 10-6
Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation ..............9-40 Crossover Rack/Dryer Entrance Squeegee
Back Printer/Registration Unit ...............................9-20 Rack Auto Washing Nozzle Inspection.............. 2-7
Back Printer/Registration Unit Removal/ Crossover Racks/Dryer Entrance Squeegee
Reinstallation ....................................................9-20 Rack ................................................................. 12-6
Back Printing Format (0226) .................................5-40 CTB23 Circuit Board........................................... 3-101
Back Printing Head Inspection ...............................2-9 CTL25 Circuit Board Replacement....................... 7-23
Back Printing/Registration Unit Feed Rollers CTL27 Circuit Board Replacement..................... 17-16
Cleaning ...........................................................2-13 CTL27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ................. 18-40
Back Printing/Registration Unit Nip Release
System Inspection ............................................2-18
Custom Button Regist/Save (1023) ...................... 5-80
Custom Setting Regist/Delete (0225) ................... 5-27
19
Back Surface Side Exit Guide Plate Cutter Entrance/Guide/Back Printer Head
Replacement ....................................................9-16 Section Cleaning .............................................. 2-19
Belt Tension Adjustment .......................................6-23 Cutter Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................ 9-6
BIOS Setup .............................................................4-4 Cutter Inspection .................................................... 2-9
Block Diagrams...................................................18-15 Cutter/Feed Unit ..................................................... 9-6
Body Covers ...........................................................7-4 CYA25 Circuit Board Replacement ...................... 6-16
Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................6-22 CYB25 Circuit Board Replacement ...................... 6-52
Built-in Circuit Breaker Replacement ....................17-5
19-7
19.3 Index
[D] Electrical Equipment............................................. 7-21

Data Download (0562) ........................................5-117 Electrical Equipment/Control Section ................... 19-6
Data Saving (0561) .............................................5-117 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout
Data Set Tool Creating ..........................................4-33 Diagrams........................................................ 18-13
DBF25 Circuit Board Replacement.......................6-42 ELECTRICAL SECTION ........................................ 17-1
DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/ Emulsion Side Open/Close Guide Plate
Reinstallation ..................................................17-14 Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 9-15
DC Power Supply Section ...................................17-14 Equipment Name Set (0124) ................................ 5-10
DC Power Supply System LED Indication List ....18-27 Error Indication Outline........................................... 3-2
DC Power Supply Unit Fuses and LEDs .............18-18 Explorer (9941) ................................................... 5-135
DC Power Supply Unit Replacement ..................17-15 Exposure Point Temperature Sensor (THA20)
DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Installation.................4-28 Replacement .................................................. 10-18
DIC 2 Basic Software (S2) Update ........................4-2 EXPOSURE SECTION........................................... 10-1
Diffusion Box Sensor (D422) Exposure Section.................................................. 19-5
Replacement .......................................... 6-39, 6-55 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor
DLE25 Circuit Board Replacement .......................7-26 (D650P)/Exposure Section Paper Sensor
Downstream Perforation Sensor (D403P)/ (D653P) Replacement.................................... 10-28
DTE25 Circuit Board Replacement ..................6-36 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor
Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D403L)/ LED (D650L)/Exposure Section Paper Sensor
LEE22 Circuit Board Replacement...................6-19 LED (D653L) Replacement ............................ 10-28
Drawing Position Sensor Adjustment (0553).......5-111
Drive Belt Replacement ........................................8-17 [F]
Drive Gear Replacement ......................................9-10 Fan Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..................... 10-5
Drive Pulley Replacement .......................................8-4 Feed Belt/Feed Roller Replacement..................... 6-26
Drive Shaft Removal/ Feed Motor 1 (M630) Replacement........................ 9-9
Reinstallation ............... 12-14, 12-19, 12-23, 12-28 Feed Motor 2 (M631) Replacement...................... 9-28
Driver Installation and Computer Name Feed Motor 3 (M632) Replacement...................... 9-30
Registration.......................................................4-11 Feed Motor 4 (M660) Replacement.................... 11-10
Dryer Entrance Squeegee Rack Disassembly/ Feed Motor (M401) Replacement......................... 6-37
Reassembly ......................................................12-7 Feed Roller Drive Gear Replacement........11-10, 16-9
Dryer Exit Section Cover Open/Close Sensor Feed Roller Replacement .............. 9-17, 11-11, 16-10
(D766) Replacement ......................................16-11 Feed Roller/Drive Gear Replacement................. 11-16
Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor (D771P) Feed Section Cooling Fan 2 (F607)
Replacement ....................................................16-8 Replacement .................................................. 17-12
Dryer Exit Section Paper Sensor LED (D771L) Film Carrier ......................................................... 3-100
Replacement ....................................................16-8 FILM CARRIER SECTION ....................................... 6-1
Dryer Exit Unit .......................................................16-5 Film Scanner ID Registration (0344)..................... 5-52
Dryer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation ..................16-5 Film Scanner Installation Information Reference
Dryer Fan (F760) Replacement...........................15-10 (0325) ............................................................... 5-48
Dryer Fan/Heater Section....................................15-10 Filter Exchange Log (0552) ................................ 5-111
Dryer Heater Assembly Replacement.................15-12 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (0241).. 5-45
Dryer Mesh Belt/Roller Replacement ....................15-6 Focus Offset Adjustment (0441)........................... 5-68
Dryer Rack ............................................................15-3 Frame Removal/Reinstallation ............................ 10-20
Dryer Rack Mesh Belt Inspection .........................2-13 Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation........................ 7-5
Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation .......................15-4
Dryer Rack/Dryer Exit Unit Drive Belt and Gear [G]
Replacement ....................................................15-7 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (0544) ............................ 5-104
DRYER SECTION ..................................................15-1 G Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup
Dryer Section Cover Open/Close Sensor (D763) (0522) ............................................................... 5-95
Replacement ....................................................15-8 GMC27 Circuit Board Replacement................... 17-17
Dryer Section Front Cover Removal/ GMC27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ............... 18-48
Reinstallation ....................................................15-3 Guide Rocking Unit Disassembly/Reassembly .. 11-13
Dryer Section Rear Cover Removal/
Reinstallation ....................................................15-3 [H]
Dryer Temperature Abnormality..........................3-107 Handle Replacement............................................ 6-31
Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS760) Heater Safety Thermostat (D700 to D703)
Replacement ..................................................15-10 Replacement .................................................... 13-7
Help (21)/Self-Diagnostics (Scanner)(22)/
[E] Self-Diagnostics (Printer)(23) ......................... 5-135
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ......................18-1 Herness Routing ................................................... 6-43
19-8
19.3 Index
Holiday File Regist/Delete (1022)..........................5-80 Lock Release Lever Replacement........................ 6-48

Hose Connection ................................................13-12 Low Volume Processing Setup (0622) ............... 5-122
Lower Carrier Guide Replacement....................... 7-15
[I] Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation .. 13-6
Image Correction Setup (0240).............................5-44 Lower Cutter Unit (Optional) Replacement .......... 9-11
Image Export Settings (0101) .................................5-6 Lower Dust Removal Brush Replacement............ 6-28
Image Position Initialization (0554) .....................5-112 Lower Magazine Drive Unit (Optional)
Image Position/Angle Fine Adjustment (0527)......5-98 Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 8-15
Image Scanning Condition Method (0324) ...........5-47 Lower Magazine Setting Lever Cover Removal/
Index Conditions (0227)........................................5-43 Reinstallation ...................................................... 8-8
Input Check (0320) ...............................................5-46 Lower Magazine Setting Lever Removal/
Installation Information Reference (0126) .............5-11 Reinstallation ...................................................... 8-8
Installation Information Reference (1626) .............5-86 Lower Magazine Splice Sensor (D629P)/LED
Installation Information Setup (0140) ....................5-18 (D629L) Replacement ...................................... 9-13
Installation Information Setup (1640) ....................5-86 Lower Magazine Table Unit Removal/
Internet Information Services (IIS) Installation.......4-22 Reinstallation ...................................................... 8-9
I/O Check (0341)...................................................5-49 Lower Paper Magazine Table (Optional)................ 8-8
I/O Parts Diagrams................................................18-2 Lower Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ....... 9-7
IX240 Film Holder Disassembly/Reassembly .......6-63 LP-5000 ................................................................ 19-3
IX240 Holder Door Open/Close Device LP-5000 Power Supply System Wiring
Disassembly/Reassembly ................................6-62 Diagram ......................................................... 18-36
[J] [M]
JNC25 Circuit Board Replacement.......................6-32 Magazine Door Open/Close Sensor
(D680A/D680B) Replacement ......................... 8-18
[L] Magazine Drive Unit/Interlock Switch................... 8-13
Large Rubber Belt Replacement ........................10-20 Magazine Exit Paper Sensor (D632P)/LED
Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (D632L) Replacement ...................................... 9-13
(0548) .............................................................5-107 Magazine Feed Length Adjustment (0520) .......... 5-94
Laser Exposure Check (0542) ............................5-104 Magazine Moving Cam Roller Replacement .......... 8-6
Laser History Display (0549)...............................5-109 Magazine Roller Release Arm Replacement.......... 8-4
Laser Optical Section Wiring Diagram................18-50 Magazine Table Lift Cam Roller Replacement ..... 8-11
Laser Optical Unit ...............................................10-13 Main Scan/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjust
Laser Optical Unit Air Filter Replacement...........10-13 (0547) ............................................................. 5-106
Laser Optical Unit Removal/Reinstallation ..........10-14 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ....................... 2-1
Launcher Menu Regist/Delete (1024) ...................5-83 Maintenance and Inspection Procedures .............. 2-6
Launcher Menu Registration (Menu 1024) ...........4-37 MAINTENANCE MENU........................................... 5-1
LBF25 Circuit Board Replacement .......................6-20 Maintenance Schedule........................................... 2-2
LDD Circuit Board Exhaust Fan (FAN) Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR ....................18-6, 19-4
Replacement ....................................................10-6 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR (Optional) ............ 6-51
LDD Circuit Board/AOM Driver Section ................10-4 Manual Film Carrier MFC10AR Wiring
LDD27 Circuit Board Replacement ......................10-8 Diagram ......................................................... 18-25
LDD27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................18-49 Mask Position Adjustment (0420) ......................... 5-63
Leading End Sensor (D401P)/DTE25 Circuit Mask Position Adjustment Knob Assembly
Board Replacement..........................................6-34 Disassembly/Reassembly ................................ 6-58
Leading End Sensor LED (D401L)/LEE22 Mask Position Adjustment Knob Assembly
Circuit Board Replacement ..............................6-18 Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 6-57
LED Light Amount Adjustment (0349) ..................5-58 Mask Position Adjustment Rack Replacement..... 6-59
LED Light Source Assembly Removal/ Media Attachment Index Print Setting (0139)....... 5-18
Reinstallation ......................................................7-7 Media Cumulative Production Information
LED25 Circuit Board Assembly Replacement ........7-8 (0127) ............................................................... 5-11
Left Side Cover Open/Close Sensor A/B
(D681A/D681B) Replacement ........................17-20
Media Input Environment Setup (0136)................ 5-14
Media Production Information (0120) ..................... 5-6
19
Left Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................8-13 MENU TABLE ......................................................... 1-1
Left Side Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation .....8-13 Menu Table............................................................. 1-7
Lens Dustproof Glass Cleaning ..............................2-6 Message Icon ......................................................... 3-2
Lens Home Position Sensor (D201) Message Number ................................................... 3-2
Replacement ....................................................7-19 MESSAGES AND ACTIONS ................................... 3-1
Light Source Section ...............................................7-7 Messages and Actions ........................................... 3-3
Local Area Connection Setup ...............................4-18 MFC10AR ID Registration (0447) ......................... 5-72
MFC10AR Input Check (0422) ............................. 5-66
19-9
19.3 Index
Microsoft .Net Framework V1.1 Installation...........4-25 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Filter

Monitor Adjustment (0222)....................................5-23 Replacement .................................................... 14-9
Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (0425) ........................5-67 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Tank
Monotone Correction Setting (0224) .....................5-26 Replacement .................................................. 14-17
Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation .....................6-22 P1R/P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor
Motor Driver (K3201 Circuit Board) Replacement .................................................. 14-15
Replacement ..................................................17-14 P1R/P2RA/P2RB/PSR Replenisher Pump (PU721/
Mount Holder Replacement ..................................6-67 PU722/ PU723/ PU724) Replacement ............. 14-9
MSDE2000SP3a (MSDE) Installation ....................4-21 P2 Heater Cooling Fan (F701) Replacement........ 13-6
PAC27 Circuit Board Replacement .................... 17-10
[N] PAC27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ................ 18-38
NC100AR Feeding Operation Check (0455) ........5-75 Paint (9940) ........................................................ 5-135
NC100AR Fixed Feeding Setup (0400) ................5-63 Paper Condition Method Setup (0242)................. 5-93
NC100AR ID Registration (0446) ..........................5-71 Paper Condition Setup (1700) .............................. 5-88
NC100AR Input Check (0421) ..............................5-66 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy
NC100AR I/O Check (0448)..................................5-73 (0550) ............................................................. 5-110
NC100AR Lower Feed Section .............................6-22 Paper Feed (0523)................................................ 5-96
NC100AR Machine Data Setup (0451) .................5-74 Paper Feed Check (2340) .................................. 5-130
NC100AR Sensor Calibration Information PAPER FEED SECTION .......................................... 9-1
(0443) ...............................................................5-70 Paper Magazine ..................................................... 8-3
NC100AR Upper Feed Section ...............................6-9 Paper Magazine Registration (1721).................... 5-90
Nip Release Solenoid 1 (S631) Replacement.......9-21 Paper Supply and Feed Sections......................... 19-5
Nip Release Solenoid 2 (S632) Replacement.......9-22 Paper Supply Assembly Replacement................... 8-3
Nip Release Solenoid 3 (S640) Replacement.......9-23 PAPER SUPPLY SECTION...................................... 8-1
Nip Release Solenoid 4/5/6 (S660/S661/S662) Paper Surfaces Display Setup (1743) .................. 5-93
Replacement ....................................................11-8 Partition Confirmation ............................................. 4-6
Nip Roller 1 Replacement .....................................9-25 PDC25 Circuit Board Replacement...................... 6-34
Nip Roller 1/2/3 Replacement ...............................11-8 Periodical Message Setting (0146) ...................... 5-20
Nip Roller 2 Replacement .....................................9-26 Photo Copy Environment Setup (0138) ................ 5-17
Nip Roller 3 Replacement .....................................9-27 Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment......................... 7-31
Nip Roller 4 Replacement .....................................11-9 Platen Replacement ............................................. 9-37
Nip Roller Replacement .................. 9-15, 11-15, 16-6 Plug-in Connector Cleaning ................................... 2-7
No. 1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/ Plug-in Connector Replacement ....... 6-38, 6-54, 7-13
Reassembly ......................................................12-6 Power Input Section.............................................. 17-4
No. 2/No. 3 Crossover Rack Disassembly/ Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2 (F630/F631)
Reassembly ......................................................12-6 Replacement .................................................... 17-7
Noise Filter (NF1)/Capacitor (C1) Replacement ...17-6 Power Supply Unit Replacement.......................... 7-27
Power Supply/Electrical Equipment Section ........ 17-7
[O] Power Supply/Electrical Equipment Section
OPA27 Circuit Board Replacement ....................17-17 Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................. 17-8
OPA27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram.................18-47 Pressure Solenoid (S401) Replacement............... 6-40
Open/Close Detecting Lever Replacement ..........6-47 Pressure Unit Disassembly/Reassembly.............. 6-13
Operation Panel/Keyboard Circuit Board Print Condition Setup and Check (02).................. 5-21
(KEY27) Replacement ......................................10-9 Print Condition Setup and Check (17).................. 5-88
Operational Procedure............................................5-4 Print Cumulative Production Information (0128)... 5-13
Opposite Roller Replacement ...............................6-10 PRINT EXIT SECTION/SORTER............................ 16-1
Optical Axis Adjustment (0345) ............................5-53 Print Production Information (0123)........................ 5-8
Optional Software Installation ...............................4-30 Print Size Setup (0220) ......................................... 5-21
Order Control and Maintenance (09) ....................5-76 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (05) ................... 5-94
Printer Backup & download (1622) ...................... 5-85
[P] Printer Data Loading (Printer Backup &
P1 to PS3 Solution Level Sensor download (Menu 1622)) ................................... 4-32
(FS700 to FS704) Replacement........................13-5 Printer Drive Gear/Sprocket Replacement ......... 12-46
P1 to PS3 Solution Temperature Sensor Printer Exit Unit ................................................... 11-15
(TS700 to TS703) Replacement........................13-4 Printer Exit Unit Feed Roller Cleaning .................. 2-17
P1/P2 Processing Racks .......................................12-9 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation.............. 11-15
P1/P2/PS3 Circulation Pump Printer Function Select (0528) ............................ 5-100
(PU700/PU701/PU704) Replacement...............13-9 Printer Input Check (0525) ................................... 5-97
P1R Stirring Valve/Replenisher Cartridge Printer I/O Check (0540)..................................... 5-101
Washing Valve Diagnostics ............................3-113 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (0551) ....... 5-110
Printer Operation Data Display (0560) ............... 5-116
19-10
19.3 Index
Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...........17-4 PSR Filter Replacement...................................... 14-13

Printer Registration (1540) ..................................5-134 PSR Level Sensor Inspection ............................... 2-12
Printer Temperature Display (0524) ......................5-97 PSR Tank Replacement...................................... 14-20
Printer Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation.............10-4 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS723/FS727)
Printer/Processor DC Power Supply Unit and Replacement .................................................. 14-13
Circuit Boards.................................................18-26 PSW25/LEA25/LEB25 Circuit Board
Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Printer Replacement ...................................................... 7-6
Section.................................................. 18-7, 18-13 Pump Output Measurement/Setting (0620)........ 5-118
Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Processor Section..18-10 PWR27 Circuit Board Replacement ................... 17-15
Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Signal Block PWR27 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram................ 18-39
Diagram ..........................................................18-15 PZR22 Circuit Board Replacement ...................... 7-24
Printer/Processor (LP-5000) Wiring Diagram ......18-35
Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table......1-7 [R]
Printor/Processor (LP-5000) Power Supply R Laser (R-LD) Data (0543)................................ 5-104
System Block Diagram ...................................18-16 Rack Auto Cleaning System Diagnostics ........... 3-112
Processing Rack Helical Drive Gear Lubrication....2-9 Rack Auto Washing Valve/P1W Water
PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION Replenishment Valve (S720 to S723)
SYSTEM ............................................................13-1 Replacement .................................................. 14-22
Processing Solution Heater (H700 to H703) Register/Delete (10).............................................. 5-79
Replacement ....................................................13-8 Registration Section Feed Roller 1
Processing Solution Heater Inspection .................2-10 Replacement .................................................... 9-33
Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Registration Section Feed Roller 2
Section..............................................................13-6 Replacement .................................................... 9-34
Processing Solution Level Sensor Cleaning ...........2-8 Registration Section Feed Roller 3
PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT Replacement .................................................... 9-35
SYSTEM ............................................................14-1 Registration Tilt Motor (M641) Replacement ........ 9-27
Processing Solution Replenishment Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table .......... 2-4
System .................................................... 14-9, 19-6 Relay (K1 to K3) Replacement ........................... 17-11
Processing Solution Tank Level Lowering ..........3-110 Replenisher Cartridge Box Malfunction.............. 3-102
Processing Solution Temperature Abnormality...3-104 Replenisher Cartridge Box Upper/Lower
Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F704) Sensor (D722/D723) Replacement .................. 14-4
Replacement ..................................................13-11 Replenisher Cartridge Door Open/Close
Processing Temperature Setting (0640) .............5-127 Sensor (D724) Replacement............................ 14-3
Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (06)............5-118 Replenisher Cartridge Open Cam/Gear
Processor Cover (Large) Open/Close Sensor Replacement .................................................... 14-6
(D762A) Replacement ....................................12-47 Replenisher Cartridge Open Unit Removal/
Processor Cover (Small) Open/Close Sensor Reinstallation .................................................... 14-5
(D762B) Replacement ....................................12-48 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Malfunction...... 3-115
Processor Drive Chain Lubrication .......................2-12 Replenisher Cartridge Section ............................. 14-3
Processor Drive Chain Replacement ..................12-45 Replenisher Door Lock Manual Releasing ........... 14-8
Processor Drive Motor (M700) Replacement......12-42 Replenisher Level Sensor Cleaning ....................... 2-8
Processor Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement ....12-43 Replenisher Level Sensor Diagnostics............... 3-114
Processor Drive System ......................................12-39 Replenisher Pump Bellows Replacement .......... 14-12
Processor Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation .....13-3 Replenisher Pump Diagnostics .......................... 3-111
Processor Input Check (0624) ............................5-125 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement .............. 14-11
Processor I/O Check (0642) ...............................5-128 Required Adjustments after Parts
Processor Operating Condition Setup (0625).....5-126 Replacement .................................................... 19-4
Processor Operation Data Display (0643) ..........5-129 Return Action after Replenishment System
Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...12-39 Error ............................................................... 3-114
PROCESSOR SECTION ........................................12-1 Right Side Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........... 12-39
Processor Temperature Calibration (0623).........5-122 Roller Replacement ......... 12-12, 12-20, 12-24, 12-29
Program Downloading to GMC27 Circuit
Board ..............................................................17-21 [S] 19
PS Tank Partition Board ......................................12-32 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (03) ................ 5-46
PS Tank Partition Board Removal/Reinstallation Scanner Cooling Fan (F101) Replacement .......... 7-29
(Blade Replacement)......................................12-32 Scanner Data Loading (Scanner Backup &
PS1 Processing Rack..........................................12-16 download (Menu 0326)) ................................... 4-31
PS1/PS2 Circulation Pump (PU702/PU703) Scanner Parameter Check/Update (0350) ........... 5-59
Replacement ..................................................13-10 Scanner Section (SP-500) .................................... 18-2
PS2 Processing Rack..........................................12-22 Scanner Section (SP-500) Wiring Diagram ........ 18-23
PS3 Processing Rack..........................................12-26 SCANNER (SP-500)................................................ 7-1
19-11
19.3 Index
Scanner (SP-500) DC Power Supply Unit and System Operation Setup and Check (16)............. 5-84
Circuit Boards.................................................18-17
Scanner (SP-500) Wiring Diagrams ....................18-23 [T]
Scan/Scan Home Position Parameter (0546)......5-105 Taskbar Setting..................................................... 4-14
Sensor Current Value Setting (0559)...................5-115 Template Regist/Delete (1021)............................. 5-80
Server/DIC2 Operation Setting Setup (0923) ......5-78 Test Pattern Printing (0541) ................................ 5-102
Setup and Maintenance Menu Table ......................1-2 Tilt Home Position Sensor (D641) Replacement .. 9-31
Shop Logo Regist/Delete (1020)...........................5-79 Tilt Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................ 9-31
Shutter Assembly Replacement............................7-20 Time Zone Setting................................................. 4-17
Shutter Open/Close Sensor (D674) Timer Setup (0121) ............................................... 5-84
Replacement ..................................................10-17 Timer Waiting Time Setup (0125) ......................... 5-10
Shutter Replacement ............................................6-52 Timing Belt Replacement ................................... 10-23
Shutter Solenoid (S673) Replacement ................10-17 Top/Right Side/Left Side Cover Removal/
Side Rail Replacement..........................................6-60 Reinstallation ...................................................... 7-4
Small Rubber Belt Replacement .........................10-24 Trouble Shooting ................................................ 3-100
Soft Down Damper Replacement..........................8-12
Soft Nip Home Position Sensor (D651) [U]
Replacement ..................................................10-26 Update.................................................................... 4-2
Soft Nip Motor (M651) Replacement...................10-24 Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation.. 13-3
Soft Nip Pre-turning Belt Replacement ...............10-30 Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation...........6-10, 6-51
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ...................................4-1 Upper Cutter Unit Replacement ........................... 9-10
Solution Hose and Clamp Inspection ...................2-11 Upper Dust Removal Brush Replacement ........... 6-11
Sorter Drive Motor (M810) Replacement ............16-15 Upper Dust Removal Brush Unit Disassembly/
Sorter Full Sensor (D811) Replacement..............16-13 Reassembly ..................................................... 6-12
Sorter Removal/Reinstallation .............................16-13 Upper Feed Section Damper Spring
Sorter Tray Stop Position Sensor (D810) Replacement ...................................................... 6-9
Replacement ..................................................16-16 Upper Feed Section Lock Release Button
SP-500......................................................... 19-2, 19-4 Replacement .................................................... 6-30
Special Film Channel Setting (0223).....................5-24 Upper Feed Section Open/Close Sensor (D421)
Spectral Calibration (0348) ...................................5-55 Replacement .................................................... 6-39
SSA25 Circuit Board Replacement .......................6-60 Upper Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation... 16-7
SSR1 to SSR3 Replacement ...............................17-10 Upper Guide Disassembly/
START Switch (D684) Replacement ...................17-19 Reassembly ................ 12-10, 12-17, 12-23, 12-27
SU700AR Sorter (Optional) .................................16-13 Upper Guide Removal/
Sub-scan Feeding Speed Adjustment (0555).....5-113 Reinstallation ................. 12-9, 12-16, 12-22, 12-26
Sub-Scan Soft Nip Adjustment (0557) ................5-114 Upper Magazine Drive Unit Removal/
Sub-scanning Exit Guide Assembly Removal/ Reinstallation .................................................... 8-14
Reinstallation ....................................................11-7 Upper Magazine Exit Nip Roller Replacement..... 9-18
Sub-scanning Exit Guide Open/Close Sensor Upper Magazine Exit Open/Close Guide Plate
(D669) Replacement ......................................11-12 Removal/Reinstallation ..................................... 9-18
Sub-scanning Exit Section Paper Sensor (D667) Upper Magazine ID Sensor 1 to 4
Replacement ..................................................11-13 (D610 to D613)/Lower Magazine ID
Sub-scanning Exit Unit..........................................11-6 Sensor 1 to 4 (D620 to D623) Replacement ...... 9-8
Sub-scanning Exit Unit Feed Roller Cleaning .......2-17 Upper Magazine Setting Lever Cover Removal/
Sub-scanning Exit Unit Nip Release System Reinstallation ...................................................... 8-5
Inspection .........................................................2-18 Upper Magazine Setting Lever Removal/
Sub-scanning Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation ....11-6 Reinstallation ...................................................... 8-5
SUB-SCANNING EXIT/PRINTER EXIT SECTION ..11-1 Upper Magazine Splice Sensor (D619P)/LED
Sub-scanning Feed Motor (M650) (D619L) Replacement ...................................... 9-12
Replacement ..................................................10-22 Upper Magazine Table Slide Lock Assembly
Sub-scanning Unit ..............................................10-19 Replacement ...................................................... 8-7
Sub-scanning Unit Feed Roller Cleaning..............2-15 Upper Magazine Table Unit Removal/
Sub-scanning Unit Large Rubber Belt Reinstallation ...................................................... 8-6
Inspection/Pulley Cleaning ...............................2-14 Upper Mask Removal/Reinstallation....................... 6-9
Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation .........10-19 Upper Paper Magazine Table ................................ 8-5
Sub-scanning Unit Small Rubber Belt Upper Sensor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation....... 9-7
Inspection/Pulley Cleaning ...............................2-15 Upper Slide Table/Bracket Removal/
Sub-tank Section ...................................................13-3 Reinstallation ...................................................... 8-7
SWA23 Circuit Board Replacement ....................16-14 Upper/Lower Magazine Paper End Sensor
System Operation Setting Setup (0921)................5-76 (D616/D626) Replacement ................................ 9-8
System Operation Setup and Check (01) ...............5-6
19-12
19.3 Index
Upper/Lower Magazine Paper Supply Motor

(M610/M620) Replacement ..............................8-16
Upstream Perforation Sensor (D402P)/Check
Tape Sensor (D404P)/DTF25 Circuit Board
Replacement ....................................................6-35
User Account Setup ................................................4-9
[W]
Waste Solution Level Sensor Cleaning .................2-11
Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS728)
Replacement ..................................................13-13
Waste Solution System........................................13-13
Waste Solution Tank Replacement .....................13-13
Winding Lower Guide Replacement .....................6-49
Winding Roller Idler Gear Replacement ...............6-48
Winding Roller Replacement ................................6-45
Winding Roller Unit Removal/Reinstallation ..........6-44
Winding Section ....................................................6-44
Winding Section Cover Replacement ...................6-47
Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation ....................6-45
Winding Upper Guide Replacement.....................6-46
Windows XP Auto Configuration ...........................4-19
Wire Harness Routing ...........................................7-32
Workflow Adviser Environment Setup (0920)........5-76
Working Information Display (0352)......................5-62
Writing Service Output Settings (0137).................5-16
[X]
X-#### Actions ........................................................3-2
19
19-13
FAX : 81-3-5484-0454
Questionnaire concerning This Manual

Fujifilm’s Products Planning & Technical Service Division would be most grateful if you would make copies of this form, then
complete and send them to us by FAX.
Your opinions will contribute greatly to an accurate assessment of the overall quality of each manual.
All questions can be answered by ticking [✓] the appropriate box(es), but in addition to these answers, please provide us with your
written comments in the lined spaces following each block of questions.
Title : FRONTIER 500

Servicing and Electrical Circuit Diagram
Manual Title and Reference Number SERVICE MANUAL
Reference Number : PP3-C1067E2
Name :
Your Name and Company

Company :
E-mail Address :
Your E-mail Address and FAX Number

FAX Number :
Question 1 • How would you rate this manual overall?

(1) Very easy to use and understand (2) Fairly easy to use and understand
(3) Slightly difficult to use
(4) Very difficult to use and understand
and understand
• Please provide us with your reasons and comments.
Question 2 • Have you found any technical errors, errors in spelling, or missing words in this manual?
Yes No
• If you have ticked (Yes), please let us know what these errors and missing words are.
Question 3 • How would you rate the writing (language, choice of words/phrases, etc.) and the illustrations/
diagrams, etc.?
(1) Clear and easy to follow (2) Should be simplified
(3) Difficult to follow
(1)’ [Illustrations, etc.] Of adequate size
(2)’ [Illustrations, etc.] Too small
(3)’ [Illustrations, etc.] Difficult to follow
• If you have ticked (2), (3) or (3)’, please give us your reasons.
Additional
Comments/
Requests
concerning
This Manual
Please return this questionnaire to : FAX No. : Tokyo 81-3-5484-0454

FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.
26-30, Nishiazabu 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 106-8620, Japan.
Printed on Recycled Paper

Ref.No.PP3-C1067E2 ESD-06.2-FP Printed in Japan

Service Manual Frontier 500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Service Manual Frontier 500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Frontier 500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Servicing and Electrical

S2 Ver.3.0 or later Second Edition

Precautions Generally Applying to All Serving Operations

Service Manual Appropriations

2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service

3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore

4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.

K Manual copying in whole or in part.

1. MENU TABLE........................................................................................................................... 1-1

2. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ................................................................................. 2-1

4. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 4-1

6. FILM CARRIER SECTION.................................................................................................... 6-1

7. SCANNER (SP-500) ............................................................................................................... 7-1

8. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ................................................................................................. 8-1

9. PAPER FEED SECTION ....................................................................................................... 9-1

10. EXPOSURE SECTION ........................................................................................................ 10-1

11. SUB-SCANNING EXIT/PRINTER EXIT SECTION ..................................................... 11-1

12. PROCESSOR SECTION ..................................................................................................... 12-1

13. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM............................................... 13-1

14. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM ....................................... 14-1

15. DRYER SECTION ................................................................................................................. 15-1

16. PRINT EXIT SECTION/SORTER...................................................................................... 16-1

18. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .............................................................................. 18-1

19. APPENDIX ............................................................................................................................... 19-1

1.2 Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table .................................. 1-7

01 System Operation Setup 0101 Image Export Settings K K K

0123 Print Production Information K K

0124 Equipment Name Setup K K

0125 Timer Waiting Time Setup K K

0126 Installation Information Reference K K

0127 Media Cumulative Production Information K K

0128 Print Cumulative Production Information K K

0136 Media Input Environment Setup K K

0137 Writing Service Output Settings K K

0138 Photo Copy Environment Setup K K

0139 Media Attachment Index Print Setting K K

0140 Installation Information Setup K

0141 Clear Error Log K

0146 Periodical Message Setting K

02 Print Condition Setup and 0220 Print Size Setup K K

0223 Special Film Channel Setting K K

0224 Monotone Correction Setting K K

0225 Custom Setting Regist/Delete K K

0226 Back Printing Format K K

0227 Index Conditions K K

0240 Image Correction Setup K

0241 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag. Setting K

03 Scanner Adjustment/ 0320 Input Check K K

0324 Image Scanning Condition Method K K

Film Scanner Installation Information

0326 Scanner Backup & download K K

0341 I/O Check K

0342 Carrier Inclination Display K

03 Scanner Adjustment/ 0343 CCD Data Display K

0345 Oprical Axis Adjustment K

0348 Spectral Calibration K

0349 LED Light Amount Adjustment K

0350 Scanner Parameter Check/Update K